Development Standards
A. This chapter is based on the 2011 Model Lighting Ordinance developed in a partnership of the International Dark Sky Association and Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA), tailored for the City. It is structured as an overlay based on, yet different from, land use zoning. The purpose of this chapter is to provide regulations for outdoor lighting that will:
1. Permit the use of outdoor lighting that does not exceed the minimum levels specified in IES recommended practices for night-time safety, utility, security, productivity, enjoyment, and commerce;
2. Minimize adverse off-site impacts of lighting such as light trespass and obtrusive light;
3. Curtail light pollution, reduce skyglow (a form of light pollution), and improve the nighttime environment for layperson enjoyment and scientific study of astronomy;
4. Protect adjacent uses, and natural and critical areas, from excessive adverse effects and spillover light and glare generated by outdoor exterior building and/or site lighting;
5. Conserve energy and resources to the greatest extent possible; and
6. Ensure a safe, attractive, functional environment that is designed for the range of anticipated after dark activities and needs of residents, businesses, pedestrians, and bicyclists while minimizing negative lighting impacts. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
Except as provided in IMC 18.610.040, outdoor lighting must comply with the requirements in this chapter. This includes, but is not limited to, new lighting, replacement lighting, or any other lighting whether attached to structures, poles, the earth, or any other location. All lighting regulated by this chapter is categorized as either nonresidential/multifamily or new residential. See IMC 18.610.060 and 18.610.070 for criteria applicable to nonresidential/multifamily and new residential outdoor lighting, respectively. (Ord. 3088 § 6 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Description and Purpose. The lighting zone determines the limitations for lighting as specified in this chapter. A lighting zone is the overlay zoning system that establishes legal limits for lighting for particular lots, areas, or districts in the City and are shown in the table below, Table 18.610.030(B).
B. Lighting Zones.
Table 18.610.030(B). Lighting Zones
Lighting Zone | Description | Zones |
|---|---|---|
0 (LZ 0) | No Ambient Lighting Areas where the natural environment will be seriously and adversely affected by lighting. Impacts include, but are not limited to, disturbing the biological cycles of flora and fauna and/or detracting from human enjoyment and appreciation of the natural environment. Human activity is subordinate in importance to nature. The vision of human residents and users is adapted to the darkness, and they expect to see little or no lighting. When not needed, lighting should be extinguished. | • P-NRCA Tradition Plateau – Natural Resource Conservation Area • C-Rec Conservancy Recreation • CF-OS Community Facilities – Open Space (for portions with critical areas) • CF-OSPO Community Facilities – Open Space Privately Owned (for portions with critical areas) |
1 (LZ 1) | Low Ambient Lighting Areas where lighting might adversely affect flora and fauna or disturb the character of the area. The vision of human residents and users is adapted to low light levels. Lighting may be used for safety and convenience, but it is not necessarily uniform or continuous. After dark sky hours, most lighting should be extinguished or reduced as activity levels decline. | • C-Res Conservancy Residential – 1 du/5 acres • CF-OS Community Facilities – Open Space (for portions without critical areas) • CF-OSPO Community Facilities – Open Space Privately Owned (for portions without critical areas) • SF-E Single-Family Estates – 1.24 du/acre • SF-S Single-Family Suburban – 4.5 du/acre • SF-D Single-Family Duplex – 7.26 du/acre • SF-SL Single-Family Small Lot – 7.26 du/acre • UVSF-0 Urban Village – Single-Family, Zoning cap 0 du/lot • UVSF-1 Urban Village – Single-Family, Zoning cap 1 du/lot |
2 (LZ 2) | Moderate Ambient Lighting Areas of human activity where the vision of human residents and users is adapted to moderate light levels. Lighting may typically be used for safety and convenience, but it is not necessarily uniform or continuous. After dark sky hours, lighting may be extinguished or reduced as activity levels decline. | • CF-R Community Facilities – Recreation • CF-RPO Community Facilities – Recreation Privately Owned • CF-F Community Facilities – Facilities • CF-FPO Community Facilities – Facilities Privately Owned • MF-M Multifamily Medium – 14.52 du/acre • MUR Mixed-Use Residential – 14.52 du/acre • MF-H Multifamily High – 29 du/acre • VR Village Residential • UV-MF Urban Village – Multifamily • UV-MUR Urban Village – Mixed-Use Residential • PO Professional Office • UV-VC Urban Village – Village Center |
3 (LZ 3) | Moderately High Ambient Lighting Areas of human activity where the vision of human residents and users is adapted to moderately high light levels. Lighting is generally desired for safety, security and/or convenience and it is often uniform and/or continuous. After dark sky hours, lighting may be extinguished or reduced in most areas as activity levels decline. | • CBD Cultural and Business District • UV-COM/RET Urban Village – Commercial/Retail • UC Urban Core • MU Mixed-Use • MU-CI Mixed-Use – Central Issaquah • IC Intensive Commercial • IC-CI Intensive Commercial – Central Issaquah • M Mineral Resources |
4 (LZ 4) | High Ambient Lighting Areas of human activity where the vision of human residents and users is adapted to high light levels. Lighting is generally considered necessary for safety, security and/or convenience and it is mostly uniform and/or continuous. After dark sky hours, lighting may be extinguished or reduced in some areas as activity levels decline. | None |
C. New Zones. When a new land use zone is created, the zone must be categorized into the appropriate light zone based on the descriptions in this section. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. The following outdoor lighting is exempt from the standards outlined in this chapter but may be subject to regulation under Federal law, State law, or other chapters of the Issaquah Municipal Code:
1. All new and replacement lighting for existing structures on single-family lots.
2. Areas subject to an active development agreement.
3. Lighting levels and technical standards within public right-of-way, private roads, or easements for the principal purpose of illuminating streets or roads, except no exemption is given for any lighting within the public right-of-way or easement installed for the purpose of illuminating areas outside the public right-of-way or easement, unless regulated by Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
4. Lighting solely for signs. See Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.
5. Repairs to existing luminaires not exceeding the threshold established in IMC 18.610.090.
6. Temporary lighting for theatrical, television, and performance areas, approved as part of a special event permit in accordance with Chapter 5.14 IMC, Special Event/Special Use Permit.
7. Permanent or temporary lighting using unshielded strings of lights, such as for lighting outdoor dining or patios with individual lamps, that are less than 70 lumens and that comply with dark sky hours.
8. Temporary seasonal/festival lighting; provided, that individual lamps are less than 70 lumens and that comply with dark sky hours. Seasonal/festival lighting is defined as temporary lighting installed and operated in connection with holidays or festivals for periods not to exceed 60 days, completely removed and not operated again for at least 30 days. Buildings may be outlined as part of this temporary seasonal/festival lighting if the outlining is with individual white bulbs limited as allowed by this section. Temporary seasonal/festival lighting may be subject to approval as part of a special event permit in accordance with Chapter 5.14 IMC, Special Event/Special Use Permit.
9. Lighting that is only used under emergency conditions. Emergency conditions are defined as lighting that is only energized during a situation that poses an immediate risk to health, life, property, or environment, such as lighting fed from a backup power source, lighting used during a natural disaster, or lighting for security purposes used solely during an alarm.
10. Lighting specifically approved in a special event/special use permit, authorized by Chapter 5.14 IMC, Special Event/Special Use Permit. Lighting that would otherwise be prohibited by this Code may be approved; provided, that lighting that would be inconsistent with the intent or provisions of Chapter 5.14 IMC, shoot into the sky, negatively impact residences, or create unsafe situations for motorists will not be approved.
11. Lighting activated via motion sensors for security or similar purposes provided lighting is set to automatically time out and shut off and is designed to emit most light downward on areas within the subject property. (Ord. 3088 § 6 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Except when provided for in this chapter, no person may erect, alter, maintain, use, or relocate any of the following lights in the City and such existing lights must be removed consistent with IMC 18.610.090:
1. Temporary lighting in which any single luminaire exceeds 20,000 initial luminaire lumens or the total lighting load exceeds 160,000 lumens.
2. Aerial lasers.
3. Searchlights.
4. Other very intense lighting defined as having a light source exceeding 200,000 initial luminaire lumens or an intensity in any direction of more than 2,000,000 candelas.
5. Any lighting that may be confused with warning signals, emergency signals, or traffic signals.
6. Blinking, flashing intermittent, and/or moving lights.
7. Accent lighting (as defined and regulated in IMC 18.610.060(F)) on those portions of a building or on objects adjacent to I-90 ROW, including on and off ramps, to prevent glare or distraction to motorists and maintain the Mountains to Sound character and vision of the City frontage, except for lighting of United States Federal flags and lighting of architecture and landscape below 15 feet. See IMC 18.610.060(F)(3)(b).
8. Light spillover at more than three-tenths footcandles at the edge of any required critical area buffer, whether on or off site, to ensure that light diminishes further toward the applicable critical area except related to publicly owned trails. See IMC 18.610.080(C)(9).
9. At any property line or project boundary of the applicable site, light spillover in light zones LZ 0, LZ 1, LZ 2 at more than three-tenths footcandles and in light zone LZ 3 at more than eight-tenths footcandles.
10. Neon or other lighting outlining buildings or roofs such as LEDs that form a continuous line of any color.
11. Decorative or other nonessential light allowing beams and illumination to shine upon a street, highway, sidewalk, or that project a decorative pattern or image onto the street, highway, or sidewalk using such beam or illumination. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Applicability. All outdoor lighting must comply with this section if a property or project is a nonresidential, transportation, or recreational use or contains more than 10 dwelling units and has an outdoor common area.
B. Performance Methods. All luminaires shall be rated and installed using either Performance Method A or Performance Method B, as described in this section, except for temporary construction lighting regulated by subsection G of this section. Only one performance method may be used per permit application.
C. Performance Method A – Prescriptive Lighting for Small and Simple Projects. All luminaires shall be rated and installed according to Table 18.610.060(C)(2), Maximum On-Site Lighting, and Table 18.610.060(C)(3), Allowed Type of Luminaire. Any project that does not comply with the thresholds in subsection (C)(1) of this section must use Performance Method B, subsection D of this section. If there is uncertainty about compliance, then Performance Method B must be used.
1. A project whose use is not listed in subsection (D)(2) of this section and is below both the following thresholds may choose to use Performance Method A:
a. A building less than or equal to a total of 4,000 square feet, existing or with any proposed additions.
b. The developed or improved portion of a site, less than or equal to a half-acre (21,780 square feet).
2. Maximum On-Site Lighting.
a. The total installed initial luminaire lumens of all outdoor lighting must not exceed the total site lumen limit established in Table 18.610.060(C)(2).
b. Either the parking space method or hardscape area method may be used to calculate lighting levels, but only one method shall be used per permit application.
c. If a parking lot has or is proposed to have 10 spaces or less, including ADA parking, the applicant must use the parking space method. If a parking lot has or is proposed to have more than 10 spaces, the applicant must use the hardscape method.
d. Any existing lighting that will remain in place must be included in the calculation of total installed lumens. The total installed initial luminaire lumens is calculated as the sum of the existing and proposed luminaires.
Table 18.610.060(C)(2). Maximum On-Site Lighting
Lighting Zone | Parking Space Method (Lumens per Space) | Hardscape Method (Lumens per Square Foot) |
|---|---|---|
LZ 0 | 350 | 0.5 |
LZ 1 | 490 | 1.25 |
LZ 2 | 630 | 2.5 |
LZ 3 | 840 | 5.0 |
3. Allowed Luminaire Backlight, Uplight, and Glare (BUG) Ratings.
a. A luminaire may be used if it is rated for the lighting zone of the site or is a lower number for all BUG ratings.
b. The following luminaire types are prohibited with Performance Method A:
(1) A luminaire equipped with an adjustable mounting device allowing alteration of luminaire aiming in the field.
(2) A luminaire that does not have BUG ratings or exceeds the BUG ratings for the light zone.
Table 18.610.060(C)(3). Maximum Allowable BUG (Backlight, Uplight, Glare) Ratings by Lighting Zone
BUG Ratings and Maximum Allowed Allowable Light | LZ 0 | LZ 1 | LZ 2 | LZ 3 | Notes |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Maximum Allowed Backlight Rating (B) | |||||
Greater than 2 mounting heights from property line | B1 | B3 | B4 | B5 | |
1 to less than 2 mounting heights from property line and ideally oriented | B1 | B2 | B3 | B4 | |
0.5 to 1 mounting heights from property line and ideally oriented | B0 | B1 | B2 | B3 | |
Less than 0.5 mounting height to property line and properly oriented | B0 | B0 | B0 | B1 | |
Maximum Allowed Uplighting Rating (U) | |||||
Allowed uplight rating | U0 | U1 | U2 | U3 | |
Allowed % light emission above 90º for street or area lighting | 0% | 0% | 0% | 0% | |
Maximum Allowed Glare Rating (G) | |||||
Allowed glare rating for an ideally located luminaire | G0 | G1 | G2 | G3 | |
Any luminaire not ideally oriented with 1 to less than 2 mounting heights to any property line of concern | G0 | G0 | G1 | G1 | |
Any luminaire not ideally oriented with 0.5 to 1 mounting heights to any property line of concern | G0 | G0 | G0 | G1 | |
Any luminaire not ideally oriented with less than 0.5 mounting heights to any property line of concern | G0 | G0 | G0 | G0 |
c. Notes for Table 18.610.060(C)(3).
(1) Extension of Property Line Impact Area. When a property abuts a public walkway, bikeway, plaza, or parking lot, the property line may be considered extended five feet beyond the actual property line for purpose of determining compliance with this section. For a property that abuts a public roadway, the property line may be considered to be extended to the centerline of the public roadway or public transit corridor for the purpose of determining compliance with this section. This adjustment is relative to Table 18.610.060(C)(3) backlight and glare only and shall not be used to increase the lighting area of the site.
(2) To be considered “ideally oriented,” the luminaire must be mounted with the backlight portion of the light output oriented perpendicular and towards the property line of concern.
(3) Any luminaire that cannot be mounted with its backlight perpendicular to any property line within two times the mounting heights of the luminaire location is considered “not ideally oriented,” and must meet the reduced allowed glare rating in Table 18.610.060(C)(3).
D. Performance Method B – Lighting Compliance by Calculation.
1. Any project or property that is subject to this section and that does not qualify to use Performance Method A (see subsection C of this section) must use Performance Method B. A project may also elect to use Performance Method B to allow more flexibility in design or luminaire selection.
2. Any complex lighting use, as listed below, must use Performance Method B:
a. Sports facilities, including but not limited to unconditioned rinks, open courts, fields, ranges for guns, golf, archery and similar, and stadiums.
b. Lighting for industrial sites having special requirements (e.g., petrochemical manufacturing or storage, and shipping piers).
c. Parking structures.
d. Urban parks.
e. Accent lighting as allowed by subsection F of this section.
f. Theme and amusement parks.
g. Correctional facilities.
h. High light level uses including automobile and truck sales and gas station fueling areas.
i. Uses whose lighting levels are controlled by State laws such as automated teller machines in Chapter 19.174 RCW and outdoor swimming pools in WAC 246-260-031(23).
3. The entire outdoor lighting design shall be analyzed using industry standard lighting software including interreflections in the following manner:
a. Input data shall describe the lighting system including luminaire locations, mounting heights, aiming directions, and employing photometric data tested in accordance with IES guidelines. Buildings or other physical objects on the site must be included in the calculations.
b. Lighting in the right-of-way that may contribute onto the property must be included in the calculation.
c. “Industry standard lighting software” is defined as lighting software that calculates point-by-point illuminance that includes reflected light using either ray-tracing or radiosity methods.
4. The design complies with this section if:
a. Horizontal illuminance and uniformity ratios meet IES recommended practices for the space type(s). More than one space type may apply to a project. All materials submitted must clearly identify the space type and the area it is applied to.
b. The lighting is not prohibited in accordance with IMC 18.610.050(A)(8) and (A)(9) regarding light spillover to sensitive areas.
c. Selected luminaires are fully shielded.
E. General Requirements for All Performance Methods.
1. Technical Lighting Requirements.
Table 18.610.060(E)(1). Technical Lighting Requirements
Color Temperature | Maximum 3,000K on site, 4,000K in right-of-way. |
Color Rendering Index (CRI) | No less than 80. |
Light Sources | LED only. |
Lighting Control and Reduction Requirements | Refer to Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code (WS NREC) for automatic controls requirements for nonresidential developments including multifamily residential. |
Dark Sky Hours | Between 10:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m. or 30 minutes after close of a business or entity with outdoor lighting to 30 minutes before opening of the business, whichever provides more dark sky. |
Dark Sky Lighting Reduction Levels | Total outdoor lighting reduced by at least 30 percent or extinguished. This includes low voltage landscape lighting. Total outdoor lighting must be uniformly reduced, rather than selecting individual luminaires to extinguish. |
a. Exceptions to Table 18.610.060(E)(1).
(1) Dark sky lighting reductions are not required for any of the following:
(A) Code required lighting including for steps, stairs, walkways, and building entrances.
(B) City facilities, as publicly funded and providing public benefit and use, set lighting hours based on the facility’s hours. This includes trails, play areas, sports fields, parks, plazas, buildings, streets. Trails through critical areas must comply with IMC 18.610.080(C)(9) regarding use of motion detectors.
(C) Motion activated lighting or lighting controlled by an astronomic clock with a manual override that comply with the requirements in IMC 18.610.080(B)(4). Lighting levels triggered by the motion detector or astronomic clock must comply with all other standards in this chapter.
(D) Businesses or entities that operate on a 24-hour basis.
(E) Residential properties that qualify under IMC 18.610.070.
(F) When all the outdoor lighting for a property consists of only one luminaire.
(2) Color rendering index (CRI) minimums are not required for stadium lighting when supported by lighting studies prepared by a qualified professional that include mitigation strategies that adhere to the 2011 Model Lighting Ordinance developed in a partnership of the International Dark Sky Association and Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA).
2. Pole-Mounted Lights and Streetlights. The following mounting heights in Table 18.610.060(E)(2) apply for new or replaced luminaires or streetlights, unless they are located in the right-of-way.
3. All pole-mounted lights and streetlights in the right-of-way must comply with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
Table 18.610.060(E)(2). Maximum Mounting Heights for On-Site and Streetlights
Location of Pole and Street Lights | Max. Height (feet) |
|---|---|
On-site light or pole for any purpose, except as listed in IMC 18.610.060(D)(2) through (D)(4) or (E)(2); or as listed below for location compliant parking lots | 15 |
Parking structure: light pole on rooftop or upper deck of parking structure | 12 |
Parking lot where light poles will be at least 100 feet from a residential zone (SF or MF zones) | 20 |
At signalized intersections, streetlight integrated with signal poles | 35 |
Streetlights on local streets, woonerfs, alleys, except at signalized intersections | 15 |
Streetlights in the following neighborhoods, except at signalized intersections: Olde Town, Issaquah Highlands | 15 |
Streetlights on collector, minor, and principal arterials except at signalized intersections and the specified streets below, and in Talus | 18 |
Streetlights on East Lake Sammamish Parkway, SR 900, Front Street north of Gilman Boulevard | 30 |
F. Accent Lighting.
1. Accent lighting does not impact the function and safety of an area but is purely decorative, or used to illuminate architecture and/or landscaping, and installed for aesthetic effect. This could include lighting for building façades, architectural features, landscaping, public art, or flags.
2. Prohibited Accent Lighting.
a. Lighting directed at building façades;
b. Lighting directed at architectural features that cannot comply with subsection (F)(3) of this section and landscaping more than 15 feet above grade;
c. Lighting directed at flags as defined in Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs, other than the United States Federal flag; and
d. Uncontained uplighting.
3. Allowed Accent Lighting.
a. Lighting of United States Federal flags; see Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.
b. Lighting of architectural features and landscape at and below 15 feet from surrounding grade.
c. Lighting of ground-mounted art.
d. Uplighting contained by roof, overhang, eave, opaque canopy, and similar elements which prevent uplighting from spilling into the sky and creating light pollution. This would apply to lighting of building-mounted art (see IMC 18.610.050).
4. General Standards for Accent Lighting.
a. Accent lighting must not contribute to light pollution or create glare by being improperly directed.
b. Accent lighting must be included in the calculation of Performance Method B and in compliance with IES recommendations.
c. Accent lighting shall be aimed and shielded so that light is directed only on those features intended for illumination.
d. Lighting must not produce glare to pedestrians, cyclists, or motorists within the property or from adjacent property or right-of-way.
e. Fixtures must be locked into position after aiming.
f. Nonessential outdoor lighting must be turned off or substantially reduced consistent with lighting zone standards of IMC 18.610.030.
G. Temporary Construction Site Lighting. Construction sites may illuminate their sites as needed during the period from 30 minutes before and 30 minutes after the City’s construction hours. If the project is granted extended work hours per Chapter 16.35 IMC, then the hours of lighting are also extended. However, at all times light must be directed within the construction site and property, and not directed to adjacent properties or roads. Outside of the hours above, only security lighting is permitted. (Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Applicability. All outdoor lighting must comply with this section if a property or project is a residential use and contains 10 or less dwelling units and does not have an outdoor common area.
B. General Requirements and Prohibitions.
1. Outdoor lighting may not be aimed onto adjacent properties including low voltage and line voltage landscape lighting. In addition, shielded directional flood lighting must be aimed so that direct glare is not visible from adjacent properties. Lighting activated via motion sensors for security or similar purposes must be set to automatically time out and shut off.
2. No luminaires may be placed at more than 15 feet above grade.
3. If a United States flag will be flown at night, it may be lit to the minimum necessary to comply with Federal law.
4. Unshielded luminaires are prohibited except as specifically identified in Table 18.610.070(C). All outdoor luminaires must be fully shielded.
5. For docks lighting on Lake Sammamish, refer to Chapter 18.804 IMC, Shoreline Master Program.
C. Maximum Allowed Lumens for Lighting of Residential Uses.
Table 18.610.070(C). Residential Lighting Lum: Maximum Allowed Luminaire Lumens
LZ 0 (lumens) | LZ 1 (lumens) | LZ 2 (lumens) | LZ 3 (lumens) | Notes | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Unshielded luminaires at one entry only | Not allowed | 420 | 630 | 630 | IMC 18.610.070(C)(1) IMC 18.610.070(C)(2) |
Each fully shielded luminaire | 630 | 1,260 | 1,260 | 1,260 | IMC 18.610.070(C)(2) |
Each line voltage landscape light | Not allowed | 100 | 1,050 | 2,100 | IMC 18.610.070(C)(2) |
Each low voltage landscape light | Not allowed | 100 | 525 | 525 | IMC 18.610.070(C)(2) |
Each shielded directional flood light | Not allowed | 1,260 | 1,260 | 2,100 | IMC 18.610.070(C)(2) |
1. One partly shielded or unshielded luminaire at the main entry, not exceeding the allowed lumen output for maximum allowed luminaire lumens for unshielded luminaires at one entry only. “Partly shielded luminaire” is defined as a luminaire with opaque top and translucent or perforated sides, designed to emit most light downward.
2. Luminaire lumens are calculated by multiplying the initial lamp lumens for a lamp by the number of lamps in the luminaire. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Purpose. A vibrant city relies on being active most of the day and into the evening. Thus, lighting is necessary to encourage pedestrian and bicycle activity beyond daylight hours. The quality of light can have a strong positive impact on the overall quality of the nighttime environment. Furthermore, due to the long nights during the Pacific Northwest winters, lighting can have a significant impact on the use of exterior, outdoor areas during hours when most people are awake, yet it is dark. Creating a hierarchy of light that contributes to understanding the public realm and addresses the safety and security of both pedestrian, bicycle, and vehicular traffic is critical to a successful after dark environment. To encourage more pedestrian and bicycle activity, visibility must be enhanced through the quality of the light and its sources.
B. General Design Standards.
1. Illumination of the entire volume, encompassing horizontal and vertical elements, is a key ingredient in perception of the space. Illuminating only the horizontal (ground) plane will result in spaces perceived to be uninteresting or unsafe. Lighting must be used to illuminate the entire volume as a key ingredient in perception of the space.
2. Illumination levels vary depending on activities. The overall illumination must be the minimum necessary to achieve its purpose. Specific elements should be emphasized with slightly higher light levels such as plazas, and pedestrian circulation paths such as stairs, ramps, abrupt changes in walking direction, crossing vehicle lanes, or other changes in elevations that can become trip hazards.
3. The types and locations of lights contribute to the public realm not only in the nature of light, but the nature of the fixtures. Streetlights, lit bollards, sconces, and gooseneck lamps, for example, all have a presence that shapes the urban character, whether they are illuminated or not. Use fixtures and locations that contribute to the neighborhood’s or project’s form and help shape the character whether illuminated or not.
4. Where off hours lighting is desired for security purposes (such as at loading docks and employee entrances) or for safety purposes (such as where lighting has been lowered or turned off for dark sky hours), motion sensors, astronomical clocks, or similar devices must be used. The following design standards apply:
a. Motion sensor may be used where the user will be passing through (such as on a trail or private walkway), the route is unpredictable, the area is small (such as a waste enclosure) and/or a user is unlikely to be familiar with the equipment.
b. Astronomic clocks with manual overrides will be used when users are coming from fixed locations (such as a building entry), the lighting is needed in a larger area, and/or a user is likely to be familiar with the equipment. Astronomic clocks with manual overrides are preferred.
c. The motion sensor or astronomic clock may be activated for a duration of no more than five minutes unless it can be objectively demonstrated that a longer period is needed. For example, if the distance to be walked is calculated based on an average user to be longer, which would then establish the lengthier duration.
d. The motion sensors may not be activated by off-site movement.
e. Security Lighting.
(1) The luminaire must be fully shielded, aimed downward to light only the designated areas and not exceed the limits in IMC 18.610.050(A)(8) and (A)(9).
(2) Lighting fixture(s) may emit up to 1,200 lumens.
5. Permanent lighting may not be attached to trees. Temporary, seasonal, or festival lighting may be placed in trees in a manner that does not harm the tree.
C. Transportation Lighting Design Standards.
1. Streetlights will use the City’s master street light plan to identify public light fixtures in color, style, height, and other characteristics.
2. Streetlight poles must be located in pairs directly across the street from each other or staggered, resulting in an intentional pattern created by poles on both sides of the street.
3. Streetlight poles must be coordinated with other street elements, especially those that impact the fixture’s ability to illuminate the intended area. Street tree design must be coordinated with streetlight placement, to ensure both at installation and as the tree matures that streetlights will achieve the required lighting and uniformity levels.
4. For alleys, the minimum lighting necessary to ensure safety. Appropriate lighting may be provided by the lights associated with individual residences along the alley rather than streetlights or other shared lighting. Lighting should be placed to eliminate glare into adjacent uses. If lighting in alleys is located on private structures instead of independent fixtures, such as poles, lighting must be programmed to come on at dusk and be uniformly reduced at a specified time.
5. Pedestrian and/or bicycle facilities must be lit to ensure users are safe and feel safe.
a. Multimodal pathways, not associated with a vehicular transportation facility, must have a low but uniform light level. Appropriate lighting may be provided by building-mounted lights rather than separate light fixtures if appropriate to the character of the space.
b. Light fixtures for street corridors serving vehicles, pedestrians, and/or bicycles, must meet the needs of all users rather than providing light fixtures for each user separately; however, for some streets where tall fixtures are needed to light the vehicular travel ways consistent with lighting levels and uniformity, separate fixtures will be necessary and appropriate.
6. Trail and pedestrian only routes must have lighting that creates a sense of safety without adversely affecting the surrounding uses, such as abutting residences. Trail lighting associated with critical areas is addressed in IMC 18.802.260.
7. Poles may be located on just one side of the pedestrian and bicycle facilities or paired or staggered like vehicular transportation facilities, as is appropriate to the character of the facility, urban design, and adjacent uses.
8. Lighting within and adjacent to critical areas must have no spillover light into the critical area in accordance with IMC 18.610.050(A)(8). Trails within critical areas must intentionally be left dark to protect the natural habitat for nocturnal animals and wildlife with the following exceptions:
a. Nonmotorized bridges within critical areas may have a low level of light for safe use, and the light should be contained and focused on the bridge deck.
b. Publicly owned trails may use motion detectors per subsection (C)(9) of this section to increase trail lighting to allow a user’s safe passage through critical areas if the City or other agency has determined that lit passage after dark is appropriate and necessary.
9. Walking and biking routes must be lit to illuminate the faces of users, to a height of approximately six feet high. Spillover lighting from adjacent sidewalks, streets, buildings, etc., may fulfill this requirement and must be incorporated into the lighting calculations. Internally illuminated bollards may be used, and are appropriate to highlight pedestrian routes, demark changes between users (e.g., pedestrian and vehicular areas), steps or other grade changes. Illuminated bollards should not be the only light source when it is useful to illuminate people’s faces to create a sense of safety.
D. Outdoor Amenity Space Design Standards.
1. Outdoor amenity space must have low levels of uniform illumination for safety, with higher levels for focal points or areas of high activity, such as walking routes.
2. Recreation and children’s play areas must be illuminated if they are intended for use after dark with controls so that they are “off” after hours. Areas not intended for use after dark may not be illuminated.
E. Building and Specific Use Design Standards.
1. Primary building entrances and individual entrances to retail or other separate uses and residences along streets, plazas, trails, and similar uses shall highlight the entries with lighting. This does not apply to employee-only entrances or entries used only for exiting.
2. To avoid glare and minimize distraction, canopy lighting, such as with automobile fueling stations, hotel or hospital entrances must be contained by the canopy design and luminaire selection and shall not be mounted to the canopy sides (fascia) or top. (Sign lighting on the sides of the canopy is regulated by Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.) This can be achieved by one of the following methods:
a. The luminaires are fully recessed into the canopy; or
b. If the luminaires are surface mounted, they have no exposed lens outside of the canopy area, such as through the use of a soffit.
c. If indirect lighting is desired, the light may be beamed upward and then reflected down from the underside of the canopy. When this method is used, light fixtures must be shielded so that direct illumination is focused exclusively on the underside of the canopy.
d. The luminaires must comply with the glare portion of the BUG rating for that lighting zone.
3. When the following are illuminated, lighting fixtures must be mounted, aimed, and shielded so that their beams fall within the primary playing area and so that no illumination is directed off site: outdoor performance venue and sport or recreation fields, for activities including sports, ballgames, and play. All luminaires must be directed or shielded so as to not be visible off site to roads or residences. Pole heights may only be as tall as necessary to meet lighting requirements for the class of play and facilities. Landscaping must be installed and incorporate evergreen trees located between the poles supporting the luminaires and adjacent residential uses.
4. Sports and Event Lighting. The main event lighting must be turned off no more than 30 minutes following the end of the event. A secondary lighting system with lower height and light level lighting must be used to facilitate patrons exiting the event location and for maintenance crews.
F. Olde Town Design Standards.
1. Lighting selected both on site and in the right-of-way must complement the historic character of Olde Town through complementing the City’s public light fixtures in color, style, and other architectural features.
2. Lighting shall be used through block passages and connections to and from parking.
3. At Olde Town’s gateways, lighting shall be used as one of the elements to highlight entrance into the neighborhood.
G. Parking Facility Design Standards.
1. Structured parking, including the roof, must ensure no direct light spillover from fixtures or vehicles and must minimize glare spilling from garage fixtures and vehicles onto the adjacent roadways, off-site views, and residential areas, and eliminate or significantly reduce visibility of light sources by shielding the view of the light fixtures when viewed from outside the garage. Techniques include limiting openings or screening openings with architectural and/or landscape elements.
2. Light standards may not be located where they will interfere with or impinge on parking stalls, stacking areas, ingress or egress, or marked pedestrian routes.
3. Parking lot light poles must be located so that trees within the parking lots do not obscure the operation of the light pole. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Permits.
1. An outdoor lighting permit is required for all lighting except:
a. Lighting that is not covered by this Code.
b. Lighting that is exempt.
c. Lighting for residential projects per IMC 18.610.070
d. Maintenance and cleaning. See subsection C of this section.
2. Applicants must obtain all applicable permits associated with the proposed lighting before constructing, installing, replacing, or repairing the outdoor lighting, including permits required by other applicable codes. Other applicable permits may include, but are not limited to, other local, State, and Federal codes, including, but not limited to, electrical and energy codes and the Building Code.
3. Submittal Requirements.
a. A site plan showing the proposed location, mounting height, aiming point, type, and size of all outdoor lighting, including building-mounted, landscape, roadways, and parking lot lighting. The site plan shall also include property line or project limit line if part of a larger project, any buildings or structures which might impact the light, and any additional information that shows compliance with this chapter.
b. If building-mounted fixtures are used, building elevations information showing the location and height of each fixture is required.
c. Manufacturer fixture specification sheets or cut sheets for all fixture types. Fixture cut sheets must be labeled with fixture type and all fixture features and accessories must be defined and an image of the fixture included.
d. Any other information determined necessary by the City, such as lighting studies prepared by a qualified professional, photometric analysis, lighting schedule, documentation, renderings, or plans.
B. Inspections. All lighting permitted by this chapter may be subject to inspection by the Director. If a complaint is filed or violation suspected, the City may request the property owner hire a consultant to evaluate the lighting to determine if it is consistent with this chapter or the City may hire a consultant to either peer review the evaluation or perform the evaluation if the property owner does not do so within 30 days of receiving a written notice from the City. Any cost incurred by the City to determine if the lighting is in compliance will be the responsibility of the property owner.
C. Maintenance. Maintenance or cleaning does not require a permit. Replacement of lighting is allowed without a permit following temporary removal for maintenance or cleaning of lighting or following temporary removal for permitted building façade changes. This exception does not include any structural, electrical, or luminaire changes.
D. Existing Lighting. Lighting installed prior to the effective date of this chapter must comply with subsections (E)(2) and (E)(3) of this section.
E. Additions or Alterations.
1. Any new outdoor lighting must meet the requirements of this chapter.
2. Major additions for nonresidential and multiple dwellings governed by IMC 18.610.060. If a major addition occurs on a property, lighting for the entire property must comply with the requirements of this chapter. “Property” means all contiguous land in common ownership. For purposes of this section, the following are considered to be a major addition:
a. Additions of 25 percent or more in terms of additional dwelling units, gross floor area, seating capacity, or parking spaces, either with a single addition or with cumulative additions within a three-year period.
b. Single or cumulative additions, modification, or replacement of 25 percent or more of installed outdoor lighting luminaires within a three-year period.
c. A major addition requires the submission of a complete inventory and site plan detailing all existing and any proposed new outdoor lighting that will demonstrate compliance.
3. Minor modifications, additions, or new lighting fixtures for nonresidential and multiple dwellings governed by IMC 18.610.060.
a. For nonresidential and multiple dwellings, all additions, modifications, or replacement of less than 25 percent of outdoor lighting fixtures existing within a three-year period do not have to be brought into compliance.
4. Right-of-Way.
a. Private development that is required to replace, add, or update street lighting must comply with the lighting requirements of this chapter for new street lighting pursuant to IMC 18.610.080(C).
b. Capital facilities projects must comply with the requirements of Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. The intent of this chapter is to attain vibrant, mixed-use, pedestrian-friendly neighborhoods by establishing site design standards that orient development so that it defines the public realm, reacts to and acknowledges the natural environment, and improves the pedestrian and multimodal experiences. Each development must meet the site and urban design intent by blending functionality with elements that make projects memorable, identifiable, and livable. Specifically, these standards aim to achieve:
1. Integration. Sites that are designed to acknowledge and amplify the context of the surrounding urban and natural environment including, but not limited to, trees, creeks, and mountains.
2. Transportation Priorities. Pedestrian and bicyclist circulation needs that are higher priority than motorized circulation, while ensuring sites are designed for functional motorized transportation.
3. Sense of Place. Development that is designed to generate a sense of belonging, community, and interest. In some cases, development may be designed to establish distinct characteristics of different neighborhoods or districts.
4. Environmentally Sustainable Design. Development that incorporates the most effective and innovative sustainable green building program measures.
5. A Sense of Arrival. Sites that highlight unique design features and provide a sense of arrival in each district and development to establish distinct boundaries that are recognizable to the community.
6. Compatibility With Existing Features and Context. Sites that respond to and harmonize with existing features and buildings, such as adjacent creeks, internal and external views, solar orientation, and adjacent building design (see Figure 18.600.010(A)(6)).
Figure 18.600.010(A)(6). Design Harmony Between New and Historic Buildings

B. The intent of this chapter’s urban design standards is to ensure that new buildings harmonize with the vision for a neighborhood’s buildings and public realm. When buildings harmonize within the context, the history and vibrancy of Issaquah’s urban fabric is maintained and enhanced. Such harmony is achieved through the urban design standards for building scale, proportion, massing, and ground level activation, unless the new buildings are of civic and social importance, when differentiated architecture can highlight the building’s importance (see Figure 18.600.010(B)).
Figure 18.600.010(B). Civic Buildings as Focal Point
![]() | ![]() |
(Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Unless exempt by IMC 18.600.030, Exemptions, this chapter applies Citywide to development, redevelopment, and subdivisions.
1. Site and urban design standards applicable to all sites are addressed in IMC 18.600.040.
2. Site and urban design standards applicable to multifamily, commercial, mixed-use development, and single-family and townhouses are addressed starting in Article III of this chapter, as shown in the following table:
Table 18.600.020(A)(3). Applicability of Design Standards
Use | Reference | |
|---|---|---|
Urban Design | Article III | |
Sustainable Site Design | All | IMC 18.600.040(A) |
Wayfinding | All | IMC 18.600.040(B) |
Ground Level Facades | Commercial and Mixed-Use | IMC 18.600.050 |
Entries | Commercial and Mixed-Use Multifamily Retail | IMC 18.600.050 IMC 18.600.060 IMC 18.600.080 |
Walkways | All Single-Family 2+ Lots | IMC 18.600.040(F) IMC 18.600.070 |
Site Design | Article IV | |
Fences, Walls, and Screening | All | IMC 18.600.090 |
Waste Collection | All | IMC 18.600.100 |
B. Additional standards may apply by zone and subarea, as identified and applicable in Part VII of this title, Neighborhood Overlay. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
Individual single-family detached and middle housing developments are not subject to this chapter. (Ord. 3091 § 9 (Exh. I), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Sustainable Site Design. Every project must contribute to the City’s overall goals for sustainability and climate change mitigation and resiliency, in accordance with the Land Use Element of the City Comprehensive Plan. Specific to site design, this means:
1. Development must integrate sustainable green building principles into designing site layout, orientation, and construction.
2. Required methods include, at minimum:
a. Integrating existing environmental site characteristics such as existing topography, critical areas, and trees into the site design;
b. Analyzing the sun path and wind directions passing through the site and how these might contribute to energy efficiency by natural heating, cooling, or energy generation;
c. Enhancing or expanding multimodal transportation options (see Chapters 12.10 and 18.608 IMC);
d. Providing electric vehicle charging if providing new parking (see IMC 18.604.090); and
e. Including accommodations for technologies such as conduits for fiber, broadband readiness, and building and lighting energy use minimization.
B. Intuitive Wayfinding. Sites must provide wayfinding signage and be designed so all users including pedestrians, bicyclists, and motorists can easily orient themselves and understand how to move through the development.
C. Multifunctionality. Site design must create opportunities for multiple uses. Examples include:
1. Raised planters and walls may be designed to be used for seating;
2. Planter strips may accommodate bioswales;
3. Raised utility vaults may be designed as playscape areas;
4. An emergency staging/fire lane area(s) may be designed to be used for recreation or informal gathering when not in use for emergencies;
5. Fire turnarounds may be integrated into plaza/trail/road configurations;
6. Parking lots and garages may be used as off-peak markets;
7. Low volume driving surface may be shared with pedestrians and bicyclists;
8. Nature trails and utility corridors may be combined;
9. Play elements that also educate;
10. Swales or pavers that manage stormwater and create community space opportunity; and
11. Utility and infrastructure cabinets may be surfaced with art, information, and maps.
D. Site Amenities and Street Furniture. Site design must provide site amenities and street furniture in community spaces (Chapter 18.608 IMC) and adjacent transportation facilities to support the uses and create a public living room. Amenities must be easily accessible to pedestrians and not interfere with pedestrian routes. Amenities must include a combination of the following, to the extent practical:
1. Benches;
2. Pet relief stations;
3. Bike racks;
4. Art;
5. Decorative bollards;
6. Drinking fountains;
7. Transit or bus shelters;
8. Overlooks;
9. Informational and directional signage;
10. Interpretive kiosks;
11. Waste receptacles; and
12. Directories.
E. Special Paving Materials. Special and varied paving materials must be used to create visual interest and highlight areas of importance, see examples in Figure 18.600.040(E). Examples of areas of importance are: locations in community spaces (Chapter 18.608 IMC); transportation facility intersections; and important pedestrian crossings of vehicular routes (Chapter 18.602 IMC).
Figure 18.600.040(E). Examples of Special Paving Materials
![]() | ![]() |
F. Transportation Facilities. Pedestrian walkways and connections to surrounding transportation facilities and properties must be designed as follows:
1. Motorized and nonmotorized connections must be provided in coordination with adjacent transportation facilities and City planned transportation facilities.
2. Parking, drive-throughs, and similar auto-dependent facilities must not impede pedestrian walkways and bicycle facilities, in accordance with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
3. Building and structure design must provide direct access to the Transportation Facilities in accordance with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
4. Barrier-free walkways providing the most direct route through a development must be provided between public entrances and the nearest public sidewalk, trail, or shared use corridor.
5. Walkways must meet the latest Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) guidelines. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Buildings must be oriented towards natural areas in Central Issaquah (see Figure 18.600.042(A)). Development sites, partially or totally within the Natural Context zone (i.e., within 150 feet of a natural area), and adjacent site development must respect, reinforce, and strengthen natural area assets.
Figure 18.600.042(A). Natural Context Areas Map

1. The building design and site between the natural area and the building must connect the building(s) and site uses to the natural area rather than divide them (see Figure 18.600.042(A)(1)).
Figure 18.600.042(A)(1). Natural Context Zone Diagram

2. Buildings must be designed to face the natural area and use natural materials and finishes that will age well over time.
3. Buildings must be designed with doors and windows making up 50 percent of the wall(s) oriented toward natural areas, to blur the transition between outdoor and indoor spaces along natural areas.
4. Upper floor must have building stepbacks that foster a graceful transition between the built and natural environments with a minimum stepback of five feet and maximum of 20 feet for all floors above the fourth floor that face the natural area, and shall be provided as follows:
a. For buildings taller than five floors, stepback must begin by the sixth floor but may begin as low as the third floor.
b. For buildings with fewer than six floors, a minimum of the first two floors must be built at the street edge.
5. Uses and activities shall be placed in the setback from the natural area, to orient to and build on its presence, rather than divide the site from the natural area.
6. Only native plant material landscape shall be used in the area between the building and the natural area.
7. Buildings shall be designed with balconies, stoops, porches and/or upper floor terraces facing the natural area. See example in Figure 18.600.042(A)(7).
Figure 18.600.042(A)(7). Building Oriented to Natural Area

8. Public walkways shall be provided between regulated creek or wetland open space and the building frontage.
9. For development adjacent to natural areas with water (such as wetlands, streams, and ponds), a water-oriented feature shall be provided, such as viewing platforms, trails, and outdoor seating areas accessible to the public while containing human and pet impacts with a barrier, railing, or fence.
10. Building activities and design that close off the building from the natural area are prohibited, including, but not limited to, utility rooms, storage, and solid walls with lack of windows and doors.
11. Driveways, parking loading areas, outdoor storage areas between buildings and open spaces/natural areas are prohibited. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Projects must preserve views of the forested hillsides of Tiger, Squak, and Cougar Mountains, Sammamish Plateau and Mt. Rainier from public spaces including transportation facilities and community spaces as shown on the Green Necklace Map, IMC 18.608.050(B), as follows:
1. Along the axis of existing transportation facilities except through block passages and trails, preserve the existing linear view;
2. If the existing circulation transportation facilities are curved, then the applicant must obtain a determination of the important views to be retained, by following the deviation process (IMC 18.600.110). The request must be reviewed and approved prior to approval of the project’s land use permit. For new transportation facilities, use views of the forested hillsides listed above as one criterion in determining appropriate layout; and
3. Design community spaces to preserve views along new and existing transportation facilities.
4. Floors above the mid-rise level for high-rise buildings must be horizontally separated from other high-rise buildings by 110 feet. Low-rise, mid-rise, and high-rise building locations may be adjusted as determined by the Director to ensure preservation of these view corridors.
5. The applicant may seek a deviation from this section by following the deviation process at IMC 18.600.110. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Ground Level Details of Commercial Uses in Mixed-Use Buildings.
1. Intent. This subsection intends to ensure that mixed-use buildings that have commercial use on the ground floor display the greatest amount of visual interest and reinforce the character of the streetscape.
2. Applicability. This subsection applies to mixed-use buildings with a commercial use on the ground floor.
3. Standards. Buildings located along a public street must incorporate at least four of the following elements into any ground-floor, street-facing façade:
a. Lighting supported by ornamental brackets;
b. Belt courses;
c. Plinths for columns;
d. Ornamental doors or window;
e. Projecting sills;
f. Tilework; and/or
g. Potted plants or hanging baskets supported by ornamental brackets.
B. Entries at Commercial Office Uses.
1. Intent. This subsection intends to ensure that entries facing the street are prioritized, and entries off through block passages will be additional and secondary to the street entrance. By locating entries facing the public realm, users will enter and exit the building from the street or passage, activating and animating the district.
2. Applicability. This subsection applies to commercial office uses.
3. Standards. Entries at commercial office uses must comply with the following:
a. Ground floor commercial entries must be oriented to transportation facilities and through block passages and be directly accessible from the adjacent sidewalk.
b. Primary business and client entries must face the street and shall not be accessed directly from parking lots.
Figure 18.600.050(B)(3). Commercial Office Entry (Image: Crandall Arambula)

c. Employee and service entries may face other nonprimary frontages, through block passages, and parking facilities.
d. At-grade entries fronting on sidewalks must be provided.
e. All doorway and window glazing must be transparent and comply with IMC 18.602.080, Ground level transparency. Colored, dark tinted, reflective, or other opaque window or door materials and treatments are prohibited.
C. Standards for retail use entries are located in IMC 18.600.080. (Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Intent.
1. When buildings have ground floor individual dwelling units or main lobby entries oriented to the street or pedestrian realm, they contribute to the vitality and safety of the public realm through “eyes on the street” surveillance. By locating entries to face the street, courtyard, and/or through block passages, users will enter and exit the building from the street, activating and animating the public realm.
2. These standards intend to ensure ground-related residential units improve the experience for pedestrians and offer the opportunity for semi-private space to the residence. The design and placement of the building, windows, and semi-private space needs to balance the need for activity adjacent to sidewalks and public space while maintaining security and privacy for residents.
3. The design of residential buildings should reinforce a pedestrian-friendly and multimodal transportation environment. This might include stoops, private front yards, common gardens, courtyards or elevated first floor units.
B. Applicability. This section applies to multifamily developments with ground floor residential units.
C. Multifamily Entries Standards.
1. Any building abutting a transportation facility must be oriented to the transportation facility.
2. Architectural elements must be used to provide a clearly identifiable and defensible entry visible from the street. For example, front porches with substantial depth, distinctive roof forms, architectural details, seating, railings, or alcoves may be used. Developments must include at least two of the following:
a. Recesses.
b. Balconies.
c. Articulated roof forms.
d. Front porches.
e. Arches.
f. Trellises.
g. Glass at sides and/or above entry doors.
h. Awnings and/or canopies.
3. Architecture and landscape architecture features must be used to further enhance and identify the pedestrian entry experience. Primary building entries must include a clearly identifiable entry doorway visible from the adjacent transportation facility, enhanced landscaping, special paving, and pedestrian-scaled lighting and/or lighted bollards.
Figure 18.600.060(C)(3). Commercial Terracing or Alternative Treatments

4. Ground floor residential entries must be oriented to the street, courtyard (if not adjacent to the street), or through block passage. If the doorway does not face the street, a clearly marked and well-maintained five-foot paved path must connect the entry to the sidewalk. They must also provide secure access directly to dwelling units or through elevator lobbies, stairwells, and corridors.
Figure 18.600.060(C)(4). Multifamily Entries Accessed From the Street

a. Compliant design requires the following:
(1) The primary entry for any ground-floor unit abutting the transportation facility, and the primary entry for multifamily residential buildings with ground-floor units that do not have entries facing the street such as those with entries through lobbies, must open directly onto the transportation facility.
(2) Individual unit and lobby entry doors that are substantial enough to suggest privacy while still appearing welcoming to those who approach and enter.
(3) For doors that face an active and busy street, provide separation through setback or four-foot recess with comfortable grade change.
(4) For each building frontage that exceeds 50 feet in length, each unit must have a separate entry directly from the sidewalk, through block passage, courtyard, or similar pedestrian-oriented facility except where unavoidable factors (e.g., vertical separation such as for an underground garage, or horizontal separation such as a lack of setback) preclude the connection. Where the connection is precluded, terraces, balconies, or similar active facility must be provided for each ground floor unit.
(5) Secondary entrances may be from parking areas, where a pedestrian connection from the parking area to the entrance has been made.
b. Noncompliant Design.
(1) Main entries accessed directly from parking lots or alleys. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Intent. This section intends to establish nonmotorized connections among and between single-family homes in developments of two or more lots.
B. Applicability. This section applies to developments of single-family homes involving two or more lots.
C. Standards. Developments of single-family homes involving two or more lots must comply with all of the following:
1. In addition to any required sidewalks or bike lanes, provide nonmotorized access and circulation by walkways, shared use paths and/or techniques such as linking cul-de-sacs, linking groups of buildings, and providing parallel routes that are permanent and recorded on plats and/or other required permit plans.
2. A required nonmotorized facility must provide pedestrian access from within the development to activity centers, parks, common areas, open spaces, schools or other public facilities, transit stops, public streets and/or existing nonmotorized facilities in adjacent developments served by public streets.
3. Stubs and/or routes for future connection may be required after an analysis of potential development on adjacent parcels and remaining opportunities to connect with collector and arterial streets.
4. At least one nonmotorized facility is required where block lengths or cul-de-sac lengths are 500 feet or more.
5. Nonmotorized facilities must be located the maximum distance possible from residential buildings that will still allow meeting the other requirements of this chapter. Landscaping must be provided within the setback in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 18.606 IMC, Landscaping. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Intent. Individual retail shop entries oriented to the street are essential for business success and contribute to the pedestrian-oriented vitality of shopping areas. The following standards intend to ensure a welcoming public realm for both businesses and pedestrians.
B. Applicability. This section applies to all retail uses, including those located within commercial and mixed-use buildings.
C. Standards. Retail entries must comply with all of the following:
1. A customer entrance to individual retail storefronts must be oriented to the street and directly accessible from the adjacent sidewalk;
2. Retail uses must have at-grade entries fronting sidewalks;
3. Secondary entries are permitted along a through block passage, alley, or parking lot;
4. Entries directly from parking lots must be limited to service, employee, and emergency access;
5. Entrances to business must be identifiable;
6. A minimum of 25 percent of the retail area must be oriented to pedestrians; and
7. Use of ramps or steps to access a retail storefront is prohibited.
Figure 18.600.080(C)(7). Retail Entryways (Image: Crandall Arambula)

(Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Intent. The standards in this section intend to provide screening between incompatible uses.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all commercial and multifamily developments.
C. Wall Standards.
1. Site walls must comply with the following standards:
a. Site walls adjacent to pedestrian areas (e.g., walkways, sidewalks, trails) shall not be taller than four feet in height. If taller walls are required, e.g., a retaining wall, one of the following may be selected:
(1) A wall up to four feet tall next to or near the pedestrian area with one or more taller walls (each up to 10 feet in height) terraced behind the lower wall; or
(2) A wall up to 10 feet tall, set back from the pedestrian area with enough setback to accommodate evergreen trees spaced every 30 to 35 feet. Additional walls, also up to 10 feet tall, may be terraced behind the first wall. Setback of the wall closest to the pedestrian area must accommodate mature tree size without impinging on pedestrian area. Setback space between trees must be filled with shrubs and groundcovers consistent with landscape standards; see Chapter 18.606 IMC, Landscaping.
b. In all cases of terracing, walls must be terraced with a minimum of three feet to accommodate shrubs, vines, and groundcover.
c. Wall materials must complement the selected architectural styles, such as block or shotcrete covered soil nail walls (Figure 18.600.090(C)(2) shows an example for a noncompliant wall; while it is the right height, the style of wall is busy and detracts rather than complements the adjacent homes).
Figure 18.600.090(C)(2). Noncompliant Wall Design

d. Materials scored or changed at a pedestrian scale frequency. Pedestrian scale materials include brick and other block or modular element. If concrete is used, it must be treated architecturally with scoring or other detailing.
e. Walls four feet and greater in height and longer than 30 feet length must be articulated and modulated at a frequency of, at a minimum, 35 feet.
f. When walls are used to screen undesirable elements, then articulation, artwork, and/or landscape plantings must be added to soften the visual effect of the structure.
2. The following are prohibited:
a. Using rockeries or timber walls, except when adjacent to natural open spaces.
b. Large expanses of concrete with no reveals, scorelines, or similar elements.
D. Fence Standards. Fences must comply with the following standards:
1. Fence design should complement the character of the development such as split rail or informal fencing (e.g., vinyl, aluminum, etc.) in natural or transition areas, and more formal fencing (e.g., wood, wrought iron, etc.) in developed areas.
2. Fences adjacent to pedestrian facilities and community spaces must be four feet or less in height and partially view-obscuring. Fences screening utilities, service, loading, waste, etc., must be the same height as the equipment it is screening but not exceed eight feet, while complementary to the architecture and character of adjacent areas.
3. When fences are used to screen undesirable elements, then articulation, artwork, and/or landscape plantings must be added to soften the visual effect of the structure. If fences are used to screen facilities such as waste collection areas, full height fences (six to eight feet tall) shall be used.
4. Wood or wrought iron are preferred fencing, arbor, pergola, or trellis materials such as when along a property side that is visible to the public or abutting property owners. Hedge or impenetrable landscape may be substituted for fencing, but height restrictions do not apply.
E. Specific Types of Fencing Standards. The following standards apply to certain types of fencing:
1. Use of chain-link fencing is restricted, except when provided as follows:
a. In general, chain-link fencing is prohibited in prominently visible areas or along transportation facilities unless specifically allowed below.
b. In less prominent areas, like the side and rear setbacks, black vinyl coated fencing, or other color coating that reduces visibility, may be used.
c. Temporary Uses. Chain-link fencing may be used for temporary purposes such as construction sites.
d. Multifamily and Nonresidential Sites. In less visible portions of multifamily, commercial, retail, or industrial areas, black vinyl coated chain link may be used for fencing where sight-obscuring fencing is not needed. Chain-link fencing must be softened with landscape screening.
e. Recreational Sites. Recreation fields and ball fields may use black vinyl coated chain link fencing to contain balls and players.
f. Major and Minor Utility Facilities. Major and minor utility facilities may use chain-link fencing softened with landscape screening.
g. Single-Family, Duplexes, Triplexes, Fourplexes, and Townhomes on Individual Lots. Chain-link may not be used unless specifically allowed by the architectural standards, such as Olde Town single-family-duplex architectural standards, or active Architectural Review Committee for an area, such as Issaquah Highlands and Talus.
2. Electric Fences. Electric fences are not permitted in any district except where additional fencing or other barriers prevent access to the electric fence by small children.
3. Barbed-Wire Fences. Barbed-wire fences may be used only in the following situations:
a. At the top of a six-foot-high solid or chain-link fence in commercial or industrial zoned districts;
b. To protect and contain permitted agricultural animals, which include livestock, bees, and poultry; or
c. At the top of a solid or chain-link fence around a major or minor utility facility. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Intent. The following standards are intended to ensure the provision of adequate facilities for waste and recycling collection in commercial and multifamily projects.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all commercial and multifamily developments.
C. General Standards for Waste Collection. Waste collection must meet all the following standards:
1. Separate containers must be provided for garbage, recyclables, and food waste. Each collection type must be located in the same outdoor enclosure or indoor room, using consistent methods. If a restaurant is an included use, room for a grease barrel must be provided. If a restaurant might be a future use, room for a future grease barrel is encouraged.
2. All trash compactors must be connected to sanitary sewer (separated from storm drains).
3. For dumpsters on rollers, the area at the front of the enclosure, where the dumpster will be pulled out for servicing, may not exceed a three percent grade, to prevent runaway dumpsters.
4. For stationary dumpsters, any cross slope in front of the enclosure may not exceed 10 percent.
5. Waste truck accessibility to the dumpster enclosures is limited by the truck turning templates, available from the City. Dumpsters on rollers must be rolled or pulled out to the front of the enclosure, while stationary dumpsters must be picked up from within the enclosure. There is a limited distance an operator will travel from vehicle to access enclosure. Waste collection must be coordinated between the development, the City and the waste collection purveyor.
6. If a vehicle is needed to pull the dumpster or containers to a location where the waste purveyor can access the containers for emptying, adequate storage space inside the building must be provided for the vehicle.
7. Containers That Are Transported to the Curb for Pickup.
a. Containers must have a permanent location on private property that is screened from view from the street and sidewalk with solid fencing, such as wood, or sight-obscuring landscaping.
b. Containers are allowed to be brought to the curb no sooner than 18 hours before the time of pick up and must be returned to private property no later than 18 hours after pickup occurs.
D. Outdoor enclosures require all of the following:
1. Waste locations should be convenient for residents/businesses. In general, waste enclosures should be provided within 250 feet of each residence/use, unless precluded by other site planning factors.
2. Containers must be located within a minimum six-foot-high enclosure designed to extend a minimum of one foot above the height of the container and must provide a 100 percent sight-obscuring enclosure. Other screening may be required per landscape standards in Chapter 18.606 IMC.
3. The enclosure must be roofed to create a wildlife resistant enclosure. Any roofed structure over enclosures for stationary dumpsters must have a vertical clearance of 14 feet.
4. Enclosure pads must slope toward an opening to allow drainage. The pad may not exceed a three percent grade and must be concrete.
5. Dumpsters, grease and oil containers, and trash compactors must have no illicit discharge to storm drains. Storm drains must be positioned so that potential discharge from dumpsters, containers, and compactors is visible outside the waste enclosure. For instance, storm drains can be located at a distance from the enclosure, such as a minimum of 15 feet, to highlight illicit discharge from the enclosure.
6. Dumpsters must have lids, or keep them under cover, to prevent the entry of stormwater.
7. Gate doors at the fronts of enclosures must open with a 180-degree swing, and include gate stops in both the open and closed positions. The gates must be constructed with commercial grade hinges, poles, and hasps.
8. A separate door for users is required in addition to the service gates to facilitate access.
9. Dumpster enclosures may not be located in required setbacks.
10. Precast curb stops must be placed around the entire inside perimeter of the enclosure except where doors are located.
11. Compactors must provide an eight-to-10-inch-thick reinforced concrete slab.
E. Enclosures or Collection Rooms Inside Buildings.
1. If waste chutes are used, separate garbage and recycling chutes are required. An optional additional chute for food waste may be used; however, it is preferred that food waste is collected in a waste collection room, rather than through a chute.
2. All waste streams must be consolidated into one or more waste collection rooms that are secure, well-lit, and only accessible to building occupants and management. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Deviations may be requested for the following list of standards in this chapter. Deviations must be requested according to the appropriate permit process in IMC 18.204.020, Review levels. Deviations from the standards within this section must meet the approval criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and the criteria listed below. Any proposal to deviate that does not satisfy the following conditions must apply for a variance, according to Chapter 18.210 IMC, Variances.
B. Deviation Criteria for IMC 18.600.044 to Determine Views to Be Retained Along Curved Transportation Facilities.
1. The applicant must demonstrate which preserved view or views listed in IMC 18.600.044 are existing prior to the project development and what the impact would be on those views after project construction.
2. If there are no views to preserve, no further action is required. If there are views to preserve, then the applicant must either comply with IMC 18.600.044 or seek a deviation.
C. To seek a deviation from the views and vistas standards, the applicant must provide a viewshed study to assess the impacts of the proposed project. If views will not be altered or impacted by the proposed deviation or development design, no further action is required, and the deviation may be approved. If views will be impacted, a deviation may be approved if the applicant utilizes one of the following techniques to minimize changes in view corridors:
1. Increasing distances between high-rise building towers;
2. Retaining or creating new view corridors; or
3. Strategic placement of building bulk or height, while meeting minimum densities, and FAR. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. The intent of this chapter is to establish building design standards that:
1. Create a vibrant, livable, pedestrian-friendly, and sustainable built environment through buildings designed to frame and engage the public realm, while maintaining and enhancing existing building uses and designs and views to nature;
2. Ensure internal and external views and solar access are considered when locating taller buildings. This includes ensuring sunlight at street level and in community and amenity spaces by thoughtfully locating buildings;
3. Ensure that buildings engage with adjacent facilities and that they do not have a “back side” through design and articulation;
4. Encourage and enforce a safe and healthy environment for benefit of the public welfare;
5. Encourage building designs that accommodates many uses so they may evolve over time;
6. Reduce heat island impacts by allowing for green space and tree canopy between buildings; and
7. Increase passive solar to reduce energy use.
B. The multifamily building design standards intend to break up the mass of buildings in creative ways.
1. Balance street-level activation with visual separation and privacy for ground-floor multifamily units that have minimal setbacks from streets, through block passages, or other public rights-of-way while increasing physical interaction between ground floor multifamily units and the public realm.
C. The retail and commercial building design standards intend to:
1. Activate transitions into storefronts, hotel lobbies, and other commercial spaces that have minimal setbacks from streets, through block passages, or other public rights-of-way; and
2. Increase visual and physical interaction between ground-floor retail uses and the public realm through adequate window and door openings. Retail uses face transportation facilities and use large street level windows that allow pedestrians to see activity within shops. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
Unless exempt by IMC 18.602.030, Exemptions, this chapter applies Citywide to development, redevelopment, and subdivisions. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. This chapter does not apply to the following:
1. Temporary uses and structures; and
2. Buildings and sites designated as landmarks by the Historic Preservation Commission.
B. Ground-level transparency does not apply to recreational cannabis facilities, as addressed in IMC 18.502.090. (Ord. 3091 § 10 (Exh. I), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. The following standards provide a baseline for building design in the City of Issaquah. However, Issaquah’s neighborhoods are not all the same. Additional building design standards may apply in Issaquah’s overlay areas, which are addressed in Part VII of this title, Neighborhood Overlays. See also Chapter 18.600 IMC, Urban Design and Site Planning, for additional building design standards that apply to specific uses.
B. Primary building entrances must face and be accessible from transportation facilities in order to engage the public realm, to bring visual interest, variation, and intimacy to the streetscape, while maintaining the pedestrian through-route. Other, nonprimary, building entrances may also be accessed from secondary or non-pedestrian-oriented transportation facilities or parking lots. Activities in the right-of-way must comply with Issaquah street standards.
C. Each primary building entrance must have weather protection and highlight the presence of the entrance to pedestrians through the use of architectural treatments such as modulation and articulation changes in the street wall or building façade, and lighting. Primary pedestrian entrances must be visually more prominent than secondary entrances.
D. For buildings that have more than one frontage along a transportation facility, each frontage must receive individual and detailed ground level treatment to complement the designated pedestrian character.
E. Blank walls longer than 30 linear feet are not allowed except when facing alleys.
1. General building design should appear to have continuity on all sides and no “back side.”
2. If windows and doors are not present, blank wall treatment is required. Treatment methods include, but are not limited to, at least two of the following:
a. Other features that allow visibility to the interior of the building;
b. Vertical trellis with climbing vines or plant materials to obscure or screen a minimum of 60 percent of the wall’s surface;
c. Decorative tile, cornices, or masonry;
d. Artwork (mosaic, mural, sculpture, etc.) on at least 25 percent of the blank wall surface;
e. Discernible change in building materials, patterns, or color variation every 15 horizontal feet and extending 60 percent of the vertical height of the adjacent building story; or
f. Special building details that add visual interest at a pedestrian scale.
3. If landscaping is present, it must enhance the blank wall and pedestrian experience as well as reduce the perceived scale.
a. Landscaping must be provided in combination with other design features.
b. Landscaping must include species that will not cause damage to hard surfaces over time.
c. Landscape beds/boxes, raised planters, and/or green ways are considered landscaping.
F. Outdoor informal gathering areas and opportunities for social interaction must be located adjacent to the façade. The required area will be based on requirements for outdoor spaces for new and redevelopment in accordance with Chapter 18.608 IMC, Community and Amenity Spaces.
G. Numerous and separated, rather than consolidated, entrances must be used such as regular use of individual entrances to businesses and residences. Entrances must be reinforced with the use of traditional “main street” design and repeated architectural elements such as windows, weather protection, pedestrian-oriented signage, archways, doors, accent lights and piers, columns, or pilasters.
H. Landscaping, including evergreen plantings to maintain year-round interest, must be located between the property line and the building to soften hardscape spaces and contribute to the Green Necklace. Plantings may be in at-grade or raised planters, containers, window box planters, upon trellises, etc. Where the building is located at the property line, plantings may be located in building bays such as required in IMC 18.602.060(D). Plantings may also extend onto the adjacent right-of-way. Landscaping in or adjacent to sidewalks must also comply with the sidewalk use design standards and guidelines under Chapter 12.05 IMC, Sidewalk Use District.
I. In commercial or mixed-use zones that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), at least two of the following design elements must be incorporated into the building design to best enhance the ground level details:
1. Clerestories over storefront windows;
2. Projecting window sills;
3. Medallions;
4. Benches and seat walls along 25 percent of the length of the façade; or
5. Decorative brick, tile or stone work on the ground floor façade.
J. Design of buildings must reinforce a pedestrian-friendly environment using the following techniques:
1. In commercial and mixed-use zones, the ground floor must be designed to incorporate active, visible uses (e.g., retail) or other visible uses that engage the pedestrian (e.g., residences, meeting rooms, lobbies, live/work). Where office and other uses require ground floor privacy, then a combination of landscaping, low walls, fencing and other built elements should create layers and differing textures to define these semi-private areas while maintaining a pedestrian-friendly environment.
2. Where gates or fences are desired or required, an open design must be used to allow social interaction. Semi-public and semi-private space must be delineated from public areas with railings or fences no more than three feet tall (unless fall protection is required), planters, or overhead elements.
K. Sustainable Design.
1. All mixed-use or commercial development or redevelopment of buildings greater than or equal to 10,000 gross square feet and subject to IMC 18.602.020, Applicability, must be certified to meet the current version of the U.S. Green Building Council’s (USGBC) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Platinum program standards.
2. All residential development projects of 10 units or more and subject to IMC 18.602.020, Applicability, must be certified to meet the current version of the Built Green four-star certification standards. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Applicability. The following section contains the design standards that apply to required massing and articulation. These design standards must be met by all buildings, except where architectural styles of a specific neighborhood subarea or overlay provide different guidance, in accordance with Part VII of this title, Neighborhood Overlays.
B. Upper portions of buildings shall step back through changes in building materials with articulation and modulation that differs from the first three floors, per base and building height requirements in IMC 18.404.090, Residential zones form and intensity standards, through 18.404.170, Talus form and intensity standards.
1. Buildings adjacent to natural areas must comply with the stepback requirements in IMC 18.600.042(A).
2. Stepbacks must incorporate terraces and usable outdoor space.
3. Buildings with four or fewer floors shall not incorporate more than one upper floor stepback.
Figure 18.602.050(B)(4). Examples of a six-story building with upper two floors stepped back from street (left) and a four-story building with lower two floors at the street edge and upper two floors stepped back (right)

Figure 18.602.050(B)(5). Example: Building over six stories with multiple stepbacks. Photo: BHC Consultants

C. Buildings must provide surface relief, depth, and shadows to the façade by:
1. Recessing at least 18 inches deep or projecting elements of the façade, especially windows;
2. Changing materials, color, or height; or
3. Vary within the build-to-line for horizontal façades longer than 30 feet.
D. Commercial and retail structures must abut the sidewalk to create the presence of a streetwall. A setback from the sidewalk will only be considered if the use and/or adjacent uses will use the setback area as active space, specific design elements, or for security purposes (e.g., outdoor seating for a restaurant or café, retail display area, entry court, seating, fountain, kiosk, etc.). If a setback is allowed, use of design elements that create and/or maintain a strong connection to the street and support a pedestrian-friendly environment must be provided.
1. If a setback is allowed, it should be the minimum necessary to provide the active space and/or design element needed for the specific use.
2. An approved setback for commercial and retail proposals shall be no greater than 10 feet.
E. To increase a building’s architectural detail and level of interest, in areas that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), windows must be:
1. Divided light windows;
2. Operable;
3. Trimmed around framed openings; or
4. Recessed or projecting from the building façade and not flush.
F. In areas that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), the building base, middle, and top must be distinguished from each other through techniques such as setting back buildings with heights over three stories or varying character, materials, color, or height.
G. Views must be preserved in accordance with IMC 18.600.044(A).
H. In areas that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), building corners adjacent to the public realm must include added detail, design, and building form, or conversely cutting away the corner for a special entry, gathering spot, café seating, sidewalk vending, art, a fountain, or similar pedestrian element. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of rooftop standards is to regulate the development of rooftops that may be used as active amenities, such as for community gardens, recreation, and useable courtyards (see Figure 18.602.060(A) for an example of a compliant rooftop).
Figure 18.602.060(A). Rooftops Used for Communal Space

B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all nonresidential and multifamily developments.
C. Where active uses cannot be placed on rooftops, rooftops should be used for passive activities, such as green roofs to partially address stormwater, solar panels, art and/or design to make them visually interesting, as well as a means to allow access to light and air for adjacent occupied space.
D. In areas that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), nonresidential buildings must have parapets and projecting cornices to create a prominent edge when viewed against the sky. Residential uses may use parapets and projecting cornices or sloping roofs consistent with the building design.
E. Parapets should be used to highlight focal points of the building. Parapets shall not dominate the façade or appear as flat and obviously false extensions of building wall sections, but rather appear as distinct building masses and extend into the depth of the building.
F. Parapets may not exceed 25 percent of the height of the supporting wall, as measured from grade to the exterior roof surface, and may not exceed eight feet in height.
G. Where roof shape and penthouse functions are integrated into the overall building design, one of the following design elements must be used:
1. Active rooftop uses in accordance with IMC 18.608.100, Rooftop amenities;
2. Green roofs that reduce stormwater runoff; or
3. Parapet walls.
H. In areas that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), sloped roofs must have pitched roofs with a minimum slope of 4:12. Large roofs that extend longer than 60 feet must have a change in form such as a change in height, pitch, orientation, or other changes in form at a spacing to break up the massiveness of a continuous, uninterrupted sloping roof.
I. Views at ground level of mechanical, electrical, and communication equipment, satellite dishes, utilities, infrastructure housing, HVAC, except renewable energy appurtenances, must be screened from view from surrounding sidewalks, through block passages, community spaces, or public parks. Screening may be required for sides or tops of equipment, as necessary to shield views. The devices must be screened in a method that is integrated with the architectural character of the building. Where the equipment is contained in a plain box, or self-screened, the roof-mounted equipment shall match the color of the roof to minimize visual impacts when equipment is visible from higher elevations nearby.
J. Cell phone towers and related equipment may be located on rooftops in accordance with Chapter 18.512 IMC, Wireless Communication Facilities, but must be located toward the center of the roof to minimize ground level and surrounding street views as much as possible. The Director may require structure design or screening methods to integrate the equipment with the development design.
K. Equipment that is incorporated into a rooftop terrace or garden must ensure screening of large equipment with architectural elements and/or landscaping to include the top and all sides. At maturity, the plant screening must be at least the height of the equipment being screened.
L. Rooftop Materials.
1. Rooftops must be comprised of sustainable building materials. Examples of acceptable sustainable building materials include, but are not limited to:
a. Green and living roofs;
b. White or cool roof materials designed to reflect as much heat as possible, reducing HVAC system demands;
c. Natural, recycled, or reclaimed roofing materials, including, but not limited to, wood, recycled metals, slate, and clay materials;
d. One hundred percent recyclable roofing;
e. A material not specifically listed here, but one that the applicant demonstrates provides greater energy and heating efficiency or a lower carbon footprint over the lifecycle of the material; or
f. A material not specifically listed here, but one that provides greater fire safety than the sustainable alternatives listed above.
2. Rooftops shall not contain materials that cause chemical runoffs harmful to streams and ecosystems, such as anti-moss treatments like zinc or copper that can harm fish habitats through runoff. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of weather protection requirements is to:
1. Protect pedestrians and outdoor seating areas from rain and snow;
2. Be an integral component of the building façade and architecturally complement the architecture;
3. Be proportionate to the building and sidewalks; and
4. Consider the surrounding environment to avoid interference with street trees, light fixtures, or other street furniture.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all nonresidential and multifamily developments.
C. Weather protection is required over entrances that serve as the primary access for tenants, guests and customers. Weather protection must be provided on no less than 75 percent of the building façade length where the building is located adjacent to a sidewalk, pedestrian path, or woonerf. Weather protection for pedestrian routes to rear or secondary entrances is required; however, the extent of weather protection along portions of the building not used by pedestrians may be waived if such weather protection would interfere with loading, deliveries, or waste collection.
D. Appropriate sizing of weather protection coverage is required as follows:
1. Weather protection associated with nonresidential buildings must be at least six feet in depth and have at least eight feet clearance beginning at the average finished grade. If the weather protection is 12 feet above the sidewalk, it must be at least eight feet in depth.
Figure 18.602.070(D)(1). Diagram of Weather Protection Dimensions

2. Weather protection over building entrances for residential uses must be at least four feet deep and four feet wide.
Figure 18.602.070(D)(2). Diagram of Weather Protection Dimensions on a Residential Building

E. The heights of weather protection must be compatible with adjacent buildings. The location of street trees and the edge of the driving surface may require adjustments to these dimensions. In all cases, the height and depth of the weather protection must prioritize providing protection to the pedestrian over architectural enhancement.
F. Acceptable weather protection materials include, but are not limited to:
1. Fabric awnings, including canvas or retractable awnings, made out of fire-retardant material;
2. Horizontal metal canopies with transom or clerestory windows above;
3. Simple, planar forms resembling flat or shed roofs; or
4. Glazed canopies.
G. Weather protection shall not be:
1. Made of vinyl fabrics in Central Issaquah or Issaquah Highlands subareas;
2. Backlit through internal lighting;
3. Arched, circular, or in rounded dome forms in Central Issaquah; or
4. Used primarily for nonpedestrian uses. For example, weather protection for pots, and retail displays and does not protect pedestrian facilities or outdoor seating. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of requiring transparency standards is to ensure active ground floor street uses that support walkability and a pedestrian supportive environment.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all nonresidential and multifamily developments.
C. Measurement. The transparency percentage is measured for each façade facing a public space and includes the linear five feet above the building’s first finished-floor height, except as otherwise specified in subsection F of this section. Transparent surfaces include windows and transparent or glass doors.
Figure 18.602.080(A)(1). Ground Floor Transparency Along a Building Frontage for Multifamily/Office Space and Retail Space (Image: Crandall Arambula)

D. Window glazing must be clear and transmit visible daylight.
E. Reflective glass, coatings, or glazes shall not be used. Transparent surfaces shall not use glazing that is blue/green, dark tinted, or other opaque materials or treatments. This includes window films and walls placed behind windows.
F. Multifamily and commercial uses must comply with the following additional standards:
1. Forty percent ground floor façade transparency is required for multifamily and commercial use buildings that front streets, through block passages, natural areas, or publicly accessible open space.
a. For multifamily residential space within buildings located directly adjacent to the sidewalk, the first floor must achieve 40 percent transparency for portions of the façade six feet and higher above exterior ground level. See Figure 18.602.100(D)(1)(c) for an illustration.
G. Retail use must comply with the following additional standards:
1. Seventy percent ground floor façade transparency is required for retail uses that front streets, through block passages, a natural area, or publicly accessible open space; and
2. Applied window signs must be less than 10 percent of any single opening. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of requiring specific standards for single-family and middle housing development is to:
1. Ensure single-family and middle housing developments are compatible with the scale and design of the neighborhood or community in which it is located. Compatibility of design includes, but is not limited to:
a. Resembling the style and modulation of a single-family residence.
b. Having a height and scale that is consistent with the existing single-family homes in the neighborhood;
2. Provide livable housing for residents that includes amenities such as usable open space;
3. Encourage a sense of community within each neighborhood; and
4. Emphasize people, pedestrians, and homes while reducing the impact of automobile access and storage.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all single-family and middle housing buildings, except where architectural styles of a specific neighborhood subarea or overlay provide different guidance, such as Olde Town, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus subareas.
C. Front Entrances.
1. Residential structures must be oriented with the front of the home facing the street, or central open space, or central courtyard. If none of these options is not practically feasible then the front door shall face the transportation facility providing access to the development.
2. Residential structures must provide a clear, direct, unobstructed pedestrian walkway between the sidewalk or public right-of-way and the front door. Gates are allowed along the path, as long as they can be opened to provide access from the street to the front door.
3. The primary entryway to the dwelling unit must provide a covered entry porch at least four feet deep.
4. Residential developments containing more than one residential unit must provide a comprehensive pedestrian walkway system within the development allowing access from the structures to adjacent unit entries, parking lots, common areas, parks, and other facilities.
5. Duplexes.
a. A duplex in a side-by-side configuration, meaning both units face the street next to one another, must each have one street-facing door per unit; see Figure 18.602.090(C)(5).
b. A duplex in a front-to-back configuration, meaning the two units are oriented perpendicular to the street, must have one street-facing door for the street-facing unit. The unit in the back may have a door perpendicular to the street as long as it has a direct path from the street to the primary entrance.
c. A duplex in a stacked configuration, meaning one unit is on the story above the other unit, must provide entrances consistent with either side-by-side or front-to-back configurations.
Figure 18.602.090(C)(5). Duplex Entries
(5).png)
D. Driveways and Garages.
1. Alley Access.
a. If the lot has alley access, all driveways and garages must only be accessed from the alley.
b. Alley-loaded driveway widths are not regulated.
c. If alley access is not feasible, driveways and garages may be accessed from the street.
2. Street-Facing Garages.
a. Size. Garages that face a transportation facility may not exceed 50 percent of the overall dwelling unit width unless the building’s façade is less than 36 feet wide.
(1) On building façades less than 36 feet in width, facing a street or transportation facility whose façade includes both a front door and a garage, the width allotted to the garage must be minimized, and the width devoted to the front door and living space be maximized. In no case may the front door and the space on either side of it be less than six feet in width. In addition, the front door must incorporate elements that emphasize its presence and importance, including, but not limited to, weather protection, lighting, landscaping, special paving, etc.
(2) Garages must be sized to accommodate the required on-site number of standard-sized parking stalls, waste containers (garbage, recycling, and yard waste), and storage inside the garage.
3. Driveway Standards.
a. Length. Each lot with driveway access from a street, woonerf, alley, or similar facility must provide a driveway that has an on-site 18-foot minimum length. Where driveway parking is not needed or possible, driveways must be limited to four feet or less in length and use other techniques that communicate that parking on the driveway apron is prohibited.
b. Width.
(1) Driveway widths for residential buildings must be in accordance with the City’s driveway construction standards in Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
(2) The width of the driveway may not be greater than 67 percent of the lot or unit width.
(3) Where a wider driveway is functionally necessary (such as to serve a three-car garage), landscape or other elements shall be used to break the driveway into sections, each 20 feet or less in width. See Figure 18.602.090(D)(4).
Figure 18.602.090(D)(4). Wide Driveway Elements

c. Only one driveway cut from a street, or another transportation facility with a pedestrian component, is allowed per lot, not including alleys.
d. Shared Driveway.
(1) Shared driveways must be in accordance with IMC 18.350.020, Shared-access lots.
(2) An access easement must be recorded with the King County Recorder’s Office granting use of the driveway to all lot owners and public safety personnel.
e. Driveways shall be constructed of materials such as concrete, exposed aggregate, and pavers. Asphalt shall not be used for driveways.
E. Massing, Scale, and Facade Design Standards.
1. Buildings over 30 feet in width must incorporate both of the following modulation techniques along any street façade:
a. Change in Plane. Recess or project a portion of the façade by a minimum of four feet in depth and eight feet in width. Must extend to all stories to qualify as a mass reduction technique.
b. Front Porch or Entry Feature. Provide a front porch, portico, recessed or projecting entry, associated roof accent or other architectural feature directly over the front door.
2. Façade articulation techniques must be used to further reduce the perceived scale of the building and must be coordinated with the overall massing approach to create a cohesive, human-scaled façade by using at least two of the following elements:
a. Window groupings, patterns, and detailing, such as recessed or projecting windows, panes, shutters, and awnings;
b. Balconies;
c. Architectural details, including trim, columns, pilasters, cornices, and chimneys; and
d. Changes in color or material to highlight specific portions of building’s shape.
Figure 18.602.090(E)(1). Façade Massing and Scale – Not Allowed Vs. Mass Reduction Techniques to Create Compliant Massing and Scale
(1).png)
Figure 18.602.090(E)(2). Building Mass and Scale Examples – Allowed Mass Reduction Techniques to Create Compliant Massing and Scale
(2).png)
F. Middle Housing and Townhouse Standards.
1. An attached single-family/townhouse may not have a firewall and/or parapet extension above the roofline.
2. The maximum number of single-family dwellings/townhouses that may be attached in a single grouping varies by zoning district and is determined in IMC 18.402.020, Table of permitted uses. (Ord. 3091 § 10 (Exh. I), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of requiring specific standards for multifamily development is to:
1. Ensure multifamily development that is compatible with the scale and character of the neighborhood or community in which it is located;
2. Provide livable housing for residents that includes amenities such as usable open space; and
3. Encourage a sense of community within each overall development.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all multifamily buildings, except where architectural styles of a specific neighborhood subarea or overlay provide different guidance, such as Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus subareas.
C. Multifamily Building Massing Standards.
1. Street-facing façades must project or be recessed from abutting façade planes by a minimum depth of three feet for a minimum width of eight feet and maximum width of 25 feet.
Figure 18.602.100(C)(1). Multifamily Building Modulation

2. Modulation must extend to the roof, except where there are balconies.
3. Buildings must include articulation along the façades facing and visible from public rights-of-way.
4. Horizontal façades longer than 30 feet must be articulated into smaller units using at least two of the following elements:
a. Distinctive roof forms;
b. Changes in materials;
c. Window patterns; and/or
d. Color differentiation.
D. Multifamily Building Setback Design.
1. Where buildings have a zero setback:
a. Units adjacent to sidewalks and public walkways must have a finished floor elevations at a minimum 18 inches above exterior ground level with recessed entries (maximum four feet depth) oriented to stoops, patios, terraces, or porches for each individual entry if required;
b. Windows of units directly adjacent to sidewalks and public walkways must be located above pedestrian sightlines, at least six feet above exterior ground level.
Figure 18.602.100(D)(1)(c). To accommodate residential privacy, multifamily buildings adjacent to the sidewalk may achieve the required 40 percent transparency in the first floor areas above six feet from ground level
Figure 18.602.100(D)(1)(d). Ground floor residential unit with zero setback with windows positioned six feet above the exterior ground level. (Image: Crandall Arambula)
Figure 18.602.100(D)(1)(e). The side façade of this townhome development has zero setback to the sidewalk. The first story is elevated above ground level and windows are located above eye level. (Graphic: BHC Consultants)
2. Where buildings have a setback up to 10 feet:
a. Landscaping must be incorporated within the setback;
b. Entries must be provided at grade or raised above the sidewalk;
c. Private porches or patios must be separated with hedges, steps, low walls, or low fences.
E. Cottage Housing Standards.
1. Number of Dwelling Units. The maximum number of cottage houses that may be clustered in a single grouping varies by zoning district and is determined in IMC 18.404.090, Residential zones form and intensity standards.
2. Cottage Size. Cottages shall each be no more than 1,700 square feet in size, excluding attached garages.
3. Orientation. Each dwelling unit that abuts the central courtyard must have a primary entry oriented to the common open space.
4. Amenity Space.
a. Cottage housing developments must provide open space and meet the common outdoor amenity space requirements as determined in Chapter 18.608 IMC, Common Outdoor Amenity Space.
b. Each cottage must provide private outdoor amenity space. This may include a covered porch, patio, or deck with a minimum area of 60 square feet per unit. Private outdoor amenity space does not contribute to the minimum outdoor common space area requirement.
5. Parking.
a. Parking shall be provided in accordance with IMC 18.604.080, Computation of vehicle parking.
b. Required parking shall be located on the same property as the cottage housing, unless the lot is part of a subdivision and owned by all property owners.
c. Required parking may be located in or under an accessory parking structure, but such structures shall not be attached to individual dwelling unit. Uncovered parking is also permitted.
6. Existing Nonconforming Structures.
a. An existing detached single-family structure, with respect to the standards of this chapter may be nonconforming, may be permitted to remain, but the extent of the nonconformity may not be increased. The nonconforming dwelling unit must be included in the maximum lot density.
b. Nonconforming dwelling units may be modified to be more consistent with this chapter.
c. New accessory dwelling units are not permitted in cottage housing developments.
F. Courtyard Housing Standards.
1. Number of Dwelling Units. The maximum number of dwelling units that may be clustered in a single grouping varies by zoning district and is determined in IMC 18.404.090, Residential zones form and intensity standards.
2. Orientation. Courtyard housing projects shall meet the following site layout requirements:
a. Courtyard housing shall be in a U- or L-shaped configuration. At least two sides of the dwelling units must surround the central courtyard.
b. The main entry to each ground floor dwelling unit shall be directly off a common courtyard or directly from a street.
3. Central Open Space. Courtyard housing developments must provide a central courtyard and meet the common outdoor amenity space requirements as determined in Chapter 18.608 IMC, Common Outdoor Amenity Space. (Ord. 3091 § 10 (Exh. I), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
(Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Where buildings have a zero setback:
1. Windows and façades must be recessed a maximum of one and one-half feet from the build-to-line to accommodate columns or other architectural elements that engage the pedestrian and create façade interest.
2. Entry areas and doorways must be recessed a maximum of four feet to provide a transition into storefronts.
Figure 18.602.120(A)(3). Recessed Entries and Windows for Zero Setbacks (Image: Crandall Arambula)

B. Where buildings have a setback up to 10 feet:
1. Outdoor seating, dining, and/or retail display must be accommodated with primarily paved areas, which may include limited landscaping in the form of at-grade or raised planters or landscape pots. See example in Figure 18.602.120(B).
Figure 18.602.120(B). Ground Floor Commercial With 10-Foot Setback for Dining
C. Buildings must engage with the street by including design and amenity elements including, but not limited to, outdoor seating, plantings or landscape elements, or pavers.
D. Ground level retail and entrance lobby uses located on a pedestrian-oriented transportation facility must have a first-floor height of at least 15 feet. Office uses and other uses not located on a pedestrian-oriented transportation facility may have lower first-floor heights. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Deviations may be requested for the following standards in this chapter. Deviations must be requested according to the appropriate permit process in IMC 18.204.020, Review levels, Deviations from standards, and meet all of the approval criteria listed under IMC 18.204.080, Application vesting, and the criteria stated below. Any proposal to deviate that does not satisfy the following conditions must apply for a variance, in accordance with Chapter 18.210 IMC, Variances.
1. Window transparency percentage standards may be adjusted when the security and privacy requirements of the tenant or owner need to be balanced with the flows of the transportation facility based on the following approval criteria:
a. Multifamily window transparency percentage standards may be adjusted by 10 percent when:
(1) Additional design features beyond what is required by this Code are used instead. For example, artwork, fountains, street furniture, varied exterior materials, and/or landscape elements or plazas are used to enhance the pedestrian environment; or
(2) Housing units make up at least 50 percent of the ground floor space that fronts streets, through block passages, natural areas, or publicly accessible open space.
b. Nonresidential window transparency percentage standards may be adjusted by five percent when:
(1) Additional design features beyond what is required by this Code are used instead. For example, artwork, fountains, street furniture, varied exterior materials, and/or landscape elements or plazas are used to enhance the pedestrian environment. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
The intent of this chapter is to establish standards for the design, configuration and performance of parking facilities based on land use and community vision for the transportation system. By requiring parking as a condition of development, the City intends to achieve a balance between insufficient parking (which can cause overflow parking pressure in adjacent streets and lots) and excessive parking (which wastes space and resources). This balance is necessary to support a pedestrian-friendly environment, encourage attractive urban design, and reduce environmental impacts by limiting impervious surface. This will be accomplished by administration of this chapter in order to:
A. Increase traffic safety and pedestrian safety;
B. Encourage safe and efficient vehicular and nonmotorized travel;
C. Ensure adequate, safe, and reasonable storage of and access to parking facilities;
D. Encourage the use of parking garages over surface parking;
E. Promote efficient site design to provide parking therein;
F. Provide tools for flexibility in the design, performance, and location of parking facilities;
G. Reduce the visual impact of parking lots and garages;
H. Allow on-street parking to meet as much of the required parking as possible;
I. Where on-street parking is constrained, provide adequate off-street parking;
J. Minimize paving and impervious surfaces;
K. Promote environmental quality through reduced use of fossil fuels by supporting the use of nonmotorized travel;
L. Encourage alternative methods of moving people and incentivize the parking and storage of bicycles; and
M. Provide convenience and reliability to commuters, residents, pedestrians, employees, tourists, shoppers, students, bicyclists, special populations, and service providers. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. This chapter applies to all existing uses, changes of use, and development in the City.
B. In the case of a use not specifically mentioned in this chapter, the parking standards must be determined by the Director. Such determination shall be based upon the requirements for the most comparable use specified in this chapter. The applicant may be required to provide sufficient information to demonstrate that the parking demand for a specific land use will be satisfied, based upon existing land uses similar to the proposed use. The applicant shall provide a parking study for the proposed use which shall be prepared by a professional with expertise in traffic and parking analysis.
C. Parking standards are distinguished between Tier I and Tier II:
1. Parking in Tier I areas must accommodate the multimodal goals for urban development as established in the mobility master plan. Tier I encompasses Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands Commercial areas, and Olde Town.
2. Parking for Tier II areas must accommodate the neighborhood characteristics of less dense development. Tier II encompasses all areas of the City that are not Tier I.
Figure 18.604.020(A). Parking Tier Areas

(Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
The addition of dwelling units or living units added within an existing building may require the retention of existing parking that is required to satisfy existing residential parking requirements under local laws and for nonresidential uses that remain after the new units are added. (Ord. 3105 § 4 (Exh. A), 2025).
A. The intent of this section is to provide bicycle parking in a safe, accessible, and convenient location to support a bicycle-friendly community.
B. Bicycle parking provides a space for securing a bicycle at any location and includes both the space of the bicycle rack and the space to attach the bicycle to the rack.
C. Bicycle parking spaces must provide parking for cyclists of all ages and abilities. Area devoted to bicycle parking shall not be used for any other purpose, except as authorized by this Code.
D. Wayfinding signage must be provided when bike parking facilities are not visible from the public street or sidewalk. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of short-term bicycle parking is to provide safe, accessible, and secure locations that directly serve the use activities generating the bicycle parking demand.
B. Short-term bicycle parking is for bicycles parked less than four hours.
C. All short-term bicycle parking installations must meet the following criteria:
1. Must be located in a well-lit area, highly visible to the public to emphasize use, and within 50 feet of a building’s primary entrance;
2. Must not impede the use or encroach on any adjacent transportation travel facilities at any time;
3. Must accommodate a U-lock-type lock to lock both the bicycle’s frame and tire to the bicycle rack; and
4. Must support the frame of the bicycle in at least two places and prevent the bicycle from tipping over.
D. When 10 or more short-term bicycle parking spaces are required, a minimum of 50 percent of the spaces must be covered.
E. With approval from the Director, required short-term bike parking may be installed in the public right-of-way, in accordance with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
F. The minimum number of off-street short-term bike parking spaces required is set forth in Table 18.604.040(A).
Table 18.604.040(A). Short-Term Bike Parking Requirements
(When requirement establishes multiple values, the greater number of spaces applies)
Land Use | Requirement |
|---|---|
Residential | |
Single-family detached, middle housing | None |
Senior housing, assisted living facilities, uses not listed | 1 per 20 units |
Multifamily in Tier 1 | 1 per 20 units |
Multifamily in Tier 2 | None |
Commercial | |
Office, research and development, or uses not listed | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 40,000 sq ft |
Child care/day care | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 20,000 sq ft |
Retail, eating and drinking, personal services | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 2,000 sq ft |
Lodging | Minimum 2 spaces per building |
Entertainment | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 1,000 sq ft |
Industrial | |
Manufacturing or production | None |
Warehouse and freight movement | None |
Civic, Cultural Facilities | |
Nonassembly; or uses not listed | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 40,000 sq ft |
Assembly | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 1,000 sq ft |
Elementary through high school | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 10,000 sq ft |
University or vocational schools | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 10,000 sq ft |
Recreation | Minimum 2 spaces; or 1 per 20 auto spaces that serve the recreation space |
(Ord. 3100 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3093 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. Long-term bicycle parking is for bicycles parked four or more hours.
B. Long-term bicycle parking must provide a safe, accessible, and secure location that directly serves the use activities generating the bike parking demand, and must meet the following criteria:
1. The parking area must be provided in secure room or enclosed area with a locked gate with limited access for only the users securing a bicycle.
2. The parking area must be located in one of the following secure locations:
a. Within 50 feet of an attendant or security guard;
b. Within the field of view of security system and within 100 feet of a building’s primary entrance;
c. Located in an area visible from employee work areas, or
d. Located in an area visible from residential communal areas or living spaces.
3. The parking must accommodate a U-lock-type lock to secure both the bicycle’s frame and one wheel to the bicycle rack;
4. Access to power source for charging electric bicycles must be provided in accordance with Table 18.604.050(B);
C. Bicycle parking located inside a dwelling unit is not counted toward long-term bicycle parking space requirements for residential uses.
D. When 10 or more long-term bicycle parking spaces are required, 100 percent of the spaces must be covered.
E. The minimum number of long-term bike parking spaces required is set forth in Table 18.604.050(A).
F. In Tier 1 nonresidential areas, showers and lockers for cyclists must be provided and located near the long-term bike parking area in accordance with Table 18.604.050(B).
Table 18.604.050(A). Long-Term Bike Parking Requirements
(When requirement establishes multiple venues, the greater number of spaces applies)
Land Use | Requirement |
|---|---|
Residential | |
Single-family detached and attached, middle housing | None |
Multifamily in Tier 1 | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per unit |
Multifamily in Tier 2 | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 20 units |
Assisted living facilities, uses not listed | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 20 units |
Commercial | |
Office, research, or uses not listed | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 40,000 sq ft |
Child care/day care | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 4,000 sq ft |
Retail, eating and drinking, personal services | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 12,000 sq ft |
Lodging | Minimum 2 spaces per building, or 1 per 20 rental rooms |
Entertainment | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 12,000 sq ft |
Commercial outdoor recreation | 1 per 20 vehicle parking spaces |
Industrial | |
Manufacturing or production | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 15,000 sq ft |
Warehouse and freight movement | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 40,000 sq ft |
Civic, Cultural Facilities | |
Nonassembly; or uses not listed | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 12,000 sq ft |
Assembly | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 12,000 sq ft |
Elementary through high school | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 1,000 sq ft |
University or vocational schools | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 1,000 sq ft |
Recreation | None |
Table 18.604.050(B). Minimum Required Supporting Facilities for Long-Term Bicycle Parking
Land Use | Requirement |
|---|---|
Office | 2 showers per 50,000 sq ft |
Office | 1 locker per long-term bike rack required; 50,000 sq ft and greater |
Office | 1 power outlet per two long-term bike racks; 50,000 sq ft and greater |
(Ord. 3100 § 2 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3093 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. Installation. All bicycle racks must be installed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and meet the following criteria:
1. Racks must be securely fastened.
a. For sturdy surface locations, bicycle racks must be secured on concrete, pavers, or asphalt surfaces.
b. For soft surface locations, bicycle racks must be secured with in-ground mounting with concrete footings.
2. The fasteners must be tamper-resistant.
3. Short-term bicycle parking installations must comply with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
B. Rack Materials. Bicycle rack materials must be made of carbon steel or stainless steel with a coating that minimizes damage to bicycles secured to the rack. The rack coatings must include:
1. Powder coatings (TGIC or similar); or
2. Thermoplastic.
C. Types of Rack. Bicycle racks must only use the following rack types:
1. Inverted U or staple;
2. Rack cradles;
3. Wall-mounted; or
4. Corrals.
D. Spacing Requirements. All bicycle parking must not encroach on any walkway area, bicycle facility travel lane, or motorized vehicle travel lanes at any time. The minimum footprint for a single occupant bicycle is six feet long and two feet wide and six feet long and four feet wide for cargo bikes.
E. Street Installations. All bicycle parking installed on a street must comply with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. Use of Parking. Parking spaces must provide vehicle parking only for residents, customers, patrons, visitors, and employees. Area devoted to parking may not be used for any other purpose, except as authorized by this Code. Except in designated areas, required parking shall not be used for:
1. The storage of motorized vehicles, recreational vehicles, boats, or other materials; or
2. The sale, repair, or servicing of any vehicle.
B. Location.
1. All uses: Except as provided within Chapter 18.604 IMC, all parking shall be provided as off-street parking. Parking shall not be located in areas so that vehicles extend over sidewalks, vegetation or other obstructions or provided in any required landscape planting area unless otherwise allowed by Chapter 18.606 IMC, Landscaping.
2. Single-family and middle housing: Required parking must be on site.
3. Multifamily: On-site parking is not permitted in the side or rear setback of a multifamily development when the parking would abut a single-family district. In other cases, on-site parking for multifamily development is allowed in the rear and side setback.
4. Other uses: Parking must be provided on site or when utilizing IMC 18.604.160, Flexible parking tools, within 800 feet of the building or use for which the parking area is required.
C. Barrier-Free Spaces. Parking and access must be barrier free and provided in accordance with the Building Code.
D. Permit Required. Parking or loading spaces shall not be created, constructed, located, relocated, or modified after the effective date of these provisions without first obtaining a Level 1 independent technical document review in accordance in accordance IMC 18.204.060, Technical document review. If ADA stalls or accessible routes are altered, a building permit is required.
E. Accessory Uses. Parking and loading spaces that are not primary uses are considered accessory uses and are subject to the same procedures and review requirements as primary uses.
F. Unlawful Elimination. Parking and loading facilities must not be eliminated or reduced without the establishment of alternative parking or loading facilities which meet the requirements of this Code.
G. Change in Use. When a change of use is proposed, required parking and loading facilities must be provided according to this chapter. If the proposed use requires more parking or loading than the previous use, the applicant must construct the required parking and/or loading stalls prior to occupancy.
H. Substantial Remodels or Additions. The provisions of this chapter are applicable to substantial remodels or additions that expand the gross floor area of the use by 10 percent or greater. Remodels or additions to single-family units do not require additional parking spaces; however, the site plan must be consistent with the other parking standards.
I. Middle Housing and Co-Living Transit Access. Residential lots containing middle housing and co-living units within one-half-mile walking distance from a major transit stop, measured along continuous pedestrian routes not geographically interrupted by features such as steep slopes, major arterials and highways with no pedestrian crossings, are exempt from off-street parking requirements.
J. Tree Retention Exemption for Required Residential Parking. Off-street parking as a condition of permitting a residential project will not be required if the applicant demonstrates that compliance with tree retention policies outlined in IMC 18.812.070, Minimum tree retention requirements, would otherwise make a proposed residential development or redevelopment infeasible.
A determination of infeasibility shall be made by the City during the project permit application review process, and shall be based on site-specific conditions, required submittals, and applicable City standards. To qualify for this exemption, the applicant must clearly demonstrate that the application of tree retention policies would otherwise make the proposed residential development or redevelopment infeasible by meeting one or more of the following criteria:
1. Compliance with tree retention requirements would necessitate the placement of some or all off-street parking in a parking structure due to insufficient available space caused by tree retention.
2. Tree retention constraints result in no viable location for required off-street parking due to tree retention constraints, and no feasible alternatives exist, such as parking agreements or other flexibility mechanisms provided in the code. (Ord. 3106 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3104 § 3 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3093 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. Amount Required. The numbers of required parking spaces are listed by use in Table 18.604.080(A).
Table 18.604.080(A). Table of Off-Street Parking Standards
Land Use | Tier I | Tier II | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
Minimum | Maximum | Minimum | Maximum | |
RESIDENTIAL | ||||
General Residential | ||||
Single-family attached | 1 per unit | 1 per unit or 1 tandem space with a 2-vehicle capacity | 1 per unit | 1 per unit or 1 tandem space with a 2-vehicle capacity |
Single-family detached (for lots less than 6,000 square feet) | 1 per unit | 4 per unit | 1 per unit | 4 per unit |
Single-family detached (for lots greater than 6,000 square feet), cottage housing | 2 per unit | N/A | 2 per unit | N/A |
Co-living | 0.25 per unit | 0.25 per unit | 0.25 per unit | 0.25 per unit |
Middle housing (excluding cottage housing) for lots less than 6,000 square feet | 1 per unit | N/A | 1 per unit | N/A |
Middle housing (excluding cottage housing) for lots greater than 6,000 square feet | 2 per unit | N/A | 2 per unit | N/A |
Multifamily and live/work | 0.75 per unit | 2 per unit | 1 per unit | 2 per unit |
Senior housing, bonus density units (See IMC 18.500.060(B)(1)) | 0.5 per each unit above allowed base + one space per employee at peak times | 2 per unit | 0.5 per each unit above allowed base + one space per employee at peak times | 2 per unit |
Assisted living facility | 0.4 per unit | 0.75 per unit | 0.4 per unit | 0.75 per unit |
Accessory Residential, as listed below | ||||
Accessory dwelling unit | No min | 1 per unit | No min | 1 per unit |
COMMERCIAL | ||||
Office, professional or corporate | 1.63 per 1,000 GFA | 1.95 per 1,000 GFA | 1 per 300 GFA | No max |
Day care | No min | 2.45 per 1,000 GFA | 2.45 per 1,000 GFA | 3.57 per 1,000 GFA |
General Service, as listed below | ||||
Automotive fuel station | No min | 1 per 2,000 GFA + Required parking for other on-site land uses (if any) | No min | 1 per 2,000 GFA + Required parking for other on-site land uses (if any) |
Car wash | 1 per 2,000 GFA + Required parking for other on-site land uses (if any) | No max | 1 per 2,000 GFA + Required parking for other on-site land uses (if any) | No max |
Vehicular service, maintenance, or repair shops | 1.69 per 1,000 GFA | 3.36 per 1,000 GFA | 1.69 per 1,000 GFA | 3.36 per 1,000 GFA |
Medical | ||||
Hospital | 1 per 500 GFA | No max | 2.25 per 1,000 GFA | No max |
Clinic | 3.89 per 1,000 GFA | No max | 3.89 per 1,000 GFA | No max |
Office | No min | 1 per 200 GFA | 1 per 200 GFA | No max |
Overnight Lodging, as listed below | ||||
Hotel | No min | 0.74 per rentable room | 0.74 per rentable room | 0.96 per rentable room |
Bed and breakfast | 1 per rentable unit | No max | 1 per rentable unit | No max |
Personal service | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 250 GFA | 1 per 200 GFA | No max |
Recreation, Indoor | ||||
Bowling alley | 1 per 500 GFA | No max | 1 per 500 GFA | No max |
Theater, live and movie | 1 per 500 GFA | No max | 1 per 500 GFA | No max |
Restaurant/bar, food, beverage | 1 per 500 GFA | 4.72 per 500 GFA | 1 per 100 GFA | No max |
Retail Sales | ||||
< 3,999 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 200 GFA | 1 per 200 GFA | No max |
4,000 – 29,999 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 250 GFA | 1 per 200 GFA | No max |
> 30,000 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 250 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | No max |
INDUSTRIAL | ||||
Heavy industrial | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | No max |
Light industrial | 0.5 per 1,000 GFA | 0.65 per 1,000 GFA | 0.65 per 1,000 GFA | 1.06 per 1,000 GFA |
Research and development | 1 per 1,500 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 2.58 per 1,000 GFA |
Self-storage service | 0.1 per 1,000 GFA | 0.17 per 1,000 GFA | 0.1 per 1,000 GFA | 0.17 per 1,000 GFA |
Warehouse and distribution | 0.39 per 1,000 GFA | 0.61 per 1,000 GFA | 0.39 per 1,000 GFA | 0.61 per 1,000 GFA |
Waste-related service | 1 per 2,000 GFA | 1.9 per 1,000 GFA | 1.9 per 1,000 GFA | 3.13 per 1,000 GFA |
PUBLIC, INSTITUTIONAL, AND OPEN SPACE | ||||
Agriculture | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 250 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | No max |
Civic uses, except as listed below | 1 per 500 GFA | 1.5 per 500 GFA | 1 per 300 GFA | No max |
Government facility: fire/police station; maintenance site | 1 per 500 GFA | 1.5 per 500 GFA | 1 per 300 GFA | No max |
Essential public facilities | 1 per 500 GFA | 1.5 per 500 GFA | 1 per 300 GFA | No max |
Parks, plazas, open spaces, and natural areas except as listed below | No min | No max | No min | 1.7 per acre |
Trailhead | No min | Determination by Parks Director | Determination by Parks Director | Determination by Parks Director |
Stadium/arena/amphitheater, sports fields | No min | 1 space per 4 seats + 1 per 100 GFA assembly area not containing seats | 1 space per 3 seats | No max |
Schools, public and private | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 300 GFA | 1 per 400 GFA | No max |
NONRESIDENTIAL ACCESSORY | ||||
Heliport, helipad, helistop | No min | 1.5 space per 100 GFA of terminal/passenger areas | 1 space per 100 GFA of terminal/passenger areas | No max |
(Ord. 3100 § 3 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3093 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to provide electric vehicle charging infrastructure for off-street parking spaces.
B. Standards. Electric vehicle charging infrastructure must be provided for new and substantial improvements or additions, new surface parking lots (not gravel), and new parking garages as follows:
1. Electric vehicle infrastructure must be provided according to Tables 18.604.090(A) and 18.604.090(B). For developments that have mixed residential and nonresidential uses, parking associated with residential uses must meet the requirements of Table 18.604.090(A), and parking associated with nonresidential uses must meet the requirements of Table 18.604.090(B). Projects must meet the number of electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) parking spaces, the number of electric vehicle ready (EV-ready) parking spaces, and the number of electric vehicle capable (EV-capable) parking spaces.
2. Exception for On-Site Parking With Less Than 10 Spaces. Except for Group A, Group E, and Group M occupancies, on-site parking with less than 10 parking spaces shall not be required to comply with subsection B of this section.
3. Group A, Group E, and Group M occupancies shall comply with one of the following, whichever is greater:
a. The provisions of subsection B of this section shall apply only to designated employee parking spaces.
b. One of each 200 parking spaces or fraction thereof shall be EV ready. One of each 200 parking spaces or fraction thereof shall be an EV charging station.
Table 18.604.090(A). Residential Electric Vehicle (EV) Charging Infrastructure
Use | Number of EVSE Parking Spaces | Number of EV-Ready Parking Spaces | Number of EV-Capable Parking Spaces |
|---|---|---|---|
New residential buildings that do not contain more than two dwelling units | None | 1 per dwelling unit | None |
All other new residential buildings (Group R occupancies) | 10% of total parking spaces | 30% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces |
Existing multifamily buildings undergoing substantial improvement (R-1, R-2, and I-2 occupancies) | 10% of total parking spaces | 20% of total parking spaces | None |
Table 18.604.090(B). Nonresidential Electric Vehicle (EV) Charging Infrastructure
Use | Number of EVSE Parking Spaces | Number of EV-Ready Parking Spaces | Number of EV-Capable Parking Spaces |
|---|---|---|---|
New nonresidential buildings (Group A, B, E, F, H, I, M, and S occupancies) | 10% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces |
Existing nonresidential buildings (Group A, B, E, F, H, I, M, and S occupancies) undergoing substantial improvement | 5% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces | None |
New surface parking lots (not gravel) and parking garage uses | 10% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces |
4. When EVSE or EV-ready parking spaces are required, 10 percent of the accessible parking spaces, rounded to the next whole number, shall be EVSE. Additional 10 percent of the accessible parking spaces, rounded to the next whole number, shall be EV ready. No fewer than one for each type of EV charging system shall be accessible. The electric vehicle charging infrastructure may also serve adjacent parking spaces not designated as accessible parking. A maximum of 10 percent of the accessible parking spaces, rounded to the next whole number, is allowed to be included in the total number of electric vehicle parking spaces required.
5. Nothing in this section shall be construed to modify the minimum number of off-street motor vehicle parking spaces required for specific uses or the maximum number of parking spaces allowed, as set forth in this chapter.
6. All EVSE parking spaces must have designated signage and pavement markings per RCW 46.08.185.
7. All EV charging infrastructure must be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). For EV-ready parking spaces, the branch circuit must be identified as “Electric Vehicle Ready” in the service panel or subpanel directory, and the termination location must be marked as “Electric Vehicle Ready.”
8. Projects that fully or partially include affordable housing units at or below 80 percent AMI must meet 100 percent of the requirement for EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable in the project; however, the provision of EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable in the project associated with defined affordable housing must be cost neutral. To achieve cost neutrality, the applicant must demonstrate how cost neutrality has been calculated in an objective and typical industry methodology and that any changes to existing standards to achieve cost neutrality are the minimum necessary. A method to achieve cost neutrality may include reduction in the minimum required parking (supported by a parking study as allowed by this Code).
9. If the above action does not result in cost neutrality, then, alternatively or additionally, the applicant may propose:
a. Reduction in the amount of required parking lot landscaping.
b. Any combination of the above that ensures the provision of EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable infrastructure associated with affordable units is cost neutral.
10. In no case may the provision of EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable stalls associated with affordable housing units drop below 50 percent of the required EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable infrastructure.
11. Exception for Co-Living and Middle Housing. Off-street EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable parking shall not be required as a condition of permitting development of middle housing within one-half mile distance of a major transit stop, per RCW 36.70A.635(6)(d). (Ord. 3106 §§ 2 – 4 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3100 § 4, 2025; Ord. 3093 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. All nonresidential uses containing 20 or more vehicular parking spaces and residential developments of six or more dwellings must provide parking spaces for motorcycles, scooters, and similar motorized vehicles.
B. Parking spaces must be provided at one per 36 of the required automobile spaces with at least one space provided for uses meeting the threshold in subsection A of this section.
C. Nonresidential uses such as warehouses, storage facilities, and automobile services may seek a deviation to be exempt from this section requirements.
D. Motorcycle or scooter drive aisles must also comply with the adjacent automobile drive aisle dimensions in accordance with Figure 18.604.170(A), Vehicle Parking Stall Size and Configuration.
1. Motorcycle or scooter spaces must be located according to the same criteria and standards that are applicable to compact parking spaces. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to provide adequate room for off-street loading and unloading of commercial vehicles associated with the proposed development. Whenever normal operation of any development requires that goods, merchandise, or equipment be routinely delivered to or shipped from that development, a sufficient loading and unloading area must be provided to accommodate delivery or shipment operations safely and conveniently.
B. Quantity of Loading Space.
1. The minimum number of off-street loading spaces required for a specific use is set forth in Table 18.604.110(A).
2. When a lot contains more than one business establishment, the square footage of the business establishments within the same category must be added together in order to determine the number of required off-street loading spaces.
C. Standards for Loading Spaces.
1. Width. Each off-street loading space must not be less than 10 feet in width.
2. Overhang. All buildings with overhangs that project over off-street loading spaces must have a vertical overhang clearance of not less than 14 feet.
3. Length. Each off-street loading space for a high-demand use must be a minimum of 35 feet in length, unless provided otherwise in Table 18.604.110(A).
4. Location. All off-street loading spaces must be located on site.
D. Change Current Use. When a change of use is proposed for an existing structure, required off-street loading for the new use must be provided according to the off-street loading standards within this section.
E. Other Parking Requirements. No area allocated to required off-street loading and unloading facilities may be used to satisfy other parking requirements, nor may any portion of any other parking requirements be used to satisfy the area required for off-street loading and unloading facilities, except for the maneuvering and circulation portions of such areas.
F. Signage and Hours. Off-street loading areas must be signed and hours of use must be established.
G. Maneuvering Space. All required off-street loading facilities must be designed such that vehicles engaging in loading or unloading activities do not encroach upon or interfere with the right-of-way or public use of transportation facilities.
Table 18.604.110(A). Off-Street Loading Space Standards
Land Use | Minimum Requirement |
|---|---|
Residential | |
Multifamily (< 40 units) | 1 space |
Multifamily (≥ 40 units) | 2 spaces |
Commercial | |
Office, research, or uses not listed | 1 space per 30,000 GFA |
Retail, eating and drinking, personal services | 1 space per 10,000 GFA |
Lodging | 1 space per 40 rental rooms |
Entertainment | 1 space per 10,000 GFA |
Commercial outdoor recreation | 1 space per 30,000 GFA |
Civic | |
Nonassembly; or uses not listed | 1 space per 30,000 GFA |
Assembly | 1 space per 30,000 GFA |
Elementary through high school | 1 space per 20,000 GFA |
University or vocational schools | 1 space per 20,000 GFA |
Recreation | 1 loading space per 20 auto parking spaces that serve the space |
(Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to provide safe and sufficient parking and stacking space to support drive-through facilities so they do not encroach on public streets, sidewalks, or private parking and circulation areas.
B. Design. Required stacking space shall measure eight feet by 20 feet with direct forward access to a service window of a drive-through facility. Individual spaces within the lane may not be delineated with pavement markings. Stacking lanes shall not block on-site pedestrian routes or encroach on the public right-of-way.
C. Requirements. Uses providing drive-through services must provide vehicle stacking spaces in accordance with Table 18.604.120(A).
Table 18.604.120(A). Required Stacking Spaces for Drive-Through Window Facilities
Drive-through use | 1 window | 2 windows | 3 or more windows |
|---|---|---|---|
Drive-through food/beverage service | 5 stacking spaces | 4 stacking spaces per window | 3 stacking spaces per window |
Drive-through bank/financial institution, business service, or other drive-through use not listed | 4 stacking spaces | 3 stacking spaces per window | 2 stacking spaces per window |
D. Parking Credit. Credit towards minimum parking requirements must be given for each drive-through station. One-third parking credit must be given for each stacking space.
E. Other Parking Lot Standards. The drive-through facility must meet all other parking lot requirements including, but not limited to, location requirements, landscape screening, lighting, signage, and design standards. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of temporary parking is to provide parking for a temporary use with a limited purpose and time and to minimize impacts of the temporary use on surrounding land uses.
B. Requirements for Construction.
1. Temporary areas for equipment staging and mobilization and for construction worker parking must be provided.
2. A temporary gravel or unimproved parking or staging area requires a use permit in accordance with Chapter 5.14 IMC, Special Event/Special Use Permit.
3. Temporary parking and staging areas must have a setback of 20 feet from existing streets, and no gravel placement is allowed within 20 feet of the existing streets.
4. Temporary parking and staging areas shall also comply with all applicable National Fire Protection Association standards.
C. Requirements for Temporary Businesses. Parking stalls on private property may be used temporarily for conducting temporary business. The Department will determine if a permit is required.
D. Parking for temporary businesses such as produce stands, outdoor vendors such as espresso carts, food carts and trucks, and Christmas tree stands must be approved through the special event permit in accordance with Chapter 5.14 IMC, Special Event/Special Use Permit.
1. Parking stalls on privately owned transportation facilities and parking lots may be used temporarily for conducting temporary businesses in accordance with the following criteria:
a. The use does not create a hazard;
b. The use does not displace needed parking for the primary use; and
c. The use is allowed by the property owner following the appropriate permit process. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of the transportation management plan (TMP) is to promote the use of transportation alternatives which lessen traffic congestion, lessen the impact on the City’s air quality, and use the City’s existing infrastructure more efficiently.
B. A TMP is a contract between the City and a property owner, manager, or an employer stating that the property owner, manager, or employer will provide the following to residents, employees, and other users of a property:
1. Education on alternative modes of travel;
2. Opportunities to use alternative modes of travel; and
3. Incentives for ride sharing, carpooling, and using transit, bicycling and walking as a substitute for automobile travel.
C. The TMP must address the responsibility of the property owner, manager, or employer(s) for monitoring the success of the TMP and reporting the annual results to the City.
D. Requirement. A TMP is required for individual projects, pursuant to the City’s adopted transportation management regulations. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. Intent. This section establishes standards for outdoor residential uses, storage and activities related to motor vehicles and nonmotorized vehicles. These standards are intended to protect property values by reducing visual blight, aid in emergency access and fire safety, guard against the creation of rodent and pest harborage, and reduce the impact on the natural environment from the leaking of motor vehicle fluids.
B. Recreational Vehicle, Utility Vehicles, Trailers, and Boats in ROW. It is unlawful for any person to park and/or permit any other person to park a recreational or utility vehicle, boat or trailer in the public right-of-way or in a manner that obstructs visibility from adjacent driveways or street corners.
C. Disabled or Unlicensed Vehicles and Boats. It is unlawful for any person to keep, store or park, or to permit any other person to keep, store or park, any disabled vehicle or boat, or unlicensed vehicle or boat, on any privately owned residential property within the City unless that vehicle or boat is stored and parked outside public view within a fully enclosed building at all times. Auto or boat repair shops may have disabled licensed vehicles or boats on the premises which are being repaired, but these vehicles or boats shall not be parked clearly within public view or in the right-of-way. Vehicles are considered disabled when they are incapable of being operated or have not been operated or repaired for over 30 days, including automotive parts, whether assembled or not.
D. Appearance. All vehicles and boats kept on site must be operational, currently registered and licensed, and maintained in a clean, well-kept condition which does not detract from the appearance of the surrounding area.
E. Vehicles, Boats, and Trailers in Residential Areas.
1. Commercial. It is unlawful for any person to park or store commercial vehicles in residential areas. This provision does not apply to temporary parking for delivery, pick up, moving, or service activities. For the purpose of this section, a “commercial vehicle” is defined as any vehicle types defined within Classes 4 through 13 of the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA)’s standardized vehicle classification system.
2. Recreational Vehicles, Boats, and Trailers. Recreational vehicles, travel trailers, campers, motor homes boats, boat trailers, flatbed trailers, hauling trailers, and similar vehicles may be parked on a residential property, as long as the vehicle complies with the provisions of this Code. The vehicle must be kept on a driveway or in a carport or garage. If the vehicle cannot be stored on a driveway or in a carport of garage due to size constraints, the vehicle must be parked off site. Canoes, kayaks, or other nonmotorized water craft are not required to be sight screened.
3. Motorized vehicles shall not park in the pervious surface areas of front or streetside setbacks of a residential use property unless such pervious surface is a driveway or is located under or within a carport or garage.
F. Vehicle as Dwelling Unit. It is unlawful for any person to use any recreational or utility vehicle parked or stored on private property as a permanent or temporary dwelling unit, except where explicitly permitted in campgrounds in accordance with IMC 18.402.020, Table of permitted uses; provided, however, temporary guests who travel in a recreational or utility vehicle may reside in the vehicle on the host’s premises on a temporary basis not to exceed 30 days in any 12-month period. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to provide tools for flexibility in the design, performance, and location of parking facilities. This section provides methods, incentives, and techniques to meet the following:
1. Decrease the reliance on motor vehicles;
2. Diminish the percentage of land dedicated to parking;
3. Reduce the amount of parking needed to support land uses while providing adequate parking;
4. Allow projects to adapt to market needs and changes in community priorities; and
5. Adopts progressive trends in parking technology and management.
B. The tools are applicable based on a project’s location within the City, with projects in Tier I allowed additional tools and flexibility for compact facilities which support urban densities and design.
C. Cap on Reductions. This Code allows for the combination of tools described in this chapter, provided the intent of the chapter is met. Reductions must be capped at a 40 percent from the minimum required parking, with the exception of subsection J of this section, Tandem Parking for Residential Uses, which is capped at a 50 percent reduction from the minimum required parking if requirements are met and subsection G of this section, Small Business Waiver, which waives all parking if requirements are met. Additionally, higher reduction in parking, beyond 40 percent, may be allowed for redevelopment of an existing legal nonconforming community service establishment that meets the goals and policies of the City’s human services strategic plan. Such a reduction shall be processed as a Level 2 review process and shall meet the following criteria:
1. A technical report analyzing multiple comparable land uses in a similar market area, such as transportation demand management, prepared by a traffic or parking professional that supports such reduction.
2. A transportation management plan (TMP) in accordance with IMC 18.604.140 is provided by the applicant and approved by the City, showing customer and employee vehicle parking measures that minimize potentially negative spillover impacts to neighboring businesses and residents as well as methods to reduce vehicle parking demand. The plan must show location of any off-site public and private parking proposed for the use. Additionally, the applicant shall provide a parking utilization study, prepared by a traffic or parking professional, of offsite parking spaces proposed for the project, documenting availability and mitigation measures that would be necessary to offset any negative parking or traffic-related effects to surrounding businesses and residents as a result of this project.
D. Parking Flexibility Tools by Tier. Table 18.604.160(A) establishes the permitting review levels and displays which parking flexibility tools are available Citywide versus which tools are only available in Tier 1 to support urban densities and design. Refer to Figure 18.604.020(A) for map of Tier 1 and Tier 2.
Table 18.604.160(A). Parking Flexibility Tools by Tier
Parking Tool | Availability for Use in: | Maximum Reduction | Review Level (IMC 18.204.020) | |
|---|---|---|---|---|
Tier I | Tier II | |||
Shared parking | Available | Available | 40% | Level 1 |
Transit access | Available | Not Available | 40% | |
Small business waiver | Available | Not available | All parking | |
On-street parking credit | Available | Available | 20% | |
Off-site parking | Available | Available | --NA-- | |
Tandem parking | Available | Available | 50% | |
TDM study | Available | Available | 40% | |
Delay of installation | Available | Available | --NA-- | |
Reserved parking | Available | Available | --NA-- | |
Electric vehicle charging provisions | Available | Not available | 10% | |
Parking district | Available | Not available | --NA-- | |
CBD credit | Available | Not available | 40% | |
E. Shared Parking.
1. The intent of shared parking is to efficiently use parking resources where the potential for shared parking with abutting land uses has been analyzed, to efficiently use parking facilities for more than one use, specifically uses whose prime hours of operation do not overlap, and to decrease the amount of parking provided for a specific use by sharing adjacent underutilized parking facilities.
2. Prime Hours of Operation.
a. Prime hours of operation are defined as the time span during which a use has its highest level of activity from employees, clients, customers, and/or other users.
b. Approval for the prime hours of operation must be reviewed and set as approved by the Director.
3. Spaces Required.
a. Nonoverlapping Prime Hours of Operation. Shared parking will only be permitted if prime hours of operation of the uses seeking to share parking do not overlap, or if the overlap is less than one-half hour. If the uses have nonoverlapping prime hours of operation, the property owner(s) must provide parking spaces equal to those required of the use with the greater of the individual parking requirements in accordance with Table 18.604.080(A).
b. Overlapping Prime Hours of Operation. If the uses have overlapping prime hours of operation, shared parking is not allowed.
c. The required number of spaces for shared parking may be reduced by a maximum of 40 percent of the total required parking stalls if the following criteria are met:
(1) A transportation demand management (TDM) study, in accordance with subsection L of this section, supports the estimated shared parking demand for the proposed uses; and
(2) Evidence from technical studies or manuals relating to the proposed mix of shared uses is provided.
4. Review for Shared Parking.
a. Existing Use. Shared parking may be approved by the Director for an existing use if it complies with the approval criteria for shared parking.
b. New Uses. Shared parking for new uses does not require a separate review process and may be approved within the site plan review process for the project.
5. Approval Criteria for Shared Parking. Shared parking may be approved if all of the following approval criteria are met:
a. The location of parking facilities must be within 800 feet and visible to the associated uses involved in the shared parking contract.
b. The location must be zoned to permit parking facilities outright, or through a specific site plan review process.
c. A convenient pedestrian connection must be provided between the uses and the shared parking facilities. This pedestrian connection must be designed as barrier-free and built with appropriate lighting and safety considerations consistent with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
d. The availability of parking for each use must be indicated by directional signs governed by Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.
6. Shared Parking Contract. A contract is required and must be executed by all the owners/operators of the shared parking and the City. The shared parking contract must:
a. Provide that the land comprising the required shared parking facilities shall not be encroached upon, used, sold, leased, or conveyed unless doing so will not impact the shared parking facilities or the contract is amended or terminated and adequate parking is provided for the uses;
b. Provide that the contract term must be for as long as any of the shared parking continues in existence;
c. Be recorded with the King County Recorder’s Office and be binding upon the heirs, successors, and assigns of the parties;
d. Indicate prime hours of operation for the uses sharing parking;
e. Assign maintenance provisions for the parking facilities and landscaping;
f. Designate potential times of overflow, and a parking plan which will be implemented in the event of overflow; and
g. Provide for parking enforcement at the subject locations.
7. Contract Amendments or Termination. Amendments to the contract or contract termination must be reviewed and approved through the Level 1 review process pursuant to Chapter 18.204 IMC.
F. Transit Access. Transit access parking reductions are available to projects with direct pedestrian and bicycling access to the frequent transit facilities.
1. To be eligible for this reduction, a project must meet the following criteria:
a. The primary pedestrian entrance to the building is within a quarter mile of the frequent transit facilities, measured along continuous pedestrian routes; and
b. The pedestrian routes are not geographically interrupted by features such as steep slopes or major arterials and highways with no pedestrian crossings.
2. Eligible projects may receive up to 20 percent reduction of required parking without a TDM study.
3. Required parking may be reduced by a maximum of 40 percent, with a TDM study, for eligible projects if all of the following measures are taken to enhance access to the transit facilities:
a. Generally continuous weather protection is provided for pedestrians on 75 percent of building frontage, not including crossings of vehicular routes;
b. Continuous, direct sidewalks or walks are provided;
c. Generally continuous street lighting and minimized and/or enhanced pedestrian crossings of vehicular routes are provided.
G. Small Business Waiver. A business with gross floor area (GFA) less than or equal to 3,000 square feet and that meets all the following criteria may request to have its parking requirement waived. A business with more than 3,000 GFA and that meets all the following criteria may receive a waiver for the first 3,000 GFA. The criteria are:
1. The business is located within an existing building (new development prohibited from consideration);
2. The business is located adjacent to a pedestrian facility;
3. The business is visible from a pedestrian facility; and
4. The business has its primary pedestrian access from a pedestrian facility; and
5. A TMP, in accordance with IMC 18.604.140, is provided by the applicant, and approved by the City, showing customer and employee vehicle parking measures that minimize potentially negative spillover impacts to neighboring businesses and residents. The plan must show off-site public and private parking locations as well as a method to reduce vehicle parking demand.
H. On-Street Parking Credit. Street level retail uses may count the on-street parking stalls within the right-of-way that are directly abutting the building space to help fulfill no more than 35 percent of the parking requirements.
I. Off-Site Parking. The minimum required parking may be provided by off-street parking within 800 feet of the development for which the parking is required.
J. Tandem Parking for Residential Uses. Tandem parking may be allowed for certain uses in order to provide for a more attractive streetscape and pedestrian-friendly environment by more efficiently using the land.
1. Approval Criteria for Residential Uses. Tandem parking may be permitted for up to 50 percent of the total residential parking requirement if all of the following criteria are met:
a. Each residential unit may have only one tandem parking stall (equaling no more than two parking spaces) for each dwelling unit or for each multifamily unit requiring two parking spaces;
b. Ingress and egress for the tandem parking stalls do not interfere with the safety of residents or adjacent property owners, and the functionality of adjacent parking;
c. The size of the tandem parking stalls must equal two standard stall dimensions (eight feet wide by 37.5 feet in overall length). Compact tandem stalls are not permitted;
d. Individual private residential garage door width must be a minimum of eight feet; and
e. Tandem garages in individual, private residences are permitted outright when they are greater than two standard stall dimensions, and when storage space is provided in the garage area for waste collection bins, unless the project has a shared collection area, and items which typically occupy garage space (e.g., bicycles and other gear).
2. Additional parking spaces may be required if the percentage of tandem parking spaces is increased beyond the standard stall percentage, as indicated in subsection (J)(2) of this section, so long as this additional parking does not negatively impact public safety. For example, a project with 10 units is required to have 20 parking spaces. If there are no more than five stalls in the tandem configuration, this complies. However, if seven stalls are in the tandem configuration, two stalls over the maximum. (One stall for each unit over five is considered available so only two stalls are above the maximum.) If two additional stalls are provided on site, then the project is in compliance, as indicated in Figure 18.604.160(J).
3. Tandem parking must not be used for the storage of boats, trailers, recreational vehicles, or materials.
Figure 18.604.160(J). Residential Tandem Parking Configuration

Note: White boxes represent available/unoccupied parking spaces within a tandem stall.
K. Tandem Parking for Retail and Commercial Uses.
1. Approval Criteria for Retail and Commercial Uses. Because of the need for individual occupants to coordinate parking on a large scale, tandem parking is permitted only for employees if all the following criteria are met:
a. No more than 25 tandem parking stalls (equaling 50 parking spaces) may be provided;
b. Parking spaces are assigned to all employees;
c. Tandem parking stalls must be of standard size with an overall tandem stall size of eight feet by 37.5 feet;
d. Adequate visitor parking is provided; and
e. Tandem parking must not be used for the storage of boats, trailers, recreational vehicles, or materials.
2. Exception for Retail, Commercial, and Vehicle Repair Shop Customers. Tandem parking is permitted for customers of retail, commercial, and vehicle repair shop uses if all of the following criteria are met during business hours:
a. Valet parking is provided for customers;
b. Tandem parking spaces for customers are available only for valet parking use;
c. The tandem parking can accommodate a minimum of two cars in a row; and
d. Retail and commercial approval criteria in subsections (K)(1)(c) through (K)(1)(e) of this section are met.
L. Transportation Demand Management (TDM) Study. A project may receive additional reductions in required parking with a TDM study looking at multiple comparable projects in the Pacific Northwest. The TDM study must be prepared by a traffic or parking professional selected jointly by the City and the applicant. Additional required parking reductions recommended by a TDM study may be approved if one or more of the following can be shown:
1. Demonstrable pedestrian, bicycle, or mass transit facilities provided to encourage and promote use by employees, residents, or customers which replaces automobile use;
2. Density of more than 12 dwelling units per acre;
3. Income restricted housing under 80 percent of average median income; and/or
4. Presence or provision of basic daily uses within 1,300 feet (i.e., one-quarter mile) such as grocery/corner store, drug store, and child care; and/or weekly uses such as bank, convenience store, restaurant, or theater.
M. Delayed Parking Installation. During land use or construction permit review, completion of the required parking improvements may be delayed due to project phasing, inclement weather, or poor soil conditions (example: settling of fill). Requests for such delays must be submitted in writing and must explain the reason for the request and an estimated completion date for the improvements. All approved delays must be bonded pursuant to the City’s estimate of the value of the delayed improvements.
1. Phasing. In the event the project is phased, the Director may apply additional conditions with related project permits to ensure each phase complies with this Code and any permit approvals, such as but not limited to access, fire circulation, parking, and landscaping requirements including site stabilization.
a. Phased Occupancy. In the event that a building is occupied in phases, only a portion of the required parking is necessary with each phase. The calculation must be based on the parking as calculated and/or modified by this chapter. All parking must be constructed and completed by final certificate of occupancy or final tenant improvement occupancy, whichever is later.
b. Maintenance. Prior to completing a project, interim landscape in required landscape areas must be provided to discourage invasive plants from being established. Routine maintenance of these areas must include removing invasive plants.
N. Reserved Parking. The intent of reserved parking is to provide less “paved and striped” parking. If the application provides documentation that indicates lower parking demand for the specific site or use, then reserved parking may be used for a specific time period. Reserved parking must provide all of the following:
1. A transportation management plan (TMP), in accordance with subsection L of this section, that indicates a currently lower parking demand than required in Table 18.604.080(A), and a time period for when the conversion to parking is deemed necessary.
2. Landscaping or other use of the land in lieu of the remaining parking which could be converted into “paved and striped” parking if site/use conditions change; and
3. Reserved Parking Contract. A contract is required and must be executed by all the owners/operators of the use and the City. The reserved parking contract must:
a. Provide that the land comprising the required reserved parking facilities must not be encroached upon, used, sold, leased, or conveyed unless doing so will not impact the reserved parking area or the contract is amended or terminated, and adequate parking is provided for the site/use;
b. Provide that the contract term must be for as long as any of the reserved uses continues in existence;
c. Assign maintenance provisions for the parking facilities and landscaping;
d. Designate potential times of overflow, and a parking plan which will be implemented in the event of overflow; and
e. Be recorded with the King County Recorder’s Office and be binding upon heirs, successors, and assigns of the parties.
4. Contract Amendments and Termination. Amendments to the contract or contract termination must be reviewed and approved through the Level 1 review process.
O. Electric Vehicle Charging Provisions. For every electric vehicle charging station provided, the required number of parking spaces may be reduced by an equivalent number, provided the total reduction does not exceed 10 percent of the total required parking spaces.
P. Parking District. One or more properties or developments may form a parking district. The parking district may account for some or all of the parking requirements within the district, including vehicular parking located in structures, surface lots, on-street parking, etc., and bicycle parking located in racks, lockers, rights-of-way, private access, etc. The parking district may use a combination of parking tools or other measures to fulfill the intent of this section.
1. The intent of parking districts is to:
a. Provide adequate vehicular and bicycle parking, as well as accessible bus stops, for uses within the parking district;
b. Shift from auto focused to a pedestrian-oriented and park-once philosophy;
c. Collaborate with King County and Sound Transit on transit stop locations, as well as bicycle facilities such as bike racks or a bike station, where a bicycling program could benefit the entire community;
d. Provide incentives to encourage a transition from surface parking to structured parking;
e. Share parking so it is used efficiently and space devoted to parking is minimized; and
f. Allow flexibility in the timing of parking construction, so that its construction can be efficient and related to construction phasing and demand for parking.
2. Wayfinding Signage. Parking districts must communicate the availability of parking for each use by directional signs governed by Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.
3. District Establishment. The Director may approve establishment of a parking district following the procedures outlined in Chapter 18.202 IMC, Applications.
a. Parking lots must be a maximum distance of 800 feet between lots.
b. The total requirement for all off-street parking must be the sum for all individual uses.
c. An agreement establishes a primary operator for the duration a district is established. If all parties agree to dissolve the district, the agreement must also define how all properties will comply with the original parking requirements for their uses.
Q. CBD Credit. Parking Reductions in the CBD Zoning District. Parking requirements for all uses located in the CBD zone may be reduced by as much as 40 percent as follows:
1. General Reduction. Parking requirements for all uses in the CBD zone may be reduced by 15 percent in order to encourage redevelopment and promote pedestrian systems.
2. Additional Reduction. An additional 25 percent of the required number of spaces for shared parking may be reduced in the CBD zone when the provisions of subsection E of this section, Shared Parking, are met.
3. Additional Olde Town Provision. The following provisions apply to the CBD zone and MF-H zone (along East Sunset Way only).
a. Change of Use. No additional parking is required for a change in use for an existing structure or the use of previously unused space within an existing structure.
b. Additions. Additional parking must be provided in accordance with this chapter for any structural addition only when it exceeds 10 percent of the original gross floor area of the building. (Ord. 3106 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of the off-street design standards and specifications is to provide safe, barrier-free access connecting parking areas to the specific uses they serve, permit accessibility to vehicles, including public safety vehicles, enhance urban form, and reduce surface parking as much as possible. The following standards and specifications apply to all parking required under this chapter.
B. Dimensions. Stall dimensions including standard, compact, micro, parallel, and motorcycle stall dimensions must be designed as shown in Figure 18.604.170(A).
1. Standard parking stalls may not exceed the standard dimensions. Any stalls with dimensions less than the standard stall in one or both directions, but no less than the compact stall size, are considered compact stalls. Any stalls with dimensions less than the compact stall in one or both directions, but no less than the micro stall size, are considered micro stalls. Stalls smaller than micro may be provided for motorcycles; however, they do not count toward meeting the required vehicle parking provisions. Multiple or combination stalls may be approved when considering improved access and usability.
C. Drive Aisle Widths. Drive aisle widths are linked to stall angle and stall lengths. Specified drive aisle widths are given in Figure 18.604.170(A). Drive aisle sizes and configurations are the maximums, except as follows:
1. Where stalls of various sizes are mixed along a drive aisle, the largest drive aisle width associated with the largest stall size present is required; and
2. The parking layout must continue the use of the larger drive where a drive aisle transitions from one stall size to another, structural columns placement, or similar situations.
D. Parallel Parking Stalls. Parallel parking stalls must be designed so that the doors of the vehicles do not encroach onto pedestrian walkways.
Figure 18.604.170(A). Vehicle Parking Stall Size and Configuration

Note: y is the bumper overhang.
E. Mix of Parking Stall Sizes. Required parking may choose the following mix:
1. Standard stalls: up to 100 percent of total required parking;
2. Compact stalls: up to 60 percent of total required parking;
3. Micro stalls: up to five percent of total required parking; and
4. Motorcycle stalls: required parking must be in accordance with IMC 18.604.100, Motorcycle and scooter parking.
F. General Stall Location.
1. Compact and micro stalls shall not impede fire lane access.
2. For single loaded parking: The stall length shall not impede two vehicle travel lanes that are a minimum of nine feet wide each, so the total fire lane width is equal to at least 38 feet.
3. For double loaded parking: Both stall lengths shall not impede the two vehicle travel lanes that are a minimum of nine feet wide each, so the total fire lane width is equal to at least 57 feet.
4. Parking spaces that are closest to the building’s entrances must not be compact spaces.
G. Driveways. Driveways must be designed and sized to prioritize pedestrian safety and access while maintaining functionality for vehicles.
1. The location and design of driveways must be in accordance with the City’s driveway construction standards in Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
H. Access. Access to parking facility vehicular driveways must occur in the priority of:
1. Alleys;
2. Driveways common with neighboring properties;
3. Secondary transportation facilities;
4. Access to primary transportation facilities.
I. Marking. The property owner must identify and mark required parking stalls, stall types, directional arrows and pedestrian crossings within parking areas using marking materials or other methods in accordance with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
J. Lighting and Signs. Parking structure walkways, elevators, stairs, and other forms of internal pedestrian circulation to public travel facilities must include signage in accordance with Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs, and lighting in accordance with Chapter 18.610 IMC, Outdoor Lighting.
K. Screening. Parking lots located along a street edge and the ground floor for parking structures must be screened by walls, hedges, or landscaped berms in accordance with IMC 18.606.080, Parking areas and highways – Landscape and decorative requirements.
L. Bumper Overhang. In order to prevent the collection of leaves and trash, a bumper overhang is preferred over wheelstops. Wheelstops shall only be used when required by the Americans with Disabilities Act or where the streetscape is curbless or consists of LID/rain gardens. Bumper overhangs must meet the following criteria:
1. Bumper overhang is generally assumed to be two feet; however, a larger or smaller overhang may actually exist depending on the angle and size of vehicles. The applicant may provide additional information on the actual configuration so the Director may determine if another overhang dimension would be appropriate with the proposed configuration.
2. Bumper overhang area may be used for walkway extension, alternative materials, landscaping, or rain garden. Unless wheelstops are used, the area shall not be asphalt. In any case, this area must be protected so that cars may not continue driving into this area.
3. Surface parking or nonparallel parking stalls that have low landscape or additional hardscape (by moving the curb) at the head of the stall may reduce the paved portion of the stall length by two feet as long as the vehicle can hang into the landscape or hardscape by two feet without reducing or impacting pedestrian walkway widths or the proposed landscape. Vehicle overhang must be indicated on all construction drawings using this technique.
M. Wheelstops. When wheelstops are provided, they must be positioned 18 inches into the parking stall. Wheelstops must not be used in conjunction with curbs. Wheelstops must ensure cars are contained within the parking lot and that cars do not overhang into areas not intended for parking such as walkways or planting areas.
N. Repair and Maintenance of Required Parking and Circulation Areas. The property owner must maintain in perpetuity all parking and circulation areas on the property in a safe, functional, and well-maintained condition that meets all applicable standards and project approvals.
O. Prior Installation of Required Parking. All parking improvements, including markings required by this section, must be installed prior to any change in the use of land or structures and prior to the occupancy of any new or enlarged structure.
P. Vehicle circulation for all parking areas on the site must be contained within the proposed parking area.
Figure 18.604.170(B). Vehicle Parking Layout for Turning Clearances, Parallel Parking, and Gravel Parking

Q. Appearance and Design. Parking lots must incorporate measures that break up the expanse of pavement, shade the surface, screen views of the parking lot from above and the sides and reduce the scale such as by locating the short dimension of the lot adjacent to the street. For surface lots, the narrow width of the parking lot, no wider than 65 feet, must be located adjacent to a transportation facility.
1. Surface Parking Lot Materials. Single-family residential uses are not required to pave and stripe their parking and circulation areas. Residential uses may use grass block pavers or turf-block pavers to meet minimum parking requirements. If residential uses choose to use hard-surfaced materials or other alternative materials, those materials must comply with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards. All other parking and circulation areas must be hard surfaced, consistent with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards. Gravel, turf-block, or other similar alternative surface may be permitted only if all of the following approval criteria are met:
a. Access to Right-of-Way. At least 20 feet of the initial vehicular entrance leading to all the rights-of-way are paved in order to minimize any dust, gravel or other material from being transported from the parking area to adjacent streets or alleys;
b. Character/Location. The alternative surface is an approved surface supporting the design characteristics of the use and/or the location; and
c. Maintenance. The alternative surface is maintained, as needed, by the property owner.
R. Sustainability. Surface parking lots must implement environmentally friendly elements such as pervious pavement, low-impact stormwater development (LID) elements such as rain gardens and other effective and innovative sustainability measures, in accordance with the stormwater master plan. (Ord. 3106 § 6 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to enhance form with parking structures and reduce surface parking lots, to connect parking areas to the specific uses they serve, and to permit accessibility to motorized vehicles. The following standards and specifications apply to all parking structures.
B. Structure Requirement. Structure parking is only required in Tier 1, in accordance with Figure 18.604.020(A).
C. New Development. Structure parking is required for all new nonresidential developments as provided in the following Tables 18.604.180(A) and 18.604.180(B).
Table 18.604.180(A). New Development – Required Parking to Be Provided in Structure
Use | Minimum Required Parking in Structure |
|---|---|
Office | 50% when > 5,000 GFA |
Retail/Service | 50% when > 25,000 GFA |
D. Vertical Mixed-Use Overlay. Structure parking is required for all new nonresidential developments within parcels abutting designated vertical mixed-use corridors as provided in the following Table 18.604.180(B).
Table 18.604.180(B). New Development – Required Parking to Be Provided in Structure
Use | Required in Structure |
|---|---|
Office | 90% when > 5,000 GFA |
Retail/Service | 90% when > 25,000 GFA |
E. Location. Structured parking facilities must be concealed within the site or located under or above or behind the street level of buildings.
F. Access. Access drives and ramps to parking and service areas must maintain clear sight lines and minimize interference at pedestrian and bicycle crossings. Vehicle driveway openings must be minimized along the street frontage by setting entrances and exits back from the primary plane of the façade; placed a minimum of 40 feet from street corners; and incorporate architectural treatment of the openings, art, and landscaping.
G. Wrap With Commercial. Where structured parking is provided on the ground level, commercial or residential uses must be provided along the build-to-line with parking facilities placed behind the uses and away from the transportation facility. The commercial or residential space must be a minimum depth of 20 feet.
H. Structured Parking Building Design. Structured parking must incorporate building design elements and must be architecturally integrated and designed in a similar fashion to associated or adjacent buildings.
I. Natural ventilation and daylight must be incorporated in parking structure design and installed to avoid glare or reflection of light. Lights must not be located where they may interfere with parking stalls, stacking areas, and ingress and egress to parking areas. Also see Chapter 18.610 IMC, Outdoor Lighting.
J. Rooftop Screening. Where the structure does not reach the maximum building height, the top level of open parking structures must be screened in accordance with IMC 18.606.090, Parking structure requirements. (Ord. 3106 §§ 7 – 9 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to establish regulations for nonconforming parking facilities. See also Chapter 18.214 IMC, Nonconforming Uses and Structures.
B. Resurfacing of Existing Residential Parking Spaces. Existing parking spaces for residential uses that do not conform to the requirements of this chapter and were established prior to June 6, 2024, are not required to be modified or resized, except to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act. Existing paved parking lots serving residential uses are not required to resize parking spaces during resurfacing.
C. Gravel-Surfaced Parking Spaces for Residential Uses. Existing legally nonconforming gravel-surfaced parking spaces for residential uses, established prior to June 6, 2024, shall count toward minimum parking requirements, up to a maximum of six spaces.
D. Demolition and Change of Use. Developments which had legal nonconforming parking facilities prior to the effective date of these provisions must become conforming when:
1. A structure is demolished; or
2. The use of the development is changed to a new use, except when an existing commercial or mixed-use building being converted into a residential development when the existing building received a certificate of occupancy at least three years prior to the permit application to add housing units.
E. Additions. If the basis for calculating required parking is increased, such as adding gross floor area, seats, units, or other measure, then required parking must be provided for the increased amount. (Ord. 3106 § 10 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3105 § 6 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
Landscape is an essential element of a great public realm and maintaining the character of Issaquah. The intent of this chapter is to require development that draws nature into the community. Adding green elements softens the urban form and provides transitions from natural edges to the built environment. These standards ensure a livable, verdant, attractive community by requiring well-designed green spaces that complement high-intensity urban uses and integrate landscaping design principles. Minimum requirements and standards are established to:
A. Protect and enhance the quality and function of the natural environment;
B. Create a public realm that helps to define the character and image of Issaquah;
C. Support a pedestrian- and bicycle-oriented environment;
D. Provide safety to pedestrian, bicycle, and vehicular traffic;
E. Promote wise and efficient use of water resources;
F. Protect water quality;
G. Ensure appropriate plant material selection and spacing for proposed locations and uses;
H. Encourage healthy, attractive year-round landscapes throughout Issaquah;
I. Require proper landscape maintenance practices to minimize landscape hazards;
J. Require retention of native vegetation and associated soils where appropriate;
K. Integrate landscaping within nature and the context of the built environment;
L. Soften development and hardscape spaces;
M. Establish lush, verdant landscaping as key focal points; and
N. Ensure plant and landscape materials are restorative and resilient to climate change through diverse native and drought-resistant species. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
The provisions of this chapter apply to:
A. New development;
B. Subdivision of property;
C. Any development or redevelopment located in, adjacent to, or affecting critical areas as defined in Chapter 18.802 IMC; and
D. Any redevelopment or project that results in an increase of 20 percent or more of impervious surface area on a property. (Ord. 3088 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. When the cost of an addition, alteration, or repair of any existing building or structure exceeds 50 percent of the value of the existing building or structure, landscaping must conform with the requirements of this chapter.
B. When the cost of an addition or alteration of gross floor area is 50 percent or less of the existing building or structure value, nonconforming landscaping must conform to the requirements of this chapter proportionately, which shall be no less than a percentage of required landscaping area and plantings equal to the percentage of increase in gross floor area.
1. Additional landscaping must be grouped into a single area with priority given to consistency with the required landscape types and visibility from a public street or other public area.
2. This landscaping must displace paving or other impervious material including one or more parking spaces in excess of required parking. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
The following project types are exempt from permitting and bonding requirements outlined in this chapter:
A. Single-family use lots with a detached single-family home;
B. Middle housing developments;
C. Accessory dwelling units; and
D. Small projects requiring the installation of five or fewer new trees or 1,000 square feet of landscaping. (Ord. 3091 § 11 (Exh. J), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The intent of these planting and vegetation standards is to ensure that plants are selected considering the surrounding context, enhancing and protecting Issaquah’s natural environment.
B. All planting areas must contain landscape, installed based on an approved plan.
C. Plant Standards. All plant materials used must meet the most recent American Association of Nurserymen Standards (ANSI Z60.1) for nursery stock.
D. All landscape and groundcover must be appropriately spaced by its respective type and plant size to provide total coverage of the landscape area within three years.
E. Plant Selection. All plants must be adapted to their sites, considering sun exposure, cold hardiness, moisture requirements, soil type, climate change, environmental stress, and soil pH. Plants with differing environmental/cultural requirements must not be used together unless desirable conditions can be provided for all plants.
1. New plant materials must consist of native or drought-tolerant varieties or nonnative species that have adapted to the climate conditions of the King County lowland environment. Appropriate locations and species must be selected to ensure plants will thrive, considering how the impacts of climate change can add undue stress to native plants in an urban environment. In some cases, native plants may need to be irrigated to survive.
a. Drought-tolerant and native plant species lists can be found in King County’s Native Plant Guide.
2. There must be a diversity of tree and shrub genus and species in the site landscaping and must contain 50 percent native trees per IMC 18.812.080, Replacement trees, and 30 percent native shrubs and groundcovers. No more than 50 percent may be of one species.
3. All plants must be selected taking into consideration the mature size of the plant and the space allowed for the plant to grow unobstructed. For example, large native conifers are not appropriate in densely built areas and narrow planter beds.
4. Plants must be selected that are appropriate for the provided space to minimize persistent pruning. Any class of noxious weeds, including nonregulated weeds and weeds of concern, per the King County Noxious Weed Control Board pursuant to the State Weed Control Law, Chapter 17.10 RCW, is not allowed.
5. A minimum of 10 percent of shrubs and groundcovers must be known to attract regional pollinator species.
6. Tree species must be selected from the City preferred and prohibited tree list.
F. Plant and Pot Sizes and Spacing. Standard plant sizes and spacing requirements for new landscape areas must follow the guidelines for selection and spacing based on the ultimate size and growth habits of the plants as defined in the ANSI Z60.1-2014 or the most recent edition of the guide. At a minimum:
1. Four-inch pots must be spaced 12 inches on center in a triangular planting arrangement.
2. One-gallon pots must be spaced 18 inches in a triangular planting arrangement.
3. Groundcovers spacing is dependent on the type and size of the plant material used. In existing woodlands, the spacing of groundcovers is allowed to be spaced apart.
G. Shrubs spacing is dependent on the type and size of the plant material used and must be adequate to provide total coverage of the landscape area within three years. At a minimum:
1. Low shrub: mature size under three feet tall. Minimum size at planting: one-gallon pot. If massing is the intent, spacing 18 inches on center or to cover in three years.
2. Medium shrub: mature size from three feet to six feet tall. Minimum size at planting: two-gallon pot. If massing is the intent, spacing 24 inches on center or to cover within three years.
3. Large shrub: mature size over six feet tall. Minimum size at planting: five-gallon pot or balled and burlapped equivalent. If massing is the intent, spacing three feet on center or to cover within three years.
H. Trees spacing is dependent on the type and size of the trees used and will depend on the landscape type that is required per the approved landscape plan. At a minimum:
1. Small tree: a tree with an ultimate height less than 30 feet under normal urban growing conditions. When planted, they must be no smaller than one-and-one-half-inch caliper, six to eight feet in height.
2. Medium tree: a tree with an ultimate height between 30 and 50 feet under normal urban growing conditions. When planted, they must be no smaller than two-inch caliper, 10 feet to 12 feet in height.
3. Large tree: a tree with an ultimate height over 50 feet under normal urban growing conditions. When planted, a deciduous tree must be no smaller than two-and-one-half-inch caliper, 12 feet to 14 feet in height.
4. Narrow tree: a tree with a maximum width less than 15 feet.
5. Coniferous tree: when planted, they must be seven-foot minimum height as measured per the ANSI Standards.
6. Multistemmed trees must be a minimum of five feet high when planted.
7. Street trees when planted must be sized according to Chapter 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation, and the preferred and prohibited tree list.
I. Artificial or synthetic turfs must comply with the best available science to ensure no toxic run-offs or adverse environmental impacts. For example, some turfs use 6PPD quinone or microplastics that have harmful effects to aquatic ecosystems.
J. Berms. If berms are used, they must be planted with trees, shrubs, and living groundcover and must be adequately planted to prevent erosion.
1. Berms planted with sod lawn must be no steeper than a 3:1 ratio.
2. Planted slopes with erosion control plants and groundcovers must be no steeper than a 2:1 ratio.
3. Any berms over 2:1 must have 100 percent biodegradable erosion control netting or matting installed in addition to the required plantings.
K. Pedestrian Pathways. Landscape material shall not be used for pedestrian pathways except between stepping stones or similar durable materials.
L. Landscaping Area Size Requirements.
1. Larger planting beds are more likely to be successful than small ones. Therefore, planting bed size must be as large as practical for each site. Shrub planting areas must be a minimum of 100 square feet with a minimum width of five feet.
2. All required tree planting areas must be:
a. A minimum width of five feet and provide a minimum soil volume of 1,200 CF. When adequate soil volumes are not achievable via planting strips, structural soils and tree soil cells must be used to increase soil volumes and connect root zones of planting under paving. If using structural soil, four times the volume is necessary to match that of tree soil cells in order to match usable soil amounts. If root zones are connected, soil volumes shared by multiple trees can be less than 1,200 CF per tree.
b. Tree wells must be a minimum of 24 square feet of open area; however, the use of continuous landscape beds or lawns is considered preferable to individual tree wells.
c. Island planting beds in parking lots or similar situations must have a minimum dimension of five feet between curbs.
d. Planting holes must be three times the diameter of the plant rootball and must be backfilled.
M. Tree and Vegetation Protection. The following standards intend to provide adequate protection of trees and the landscaping area:
1. Protective devices such as bollards, root guards, planter edger, boulders, etc., may be used.
2. Where vehicles may overhang into required landscaping areas, trees must be located such that they will not be damaged by vehicles pulling in and out of parking stalls. Permanent curbing must be provided in all landscaping areas within or abutting parking areas unless modifications are needed to accommodate stormwater infrastructure; other structural barriers may be substituted for curbing, such as concrete wheel stops.
3. Trees must be sized appropriately and not be placed in areas where they will require excessive pruning (greater than 25 percent of the canopy).
4. The property owner must not fill, excavate, stack, or store any equipment or compact the earth in any way within the area defined by the dripline of any tree to be retained.
N. The applicant shall not install impervious surface material within the area defined by the dripline of any trees to be retained unless specifically approved by the Director.
O. If the grade level around a tree to be retained is to be raised, the applicant must construct a wall or well around the tree. The diameter of this wall or well must be equal to the diameter of the tree’s dripline. See Chapter 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation, for allowable grade impacts within the critical root zone. (Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The following standards intend to preserve and enhance the City of Issaquah’s soils, working to ensure healthy vegetation and landscapes.
B. Soil Porosity. Soils in planting areas must have adequate porosity to allow root growth. Soils compacted to a density greater than 85 percent compaction must be loosened (ripped) to increase aeration to a minimum depth of 18 inches, or to the depth of the largest plant rootball, whichever is greater. After soil preparation is completed, motorized vehicles must be kept off the soil area to prevent excessive compaction and underground pipe damage.
C. Soil Amendments for New Landscape Areas. All new landscape areas are required to amend soils to improve soil health and nutrient availability, increase porosity, infiltration and moisture holding capacity and must meet the following minimum specifications for soils, compost, mulches, and seed mixes:
1. Subgrade must be a minimum of eight inches below finish grade. Substandard soils must be removed prior to adding amendments. Topsoil must be tilled into soils in four-inch lifts to prevent a distinct soil interface from forming.
2. A soils analysis must be completed for all new planting areas before and after any amendments and must include:
a. A determination of soil texture, indicating percentage of organic matter.
b. An approximated soil infiltration rate either measured or derived from soil/texture/infiltration rate tables.
c. A measure of pH value.
3. Soils for use in projects applying low-impact development (LID) standards must follow the LID Technical Guidance Manual for Puget Sound.
4. For soils that will not adequately percolate to provide proper drainage for plant materials, a correction plan must be developed by the landscape architect.
D. Waterwise Soil Amendments. The amendments are required for all landscape areas:
1. Plants having similar water use characteristics (hydrozones) must be grouped together.
2. Soil amendments may be necessary to produce a healthy growing medium, which will increase the survival rate for new planting and reduce ongoing maintenance requirements.
3. Water and nutrient holding materials must be incorporated into the soil as deep as possible, but no less than 12 inches. Fully composted organic material must be used.
E. Mulch Standards.
1. All mulched groundcover areas must have groundcover established, covering the area with growing plant material within three years. Mulch may not be used as a groundcover.
2. New planting areas shall be mulched to minimize evaporation, suppress weed growth and reduce erosion, using fully composted material.
3. Trees in lawn areas are required to have a mulched bed extending a minimum of 24 inches in all directions from the base of the tree.
4. Mulch shall not be placed against the tree trunk above the soil line.
5. All mulches used in planter beds must be weed-free and feathered to the base of the plants and kept at least six inches away from the crowns of shrubs or trunks of trees.
F. Native Soil Protection. The conservation and use of on-site native soil and vegetation for stormwater management is a central principle of LID design. For management of native vegetation and soil protection areas for LID design see the LID Technical Guidance Manual.
1. The duff layer and native topsoils must be retained in an undisturbed state to the maximum extent practicable. Any duff layer or topsoil removed during grading must be stockpiled on site in a designated, controlled area not adjacent to public resources and critical areas. The material must be reapplied to other portions of the site where feasible.
2. Areas that have been cleared and graded or subject to prior disturbance must be amended. Prior disturbance must include soil compaction or removal of some, or all, of the duff layer or underlying topsoil. Replaced topsoil must be a minimum of eight to 12 inches in depth, unless the applicant demonstrates that a different thickness will provide conditions equivalent to the soil moisture holding capacity native to the site. Replacement topsoil must have an organic content of 10 percent dry weight and a pH between 5.5 and 7.0. The intent of amending disturbed soils is to restore the moisture holding capacity of the original undisturbed native soil to the maximum extent practicable.
3. Native Vegetation Retention Areas. All projects with existing native vegetation areas must retain the following minimum of the native soil area:
a. Twenty-five percent for nonresidential uses and multifamily; and
b. Thirty percent for single-family residential uses.
4. This section does not apply to areas that would harm existing trees proposed for retention, or that, at project completion, are covered by an impervious surface, incorporated into a drainage facility, or engineered as structural fill or slope. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to protect and enhance environmental functions and integrity, while also protecting and promoting efficient use of water. A permanent, efficient irrigation system must be installed in all landscapes unless exempted pursuant to this section.
B. For projects that require a site development permit (see Chapter 18.208 IMC, Site Development Permits), irrigation systems must be designed to conserve water by using best available conservation technology and irrigation best management practices by using at least three of the following techniques:
1. Subsurface or drip irrigation;
2. Sprinkler head selection and spacing designed to minimize overspray;
3. Use of plants with similar water needs, soil moisture sensors and separate zones for turf and shrub hydrozones and microclimates to meet watering needs of different sections of the landscape;
4. A minimum of 25 percent of landscaped areas are designed with long-term irrigation from harvested rainwater, such as rain barrels or rain gardens;
5. Irrigation uses recycled water or greywater water; or
6. Other technology that reduces water uses equal to, or greater than, the options above, as demonstrated by the applicant.
C. Irrigation systems must include a rain and soil moisture sensor designed to shut off or override watering during rainfall events.
D. Deviations to the irrigation requirements, as approved per IMC 18.606.190, Allowed deviations to this chapter, may be made for:
1. Allowing lawns to brown during the summer (June through September) to reduce water consumption;
2. Approved xeriscape (low water usage) plantings;
3. Landscaping using drought-tolerant plants or established indigenous plant material;
4. Landscaping in conjunction with low-impact development stormwater systems or landscapes where natural appearance is acceptable or desirable to the City.
E. Irrigation systems must be designed to avoid runoff, low-head drainage, overspray, or other similar conditions where irrigation water flows onto adjacent property, nonirrigated area, or impervious surfaces by:
1. Considering soil type and infiltration rates;
2. Using proper irrigation equipment and schedules, including such features as repeat cycles, and matched precipitation and infiltration rates; and
3. Considering special problems posed by irrigation on slopes, in median strips, and in narrow hydrozones.
F. Landscape water features must use nonpotable water unless the water feature is designed to both minimize water loss and recirculate water used in operation.
G. Public irrigation systems must utilize a master control valve connected to a flow sensor and irrigation controller.
H. Irrigation systems in right-of-way medians, curb strips, parking lots or other landscape strips of less than five feet in width or turf-grass exceeding a slope of three horizontal feet to one vertical foot (3:1) must be served by a low-volume, subsurface irrigation system providing a distribution uniformity of not less than 0.90.
I. Irrigation systems must be designed with provisions for winterization by providing either:
1. Manual drains at all low points (automatic valves are not allowed); or
2. A method to blow out irrigation system pipes with pressurized air.
J. Irrigation systems must be maintained and inspected periodically to assure proper functioning, adjust scheduling and to meet irrigation water budget requirements. Replacement of components must be original specified parts or materials, or their equivalents.
K. Water tubes may also be added to the tree plantings to allow water to penetrate the soil. However, they must be removed after the trees have become fully established or after the maintenance bond period, whichever comes sooner. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. For certain areas in the City, land uses may be more or less intensive based on the activity and zoning designation. The intent of this section is to use landscaping to balance and separate uses for such zones and land uses where needed. In many cases, this is used for parking landscape standards. See Figure 18.606.070(A) for an example of the intended effect of these types.
Figure 18.606.070(A). Landscaping Types Visual Example

B. The landscape types apply to all parking land uses and zones regulated by landscape type.
C. Classification of Landscape Types.
1. The standards for types of plantings and landscaping are established in Figure 18.606.070(C), Types of Landscape Plantings:
Table 18.606.070(C). Types of Landscape Plantings
Type | Purpose | Tree Standards | Shrub Standards | Standards |
|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Year-round sight barrier | • Minimum 90% evergreen trees in three years. • Rows spaced an average of 30 feet on center depending on species with a minimum of four trees per 5,000 square feet. • A minimum of six to eight feet high for conifers and two-and-one-half-inch caliper for deciduous and evergreen broad-leaf trees when planted. | • Minimum 80% evergreen. • Large shrubs a minimum of five-gallon pot or balled and burlapped equivalent when planted. | • Where the required setback is greater than 10 feet, the 10 feet of the setback area adjacent to the property line must be landscaped. • Where the required setback is 10 feet or less, the entire setback area must be landscaped. • The landscaping must be a combination of large evergreen and deciduous material to provide a 90% sight-obscuring screen within three years, or a combination of approximately 70% evergreen trees backed by a 100% sight-obscuring fence softened or accented with landscaping. |
2 | Visual screen | • Minimum 50% evergreen. • Medium trees spaced an average of 25 to 30 feet on center depending on species, with a minimum of four trees per 5,000 square feet. • Minimum of six to eight feet for conifers and two-inch caliper for deciduous and evergreen broad-leaf trees when planted. | • Minimum 50% evergreen. • Triangulated rows: Medium shrubs spaced per IMC 18.606.040(G). • Minimum two-to-three-gallon pot or balled and burlapped equivalent when planted. | • Where the required setback is greater than 10 feet, the 10 feet of the setback area adjacent to the property line must be landscaped. • Where the required setback is 10 feet or less, the entire setback area must be landscaped. • The landscaping must be a combination of medium to large evergreen and deciduous material to provide a visual screen within three years and with shrubs and groundcover providing 100% coverage in three years, or a combination of approximately 30% evergreen trees backed by a 70% sight-obscuring fence softened or accented with landscaping. |
3 | Visual buffer | • Minimum 30% evergreen. • Small to medium trees spaced an average of 20 feet on center depending on species with a minimum of four trees per 5,000 square feet. • A minimum of six to eight feet for conifers and one-and-one-half-inch caliper for deciduous and evergreen broad-leaf trees when planted | • Minimum 30% evergreen. • Triangulated rows: Small shrubs spaced per IMC 18.606.040(G). • Minimum one gallon pot or balled and burlapped equivalent. | • Where the required setback is greater than 10 feet, the 10 feet of the setback area adjacent to the property line must be landscaped. • Where the required setback is 10 feet or less, the entire setback area must be landscaped. • The landscaping must be a combination of evergreen and deciduous material to provide a visual buffer within three years and with shrubs and groundcover providing 100% coverage in three years. |
D. Zones That Require Landscaping Along Lot Lines.
1. Table 18.606.070(D) does not apply for zones in Central Issaquah subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus.
2. Street frontage landscaping is not required along Front Street, unless buffering a parking area or mechanical equipment.
3. Where there is a conflict between the perimeter landscaping designation and landscaping buffers abutting less intense zoning districts in Table 18.606.070(D), the more intensive landscaping buffer type shall be used.
Table 18.606.070(D). Zones Requiring Lot Line Landscaping
Zone | Street Frontage | Perimeter | Landscaping Buffers Abutting Less Intense Zoning District | Notes |
|---|---|---|---|---|
C-Rec and TP-NRCA | Type 3 | Type 3 | NA | |
Community Facilities | Type 3 | Type 3 | NA | |
SF-E, SF-S, SF-SL, SF-D, C-Res | See Notes | NA | NA | See IMC 18.606.170 regarding street trees |
MUR, MF-M, MF-H | Type 3 See Notes | Type 3 | Type 2 All single-family zones, C-Rec, TP-NRCA | See IMC 18.606.170 regarding street trees |
Intensive Commercial (IC) | Type 2 See Notes | Type 2 | Type 1 (MFR, SFR, or CBD) | See IMC 18.606.170 regarding street trees |
(Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The purpose of landscaping or decorative elements in association with parking areas is to soften the visual appearance, reduce the impacts on pedestrians, screen views of parking, add shade, limit the amount of continuous impervious surface, and reinforce safe pedestrian access to buildings and connecting sidewalks.
B. The following parking landscape standards apply Citywide, except in Central Issaquah subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus:
1. Required Landscaping Type by Parking Size.
Table 18.606.080(B)(1). Required Landscaping Types by Parking Size
Standard Threshold | Street Frontage | Perimeter | Landscaping Buffers Abutting Less Intense Zoning District | Notes |
|---|---|---|---|---|
Parking > 25 required spaces | Type 1 | Type 2 | Type 1 | See IMC 18.606.080(C) for additional location standards. |
Parking < 25 required spaces | Type 2 | Type 2 | Type 1 | See IMC 18.606.080(C) for additional location standards. |
Parking structure | Type 1 | Type 2 | Type 1 | See IMC 18.606.090, Parking structure requirements. |
2. Street Frontage, Pedestrian Walkways and Parking Lots Near Sidewalks. Along street frontage and between pedestrian walkways and parking areas, a planting area along the right-of-way or pedestrian walkway, except for driveways, must be planted with a mixture of evergreen and deciduous trees based on the size of the parking lot as required for the identified landscape type identified in IMC 18.606.040, General requirements by landscape type.
3. Table 18.606.080(B)(2) defines planting requirements for parking areas.
Table 18.606.080(B)(2). Landscape Type and Quantity for Parking Areas Outside of Issaquah Subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus
Street Frontage | Perimeter Screening | Interior Layout | |
|---|---|---|---|
Parking: Greater than or equal to 25 required spaces | Type 1 landscaping of the planting strip with medium to large trees. | When parking lots are within 15 feet of a less intense zoning district, a six-foot-high wall is required with Type 2 screening of the wall. | 25 square feet of landscaping must be provided for every parking space. |
Parking: Less than 25 required spaces | Type 2 landscaping of the planting strip with medium trees. | When parking lots are within 15 feet of less intense zoning districts, a six-foot-high wall or evergreen hedge with shrubs spaced three feet on center is required. | 18 square feet of landscaping must be provided for every parking space. |
All parking lots | Frontage will be required to have a three-foot-high wall or solid evergreen hedge. | Visual access to meet CPTED standards will be allowed where necessary as determined by the Director. | Island widths must be a minimum of eight feet wide. |
4. Screening Wall. Parking lots along street edge must be screened by walls, hedges, landscaped berms, or a combination of these elements. Screen walls must consist of a solid three-foot-high evergreen hedge and/or fence with landscaping to soften the fence on the street side. Trellising with climbing vines above a solid wall may be substituted for the fencing.
5. Clustering. Clustering of landscaping is permitted to encourage larger planting areas for LID.
6. Planting and pruning of shrubs for hedges along street frontages must be adequate to allow the plants to fill in between shrubs to create a screen that reduces headlight glare to surrounding properties and streets.
7. Preservation of Tree Function (Shade). Landscape maintenance must allow the trees to reach a size and shape to provide the intended shading of the parking surface. The landscape plan must set a predetermined minimum height for trees. Once the desired height is reached, trees must not be pruned below that height. See landscape standards, tree pruning in IMC 18.606.150.
8. Landscape Islands/Strips.
a. Landscape islands or peninsulas within the parking lot must be a minimum of eight feet wide and the equivalent to the required parking stall length. The length is encouraged to be longer to aid in traffic calming.
b. Planting islands with trees must be located at the ends of each parking row and midway between the ends. A span of no more than 10 parking spaces must be allowed between planting islands (six if spaces are double backed). Planting islands located midway between the end islands may run perpendicular or parallel with the rows.
c. Tree grates are not encouraged, but, when used, must be designed so that sections of grate can be removed incrementally as the tree matures and must be designed to avoid accumulation of trash. See Figure 18.606.080(B)(8)(d) for two methods of providing tree wells in parking lots.
d. Decorative mulches or unit pavers may be used in areas of heavy foot traffic but shall not cover more than five percent of the required landscaping.
Figure 18.606.080(B)(8)(d). Two Methods of Providing Tree Wells in Parking Lots. (S: standard stall; C: compact stall)
![]() | ![]() |
9. Interior Landscape. Landscaping in the interior of parking lots is intended to diminish the effects of paving and shall consist of:
a. Landscape areas at the entries of buildings and between parking areas and buildings. These areas must be a minimum of five feet wide and may be clustered to accommodate pedestrian circulation and parking layout; and
b. One tree for every six parking spaces in parking lot interiors. Trees must be a minimum of 10 feet high and two-inch caliper when planted. The trees must be 100 percent large broad-leaf canopy trees.
C. Parking Landscape Standards for Central Issaquah Subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus.
1. Interior Landscape. Landscaping in the interior of parking lots is intended to diminish the effects of paving and shall meet the following requirements:
a. The total of all interior landscaped areas must equal or exceed 10 percent of the parking lot area;
b. A landscaped area must be provided at the end of parking aisles; and
c. The minimum width of landscape islands must be based on the plants installed in it, door swings, and adjacent uses. Landscape islands with trees must be a minimum of five feet between curbs.
2. Edge Landscape. Landscaping along parking lot edges abutting public rights-of-way, transportation facilities, or community spaces must be provided to create a pedestrian-friendly environment. Groundcover must be provided. Landscaping must also include one or both of the following:
a. Evergreen shrubs, at least two feet high at installation, to provide a continuous three-foot height hedge at maturity. These landscaped buffers for parking lot areas must have a minimum width of three feet; and
b. Three-foot-tall fencing or wall, which is at least 75 percent opaque.
3. Small Parking Lots. Parking lots with less than eight standard spaces, 10 compact spaces, or six ADA stalls, assuming a drive aisle with half the stalls on each side, may provide required landscaping area along the edges, rather than in the interior, so long as the following are met:
a. At least one tree for every six stalls must be provided in the edge landscaping; and
b. No more than four standard spaces, five compact spaces, or three ADA stalls (with two associated walkways/loading areas) may be placed in a continuous row.
D. Landscape Standards for Residential Sites Adjacent to Freeways and Highways.
1. The intent of the following standards is to mitigate impacts to health and air in residential uses adjacent to major highways and freeways. The standards apply to multifamily and mixed-use buildings with residential spaces that are adjacent to transportation facilities classified by WSDOT as an interstate or other freeway/expressway.
2. Buildings with residential uses must use landscaping to screen or buffer interstates and highways from residential uses. The project must include the following:
a. Clustering of plant materials and vegetation that creates a continuous landscaped area adjacent to the transportation facility, as seen in Figure 18.606.080(D)(2)(a), using Type 1 landscaping;
Figure 18.606.080(D)(2)(a). Vegetation Buffer From Highway

b. Vegetation tall enough to visually block the transportation facility from ground level view of the highway or freeway. Exceptions are allowed for pedestrian connections and for sightlines for transportation facilities;
c. Existing trees nearest to and adjacent to the highway or freeway must be preserved in accordance with Chapter 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Intent. Exposed garage structures and rooftop parking have negative impacts that must be minimized without unduly discouraging their construction. Rooftop parking is considered equivalent to a surface parking lot and must be modulated by either landscaping or nonlandscaping methods.
B. Purpose. To provide sight barriers for parking structures by mitigating adverse impacts created by vehicle use areas including noise and glare by buffering uses, screening adjacent properties, facilitating movement of traffic, and improving the physical appearance of vehicle use areas.
C. General Standards, Excluding Central Issaquah Subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus.
1. Perimeter Screening. In addition to required landscaping of the setback area, one of the following must be provided around and adjacent to the entire parking structure except for driveways, pedestrian walkways, and emergency access points:
a. A 10-foot-wide planting area with Type 1 landscaping; or
b. A five-foot-wide planting area with Type 2 landscaping with trellising and climbing vines as described in IMC 18.600.090, Fences, walls and screening.
2. Interior Design Criteria. Landscape areas must be provided at the entries of buildings and between parking structures and buildings when the parking structure is a separate structure. Said areas must be a minimum of five feet wide and may be clustered to accommodate pedestrian circulation and parking layout.
3. Screening Wall. Structured ground floor parking must be screened from pedestrian view, such as from sidewalks, trails, parks, and plazas. Screen walls must consist of a solid three-foot-high evergreen hedge and/or fence with landscaping to soften the fence on the street side. Trellising with climbing vines above a solid wall may be substituted for the fencing.
4. CPTED. Visual access to meet CPTED standards may be allowed where necessary.
D. Standards for Central Issaquah Subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus.
1. Perimeter Requirements. Treatments along exposed parking structures abutting public rights-of-way, transportation facilities, or community spaces must have visually and texturally interesting pedestrian-friendly treatments, except where there are pedestrian or vehicular entries/exits to the parking structure. Treatment options are:
a. Landscape growing on the building or an attached structure, such as green walls; and/or
b. A landscape area at least 10 feet wide composed of a combination of evergreen and deciduous trees, evergreen shrubs, and groundcover. The landscape materials may be clustered, staggered, or regularly spaced, as long as screening is achieved. The minimum required number of each landscape material is based on the linear footage of exposed parking structure frontage as follows: one tree per 20 linear feet, one shrub per five linear feet.
2. Rooftop Requirements. The purpose of architectural elements or landscape for rooftop parking is to soften the visual appearance of the rooftop, screen views of the rooftop, add shade, break up the visual appearance of rooftop parking, and reinforce safe pedestrian access to stairwells and elevators.
a. Interior.
(1) The square footage of all horizontal architectural elements or landscape interior to the rooftop parking must be equal to or greater than 10 percent of the total rooftop parking area.
(2) The applicant may choose to use architectural elements and/or landscape.
(3) Horizontal architectural elements must be five feet above areas used only by cars and eight feet above areas used by people.
(4) No perimeter treatment may contribute to the 10 percent interior requirement, except that portion which is greater than five feet in height; however, this exception shall not be used to meet more than 50 percent of the interior requirement.
b. Perimeter.
(1) Architectural elements or landscape must provide a visual screen at least three feet in height around the entire perimeter of the rooftop.
(2) On sides of the rooftop parking where adjacent or nearby occupied buildings are tall enough to look across or down upon the roof, architectural elements or landscape must provide a visual screen at least five feet in height.
(3) Architectural elements or landscape provided to meet the requirements of this section, and which are visible from the exterior of the parking structure, must be consistent with and/or complementary to the exterior architecture. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of this section is to design the portion of the development area immediately adjacent to a critical area and its buffer to protect and enhance the adjacent sensitive land.
B. Within the 15-foot building setback line established in Chapter 18.802 IMC, Critical Areas Regulations:
1. All vegetation shall be native, either retained or planted as part of the project;
2. Grading performed shall slope away from the critical area and its buffer so that no runoff of irrigation water, pesticides, and/or fertilizers will be diverted into the critical areas or their associated buffers;
3. All vegetation must be installed and maintained so that no plant material will be diverted into the critical areas or their associated buffers. Plants whose seeding methods or growth patterns are likely to result in migration into critical areas and their buffers shall not be planted near the critical area or buffer unless they are categorized as native plants; and
4. Wildlife enhancement features shall be incorporated, such as snags, loafing logs, and other natural features;
5. Applications must be 50 or more feet away from a waterway or wetland, or its associated buffer as established by Chapter 18.802 IMC, Critical Areas Regulations, unless approved by the City. Approved herbicide applications within 50 feet of a critical area buffer, such as for removing noxious weeds, must be done by a WSDA licensed pesticide applicator with an aquatic endorsement and an aquatic herbicide application permit from the Washington Department of Ecology, either aquatic noxious weed NPDES permit or the aquatic plant and algae management general NPDES permit.
C. In CARA Class 1 and 2 areas, proposed developments with maintained landscape areas greater than 10,000 square feet in total area must prepare an operations and maintenance manual plan using best management practices (BMPs) and integrated pest management (IPM) for fertilizer and pesticide/herbicide applications. The BMPs must include recommendations on the quantity, timing and type of fertilizers applied to lawns and gardens to protect groundwater quality. The City must issue guidelines for IPM in CARA Class 1 and 2 areas that must be based on the following principles:
1. Use of chemical applications must be kept at the minimum level required by the chemical label;
2. Selective applications of chemicals will be used rather than broad-based chemical applications. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The intent of landscaping or decorative elements is to soften the visual appearance, reduce the impacts on adjacent pedestrians, screen views of parking, add shade, limit the amount of continuous impervious surface, and reinforce safe pedestrian access to buildings and connecting sidewalks. The following landscape standards and specifications apply to all landscaping required under this chapter.
B. Centennial Tree. “Eddie’s White Wonder” Dogwood (Cornus “Eddie’s White Wonder”) has been chosen as Issaquah’s official centennial tree. Developers are therefore encouraged to use it as a single specimen or in small group plantings. It is not appropriate for use in planting strips or as a street tree.
C. Drainage Required. All landscapes must have adequate drainage, either through natural percolation or through an installed drainage system. A percolation rate of one-half inch of water per hour is acceptable. Wetland and riparian landscapes choosing to use LID techniques as part of a LID stormwater element must follow the guidelines of the LID Technical Guidance Manual, as amended, and Chapter 18.802 IMC, Critical Areas Regulation. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
When an approved development site is cleared and construction is delayed more than six months, the Director may require temporary vegetative cover and removal of invasive plants in support of IMC 16.26.050 (temporary erosion and sediment control). (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Administration.
1. A landscape plan must be submitted to the city before a construction permit is issued for the applicable developments outlined in IMC 18.606.020, Applicability.
2. An applicant must submit a landscape plan containing all required information necessary for the City to evaluate a project’s landscape design. All plans must meet the following specifications:
a. The landscape plan must be prepared or approved by a landscape architect, Washington-certified nurseryman/landscaper, or other qualified landscape designer as authorized by the City, signed by the party accepting responsibility and liability for the proposed plan, and be submitted together with other project application materials at the time of initial project submittal.
b. The irrigation plan, if irrigation is proposed, must be prepared or reviewed and approved by a certified irrigation designer, or other qualified irrigation designer as approved by the City, and submitted together with the project’s building plans.
c. Planting and Irrigation Details. All planting and irrigation plans, details and plant materials must conform to the guidelines set forth in this chapter. The plans must, at a minimum, include the type, quantity, spacing and location of plants and materials; typical planting details; soil amendment/installation; tree protection details as applicable; the location of significant trees within 20 feet of the property line on adjacent properties; and the location of irrigation systems with sufficient information for the review of the equipment, water system, and water budget to demonstrate compliance with the standards and ability to serve the project. Underground and at-ground utilities, equipment, or appurtenances must be shown on the plans so that planting conflicts are avoided. All plants must be shown at 85 percent of their mature size on landscape plans to demonstrate coverage.
d. A tree plan must be submitted according to the requirements established in Chapter 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation.
3. Landscape and irrigation plan revisions must be approved and installed according to the standards in this chapter. Revised plans must show all changes including different plant types, sizes, quantities, locations, irrigation, and all other landscape and irrigation elements. All revisions to landscape and irrigation plans must be approved prior to installation.
4. Certificate of Occupancy. Prior to certificate of occupancy the approved landscape and irrigation installation must be:
a. Installed, inspected, and approved by the City.
b. Maintenance bond submitted and accepted per IMC 18.206.020, Assurance devices. (Ord. 3088 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Irrigation water budgeting requirements apply to all developments subject to landscaping requirements in IMC 18.606.020, Applicability. Irrigation systems must conform to landscape standards and specifications as outlined in IMC 18.606.060, Irrigation and water standards.
B. A landscape design’s irrigation water budget (IWB) must be calculated based upon the total square footage of the proposed landscape area, which includes landscape water features (such as decorative ponds, pools, or fountains), and excluding impervious surfaces and critical areas regulated by Chapter 18.802 IMC, Critical Areas Regulations, and their buffers. The irrigation water budget must be calculated as described in this section.
C. A landscape design’s estimated water use (EWU) must be calculated by determining the estimated water use for each hydrozone and adding the EWU for all hydrozones together. The sum of the EWU for all hydrozones is the landscape’s total EWU. The formula used to determine the estimated water use for each hydrozone is available in the “Irrigation Water Budgeting Requirements” handout available at the permit center.
D. Plant factor values, or the “crop coefficient,” must be used for all plant species selected for use in a landscape. The plant factor value for the hydrozone is that of the plant species with the highest plant factor value within the hydrozone. Plant factor values assigned must reflect the plant species’ actual water demand as planted according to the final landscape design and plan.
E. Irrigation system efficiency values (IE) must be assigned in calculating the estimated water use for each hydrozone of a landscape. Determination of the IE must be as described in the “Irrigation Water Budgeting Requirements” handout available at the permit center.
F. The irrigation system must be designed, installed, and maintained in such a manner as to meet a minimum distribution uniformity of not less than 0.65.
G. An irrigation schedule must be submitted with the irrigation plan. (Ord. 3088 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Landscape Maintenance. Maintenance activities vary due to weather conditions and seasonal events. The following regular maintenance procedures serve as a standard for normal maintenance:
1. Litter pickup;
2. Mowing turf;
3. Edging turf;
4. Weeding planting beds;
5. Sweeping;
6. Irrigation; and
7. Pruning to required heights and widths.
B. Tree Pruning and Maintenance. All pruning must be done to the most recent National Arborist Association Standards: ANSI Z133.1 (2017) for safety factors and Z300 (Part 1) for pruning. It is recommended that all pruning be done to Class I (Fine Pruning), Class II (Standard Pruning), or Class III (Hazard Pruning) standards.
1. The following activities are considered acceptable pruning activities:
a. Canopy cleaning: the removal of dead, dying, diseased, crowded, weakly attached, low-vigor branches, and watersprouts from a tree’s canopy.
b. Canopy raising: the removal of the lower branches of a tree to provide a height of up to seven feet for pedestrian clearance and up to 16 feet for vehicular clearance or such other increased height as deemed appropriate for clearance by the City Arborist.
2. Class IV (Crown Reduction Pruning) may only be done for the following reasons:
a. Branches are interfering with utility lines.
b. Significant crown dieback has occurred.
c. Storm damage or prior incorrect pruning requires correction.
3. In no case is topping (the severe reduction of branches without consideration of the specifications for cutting back) allowed.
4. No more than 25 percent of the total canopy may be removed through canopy thinning (the selective removal of branches to increase light penetration and air movement, and to reduce weight) unless greater pruning is approved by the City and is necessary for the health and safety of the tree.
5. If illegal tree topping has occurred, the property owner must have a certified arborist develop and implement a five-year pruning schedule in addition to monetary fines and required tree replacement.
6. Unless greater pruning is approved by the City and is necessary for the health and safety of the tree, excessive pruning is prohibited and is a violation of this Code.
7. An irrigation method approved by the City must be provided to all newly planted protected trees through an establishment period.
C. Shrub Pruning. Shrubs used for screening purposes must have a predetermined minimum desired height shown on the landscape plan. The shrubbery must be required to fill in and create an adequate screen to reduce headlight glare to surrounding properties. Once the desired height is reached, they may not be pruned below that height, except every five years based on the recommendation of a qualified landscape professional for the plant’s health and to retain the form of the plant. Shearing is allowed for hedges, but specimen plants are to be selectively pruned according to their plant type, not sheared. Visual access to meet CPTED standards must be incorporated where necessary as shown on the landscape plan.
D. Chemical Applications.
1. Use of chemical applications must be kept at the minimum level required by the chemical label. Permitted applications of pesticides must be applied by licensed applicators only. All use of fertilizers, pesticides, and herbicides must comply with best management practices. Pest and disease control using chemical products and methods must also be approved by the City Parks Department.
2. Applications of all pesticides, herbicides, and fertilizers must be made in a manner that will inhibit their entry into waterways, wetlands, and storm drains. Fertilization, if approved, must comply with the manufacturer’s specifications. Integrated pest management (IPM) strategies must be incorporated into landscape design and maintenance whenever possible.
3. All fertilizer, pesticide, and herbicide applications to turf or trees and shrubs must follow Washington State University Extension Office, National Arborist Association or other accepted agronomic or horticultural guidelines as well as the product guidelines.
4. Fertilizer, pesticide, and herbicide applications must be done only when necessary for the essential health of the landscape, with herbicides classified as safe for aquatic environments and must be made in a manner that will prevent their entry into waterways and wetlands and minimize their entry into storm drains.
E. Safety. All landscaping features, plants, trees, and objects must be maintained so that public health and safety is protected. Conditions which present a risk to public health and safety, resulting from landscaping features, including tree roots and limbs, are the responsibility of the property owner to correct. These conditions include, but are not limited to, tree roots causing disruptions to community spaces and amenity areas, and must be addressed immediately at the property owner’s expense. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The City will require maintenance and performance bonds to guarantee the completion, proper establishment and upkeep of landscaping as detailed in the approved landscape plan. For developments in, adjacent to, or affecting critical areas as defined in Chapter 18.802 IMC, additional bonding requirements may apply. The property owner is responsible for ensuring the landscaping is maintained in an appropriate manner, regardless of any second-party landscape maintenance agreements.
B. Performance. All landscaping and necessary irrigation systems must be installed per the approved plan in a safe, healthy, and attractive manner. To ensure this occurs for projects that are subject to Level 3 or 4 approval, the applicant must provide a performance guarantee equal to 150 percent of the total costs of the improvements permitted prior to permit issuance. Following installation, the applicant must provide a surety in the amount of 50 percent of the value of the plant material and irrigation installed for a period of three years.
C. If any portion of the approved landscaping dies or is not maintained in a healthy manner within the first three years of planting per annual inspections, the City will issue a correction letter requiring replacement. If corrective actions are not taken within 60 days, the City will use whatever portion of the bond is needed to replace the landscaping. The City will use either City employees or private contractors to replace the landscaping and will assess the property owner all actual costs against the deposit if it is sufficient. An additional three-year cash deposit at 150 percent of the value of the landscaping will be required if a significant amount of the plants needs to be replaced.
D. Before bond funds are returned to the applicant, the landscape area must be inspected by the City. The inspection is subject to applicable inspection fees. (Ord. 3088 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The intent of the following standards is to incorporate unique plantings to establish a special feeling of place in and on public properties and rights-of-way, while ensuring safe access and clear sightlines. Plantings may include annuals and colorful plantings, plantings in pots, beds, raised planters, edible plants or kitchen gardens, and other measures.
B. The City shall have an preferred tree list from which developers may select trees. Any trees selected for use on public property that are not on the list require approval by the City. This list is subject to periodic updating by the City and is available at the permit center.
C. The City has an approved set of specifications from which developers may select grass seed combinations (including sod) for use on public property. Any seed combination not on the list requires approval by the City. Alternative cross-sections of the planting strip on City right-of-way for the use of trees, shrubs, and drought-tolerant materials to replace sod requires approval by the Director.
D. The City is responsible for the maintenance of all developed landscape areas owned by the City, except for right-of-way, unless otherwise agreed upon by the City.
E. Maintenance of landscape areas (including irrigation systems, ornamental plantings, and other landscape elements) on City right-of-way is the responsibility of the abutting property owner, unless the City has accepted maintenance responsibility for that right-of-way. Any tree removal requires City approval (see IMC 18.812.050, Tree removal).
F. Permission by the City is required before any plant may be planted or removed from City property or public right-of-way.
G. Plant location and spacing on City right-of-way must meet all sight obstruction requirements (see Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards). Plantings on City right-of-way must not obstruct the visibility or accessibility of any fire hydrant or traffic control device. The trees may be spaced at irregular intervals to accommodate sight distance requirements for driveways, intersections, or traffic control devices.
H. Street trees must have a minimum overhead clearance of seven feet over pedestrian pathways and 14 feet over streets at maturity. Street trees must be centered a minimum of three feet from curbs and multimodal facilities and two feet from sidewalks or as otherwise approved by the City.
I. Street trees planted in tree wells in sidewalks must have a minimum of two and one-half feet of pedestrian clearance around the tree unless otherwise approved by the City (see Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards). Tree grates may be required to meet ADA accessibility requirements.
J. Street trees must be planted in a planting strip with a minimum of five feet between the sidewalk and the back of the curb. Permanent or temporary irrigation is required for a minimum of three years. Tree grates, when used, must be designed so that sections of grate can be removed incrementally as the tree matures and be designed to avoid accumulation of trash.
K. Where a setback between transportation facilities and buildings is necessary, such as in building entries, office uses, and residential uses, landscaping must be used in combination with benches, low walls, and other built elements to establish a boundary between public and semi-private areas. The landscape and built elements may create layers, differing textures, and semi-transparency to define semi-private areas while maintaining a pedestrian-friendly environment. See IMC 18.602.050, Building massing and articulation design.
L. All pedestrian facilities must be buffered with trees and shrubs, appropriate in size, scale, planter type, and character to the type of facility or subarea. Landscape adjacent to parking must be hardy and easily traversable such as with pavers to guide pedestrians. Unless otherwise permitted, the width of the planting strip must be a minimum of five feet between the sidewalk and the back of the curb.
M. Trees planted under overhead utility wires must be of a small variety (as specified by the approved tree list) which will not grow up to interfere with the wires.
N. Street trees are required for all project applications required to provide frontage improvements in the rights-of-way, unless the Director approves a deviation in accordance with IMC 18.606.190. Street trees must be a minimum of two-inch caliper for deciduous trees and seven feet tall for conifers at the time of planting. Street trees must be limbed up a minimum of five feet when planted, following the standards provided in ANSI Z133-2017. The minimum tree pit size in a tree well must be 16 square feet and the minimum tree pit must be three times the size of the rootball. (Ord. 3088 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Violations. Except as otherwise provided, violations of any portion of this chapter are subject to the applicable code enforcement and penalty provisions set out in Chapters 18.108, Enforcement, and 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation.
B. Site Stabilization. Any site that is cleared or has vegetation removed must be protected or revegetated consistent with Chapter 16.26 IMC, Clearing, Grading, and Stormwater Management. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Deviations may be requested for the following list of standards in this chapter. Deviations must be requested according to the appropriate permit process in IMC 18.204.020, Review levels. Any proposal to deviate that does not satisfy the following conditions must apply for a variance in accordance with Chapter 18.210 IMC, Variances.
1. Irrigation Water Budgeting Requirements. An applicant may request a deviation from the standards in IMC 18.606.140 if all of the criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and the following criterion is met:
a. The applicant demonstrates that a deviation results in equal to or lesser water usage as compliance with the standards.
2. Public Properties and Rights-of-Way. An applicant may request a deviation from street tree requirements in IMC 18.606.170 if all of the criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and the following criterion is met:
a. The applicant demonstrates that the deviation addresses a public safety risk. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Implementation of the Green Necklace. This chapter helps implement the Green Necklace, a vision presented in the City’s park strategic plan that ensures Issaquah community members have access to natural areas and recreation opportunities. This chapter applies only to privately developed amenities Citywide, not to public parks, trails, or other recreational facilities built by the City of Issaquah.
1. The vision for the Green Necklace is that the urban environment will be saturated with an array of green elements including community and neighborhood parks, riparian corridors, tree lined streets, active and passive plazas, and other shared urban spaces all connected by on- and off-road trails. Open space amenities and nature will be unified through the coordinated placement of parks, trails, and plazas near areas and connected public spaces. Inviting green spaces and social gathering spaces are the jewels of the necklace, and a network of connected trails are the strands of the necklace.
2. Some elements of the Green Necklace vision will be built and maintained by the City, while other elements will be built by developers, and in some cases maintained by private property owners.
3. Shared Use Routes. The urban environment also contributes to the Green Necklace through amenities such as tree lined streets, active and passive plazas, and urban and nature trails. The features of the Green Necklace are connected by shared use routes and nonmotorized trails in accordance with IMC 18.608.050.
4. Community Spaces. Natural features are used as key design elements to create a unique sense of place and enhance the value and function of the natural environment. A community space, often in the form of a plaza, is constructed by a private developer but is intended for use by the general public. These spaces are required for some nonresidential and mixed-use developments. See IMC 18.608.070.
5. Building Orientation. When a development orients its entries and active areas to face Green Necklace parks or provides a connection to a current or mapped trail connection to a park, the development’s design contributes to the vitality and safety of the Green Necklace. Orienting buildings and establishing trail connections to the Green Necklace invites social opportunities and connects people with on-site or adjacent amenities, making the Green Necklace successful. See IMC 18.608.080, Development orientation to parks, and 18.608.050. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. This chapter contains the standards and requirements to animate and connect the natural fabric of the City. They also ensure that individual projects provide amenities for their residents, employees, and visitors. The intent of these standards includes the following:
1. Building design, community spaces, and outdoor amenity spaces are connected to each other, consistently high quality, and well-maintained;
2. Site and design are inviting, encourage social interaction, and make a positive contribution to the public realm, if open to the public;
3. Site planning and design make a positive contribution to ecosystem health;
4. Livability, public life, and community health are promoted and improved through the creation of an “outdoor room”;
5. People who bike and walk are welcome and comfortable;
6. Green Necklace amenities are located within each neighborhood with the goal to provide spaces within walking distance of most residences;
7. Design, use, lighting, and other amenities make safe, comfortable places;
8. Site planning and design make a positive contribution to the public realm;
9. Each community space is multifunctional;
10. There is visual and recreational variety and interest;
11. Stormwater management and critical areas protection are beautifully integrated into urban design;
12. Connections are made to parks, plazas, and shared use routes throughout Central Issaquah and the broader community;
13. Most multifamily residential and nonresidential uses have an outdoor area either integrated into their site or within walking distance; and
14. Consistent with the character of the neighborhood, the whole composition of the community space, including streets, trees, lighting, street furniture, walkways, landscape areas, building massing and detailing defines a place for employees, residents and/or visitors to stroll, meet, play, and socialize.
B. Variety. This Code intends to achieve a variety of community spaces in the public realm that are memorable and inviting. These spaces must be designed to be multifunctional and accommodate flexible programing and activities.
C. Appropriateness. This section intends to achieve community spaces and outdoor amenity spaces that have appropriate size and functions to their locations. These spaces are intended to foster community character and not feel empty, barren, or too big when not in use.
D. Connection With Nature. Community and Outdoor Amenity Spaces provide places where people can be outdoors and experience natural elements. These spaces are intended to be well-designed with experiential elements, such as art, and/or a range of active and passive uses. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Unless exempt by IMC 18.608.030, this chapter applies Citywide to development, redevelopment, and subdivisions.
B. While the standards apply to all sites in the City, the level of action required by this chapter may depend on development use, location, and proximity to mapped Green Necklace elements throughout the City. See Table 18.608.020(B) for thresholds for community and amenity space requirements.
Table 18.608.020(B). Thresholds for Community and Amenity Space Requirements
Land Use | Location | Required Amenity Type | Development Standards |
|---|---|---|---|
Any use | Adjacent to a Green Necklace Park | Development Orientation | Map 18.608.050(B) IMC 18.608.050(C)(1) IMC 18.608.080, Development orientation to parks |
Any use | Adjacent to a Green Necklace Trail | Development Orientation Shared Use Route | Map 18.608.050(B) IMC 18.608.050(C)(2) |
Any use | Adjacent to a City-Owned Trail | Trail Connection | See Map 18.608.050(B) IMC 18.608.050(C)(3) |
Residential uses 5+ units | Citywide | Natural Amenity Space | IMC 18.608.060, Residential uses |
Assisted living or senior housing, 5+ units | Citywide | Natural Amenity Space Indoor Amenity Space | IMC 18.608.060, Residential uses |
Residential uses 22+ units | Central Issaquah | Indoor Amenity Space Additional Indoor Amenity | IMC 18.608.060, Residential uses |
Nonresidential or mixed-use | Issaquah Highlands Talus Central Issaquah | Community Space | IMC 18.608.070, Nonresidential and mixed-use developments |
(Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
This chapter does not apply to residential development, redevelopment, or subdivision of four or fewer units. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. This section contains general requirements for all types of outdoor amenity space, including public community space and private outdoor amenity space.
B. Minimum Size. Each community space or common outdoor amenity space must be provided in a contiguous area no smaller than 200 square feet.
C. Landscaping. A minimum of 30 percent of the outdoor community space or outdoor amenity space must be landscaped with plant materials. At least 50 percent can be hardscape materials which are barrier-free, such as pavers, textured concrete, and brick.
D. Seating. Seating must be provided. Seating options include fixed, movable, or a combination of both. Seating must be dispersed throughout the community space or outdoor amenity space. The following additional requirements apply:
1. At least one bench or seating unit for each 100 square feet of amenity space must be provided.
2. Seating surfaces must be a minimum of 18 inches in depth.
3. For purposes of determining the number of seats provided on a bench, ledge, or fountain, 18 lineal inches on a horizontal surface is considered one seat.
4. At least half the seating must have seat backs.
5. Moveable chairs not associated with and reserved for an adjacent business may count toward the overall seating requirement.
6. Compliance with accessibility requirements of IMC Title 16 including ICC A117.1, or as amended, is required.
E. Wayfinding. Clear and intuitive wayfinding must be used to communicate how to access the Green Necklace and adjacent parks and natural areas.
1. Intent. The intent of this section is to increase accessibility and awareness of Issaquah’s Green Necklace, and promote greater connectivity within the City, particularly for pedestrians and cyclists.
2. Applicability. This section applies to all new and redeveloped commercial, multi-family residential, and public developments adjacent to the Green Necklace Amenities, as outlined in Figure 18.608.050(B).
3. Exemption. Single-family lots are exempt from this section.
4. Signage must direct the viewer from the property line to nearby amenities.
5. All signs must not obstruct the right-of-way, pathways, or trails.
6. The wayfinding signs must be made from durable materials that are easy to maintain.
7. Universal icons designating amenity accessibility and mobility are encouraged.
Figure 18.608.040(E)(7). Examples of Universal Icons

8. Dimensions. The sign face must be on a post at least 34 inches tall. The primary text must be at least two inches in height.
Figure 18.608.040(E)(8). An Example of a Sign Meeting the Criteria

F. Connect With Nature Standards. Issaquah Creek and Tibbetts Creek are focal spots that provide a natural green edge within the Central Issaquah area. Critical areas and their buffers also can provide the opportunity for connecting with nature while preserving the value and function of the critical area. Lake Sammamish State Park, Tibbetts Valley Park, and Confluence Park provide a green edge just outside Central Issaquah. The following standards apply to amenity areas adjacent to these natural areas:
1. The community or outdoor amenity areas must provide access to existing recreational hiking trails as well as facilitate passive uses, enjoyment of nature, picnicking, or informal play.
2. Amenity spaces must have clear links to transportation infrastructure that promotes pedestrian mobility, bicycle usage, connectivity to mass transit and complete streets to ensure the vision of connected, pedestrian-friendly neighborhoods that connect to nature.
G. Additional Development Standards. In addition to the general development standards required here, the amenity types in the table below have specific requirements applicable to all uses. Where development standards for a specific amenity type conflict with the general amenity area standards, the standards for the specific amenity apply.
Table 18.608.040(E). Specific Amenity Type Development Standards
Amenity Type | Development Standards |
|---|---|
Animal Off-Leash Area | IMC 18.608.130 |
Community Garden/P-Patch | IMC 18.608.120 |
Playscapes | IMC 18.608.110 |
Plazas | IMC 18.608.090 |
Rooftop Amenities | IMC 18.608.100 |
(Ord. 3107 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. This section establishes additional development requirements for sites located adjacent to Green Necklace amenities.
B. The Green Necklace Amenities Map, Figure 18.608.050(B), is a representation of City-owned parks, open spaces, and trails that form the Green Necklace.
1. This map may be updated as the City purchases additional park and open space or identifies new trail locations.
Figure 18.608.050(B). Green Necklace Amenity Map

C. Development Requirements. A site that meets the description for more than one of the following locations must meet the development requirements for each of the applicable locations:
1. Any site sharing a property boundary with a City-owned park or open space area, including those labeled City Park or Open Space on Figure 18.608.050(B) or that are acquired by the City in the future for a park or open space that are zoned Community Facilities – Parks (CF-P) or Community Facilities – Open Space (CF-OS), must orient the development to the park or open space. Development orientation includes designing buildings to face the park, including active elements, entries, missing trail connections, or other design features that encourage easy access and use of the park or open space. See IMC 18.608.080, Development orientation to parks development standards.
2. Any site abutting a City-owned mapped trail connection, including Green Necklace trail connections labeled Type 1, Type 2, Type 3, pedestrian/bike, and major connections, as shown on Figure 18.608.050(B), must meet the following requirements:
a. The developer must construct the portion of the mapped Green Necklace trail connection located adjacent to or running through the development site.
b. The trail connection must be constructed to meet the shared use route standards in Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
3. Any site abutting a mapped future trail connection, as shown on Figure 18.608.050(B):
a. Alignment. Future trail connections shown on the map represent connections between blocks. Specific alignments for the connections will be developed during the site plan land use permit process for applicable sites.
b. Installations. As property is developed or redeveloped, corresponding portions of the future trail connection adjacent to the property must be developed and a public access easement dedicated or conveyed to the City as a condition of the project development. The easement must be recorded prior to occupancy of the adjacent building.
c. The future trail connection must be constructed solely on the property being developed.
4. Any site abutting a City-owned trail, including those shown on Figure 18.608.050(B):
a. Site Abutting City-Owned Trails. The development must provide a trail connecting the development site to the park.
(1) The trail must be constructed to meet the trail standards in Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
(2) For residential uses, the trail is not required to be open to the public, but it must be easily accessible for all residents.
(3) For commercial and mixed-use developments, the trail must be made open to the public. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of this section is to ensure high quality design, safety, and functionality of privately owned and maintained amenity spaces for residential developments, including, but not limited to, apartments, townhomes, multi-unit single-family residential subdivisions and developments, assisted living facilities, and senior housing. Specifically:
1. To provide access to larger common outdoor amenity space for the residents of multifamily developments;
2. To ensure single-family residential subdivisions and developments provide set aside amenity space for the common use and enjoyment of the residents; and
3. To require amenity spaces both indoors and outdoors for the use and enjoyment of residents who choose to avoid driving or are restricted to their immediate vicinity, such as in multifamily housing, senior housing, or assisted living facilities.
B. Required Amenity Spaces for Residential Uses.
Table 18.608.060(B). Required Amenity Spaces for Residential Uses
Land Use | Minimum Common Outdoor Amenity Space | Additional Common Amenity Area Required (sf) | Additional Requirements | Private Outdoor Amenity Space per Unit (sf) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
Residential, 5+ Units | 100 sf per unit | IMC 18.608.060(B)(1) | 48 | |
Residential, 22+ Units in Central Issaquah | 100 sf per unit | 400 (Indoor or Outdoor) | IMC 18.608.060(B)(1) IMC 18.608.060(B)(2) | 48 |
Assisted Living or Senior Housing, 5+ Units | 100 sf per unit | 48 per Unit (Indoor) | IMC 18.608.060(B)(3) | NA |
Talus/Highlands (All Residential Units) | 250 sf per unit | NA | 48 | |
Cottage Housing 5+ Units | At least 20 percent of the lot must be common open space | 60 | ||
Courtyard Housing 5+ Units | At least 20 percent of the lot must be common open space |
1. Required Outdoor Amenity Space Elements. The minimum outdoor amenity space stated in Table 18.608.060(B) must be provided as follows:
a. Private outdoor amenity space must include private outdoor balconies, rooftops amenities, ground level patios, or decks attached to individual units. Minimum length and width of each private outdoor space must be eight by six feet.
b. Common outdoor amenity space may include one or several outdoor communal balconies, rooftop amenities, ground level patios, decks, animal off-leash areas, or gardens. All space must be easily accessible to residents of all units and not be attached to any individual unit. Loading docks, employee entrances, and other similar activity areas must be designed not to interfere with incompatible on-site uses. For example, children’s play areas shall not overflow into parking lots or pedestrian pathways.
For cluster developments, see also IMC 18.500.070, Cluster housing standards.
2. Additional Common Amenity Space. In addition to the minimum required outdoor amenity space in Table 18.608.020(B), each residential project in the Central Issaquah subarea with 22 or more units must provide at least one additional common on-site amenity. The common amenity space must be a minimum of 400 square feet and can be either indoor or outdoor. Examples include, but are not limited to, a recreation room furnished with recreational equipment, a community garden/P-patch, animal off-leash area, swimming pool, or other recreational amenities such as playscapes. The facility selected must be appropriate for the target housing market segment, as demonstrated by the applicant with the land use permit submittal.
3. Assisted Living Facilities and Senior Housing Facilities. Every assisted living facility and senior housing facility with five or more units must provide private indoor amenity area and outdoor amenity space for individual units as stated in Table 18.608.060(B).
a. Required outdoor amenity area can be provided either as private space for use by individual units or as common space shared by all units. Seating space is required for a minimum of 30 percent of the total number of units provided, assuming two persons per unit (for example, six units would provide seating/table space for two units or four persons).
b. Required indoor amenity area must be provided in a contiguous area no smaller than 200 square feet and include:
(1) Seating and table space for a minimum of 30 percent of the total number of units provided, assuming two persons per unit (for example, six units would provide seating and table space for two units or four persons);
(2) Kitchen facilities, including at minimum a sink, cabinet and counter space.
4. Cottage Housing. Every cottage housing development must provide at least one outdoor common open space for the development complying with Table 18.608.060(B) and meet the following:
a. The open space must be a focal point of a cottage development with units surrounding the shared outdoor area on at least two sides.
b. The open space must be a contiguous area no less than 15 feet wide and 20 feet deep.
c. The open space must abut at least 50 percent of the cottages in a cottage housing development.
d. The open space must have pedestrian connections circumnavigating the space and connecting through the space. Each cottage unit must have direct access to the open space.
e. The following do not contribute to meeting the required common outdoor amenity space requirement:
(1) Required setbacks;
(2) Landscaped pathways along site access points;
(3) Access pathways to garages or driveways;
(4) Parking areas; and
(5) Critical areas and associated buffers.
f. A community building is an optional component, and a cottage housing development may not contain more than one community building. When proposed, a community building must meet the following development standards:
(1) A community building may not exceed 2,400 square feet of net floor area.
(2) The architectural design of the community building must be compatible in color and materials to cottage units.
(3) The maximum height of a community building must be one and one-half stories in height.
(4) Community buildings shall be designed as flexible, multi-purpose spaces.
(5) The community building must be owned and maintained through a shared maintenance agreement with each cottage unit owner.
(6) A community building is exempt from minimum off-street parking requirements.
5. Courtyard Housing. Every courtyard housing development must provide a central courtyard for the development complying with Table 18.608.060(B) and must provide the following:
a. The courtyard must be the central focal point of a courtyard housing development with units surrounding at least one shared outdoor area.
b. Shared outdoor areas must be surrounded by at least two building elevations.
c. The following do not contribute to meeting the required as outdoor common space:
(1) Required setbacks; and
(2) Parking areas.
d. A courtyard shall be a contiguous area no less than 20 feet wide and 20 feet deep.
e. Each courtyard must provide paved pedestrian access around the courtyard and to each residential building at least five feet wide.
f. Each unit shall have direct access to the courtyard through either private entrances or shared entryways.
g. Courtyards are not required to be fully landscaped. A private plaza can be proposed if standards of IMC 18.608.090 are met. A minimum of 30 percent of the courtyard must be landscaped.
h. For courtyard housing projects proposing 20 units or more, the required courtyard space may be broken up into multiple courtyards; provided, that the minimum courtyard area requirement is met.
(1) There shall be at least one primary courtyard no less than 20 feet wide and 20 feet deep.
(2) Secondary courtyards may have reduced dimensions of no less than 10 feet wide and 10 feet deep. Multiple secondary courtyards are permitted.
(3) Private outdoor amenity spaces are optional. If provided, the minimum length and width of each private outdoor amenity space must be eight by six feet.
(A) Private outdoor amenity spaces do not contribute to the minimum courtyard area requirement.
(4) Community buildings are an optional component. If proposed, community buildings must meet the following development standards:
(A) The architectural design of the community building shall be compatible in color and materials to courtyard development.
(B) The maximum height of a community building shall be one and one-half stories in height.
(C) Community buildings must be owned and maintained through a shared maintenance agreement with each courtyard unit owner.
(D) Community buildings shall be designed as flexible, multi-purpose spaces.
(5) Indoor amenities are an optional component. If proposed, each indoor amenity may reduce the total amount of courtyard area required by 100 square feet. No courtyard area will be reduced to provide less than 400 square feet of common outdoor space. (Ord. 3091 § 12 (Exh. K), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. This section intends to create publicly accessible community space that is comfortable, secure, and inviting for a variety of activities during all hours and seasons.
B. Community Space Requirement.
1. Community space for tenants, customers, and visitors must be provided with every nonresidential and mixed-use development in Issaquah Highlands and Talus neighborhoods, and in Central Issaquah when the development is adjacent to a pedestrian priority, core street, neighborhood street, or local street, as defined in Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
2. Publicly accessible community space for a building containing an industrial or intensive commercial use as listed in Chapter 18.402 IMC, Permitted Uses, is required.
3. Indoor community space is required in enclosed shopping centers. Inside common areas must be 15 percent of the total retail area. The internal corridor of the enclosed center counts toward meeting the requirement for common area if seating, plantings, and other amenities are provided.
4. Any mixed-use development must also meet the applicable residential uses requirements at IMC 18.608.060.
C. Types of Community Spaces. Community spaces must serve tenants, customers, and visitors. In most cases, a plaza is the most appropriate type of community space, but in some circumstances other types of community space, such as an animal off-leash area, rooftop amenities, or community garden/P-patch, may be appropriate. All community spaces must be designed as an integral part of the location and scale of adjacent streets, buildings, and uses.
D. Minimum Size Required. A community space must be an appropriate size to meet the needs of the development and its users.
1. A community space no less than 20 feet wide and 20 feet deep is required for each building.
2. At a minimum, a community space must provide 25 square feet per 1,000 square feet of new nonresidential construction, excluding new public school facilities. It may be broken into multiple spaces; however, no plaza which counts toward the community space requirement may be smaller than 2,000 square feet.
E. Development Standards for Community Spaces. The following requirements apply to all community spaces. See also additional development standards for specific types, including plazas, playscapes, community gardens/P-patches, and animal off-leash areas.
1. Every community space must be owned and maintained by the property owner and be accessible to the public.
F. Location and Orientation.
1. A community space must be located at or close to ground level and be visible from a public or private street;
2. An outdoor, ground level community space must be framed by placing a building on at least one side, preferably more. Where they cannot be framed by buildings, for instance because they occupy an entire block, they must be framed by architectural elements at least eight feet in height along at least one side to create an appropriate sense of enclosure and substitute for the building; and
3. A community space must not be located adjacent to surface parking lots;
4. Location and design must consider solar orientation and creating balanced opportunities for both sun and shade. Suitable shade opportunities to balance solar access can be provided by deciduous trees, offering sun in winter, buildings that do not shade the community space all day, freestanding structures such as pergolas, or architectural elements attached to buildings such as weather protection;
5. A community space must be visible from adjacent housing units or occupied spaces to ensure safety;
6. A community space must provide opportunities for people to connect with nature, including preserving views of important local natural features, as described in Chapter 18.600 IMC, Urban Design and Site Planning;
7. If present, adjacent nonmotorized transportation facilities must be integrated with the community space;
8. No more than two edges of the community space shall be shared with vehicular transportation facilities.
G. Required Design Elements. In addition to general amenity area standards found at IMC 18.608.040, the following are required:
1. Pedestrian-scaled lighting fixtures no taller than 15 feet;
2. Animal-proof waste containers;
3. Water and electrical outlets must be provided to facilitate use for a variety of events and users;
4. Some portion of the community space must be usable year-round. Examples of usable year-round space include:
a. A pergola, gazebo, pavilion, and/or provided indoor space; and
b. Generally continuous weather protection along an adjacent retail street for no less than 75 percent the length of the frontage;
Figure 18.608.070. A Plaza With Weather Protection, Art, and Inviting Seating Options

5. Clear, direct pedestrian routes are required, at least five to eight feet wide, depending on the level of pedestrian activity, the destinations, and scale of the community space;
6. An element with sustainability attributes, such as a rain garden, green roof and wall, commercial grade solar powered lights or equipment, or pervious paving; and
7. An artistic design element, such as decorative paving patterns, ornamental art features, or creative lighting elements. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. This section guides the development of sites adjacent to parks established in IMC 18.608.050. The intent of this section is to guide design and orientation of development that frames and enhances the park itself and reinforces visual and physical access between the park and the development.
B. Development Standards.
1. Building Orientation. New development must have at least one façade that is oriented to face the adjacent park space. The space between the façade and the park space must prioritize the park as a focal point by meeting the following standards:
a. Any required outdoor amenity area or community space must be located between the building and the park;
b. No surface parking lot, outdoor storage or trash area, heavy machinery, or loading area is allowed to be located between the façade and the park;
2. Building Frontage. New development must provide visual and physical connections between buildings and adjacent park space by including the following:
a. Ground level shared and private doorways and entrances that face and are visible from adjacent park space.
b. Windows that face adjacent park space.
c. Frontage elements like stoops, porches, or balconies that face adjacent park space. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of the plaza standards is to create inviting spaces, also known as outdoor rooms, for social interaction or solitary experience.
1. Plazas are outdoor open gathering places with primarily hard surfaces, but that also contain landscaping.
2. Plazas may denote important places and create a focus, while increasing light and air at street level.
3. Plazas also function as points of orientation.
B. Materials, Furniture, and Lighting.
1. The plaza must be at the same level as the public sidewalk on at least one side.
2. Pedestrian-oriented frontage is required on at least two sides unless the space is linear in design, in which case pedestrian-oriented frontage is required on at least one side.
3. The design must maintain view lines and visibility from adjacent streets into and through the plaza. Physical obstructions between a plaza and a sidewalk or public park must be designed to provide sufficient visibility to protect the public safety of the users of the plaza and to ensure that public access to the plaza is convenient, obvious, and welcoming. Walls or structures shall not exceed 36 inches in height above the abutting sidewalk or public park for a total of more than 50 percent of the lineal footage along one side of a plaza that directly abuts a public street right-of-way or public park.
4. The plaza shall not have blank walls adjacent to or fronting the plaza. If a blank wall is present, it must use site appropriate measures including murals, green walls, and/or architectural treatment. See IMC 18.600.090, Fences, walls, and screening, for more standards related to wall materials and specifications.
5. The plaza must have an edge to define the space using low walls or landscaping.
6. Plazas must be designed with at least three types of pedestrian amenities including seating, lighting, water features, special paving, landscaping, artwork, and special recreational features.
7. At least 25 percent but not more than 40 percent of the open space must be landscaped with trees, groundcover, or other vegetation.
8. Plazas must be constructed with concrete, pavers, or special paving material. Asphalt shall not be used.
9. The plaza must provide adequate drainage.
10. Root barriers must be provided for all trees planted within plazas, consistent with Chapter 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation.
11. Permanent and raised stages, amphitheaters, or other structures that limit flexibility are not allowed, unless a deviation is granted per IMC 18.608.150, Allowed deviations to this chapter.
12. All City approvals or permits for any structure, or temporary or accessory use must be reviewed for compatibility with pedestrian routes, existing uses in the plaza, accessibility, and sightlines as part of its review.
Figure 18.608.090(B)(13). Inappropriate Blank Wall Adjacent to a Plaza (Image: Crandall Arambula)

C. Plaza Seating Requirements.
1. General Seating Requirements for Community Spaces. IMC 18.608.040(D) is required. Additionally, reserved seating for a restaurant, café, or other adjacent use is allowed, but access and use of the plaza by the general public must be preserved. No more than 25 percent of the plaza area may be reserved for adjacent business use. The plaza area and business reserved seating do not count toward meeting the seating requirement.
D. Permanent structures are allowed within a plaza if they do not preclude access to the plaza by the general public. Enclosed or open-air structures are allowed to be leased for commercial use. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The rooftop amenities standards are intended to activate rooftop space by providing an amenity for active or passive recreational use.
B. Rooftop Amenities as Required Community Space.
1. A rooftop amenity may be used to provide some, but not all, of required community space; and
2. Providing a rooftop amenity does not replace the need for public street level community spaces that serve the greater community.
C. Allowable rooftop amenities may include the following:
1. Sports fields or facilities;
2. Residential uses: communal space, pet amenity areas, community gardens, view outlooks, and play areas;
3. Restaurants: outdoor eating and view outlooks; and
4. Offices or commercial uses: communal space and view outlooks.
D. Standards. Rooftop amenity design must meet the following:
1. Landscaping is required, consistent with IMC 18.608.040(C);
2. Seating is required, consistent with IMC 18.608.040(D);
3. Rooftop amenities may occupy the top deck of a building or be created using terracing or partial building setbacks;
4. A minimum depth of eight feet is required if the space results from large balconies, terracing, notching out, or setting back upper-level floors; and
5. Access to multiple tenants, not just individual units, is required, except in the case of townhouses where private rooftop amenities for individual units are allowed. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The playscape standards are intended to create safe and comfortable places for families and children to play and enjoy.
B. All play areas and structures must conform to the requirements noted in the current editions of Publication F1487 “Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specifications for Playground Equipment for Public Use,” published by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), and “The Handbook for Public Playground Safety,” published by the United States Consumer Product Safety Commission.
C. Children’s play areas and activities must be located away from streets with speed limits exceeding 35 miles per hour. Children’s play areas and activities located within a facility that is adjacent to a street must include measures necessary to protect children’s safety. Such measures must provide a physical barrier between the playscape and vehicular transportation facilities such as a minimum three-foot-tall fence or solid hedge.
D. Shade and rest areas for supervision must be provided using deciduous landscaping, architectural elements, temporary structures, or other means.
E. Along with structured play equipment, if any, natural, creative play elements for free and/or structured play must be provided. These elements do not have to be overtly for play but should support, allow, and even encourage play by children. For instance, ground slides from one level to another, tricycle tracks, swings hung from arbors, paths that meander and are of varying materials and widths, water that can be manipulated, outdoor rooms made from landscape or rocks, berms, and hills.
F. Play areas must be designed for a variety of ages, activities, and fine and gross motor skills.
G. Animal-proof trash receptacles must be provided. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The community garden/P-patch standards intend to incorporate gardening opportunities for growing flowers, herbs, fruit, and vegetables throughout the City. The standards also intend to create spaces that serve as green pockets of refuge and enjoyment for the public.
B. Location.
1. Community gardens shall be located to reduce wildlife access, such as locating it on a rooftop. If the community garden cannot be located to reduce wildlife access, the design must include an eight-foot decorative fence around entire perimeter.
2. Sites shall be selected with direct sun exposure for at least six hours a day of direct sunlight year-round.
C. Required Design Elements.
1. Sheds and storage for tools, wheelbarrows/wagons, and materials.
2. Access to water such as hose bibs and rain barrels.
3. Signs that include rules of use and P-patch etiquette, including restricting pesticide use, in accordance with Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.
4. Electrical outlets.
5. Composting and trash facilities.
6. A vehicular access point to facilitate delivery of materials and loading/unloading. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The animal off-leash area standards intend to provide hygienic, pet-friendly places for pets to perform bodily functions and exercise.
B. Required Design Elements.
1. Appropriate areas for performing bodily functions, including pet waste pickup stations and disposal of bagged waste;
2. Access to potable water;
3. Fencing to prevent dogs leaving the area. If chain-link fencing is used, it must be vinyl coated. See IMC 18.600.090, Fences, walls, and screening;
4. Double gate entry points and a hard surface such as concrete or gravel provide between the gates; and
5. Posted rules for use of the area, in accordance with Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. All community and amenity space required by this chapter must be constructed and maintained by the property owner, with the exception of shared use routes that abut a street or are in the right-of-way, which must be constructed by the property owner then dedicated to the City for maintenance.
B. The responsibility for maintenance must be transferred to each successive owner in perpetuity.
C. Maintenance activities include applicable activities listed for landscape maintenance at IMC 18.606.150 in addition to:
1. Maintaining lighting fixtures in working order;
2. Maintaining plumbing and electrical outlets in working order;
3. Replacing or fixing broken or missing tables, chairs, seating areas, or other features required by this section;
4. Maintaining the legibility and accuracy of wayfinding signage;
5. Painting over or removing graffiti; and
6. Maintaining plaza amenities, including removing snow and ice and providing adequate waste management. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Deviations may be requested for the following list of standards in this chapter. Deviations must be requested according to the appropriate permit process in IMC 18.204.020. Any proposal to deviate that does not satisfy the following conditions must apply for a variance in accordance with Chapter 18.210 IMC, Variances.
1. Size of Community Space. The applicant may request a deviation from community space size requirements if all the criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and the following are met:
a. The applicant combines the required community space for multiple buildings into one larger community space.
2. Common and Private Outdoor Amenity Space for Residential Uses. The applicant may request deviations from providing private outdoor spaces for all units if all the criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and the following are met:
a. Additional common outdoor space is provided such that the total outdoor amenity space (combined common and private) is still meeting the overall square feet as under Table 18.608.060(B).
b. Applicant has provided private outdoor space for at least 50 percent of the units.
3. Private Outdoor Amenity Space for Conversions to Residential Uses. The applicant converting a commercial or mixed use to a multifamily residential use may request a deviation from providing private outdoor amenity space as long as 148 square feet of amenity space is provided for each unit through the common amenity space(s).
4. Permanent and Raised Stages, Amphitheaters, or Other Structures. The applicant may request a deviation from this restriction if all the criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and all the following are met:
a. The permanent structure does not encompass more than 30 percent of the space;
b. The remaining area of the plaza includes additional pedestrian amenities such as seating, lighting, art, etc.; and
c. Programming for the permanent structure will occur and be managed by an identified entity. (Ord. 3110 § 2 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. The purpose of this chapter is to establish standards of design, placement, size, renovation, and proper maintenance of all exterior visible signs and sign structures within the City of Issaquah to:
1. Contribute to the economic vitality of the community;
2. Encourage signs that are both functional and attractive, and that clearly respond to the needs of the public in locating a residence or business establishment as well as general wayfinding;
3. Ensure that signage is compatible with the unique character and natural beauty of Issaquah and its neighborhoods;
4. Recognize the role signs have in creating a visually interesting and attractive place as well as contributing to good overall urban design, while avoiding visual distraction, clutter, chaos, obstructions, and an overly busy public environment;
5. Implement the goals and vision of the Mountains to Sound Greenway and Chapter 47.42 RCW (Scenic Vistas Act) by managing the type, location, and proliferation of signage that may be visible from I-90;
6. Provide signs that are pedestrian and bicycle oriented; and
7. In the Cultural and Business District zone (CBD), encourage signage that is compatible with historical and cultural Downtown Issaquah CBD. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. This chapter is applicable to all signs erected or maintained on properties or rights-of-way within the City of Issaquah, except for areas with active development agreements that have their own sign standards. On any property, except the right-of-way, signs may only be established as an accessory use to a principally permitted use. Signs may not be the principal use on any property.
B. This chapter is not intended to and may not be interpreted to restrict noncommercial speech based on its content, viewpoint, or message. This chapter shall not be construed to favor commercial speech over noncommercial speech in comparable circumstances. A commercial sign may contain a commercial or noncommercial message. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. The following signs are exempt from the standards outlined in this chapter but may be subject to regulation under Federal law, State law, or other chapters of the Issaquah Municipal Code:
1. Signs required by local, State, or Federal rule, regulation, or law;
2. Government signs, which are signs installed by the City, County, State, Sammamish Plateau Water and Sewer District, Eastside Fire and Rescue, Federal governmental agency, or other governmental agency for the purpose of protecting the public health, safety, and general welfare. This includes emergency or warning signs, traffic and directional signs, wayfinding or gateway signs erected and maintained by the City of Issaquah, public service information signs (defined as a sign that indicates danger and/or service and safety information), and any other sign placed for the protection of public health, safety, and welfare.
3. Art that does not contain text or logos is not considered to be a sign and is not subject to standards in this chapter except when the art contains a logo, slogan, advertising message, company name, registered trademark, features or designs consistent with the associated use, or contact information. Painted wall designs or patterns that do not represent a product, service, or registered trademark, and that do not meet the definition of a sign, are not considered signs.
4. Signs not visible by the public from any location designated or designed for public travel, use, or public gathering, even if on private property. Additionally, any sign that is located in a building and that is clearly intended to be visible primarily to people located in the building; however, commercial message signs within three feet of a window that are meant to be viewed from the right-of-way or an area open to the public are not exempt and are treated as window signage.
5. Any sign on a vehicle, except when such vehicle is prominently visible from the public right-of-way or other public realm and is parked in that location for the primary purpose of attracting public attention to the sign. See IMC 18.612.050, Prohibited signs.
6. Minor, Nonelectrified, and Unilluminated On-Site Signs.
a. Commercial Signs.
(1) Balloons less than 18 inches in diameter with messages;
(2) “Credit available” signs less than two square feet in size;
(3) Unit occupied signs less than one square foot;
(4) Posters in cases related to uses and activities on the property;
(5) Umbrellas with messages.
b. Residential nameplate signs less than two square feet in size.
c. Permanent Noncommercial Signs.
(1) Standard traffic and pedestrian signs, less than four square feet in size, allowed by the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), and directed by a traffic engineer to assist traffic and pedestrians on private property;
(2) Memorial signs, defined as a sign, tablet, or plaque memorializing a person, event, structure, or site, less than six square feet and limited to one per street frontage. Typical memorial signs contain names and dates related to the person, event, structure, or site, and are unrelated to any current tenant or use, except when the tenant or use meets the minimum landmark length of 40 years. See example of a memorial sign in Figure 18.612.030(A)(6)(c)(2).
Figure 18.612.030(A)(6)(c)(2). Memorial Sign Example

(Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. This section provides standards and specifications for measuring signs.
B. Sign Clearance. If the sign is above a street, the smallest vertical distance between the grade of the adjacent street or street curb and the lowest point of any sign; if the sign is above landscape or another surface, the smallest vertical distance between the grade below the sign and the lowest point of any sign. This includes framework and embellishments, extending over that grade. An example of sign clearance is in Figure 18.612.040(B).
Figure 18.612.040(B). Example of Sign Clearance

C. Sign Area. The sum of all display sign areas as determined by circumscribing the exterior limits of each display piece erected on one sign structure with a circle, triangle, or quadrangle connecting all extreme points. The sign structure supporting a sign, or the painted or architectural background of a sign, is not included in determining the sign area except when the sign structure or background is designed in a manner to visually amplify the sign itself or is specified to be included in the sign’s standards. Example of measuring sign area in Figure 18.612.040(C).
Figure 18.612.040(C). Example of Measuring Sign Area

D. Sign Face. Sign face equals sign area and indicates how many sides of a structure may have signs on it. The table for each sign design type specifies how many times a sign face may be used with that sign design type, typically between one and four, to create the total sign.
E. Sign Height.
1. For signs that are not attached to a building (such as monument, pole, or directional/informational signs), the vertical distance measured from the grade immediately around the sign to the highest point of the sign or its sign structure.
2. For a sign attached to a building, the vertical distance measured from the building grade immediately below the sign to the highest point of the sign or its sign structure. Two examples are shown in Figure 18.612.040(E)(2).
Figure 18.612.040(E)(2). Examples of How Vertical Distance Is Measured
![]() | ![]() |
F. Total Sign. The total sign is composed of the number of allowed sign faces, as demonstrated in Figure 18.612.040(F):
Figure 18.612.040(F). Example Total Sign

G. Sign Number. The number the City assigns to a temporary sign agreement.
H. Sign Structure. Any structure that supports or is designed to support any sign. A sign structure may be a single pole and may or may not be an integral part of the building. Examples of sign structure with arrows pointing to the sign structure are shown in Figure 18.612.040(H).
Figure 18.612.040(H). Examples of Sign Structure
![]() | ![]() |
(Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Except when provided for in this chapter, no person may erect, alter, maintain, or relocate any of the following signs or sign features in the City and such existing signs must be removed consistent with IMC 18.612.170(H), Removal of Signs. Violators may be subject to the penalty provisions in Chapter 8.45 IMC, Enforcement.
B. Abandoned signs. A sign that no longer identifies or advertises a bona fide business, lessor, service, owner, product, or activity, and/or for which no legal owner can be found. When a City inspector determines the maintenance, control, or safety of a sign is not being sustained, the sign is deemed abandoned and it must be removed.
C. Animated signs. Digital or moving signs except approved reader boards in community facilities zones, or as specifically allowed by this chapter.
D. Billboard signs. A “billboard sign” is defined as a large permanent sign designed or used for high-visibility display of sign copy which is typically not associated with the property upon which the sign is placed. Billboards typically have a wood or steel sign structure with one or two sign faces oriented to major traffic routes. Billboards are larger than permitted pole signs and may include catwalks.
E. Blinking signs or signs with flashing lights. Any illuminated sign or sign containing blinking, flashing, intermittent, or moving light or lights, except the time and temperature portion of a sign.
F. Cabinet signs. A “cabinet sign,” also referred to as a box or can sign, is defined as a sign contained completely within a box, frame, or similar enclosure. Cabinet signs are typically backlit with a plastic or plexiglass face. See example in Figure 18.612.050(F).
Figure 18.612.050(F). Example of Cabinet Sign

G. Feather signs. A feather sign is defined as a feather banner sign, or a feather flag made of fabric, plastic, or similar material. It is attached to a flexible or rigid pole on one side.
H. Flags larger than 60 square feet.
I. Fuel price signs that are movable. See IMC 18.612.090(I)(3)(e)(2) for definition of “fuel price sign.”
J. Highway advertising. No person may erect or maintain a sign in violation of the Highway Advertising Control Act or the Scenic Vistas Act, Chapter 47.42 RCW.
K. I-90 facing signs. A sign that is inconsistent with the restrictions of IMC 18.612.080(D)(1)(a) is not allowed.
L. Internally illuminated/backlit awning and canopy signs where light shines through the material.
M. Illuminated signs that allow beams and illumination to shine upon a street, highway, sidewalk, or that project a sign onto the street, highway, or sidewalk using such beam or illumination.
N. Large inflatable objects that are signs. A large inflatable object is defined as a large balloon or balloon-like object, greater than 18 inches in any dimension, that uses blown air or any gas to keep it inflated (except if approved as part of a special event permit).
O. Monument signs not in compliance with IMC 18.612.090(F), including the following:
1. Any monument sign exceeding 10 feet in sign height.
2. Monument signs in areas that do not meet the conditional criteria for that area.
P. Natural features and street furniture with signs. Signs, balloons, or devices affixed or painted on street furniture, trees, rocks, or other natural features, that do not have a permit as a permanent sign.
Q. Parked vehicles, trailers, or carts with signs. Signs along a public right-of-way that are attached, painted, or otherwise affixed to parked vehicles, trailers, or carts and are visible from a public right-of-way are prohibited except when the vehicle or trailer is any of the following:
1. An authorized government vehicle;
2. Being temporarily loaded or unloaded;
3. On private property where the business is located; and must be all of the following:
a. Within 100 feet of the space occupied by the business being promoted. See example in Figure 18.612.050(Q)(3)(a).
Figure 18.612.050(Q)(3)(a). Illustration of 100 Feet of Space for Promotion

b. Parked for a period not exceeding 24 consecutive hours;
c. Promoting a business with a valid City business license;
d. Parked consistent with marked parking stalls.
4. On private property where the vehicle is being operated as an outdoor vendor, consistent with IMC 18.612.060, Signs permitted in the right-of-way.
R. Primary use. No permanent sign may be located on a lot, parcel, or easement as the sole principal use of that lot, parcel, or easement.
S. Readerboard sign. Includes electronic readerboard signs, except:
1. Manual readerboards allowed with marquee signs;
2. Readerboards allowed as electronic community facility readerboards; or
3. Readerboards that are already in place and are legal nonconforming.
T. Readerboards, portable.
U. Reflective material in signage including highly reflective metallic finishes, sequin studded materials, or fluorescent colors.
V. Revolving signs or signs with movable parts except barber poles and numerical signs indicating parts of clocks or thermometers.
W. Roof signs, except as otherwise allowed in this chapter. A “roof sign” is defined as a sign erected or constructed wholly upon and over the roof of any building and supported solely on the roof structure. Signs standing out horizontally from a mansard roof are considered wall signs.
X. Strings of pennants, ribbons, streamers, spinners, mylar balloons, or other similar moving or fluttering devices, or moving or revolving devices of a carnival-like nature.
Y. Temporary signs attached to or posted on permanent signs.
Z. Traffic hazard or public nuisance signs, including the following:
1. Signs with advertising copy which imitate official traffic signs, or signals, or use such words as “stop,” “look,” “danger,” “caution,” “warnings,” or “go slow”;
2. Signs that may confuse motorists or detract from any legal traffic control device as determined by the Director; or
3. Signs on or within medians, roundabouts, traffic circles, the clear view sight distance triangle of intersections, and any sign placed in such a manner that it obscures the vision of a motorist as determined by the Director.
AA. Utility or public street features with signs. Signs, balloons, or devices affixed to or painted on the following locations within the public right-of-way or public property:
1. Utility poles;
2. Street sign poles;
3. Traffic signal equipment and poles;
4. Garbage receptacles;
5. Benches;
6. Bridges;
7. Railings and railing supports;
8. Boardwalks;
9. Fences;
10. Retaining walls;
11. Bus shelters and other types of street furniture.
BB. Any off-site sign. An “off-site sign” is defined as a sign relating, through its message and content, to a business activity, use, product, or service not available on the site on which the sign is erected, including any sign located on any property other than that property on which the business is located, except as specifically permitted in this chapter.
CC. Signs located on a railroad right-of-way or land that was previously a railroad right-of-way and is now used for public purposes, except for governmental signs.
DD. Commercial signs or messages attached to wireless communication facilities or construction cranes.
EE. Signs in or over a public right-of-way with the following exceptions:
1. Signs specifically permitted by IMC 18.612.060 to be in the right-of-way;
2. Signs that meet the requirements of Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards; and
3. Signs that are allowed by a special event or special use permit. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. The following Table 18.612.060(A) lists signs that are permitted in the right-of-way so long as such signs are consistent with the applicable sign design type standards.
Table 18.612.060(A). Signs Permitted in the Right-of-Way
Signs Permitted in the Right-of-Way | Applicable Sign Design Type Standards |
|---|---|
A-frames | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary commercial signs |
Awning or canopy | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Banners on poles | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary commercial signs IMC 18.612.130, Temporary noncommercial signs |
Business district kiosks | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Directional, informational, interpretative markers | IMC 18.612.070, Signs permitted without a permit |
Follow-through | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Front Street banner | IMC 18.612.140, Front Street temporary banner |
Garage sale | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary commercial signs |
Marquee | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Monument | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Neighborhood/district identification | IMC 18.612.060, Signs permitted in the right-of-way |
General right-of-way | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary noncommercial signs |
Outdoor vendor | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary commercial signs |
Pedestrian-oriented | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Projection | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Real estate (directional arrows, open house) | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary commercial signs |
Wall | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
(Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. General Requirements for Permanent Commercial Signs Allowed Without a Permit.
1. The signs identified in this section do not require a permit or temporary sign agreement when all conditions listed for the specific sign type are met, except if a home business is allowed a pedestrian-oriented sign. All pedestrian-oriented signs require a permit.
2. All permanent commercial signs allowed without a permit must be nonelectric and nonilluminated, except when specifically allowed below.
3. List of Permanent Commercial Sign Design Types Allowed Without a Permit.
a. Directional/informational signs and interpretive markers;
b. Drive-through selection signs;
c. Home business signs;
d. Directional/informational signs and interpretive markers examples in Figure 18.612.070(A)(3)(d).
Figure 18.612.070(A)(3)(d). Examples of Directional/Informational Signs and Interpretive Markers
Below Left, Structured Parking Informational Sign With Electrified Parking Information | Below Right, Interpretive Marker |
|---|---|
![]() | ![]() |
Below Left, Informational/Directional Sign in the Right-of-Way | Below Right, 10-Foot-Tall Informational/Directional Sign |
![]() | ![]() |
B. Directional/Informational Signs and Interpretive Markers Are Allowed as Specified in Table 18.612.070(B).
Table 18.612.070(B). Directional/Information Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All zones | On site | Additional | See below | 12 sq. ft. | 4 | 10 feet |
Right-of-way | 4 sq. ft. | 4 | 4 feet |
C. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Directional/Information Signs and Interpretive Markers.
1. Maximum Number of Total Signs. The maximum number of signs is determined by what is necessary to inform and direct the public and users as determined by the Director.
2. Location and Placement. See general sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J). Directional/informational signs and interpretive marker signs in the right-of-way must:
a. Only be used when placement in the right-of-way is necessary to serve the purpose of the sign; for example, a sign located at a parking entrance to identify it to drivers;
b. Be placed no more than 10 feet from the property, business, or service the sign is related to.
3. Structured parking is allowed one on-site electrified informational sign at each entry indicating the status of parking (status examples include open, full, and number of available stalls). Signs may provide the parking availability status of each level of a multistory garage. The changeable copy portion of the informational sign, indicating the status of the parking available, may be electronic and remotely changed. Signs may have one or two sign faces and may not exceed 12 square feet per face.
D. Drive-Through Selection Signs. A “drive-through selection sign” is a sign that displays the available selection for ordering at a drive-through business, such as a menu.
1. An example is in Figure 18.612.070(D)(1).
Figure 18.612.070(D)(1). Drive-Through Selection Sign Example

2. Drive-through selection signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.070(D)(2).
Table 18.612.070(D)(2). Drive-Through Selection Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Business with a drive-through | On site | Additional | 1 | 16 sq. ft. | 1 | 8 feet |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Drive-Through Selection Signs.
a. Maximum Number of Total Signs. In addition to the number shown in Table 18.612.070(D)(2), additional drive-through selection signs are allowed if they are not visible from the right-of-way. Drive-through selection signs that are not visible from the right-of-way are not limited to the maximum area per sign face standard in Table 18.612.070(D)(2).
b. Location and Placement. For sign location and placement information see IMC 18.612.080(J). An example is in Figure 18.612.070(E)(1).
c. Illumination. The face of the sign presenting the selection information may be illuminated either internally or externally; no other sides may be illuminated or electrified. See sign illumination information in IMC 18.612.180.
E. Home Business Signs.
1. An example of a home business sign is in Figure 18.612.070(E)(1).
Figure 18.612.070(E)(1). Examples of Home Business Sign Location and Placement

2. Home business signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.070(E)(2).
Table 18.612.070(E)(2). Home Business Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Residences where home businesses are allowed and present | On site | Other: wall, window | 1 – 2, see below | 2 sq. ft. | 1 | 12 feet |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Home Business Signs.
a. Sign Category. Home business signs are not primary, secondary, or additional signs.
b. Sign Design Types. Home business signs do not have a unique sign design type and may select a window or wall sign within the parameters provided in this subsection.
c. Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(1) All home businesses may have one window or wall sign.
(2) In addition, where there are ground-related residential units on streets designated for sidewalk use in Chapter 12.05 IMC, Sidewalk Use District, legal and permitted home businesses may choose to add a pedestrian-oriented sign as another sign. The applicant must obtain a permit for the pedestrian-oriented sign, which complies with the requirements of IMC 18.612.090(G), Projection and Pedestrian-Oriented Signs. The maximum area of the sign faces for a pedestrian-oriented sign with a home business occupation is specified in IMC 18.612.080(F).
d. Location and Placement. In cases where a home is not visible from the street, the sign may be placed on the owner’s property near the road, but not in the right-of-way. See general information in IMC 18.612.080(J). (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Permit.
1. Except when a permit is not required in accordance with IMC 18.612.070, applicants must obtain all other applicable permits associated with the proposed sign before constructing or installing the desired sign. Other applicable permits may include, but are not limited to, building permits, electrical permits, and right-of-way use permits, unless the sign is specifically exempted below. To demonstrate compliance with these and other applicable codes and laws, an applicant may be required to provide additional information and drawings.
2. Applicants may submit a sign package containing multiple signs associated with a business or project; however, they must pay more than one fee as described in subsection B of this section, Fee.
3. Process. In accordance with IMC 18.204.020, Review levels, sign permits are a Level 1 review.
4. Duration. Permits are valid for a period of one year from date of issuance by which time the subject sign must be fully installed in compliance with all required permits, such as a building permit. If the sign is not installed within one year, the applicant must submit a new application and fee, and obtain approval from the Director. A permit extension may be granted in accordance with IMC 18.206.040, Permit term, extension, and expiration.
B. Fee. A permit fee must be paid for all permanent sign permits in accordance with the City of Issaquah’s adopted fee schedule.
1. If an applicant submits a sign package, each unique sign submitted is charged a separate sign permit fee; however, multiple, identical signs are charged as if they are one sign.
2. All electric signs and illuminated signs require an additional permit which is to be procured directly from the State Electrical Inspector, in accordance with its established permit fee schedule.
C. Sign Category. Most permanent commercial signs are classified into one of three different sign categories:
1. Primary Sign. The primary advertising for a business, enterprise, or community facility;
2. Secondary Sign. A smaller sign that is not the primary sign of the business;
3. Additional Sign. In addition to primary and secondary signs, the purpose of additional signs is to (through the use of small, minor signage) assist pedestrians, bicyclists, and drivers to find a business and add visual interest and variety to the transportation facility and positively contribute to its character; if the sign is not classified into one of these three sign categories, that information is identified as part of the sign’s requirements. In some cases, other signs have unique designs; in other cases they rely on other sign design types. This is specified with each sign design type.
4. See each sign design type section below for further regulations on sign category regulations for each sign design type.
D. Sign Restrictions for Permanent Signs Adjacent to I-90.
1. Applicability of Restrictions. Restrictions apply to a building or business adjacent to I-90 except:
a. Where a street is located between I-90 and the property on which a building or business is established, such as SE 62nd Street;
b. Where the parallel building elevation to the freeway (including on-ramps and off-ramps) is determined by the Director to be the primary frontage for the building; or
c. Where a development consists of two or more buildings, this limitation applies only to the building(s) located closest to the I-90 right-of-way.
2. Restrictions. The following restrictions apply to all permanent primary and secondary sign design types:
a. Parallel Elevation of a Secondary Frontage. No building or business may be allowed signage on the building elevation that is parallel to the freeway (including on-ramps or off-ramps);
b. Perpendicular Elevation of a Secondary Frontage. A building or business is allowed a wall sign with letters limited to a maximum height of two feet and length of 15 feet. The total sign area shall not exceed 30 square feet;
3. The following definitions apply for purposes of this restriction only:
a. Parallel Elevation. An elevation at an angle of 45 degrees or less relative to I-90;
b. Perpendicular Elevation. An elevation at an angle greater than 45 degrees but less than 110 degrees relative to I-90;
c. Primary Frontage. The side of the building providing the main vehicle and/or pedestrian access, and/or the business’s primary orientation as determined by the Director;
d. Secondary Frontage. The side of the building other than the main vehicle and/or pedestrian access, as determined by the Director.
E. Sign Incentives.
1. Incentive No. 1 for Multisided and Multi-Entry Ground Level Businesses.
a. Incentive and Sign Placement.
(1) Businesses that meet all of the criteria in this subsection (E)(1) may have two building-mounted primary signs and up to two secondary signs as follows:
(A) If a business has three or more façades, for each façade that does not have a primary sign, one secondary sign is allowed per façade, up to a total of two secondary signs; or
(B) If the business has only two façades, the secondary sign may be placed on a façade with one of the primary signs.
(2) Each primary sign must be located on the façade where the pedestrian entry is located and is calculated as specified in Table 18.612.080(F), Primary Sign Maximum Sign Area.
b. To qualify for Incentive No. 1, a business must meet all of the following criteria:
(1) The business faces two or more streets or the public realm;
(2) The business has pedestrian-oriented entries on two different sides of the building, each of which faces a street or public realm; and
(3) Both pedestrian-oriented entries must be open during regular business hours and be designed to draw the pedestrian’s attention to each entry’s presence by, for example, changes in weather protection (higher or lower than adjacent weather protection), changes in building plane (building projecting or being set in), changes in building materials, or changes in building height (a tower). The pedestrian-oriented entries may open into the same foyer, or room if they are distinctly located on different sides of the building with the architectural treatment described above.
2. Incentive No. 2 for Multi-Entry Ground Level Businesses.
a. Incentive, Sign Placement, and Sign Size.
(1) Businesses which meet all the criteria in this subsection (E)(2) may have two building-mounted primary signs and up to two secondary signs as follows:
(A) If a business has two or more façades, for each façade that does not have a primary sign, one secondary sign is allowed per façade, up to a total of two secondary signs; or
(B) If the business has only one façade, one secondary sign may be placed on the façade with the two primary signs.
(2) Each sign shall be located near the pedestrian entry.
(3) The sum of the two primary sign sizes does not exceed the total primary sign size as specified in Table 18.612.080(F), Primary Sign Maximum Sign Area.
b. To qualify for Incentive No. 2, a business must meet all of the following criteria:
(1) The business’s portion of the façade is a minimum of 100 feet in length;
(2) The business’s entrances face a street or the public realm;
(3) The business has two pedestrian entries significantly separated from each other (a minimum of 50 percent of the business’s façade length);
(4) Both entries are open during regular business hours.
c. An applicant who qualifies may use both Incentive No. 1 and Incentive No. 2.
F. Sign Size. The primary sign may not exceed the following maximum sign area as indicated in Table 18.612.080(F), except when the size is specified by its sign design type to be smaller than specified in the table; for example, monument signs. Secondary and additional sign sizes are specified with the specific sign design type. The calculation of sign area for an individual business must be related to the portion of the building façade owned or leased by that business and the wall on which the sign is attached. The façade area is calculated by multiplying the relevant façade length by the relevant façade height which is determined by the finished grade and the cornice line or eave line if the roof is not flat.
Table 18.612.080(F). Primary Sign Maximum Sign Area
Facade Area (Square Feet) | Maximum Sign Area (Square Feet) |
|---|---|
0 – 100 | 15 |
101 – 199 | 25 |
200 – 1,499 | The larger of seven percent of the facade to which the sign is attached or 30 square feet, up to a maximum of 100 square feet |
1,500 – 2,999 | The larger of five percent of the facade to which the sign is attached or 100 square feet, up to a maximum of 150 square feet |
3,000 or greater | The larger of four percent of the facade to which the sign is attached or 150 square feet, up to a maximum of 200 square feet |
G. Permanent accessory uses are considered permanent commercial uses and must comply with the permanent and temporary commercial sign allowances and requirements. This includes accessory uses such as:
1. Food trucks or espresso drive-throughs on a property;
2. Car wash, convenience store, and/or restaurant with an automobile fuel station.
H. Multisided signs and their sign structure must be finished on all visible sides.
I. Sign Height and Clearance.
1. Except when the height is further restricted by the sign design type, maximum sign height shall not extend above the roof and shall be no more than 65 feet above building grade except when the sign is a corporate identification sign.
2. Signs that are allowed to extend over a walkway or area where there may be pedestrians present, including into the right-of-way, must maintain at least eight feet clearance between the walkway and the bottom of the sign and its sign structure. Figure 18.612.080(I)(2) is an example of signs that may extend into the right-of-way and the necessary clearance.
Figure 18.612.080(I)(2). Example of Signs in Right-of-Way and Clearance

J. Sign Location and Placement. The following sign placement standards apply to all permanent sign types in this chapter:
1. The primary signs must be placed on the primary street frontage providing pedestrian access except when the Director determines another configuration better serves the public.
2. Signs may be placed on any street frontage facing the public realm or a transportation facility excluding alleys, except if another placement is specifically allowed by the sign design type.
3. Where a business has no entrance or exterior street frontage on a public or private street, the Director may approve one wall sign on one exterior wall of the building space used by that business. With approval by the building owner, a business with no street frontage must be allowed one sign that is maximum of 15 square feet in size for their business name and/or logo. Each sign counts toward the maximum sign area allowed on that street frontage. For example, a grocery store with an internal pharmacy, bank, separate restaurant, and/or espresso stand.
4. All permanent commercial signs intended to be placed or allowed on site must be wholly within the property consistent with the requirements of this chapter, or as allowed by Chapter 12.05 IMC, Sidewalk Use District.
5. Permanent commercial signs may be placed in right-of-way only if specifically allowed by sign design type, as identified within IMC 18.612.060.
6. Except when allowed to be in the right-of-way, the sign must be placed entirely outside of the transportation facility; and in no case may signs extend into the area intended for vehicular travel. Where no curb exists, the sign must be placed outside the roadway at least 10 feet from the roadway edge or consistent with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
7. Minimum Setback Requirements for Public or Private Facilities.
a. Out of the sight distance triangle of intersections and driveways as described in IMC 18.612.180(B);
b. Ten feet from any driveway, alley, or vehicle access point;
c. Two feet from any curb or roadway edge;
d. Two feet from any pedestrian sidewalk or ADA accessible path;
e. Five feet from any building access point if not attached to the building.
8. The sign shall not obstruct or impinge on pedestrian or accessible routes to or along the public or private sidewalk or encroach into the minimum clear pathway area of 48 inches in width.
9. The sign location shall not interfere with the opening of car doors, use of bicycle parking facilities, bus stops, loading zones, or other similar functions.
10. Signs shall not create a hazard to either pedestrians or motorists as determined by the Director. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. List of Permanent Commercial Sign Design Types Allowed With a Permit (Except as Prohibited Under This Chapter or Other Title 18 Standard).
1. Awning, canopy, wall, window signs;
2. Monument signs;
3. Projection and pedestrian-oriented signs;
4. Community facility signs;
5. Automobile fueling station signs;
6. Marquee signs;
7. Corporate identification signs;
8. Follow-through signs;
9. Business district kiosk signs.
B. Awning, Canopy, Wall, Window Signs.
1. Examples of Awning Signs in Figure 18.612.090(B)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(1). Examples of Awning Signs
![]() Awning as a Primary or Secondary Sign | ![]() Awning as an Additional Sign |
|---|
2. Examples of Awning Edge in Figure 18.612.090(B)(2).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(2). Examples of Awning Edge

3. Examples of Canopy Signs in Figure 18.612.090(B)(3).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(3). Examples of Canopy Sign

4. Examples of Canopy Edge in Figure 18.612.090(B)(4).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(4). Examples of Canopy Edge

5. Examples of Wall Signs in Figure 18.612.090(B)(5).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(5). Examples of Wall Signs
![]() Externally Lit Wall Sign | ![]() Individually Lit Letters Forming a Wall Sign |
|---|
6. Examples of Window Signs in Figure 18.612.090(B)(6).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(6). Examples of Window Signs
![]() Window Signs and Decals, Covering Less Than 50 Percent of the Windows | ![]() Additional Window Sign |
|---|
C. Awning, Canopy, Wall, Window Signs Are Allowed as Specified in Table 18.612.090(C).
Table 18.612.090(C). Awning, Canopy, Wall, Window Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF and if allowed by subsection H of this section | See below | Primary | 1 except window; see below | IMC 18.612.080(F) | 1 | IMC 18.612.080(I) |
Secondary | 1 except window; see below | 30 sq. ft. | 1 | IMC 18.612.080(I) | ||
Additional | See below | See below | 1 | See below |
D. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Awning, Canopy, Wall, and Window Signs.
1. Maximum Number of Primary and Secondary Signs. See incentives in IMC 18.612.080(E) and restrictions for the maximum number of primary and secondary signs in IMC 18.612.080(D).
2. Illumination. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination information, and subsection (E)(4) of this section for specific illumination related to awning, canopy, wall, and window primary and secondary signs.
E. Other Requirements for and Information Related Only to Awning and Canopy Signs.
1. If multiple awnings or canopies are present, an awning or canopy sign may be either a primary sign or a secondary sign. In all cases, the primary and secondary signs must be on separate awnings or canopies.
2. If an awning or canopy is used for an additional sign:
a. Maximum Number of Total Signs and Placement.
(1) One sign per awning or canopy edge is allowed parallel to the façade, where the awning or canopy is not used as primary or secondary sign;
(2) One sign per any awning or canopy edge perpendicular to the façade.
b. Maximum Area per Sign Face. The maximum area is determined by a maximum letter or logo height of six inches.
3. Permitted Location and Placement.
a. Awnings and canopies may be on site or extend into the right-of-way. Awnings and canopies attached to on-site buildings and structures may extend into the right-of-way consistent with Chapter 12.04 IMC or as allowed by special use permit in Chapter 5.14 IMC;
b. Canopy signs are allowed on and above the face of the canopy;
c. Maximum Height. Must be placed on awnings or canopies associated with ground floor windows.
4. Illumination.
a. Awnings and canopy signs may be externally illuminated; no internal illumination which is visible through or above the awning or canopy is allowed;
b. Canopy signs may have external illumination, channel letters, halo-style illumination, or similar.
5. The following definitions apply for purposes of this section:
a. Awning. An architectural projection roofed with flexible material supported from an exterior wall of a building and/or other sign structure;
b. Canopy. A permanent, rigid architectural projection supported from an exterior wall of a building and/or other structure;
c. Edge, Awning or Canopy. The vertical edge of an awning or canopy, generally parallel or perpendicular to the façade.
6. Other Requirements for and Information Related Only to Wall Signs.
a. When a Wall Sign Is an Additional Sign.
(1) Allowed only as multibusiness wall signs;
(2) Maximum number of total signs and placement: one per street frontage with a maximum of two allowed;
(3) Maximum area per sign face is 16 square feet;
(4) Permitted location: must be entirely on site;
(5) Maximum height: no higher than 10 feet above the ground.
b. Location and Placement of Wall Signs.
(1) Primary and secondary signs: wall signs may extend up to 12 inches into the right-of-way but must comply with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards;
(2) Wall signs may not extend more than 12 inches from the building façade on which they are installed;
(3) Awning and canopy signs must located on the ground floor and associated with the subject business.
c. Signs standing out horizontally from a mansard roof are considered wall signs; however, they may not extend vertically above the top of the mansard.
d. Painted Wall Sign. Only the portion of a painted wall sign or mural that contains a logo, trademark, or other commercial message is governed by the requirements of this chapter and a painted border is not included in the overall dimensional size limitations.
e. Definitions. A multibusiness wall sign is an on-site sign that identifies tenants and may identify the building name for a multibusiness development. Also known as tenant directory sign.
7. Other Requirements for and Information Related Only to Window Signs.
a. Maximum Number.
(1) The combination of all window signs (temporary, permanent, primary, secondary, additional) shall not exceed 25 percent of the total window area on any façade. The combination of all graphics, artwork, photos, and decorations shall not exceed an additional 25 percent, for a total of 50 percent of the window area on any façade, except when a space is empty, unoccupied, or under construction. If a space is empty, unoccupied, or under construction, then its windows may be fully obscured through art, decoration, or graphics. Window signs such as open/closed, store hours, address, and other necessary directional and informational signs are exempt from total sign area limitations;
(2) Window signs as additional signs shall not exceed the façade’s linear footage divided by 20 (for example, a 60-foot façade could have up to three window signs: 60 linear feet of façade divided by 20 feet per window sign equals three window signs).
b. When a Window Sign Is an Additional Sign.
(1) Maximum Area per Sign Face. Maximum area is established by a maximum letter size or logo height of 12 inches;
(2) Position/Maximum Height. For window that a business has facing public realm or transportation facility, excluding alleys, the business may have a window sign as an additional sign.
c. Permitted Location. Primary, secondary, additional window signs must be entirely on site.
F. Monument Signs.
1. Examples of Monument Signs in Figure 18.612.090(F)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(F)(1). Examples of Monument Signs
![]() Individual Business Monument Sign | ![]() Multibusiness Monument Sign |
|---|
2. General Standards for Monument Signs.
a. Location and Placement. See sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J);
b. Maximum Area per Sign Face. Neither the portion of the sign structure providing support, nor the frame, are counted when determining the square footage of the sign;
c. Maximum Height. Overall sign height includes the frame or sign structure on which it is mounted;
d. Illumination. The sign may have exterior illumination only, regardless of the area or zone in which the monument sign is located. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination information.
3. Monument signs with business and commercial activities are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(F)(3).
Table 18.612.090(F)(3). Business and Commercial Monument Signs
Monument Sign Use Areas | How Allowed | Where Sign Is Allowed by Business Configuration | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Outside of Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, Talus, and CBD zone | Allowed outright | Individual business | On site | See below | See below | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet |
Multibusiness | 50 sq. ft. | 10 feet | ||||||
Within Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, Talus | Prohibited, except as allowed below | Individual business | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | ||
Multibusiness | 50 sq. ft. | |||||||
In CBD | Prohibited, except as allowed below | In SF home | 1 | 15 sq. ft. | 2 | 5 feet | ||
Multibusiness | 25 sq. ft. | 10 feet |
a. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Business and Commercial Monument Signs.
(1) Sign Category and Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(A) Individual business monument signs are primary or secondary signs. Up to one primary sign and one secondary monument sign may be permitted if a monument sign is allowed in Table 18.612.090(F)(3) or in subsection (F)(3)(b) of this section. An individual business is located on a separate lot and not legally part of a multibusiness development.
(B) Multibusiness development monument signs are primary signs used to identify the development and some or all of its tenants or occupants. Up to one primary monument sign may be permitted, if a monument sign is allowed in Table 18.612.090(F)(3) or in subsection (F)(3)(b) of this section. Monument signs may not be used as a secondary sign. Tenants and occupants may have their own signs, but they may not be monument signs in a multibusiness development.
b. Conditions of Placement for Monument Signs in Certain Areas of the City.
(1) Monument Signs in Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, Talus, and Cultural and Business District (CBD) After the Adoption of This Chapter.
(A) A monument sign, legally in place before the adoption of this chapter, is an allowed sign and may remain, be maintained, have its structure or sign face replaced, and undergo a name change until such time as the building or business is demolished. The monument sign may be replaced prior to demolition; however, the replaced monument sign must comply with the monument sign use area standards regarding location, maximum area, maximum number of faces, and maximum height in this section. This provision supersedes the limitations in IMC 18.612.150, Nonconforming signs.
(B) If a building is demolished, or in Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus, if a single-family subdivision is redeveloped, the monument sign must be eliminated, and other signs must be used; except if during development or redevelopment, and prior to certificate of occupancy, the Director issues a written determination that the building is not placed close to and sufficiently visible from the street, then a monument sign may be warranted to identify the business or development.
(C) If allowed under subsection (A) or (B) of this section, a monument sign must be a primary sign.
(D) New monument signs are prohibited in Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus.
(2) Monument Signs in Cultural and Business District Zone (CBD) After the Adoption of This Chapter.
(A) Any existing development that contains multiple buildings and multiple retail tenants may elect to have one monument sign, until such time as the existing development is demolished.
(B) Where an existing house is set back from the street and used for a home business one monument sign may be permitted, until such time as the existing house is demolished.
4. Monument signs associated with residential projects (single-family subdivision or multifamily development with one or multiple buildings) are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(F)(4).
Table 18.612.090(F)(4). Residential Monument Signs
Monument Sign Use Areas | How Allowed | Where Sign Is Allowed by Residence Type | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Outside of Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, Talus, and CBD zone | Allowed outright | Single- family subdivision; multifamily | On site | See below | See below | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet |
Within Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, Talus | Prohibited | Single- family subdivision | – | – | – | – | – | |
Allowed conditionally; see below | Multifamily | On site | See below | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | ||
In CBD zone | Prohibited | – | – | – | – | – | – |
a. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Residential Monument Signs.
(1) Sign Category and Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(A) Monument signs for single-family subdivisions do not have a sign category; they are other signs. If they are allowed in Table 18.612.090(F)(4) and in subsection (F)(5) of this section, there may be one per vehicular entry, placed near that entry.
(B) Monument signs for a multifamily building or development may be a primary sign, if they are allowed in Table 18.612.090(F)(4) and in subsection (F)(5) of this section. One primary monument sign is allowed for a multifamily building or development.
5. Monument signs for neighborhoods or districts are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(F)(5).
Table 18.612.090(F)(5). Neighborhood/District Monument Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs per Neigh. or District Entrance | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All areas | Right-of-way or on site | Other, monument | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet |
a. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Neighborhood or District Monument Signs.
(1) Sign Category. Neighborhood/district monument signs do not have a sign category; they are other signs.
(2) Monument signs may be permitted for a recognized neighborhood or commercial district.
(3) The monument sign must be designed to establish the neighborhood or commercial district. For example, it must be consistent in material, color, mountings, and text style.
G. Projection and Pedestrian-Oriented Signs. Projection sign is a sign that is wholly or partly dependent upon a building for support and that projects more than 12 inches from such building. Pedestrian-oriented sign is a permanent, nonilluminated sign, the primary purpose of which is to provide information for pedestrians and bicyclists. Blade signs are an example of a pedestrian-oriented sign.
1. An example of projection sign is in Figure 18.612.090(G)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(G)(1). Example of Projection Sign

2. An example of pedestrian-oriented sign is in Figure 18.612.090(G)(2).
Figure 18.612.090(G)(2). Example of Pedestrian-Oriented Sign

3. Projection and pedestrian-oriented signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(G)(3).
Table 18.612.090(G)(3). Projection and Pedestrian-Oriented Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF and if allowed by subsection H of this section | See below | Primary; see below | 1 | See IMC 18.612.080(F) | 2 | See IMC 18.612.080(I) |
Secondary; see below | 1 | 30 sq. ft. | 2 | See IMC 18.612.080(I) | ||
Additional; see below | See below | 4 sq. ft. | 2 | 12 feet |
4. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Projection and Pedestrian-Oriented Signs.
a. Sign Category. Projection signs are primary and secondary signs. Pedestrian-oriented signs are additional signs.
b. Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(1) For incentives on the maximum number of primary and secondary signs, see subsection E of this section;
(2) For restrictions on the maximum number of primary and secondary signs, see subsection D of this section;
(3) One pedestrian-oriented sign per business for each façade facing a transportation facility, including alleys when a public pedestrian entry to the business is from an alley, and the entry is open and accessible during business hours.
c. The two faces of the projection or pedestrian-oriented sign must be parallel to each other.
d. Location and Placement.
(1) Projection and pedestrian-oriented signs attached to on-site buildings may extend into the right-of-way consistent with Chapters 12.04 and 12.05 IMC or as allowed by special use permit in Chapter 5.14 IMC. They may also be fully on site;
(2) Minimum setback must be two feet from curb or edge of vehicular surface;
(3) Projection sign may not extend above the parapet or eave except when the projection sign is for a cinema or theater. In all cases, a projection sign must be limited to 65 feet or the base building height in the zone;
(4) Projection signs may extend outward up to 75 percent of the width of the abutting sidewalk but no more than six feet from the wall they are mounted on;
(5) Pedestrian-oriented signs may not project beyond the awning, canopy, or marquee;
(6) See general sign location and placement information in subsection IMC 18.612.080(J).
e. Illumination. May be externally illuminated; no internal illumination is allowed. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination standards.
H. Community Facilities Signs.
1. An example of a community facilities sign is in Figure 18.612.090(H)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(H)(1). Example of Community Facilities Monument Sign With Readerboard

2. Community facility signs are allowed as specified in Tables 18.612.090(H)(2)(a) and 18.612.090(H)(2)(b).
Table 18.612.090(H)(2)(a). Community Facilities Signs Associated With a Building as the Primary Use
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
CF-OS, CF-R, CF-F, CF-OSPO, CF-RPO, CF-FPO | On site | Primary: monument | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | Sign structure and sign: 10 feet |
See below | Other primary: wall, projection, window | 2 – 3 | Subsection (A)(5) of this section | 1 – 2 See below | Subsection (A)(8) of this section | |
CF-OS, CF-R, CF-F | – | Readerboard portion | 1 | 24 sq. ft. | 1 – 2 See below | – |
Table 18.612.090(H)(2)(b). Community Facilities Signs Not Associated With a Building Except as an Accessory Use
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
CF-OS, CF-R, CF-F, CF-OSPO, CF-RPO, CF-FPO | On site | Other, see below; Monument | See below | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet |
CF-OS, CF-R, CF-F | – | Other, readerboard portion | 1 | 24 sq. ft. | 1 – 2 See below | – |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Community Facilities Signs.
a. Community Facilities (CF) Parcels With Buildings as a Primary Use.
(1) Sign Category. Community facilities monument signs and other primary signs (wall, window, projection signs) are each treated as primary signs for the purposes of sizing each primary sign. Community facilities may not use secondary signs but may select from any additional sign identified and allowed in this section.
(2) Maximum Number of Total Signs. May have a total of up to three primary signs per building. The three primary signs may be either a monument sign and two other primary signs or three other primary signs.
(3) Any additional sign selected must follow the standards for that additional sign in this section.
(4) Maximum number of sign faces and standards for other primary signs must follow the standards for that sign design type in subsection D of this section (wall or window signs), or subsection F of this section (projection signs).
b. Community Facilities (CF) Parcels Without a Building, Except as an Accessory Use.
(1) Sign Category. When a community facility does not have a building, such as a park or sports field except accessory uses such as a bathroom building or a picnic shelter, the signs do not have a sign category and are considered other signs;
(2) Maximum Number of Total Signs. The maximum number is one monument sign per each parcel side fronting on a transportation facility or public realm;
(3) The sign design type is monument sign.
c. A Community Facilities Readerboard Sign.
(1) The maximum area per sign face for the readerboard portion of the sign is a portion of the monument sign, or other primary sign face, that a readerboard may use; it is not additive.
(2) Maximum Number of Sign Faces for a Readerboard, as a Part of Another Sign. The readerboard may have the same number of faces as the sign it is a part of, which is two faces with a monument sign or projection sign and one face with a wall or window sign.
(3) A readerboard shall not be a separate sign. It must be a portion of a monument sign or other primary sign.
Readerboard signs may be electronic or manual; however, electronic readerboards are not allowed with privately owned community facilities signs.
d. A Community Facilities Monument Sign. Community facilities monument signs must follow subsection F of this section, Monument Signs.
e. An electronic readerboard sign must meet the following requirements:
(1) The signs must be designed and placed to prevent light and glare from being visible to adjacent residential properties;
(2) The signs must dim during twilight and night hours to reduce glare and must be turned off during night hours. Night hours are between 10:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m.;
(3) The display must include only static text and/or static graphics. No moving graphics, or animations such as flying or fading, video, or blinking/pulsing/strobe effects are allowed; and
(4) Each message and/or graphic must be displayed for at least 10 seconds. The change from one message/graphic to the next may utilize a scrolling or wipe effect, but the effect may not take more than one second to complete.
f. Location and Placement.
(1) Other Primary Signs, Wall, Window, and Projection Signs Used With a Community Facilities Building. Location of community facilities signs, either on site or in the right-of-way, must follow the standards for that sign design type in subsection C of this section (wall and/or window signs) or subsection G of this section (projection signs);
(2) Community Facilities Monument Signs. Shall not be located closer than two feet from any property line and must comply with any other applicable setbacks;
(3) See sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J).
g. Illumination. A monument sign may be externally illuminated; no internal illumination is allowed, except for the portion of the sign that is an electronic readerboard. A manual readerboard may not be backlit. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination standards.
I. Automobile Fueling Station Signs. Fueling stations are businesses selling motor fuel or alternative fuels (for example, electric vehicle charging) to the public. A fuel price sign is a nonmovable sign advertising the price of motor fuel.
1. Example of Fueling Station Sign in Figure 18.612.090(I)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(I)(1). Example of Fueling Station Sign

2. Automobile fueling station signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(I)(2).
Table 18.612.090(I)(2). Automobile Fueling Station Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs per Street Frontage | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Fueling station as primary land use | On site | Other, monument | 1 | 50 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet |
Other, pole | 15 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | |||
Fueling station as primary or secondary land use | Other, fuel price sign portion | 1 total | 15 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | |
Other, signs on fueling station canopy are wall signs | 1 | See below | 1 | See below |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Automobile Fueling Station Signs.
a. Sign Category. Automobile fueling station signs are not primary, secondary, or additional signs; they are other signs. Automobile fueling station signs are the only signs allowed with this use, except if there are accessory uses at the fueling station such as convenience stores, restaurants or other retail, self-service car washes, and service bays for vehicle service and repair. See IMC 18.612.080(G) regarding signs for these permanent accessory uses.
b. Automobile fueling station canopies are regulated by this subsection I, and no other regulations related to signs on canopies apply to fueling station sites, except as allowed by subsection (I)(3)(a) of this section.
c. Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(1) One monument or pole sign is allowed per fueling station street frontage;
(2) Only one fuel price sign is allowed per fueling station and it must be integrated with the monument or pole sign. See IMC 18.612.050, Prohibited signs, regarding movable fuel price signs.
d. Signs on Fueling Station Canopy, Whether the Fueling Station Is a Primary or Secondary Use.
(1) Maximum Area per Sign Face. The maximum area per sign face is determined by the use of letters and/or logo no more than two feet in height.
(2) Maximum Height. The maximum height is determined by the height of the fueling station canopy on which the letters and/or logo are being placed. The letters and logo may not extend above the edge of the fueling station canopy roof or eave if the roof is sloped.
e. Fueling Station as Secondary Use.
(1) Examples of a fueling station as a secondary use are when a grocery or big-box store has a fueling station in addition to its primary use of grocery or big-box store and there is no intervening public right-of-way between the grocery or big-box store and the fueling station.
(2) The sign for the secondary use may be incorporated with the monument sign of the primary use; however, in no instance may the fuel price sign itself exceed the size, number of faces, and sign height limitations shown in Table 18.612.090(I)(2).
f. Location and Placement.
(1) Monument or pole signs must be at least two feet from any property line;
(2) Fueling station canopy signs must be on the face of the fueling station canopy covering the pump island(s);
(3) See sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J).
g. Illumination. All signs may be illuminated signs. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination standards.
J. Marquee Signs. A marquee is a permanent structure or canopy located above the primary entrance to a building, such as a theater, that projects over the sidewalk and is attached to, and entirely supported from, the street wall of the building. A marquee sign can also be a sign painted on or attached to a permanent overhanging marquee sign structure which projects from the face of a building.
1. An example of a marquee sign is in Figure 18.612.090(J)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(J)(1). Example of Marquee Sign and Changeable Copy

2. Marquee signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(J)(2).
Table 18.612.090(J)(2). Marquee Signs
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Mixed-use and nonresidential areas: CBD, IC, IC-CI, M, MU, MU-CI, MUR, PO, UC, UV-COM, UV-MUR-H, UV-MUR-T, UV-O, UV-RET, UV-VC, VR | See below | Primary | 1 | See IMC 18.612.080(F) | 2 | See below |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Marquee Signs.
a. Sign Category. A marquee sign is considered the primary sign of the business. A marquee shall not be used as a secondary sign.
b. Location, Placement, and Maximum Height of Marquee Signs.
(1) A marquee sign may extend into the right-of-way consistent with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards;
(2) May extend above the parapet or roof but shall not be taller than 65 feet or the allowed base building height in the area of the City in which it is located;
(3) See sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J).
c. Changeable Copy Portion of the Marquee.
(1) Letter sizing shall not exceed 12 inches in height;
(2) Shall not extend beyond, below, or be attached to the underside of the marquee.
d. Illumination. The marquee sign may only be externally illuminated. The changeable copy portion of the marquee may be backlit. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination standards.
K. Corporate Identification Signs. The purpose of a corporate identification sign is to identify one significant tenant within a building. A building owner may allow a corporate identification sign at the upper levels of a high-rise building if the sign is on a high-rise structure that is at least 10 stories tall and the high-rise structure contains the single use of a hotel, motel, or hospital; or the sign is for an enterprise that is an anchor tenant in the building.
1. An example of corporate identification sign is in Figure 18.612.090(K)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(K)(1). Example of Corporate Identification Sign

2. Corporate identification signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(K)(2).
Table 18.612.090(K)(2). Corporate Identification Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
On a high-rise structure; see below | On site | Other, wall | 2 | 200 sq. ft. | 1 | See below |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Corporate Identification Signs.
a. Sign Category. A corporate identification sign is not a primary, secondary, or additional sign; they are other signs. However, the tenant/owner for whom the corporate identification sign is permitted may have all other signage allowed by this chapter as primary, secondary, additional, and temporary signage.
b. Maximum Sign Height and Position of Corporate Identification Sign(s) and Other Permitted Signage.
(1) Corporate identification signs shall not project above the top or beyond the edge of the wall or element to which they are affixed;
(2) A corporate identification sign is located at the top of the building, not necessarily in relationship to the location of the tenant’s leased space;
(3) If a building owner and tenant determine that two corporate identification signs are necessary, the two signs must be on different façades and they must be oriented to face I-90 and/or SR-900, and not Cougar or Squak Mountains;
(4) All the other signage must be located at ground/transportation facility level.
c. Corporate identification signs must be mounted to the building with a mounting system that is not visible beyond the edges of the sign elements.
L. Follow-Through Signs. A follow-through sign is a sign which is required to be placed in the City right-of-way by the Washington State Department of Transportation Motorist Information Sign Program and is designed to direct travelers to gas, food, lodging, camping, recreation, tourist activities, and 24-hour pharmacies.
1. Examples of follow-through signs are in Figure 18.612.090(L)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(L)(1). Examples of Follow-Through Signs
![]() Single Information on a Follow-Through Sign | ![]() Co-Located Information on a Follow-Through Sign |
|---|
2. Follow-through signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(L)(2).
Table 18.612.090(L)(2). Follow-Through Signs
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Mixed-use and nonresidential areas: CBD, CF-F, CF-FPO, IC, IC-CI, M, MU, MU-CI, MUR, PO, UC, UV-COM, UV-MUR-H, UV-MUR-T, UV-O, UV-RET, UV-VC, VR Multifamily: MF-H | Right-of-way | Additional | See below | See below | 2 | See below |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Follow-Through Signs.
a. Follow-through signs are allowed only where Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) has approved a sign as part of the WSDOT Motorist Information Sign Program within their right-of-way jurisdiction.
b. Maximum Number of Total Signs. The maximum number of signs is the minimum number necessary to comply with WSDOT’s requirements.
c. Maximum Area per Sign Face. The maximum area per sign face is the minimum size necessary to comply with WSDOT’s requirements.
d. Maximum Sign Height. Maximum sign height of sign is per City street standards for street signs.
e. Manufacture of the sign and its installation must be by the applicant, following the City’s specifications.
f. Illumination. Ambient illumination only.
g. Location and Placement.
(1) Wherever possible, follow-through signs are co-located with other businesses on a follow-through sign rather than posted separately;
(2) See sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J).
M. Business District Kiosk Signs. A business district kiosk is a sign used to assist pedestrians, bicyclists, and drivers in locating businesses within a neighborhood. Business district kiosks are allowed on private and public property for the purpose of locating a business.
1. Examples of business district kiosk signs are in Figure 18.612.090(M)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(M)(1). Example of Business District Kiosk Signs
![]() Pedestrian Scale Business District Kiosk Shown Overall | ![]() Pedestrian Scale Business District Kiosk Shown Closeup | ![]() Example of a Circular Kiosk |
|---|
2. Examples of business district kiosk sided signs are in Figure 18.612.090(M)(2).
Figure 18.612.090(M)(2). Example of Business District Kiosk Sided Signs
![]() Two-Sided Business District Kiosk | ![]() Four-Sided Business District Kiosk |
|---|
3. Business district kiosk signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(M)(3).
Table 18.612.090(M)(3). Business District Kiosk Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Kiosk | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Sidewalk use districts established in Chapter 12.05 IMC | On site or right-of-way | Additional | See below | See below | 4 | 10 feet |
4. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Business District Kiosk Signs.
a. Maximum Number of Total Signs and Placement. Prior to submitting for a sign permit, a master business district kiosk plan must be submitted and approved. In a master business district kiosk plan, an applicant must propose locations demonstrating compliance with all the location criteria below and in Chapter 12.05 IMC, Sidewalk Use District. The locations of the master business district kiosk plan to ensure locations are appropriate and meet all of the following criteria:
(1) Placed at key intersections or decision points, and designed predominantly for pedestrians and bicyclists but useful to drivers as well;
(2) Sited to facilitate use by both pedestrians and vehicles, such as in the planting strip between the curb and sidewalk;
(3) Located to allow for door swings, vehicular sight lines, and pedestrian routes, and similar functional considerations, when locating them; and
(4) Meet other sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J).
b. Maximum Area per Sign Face.
(1) An individual sign for each business within the kiosk is limited to 0.75 square feet on sides oriented to and for pedestrian use. Letter size must be no larger than five inches in height.
(2) The applicant may request the use of 12-inch-tall letters/logo on sides oriented to vehicles. Where this larger letter/logo size is allowed, each sign panel with the larger letter/logo size may be no more than three feet in length. A proposal use of the larger letter size must meet all the following criteria:
(A) The 12-inch letter/logo size will be considered where vehicular volumes, speeds, and number of travel lanes are such that larger letters/logos may be necessary for safe viewing; two-lane roads, one in each direction, with travel speeds at or below 30 miles per hour do not qualify.
(B) If the larger letter/logo size is approved for use, a multisided kiosk must be used to ensure that there is at least one pedestrian-oriented side and one vehicular-oriented side.
(C) No more than two sides may use the larger letters/logo. At least one side of the kiosk must be for pedestrian use.
(3) A kiosk may also include a sponsor’s name and logo which are limited to six inches in height, one per each side of the kiosk. On circular kiosks, two names/logos are permitted.
(4) Kiosk sides may also be used for maps and noncommercial information.
c. Business district kiosk signs located on the public right-of-way require a sign permit, a master business district kiosk plan, and may require a building permit, depending on the design of the kiosk and as determined by the building official.
d. Business district kiosk signs may only include maps, noncommercial information, business name and logos, directional arrows, and distances.
e. Illumination. Ambient illumination only. (Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. General Standards for Temporary Commercial Signs. The following provisions apply to all temporary commercial signs placed within the City:
1. Permit. No permit is required but certain temporary commercial signs require a temporary sign agreement. See each sign design type in IMC 18.612.110 regarding whether a sign requires a temporary sign agreement and IMC 18.612.160 for temporary sign agreement standards.
2. Fee. No fee is required to place temporary commercial signs in the City.
3. Temporary Commercial Sign Materials and Construction.
a. Temporary signs must be constructed of any material durable enough to withstand rain, wind, and normal wear and tear for the anticipated use, and must conform to the other requirements of this chapter;
b. Temporary signs must be maintained in an aesthetic and safe condition;
c. Temporary signs may not be an electric sign and may not be an illuminated sign;
d. Temporary signs may not move or vibrate, emit noise, or be animated or have changing images.
4. Duration. The length of time each sign is permitted is listed in IMC 18.612.110. Any temporary sign that is specific to an event must be removed within five days of the end of the event.
5. Restrictions. No temporary commercial signs may be placed in the area restricted by IMC 18.612.080(D).
6. Height. Specific sign heights are listed in IMC 18.612.130. In no case are temporary signs to extend above the roofline and be higher than 65 feet above the grade regardless of building height.
7. Sign Placement.
a. Temporary commercial signs may be placed in the right-of-way only if specifically allowed in IMC 18.612.110;
b. All temporary commercial signs intended to be placed or allowed on site must be wholly within the property consistent with the requirements of this chapter;
c. Except when allowed to be in the right-of-way, the sign must be placed entirely outside of the transportation facility; and in no case may signs extend into the area intended for vehicular travel. Where no curb exists, the sign must be placed outside the roadway a minimum 10 feet from the roadway edge or consistent with the City’s roadway safety requirements;
d. Minimum Setback Requirements for Public or Private Facilities.
(1) Out of the sight distance triangle of intersections and driveways as described in IMC 18.612.180;
(2) Ten feet from any driveway, alley, or vehicle access point;
(3) Two feet behind any curb or roadway edge;
(4) Two feet from any pedestrian sidewalk or ADA accessible path;
(5) Five feet from any building access point if not attached to the building.
e. The sign shall not obstruct pedestrian or accessible routes to or along the public or private sidewalk or encroach into the minimum clear pathway area of 48 inches in width;
f. The sign shall not interfere with the opening of car doors, use of bicycle parking facilities, bus stops, or loading zones;
g. The sign must remain portable and shall not be attached or anchored to trees or to public property including, but not limited to, utility or light poles, parking meters, or pavement;
h. Signs are prohibited in, on, or within public or private medians, roundabouts, traffic circles, utility poles, lampposts (except banners as specified in this section), traffic poles and signals, and street trees;
i. Signs shall not create a hazard to either pedestrians or motorists as determined by the City Traffic Engineer.
B. Temporary Sign Agreement.
1. When required for certain temporary commercial signs, a sign number must be issued by the City prior to installation of the sign. By submitting the temporary sign agreement, an applicant acknowledges the applicable standards, including indemnification if signs are allowed in the right-of-way, and ensures compliance with any time limits. To determine if a temporary sign agreement is required for a temporary commercial sign, see the standards for the sign type above. Whether a temporary sign agreement is required or not, compliance with all standards listed for the specific sign must be met.
2. A temporary sign agreement authorizes the applicant to place the identified sign on the disclosed property or location for the allowed duration, starting from the date of issuance of a sign number. Any temporary commercial sign which requires a temporary sign agreement must properly display the issued sign number on the sign.
3. For signs allowed in the right-of-way that require a temporary sign agreement, the property identified on the temporary sign agreement must be the business address with which the sign is associated, such as for A-frames; or the address shown on the City of Issaquah business license, such as for outdoor vendors. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Temporary Commercial Signs. The following provisions apply to all temporary commercial signs placed in the City.
B. List of Temporary Commercial Sign Design Types.
1. A-frames;
2. Commercial banners on light poles;
3. Commercial banners on buildings;
4. Construction, contractor, or “coming soon” signs;
5. Garage sale signs;
6. Outdoor vendor signs;
7. Project real estate signs;
8. Residential unit real estate signs (for sale, lease or rent);
9. Real estate directional arrow signs;
10. Residential real estate open house signs;
11. Window signs.
C. A-Frame Signs.
1. An example of A-frame sign is in Figure 18.612.110(C)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(C)(1). Example of A-Frame Sign

2. Commercial A-frame signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(C)(2).
Table 18.612.110(C)(2). A-Frame Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Business/Tenant Space | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of A-Frame | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones | On site Right-of-way | 1 | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | 365 days | Is required |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to A-Frame Signs.
a. Signs must be present during the hours a business or service is open.
b. Sign Placement. In addition to IMC 18.612.100(A)(7) signs must adhere to the following:
(1) On Site. Must be on site, directly in front of or adjacent to the sponsoring business and on the property directly in front on the business, no farther than 20 feet from the primary public pedestrian entrance to the business and not in front of another business;
(2) In Right-of-Way. If the business meets the criteria below, one A-frame, up to 50 feet from the business’s primary entrance. The sign must be located the shortest distance between the sign and the entrance to the site or with a sight line to the business’s primary entrance. An A-frame is allowed in the right-of-way if the sign cannot be placed on the property directly abutting the sponsoring business and meets one of the following two criteria:
(A) The business is so close to the right-of-way that there is insufficient space to place the A-frame on site and within 20 feet of the primary public pedestrian entrance to the business; or
(B) The business is not within 20 feet of the right-of-way, and a sign placed on site and no more than 20 feet from the business’s primary public pedestrian entrance does not have a sight line from the sign to right-of-way.
D. Commercial Banners on Light Poles.
1. An example of commercial banners on light pole is in Figure 18.612.110(D)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(D)(1). Example of Pair of Commercial Banners on Light Pole

2. Commercial banners on light poles are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(D)(2).
Table 18.612.110(D)(2). Commercial Banners on Light Poles
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Banner Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF-F and CF-FPO | On site | See below | 10 sq. ft. on poles over 15 ft. 5 sq. ft. on poles up to 15 ft. | 2 | 90 days | Not required |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Commercial Banners on Light Poles.
a. Maximum Number of Total Signs. There may be up to two banners per pole.
b. Sign Placement. In addition to IMC 18.612.100(A)(7) signs must adhere to the following:
(1) Banners may not be higher than the light pole itself. This standard establishes maximum height of the sign.
(2) Banners must maintain a clearance of at least eight feet above areas where pedestrians are likely to be present.
c. Banners must be installed with permission of the light pole owner.
E. Commercial Banners on Buildings.
1. An example of a commercial banner on a building is in Figure 18.612.110(E)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(E)(1). Example of Commercial Banner on a Building

2. Commercial banners are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(E)(2).
Table 18.612.110(E)(2). Commercial Banner Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Business/ Tenant Space | Max. Area of Banner Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Banner Above Finished Grade | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF-F and CF-FPO | On site | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 1 | 30 feet | 30 days per calendar quarter per year | Is required |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Commercial Banners.
a. Sign Placement. In addition to IMC 18.612.100(A)(7) signs must adhere to the following:
(1) All commercial banners must be attached to the building housing the business and located on the side of the building that faces the street, or if the business does not face a street, then the primary entrance.
(2) The entire banner must be attached flush to the façade of the building, anchored at all four corners, and may not extend above the roofline or around the corner of a wall.
F. Construction, Contractor, or “Coming Soon” Signs. A construction, contractor, or “coming soon” sign is a temporary sign for informational purposes that identifies individuals or firms involved with the construction of a building or announcing the character of the building or enterprise, which is erected during the building construction period.
1. An example of construction or contractor sign is in Figure 18.612.110(F)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(F)(1). Example of Construction or Contractor Sign

2. An example of “coming soon” sign is in Figure 18.612.110(F)(2).
Figure 18.612.110(F)(2). Example of “Coming Soon” Sign

3. Construction/contractor or “coming soon” signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(F)(3).
Table 18.612.110(F)(3). Construction, Contractor or “Coming Soon” Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area of Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All zones | On site | See below | 32 sq. ft. | 1 | 10 feet | See below | Not required |
4. Requirements for and Information Related to Construction, Contractor, “Coming Soon” Signs.
a. Maximum Number of Total Signs. For a property or tenant space under construction, one construction, contractor, or “coming soon” sign per street frontage is allowed. If there is no street frontage, then one such sign per tenant space.
b. Duration. All construction, contractor, or “coming soon” signs allowed in this subsection may be in place while permits are active, and construction is ongoing. The sign must be removed from the site within 10 days of the cessation of excavation, construction, demolition, rehabilitation, structural alteration, or related work on site, or expiration of the construction permit(s).
c. Sign Placement. In addition to standards within IMC 18.612.100(A)(7), the sign must be located a minimum 10 feet from any adjoining property line and two feet behind the street property line.
G. Garage Sale Signs. A garage sale sign is a temporary sign advertising the sale of personal property used to dispose of personal household possessions and including sample sales. It is not for the use of any commercial venture. Garage sale signs are also known as yard sale, moving sale, or patio sale signs.
1. An example of a garage sale sign is in Figure 18.612.110(G)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(G)(1). Example of Garage Sale Sign

2. Garage sale signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(G)(2).
Table 18.612.110(G)(2). Garage Sale Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Garage Sale | Type of Sign | Max. Area of Stake/ Wire Frame Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement. |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All zones which include a residential use | Right-of-way | 4 | Stake/wire frame | 4 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | See below | Not required |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Garage Sale Signs.
a. The only type of sign that may be used for garage sale signs is stake/wire frame signs.
b. Duration. Signs may only be present for up to three days, associated with the sale, to assist with advertising and direction.
c. See sign placement in IMC 18.612.100(A)(7).
H. Outdoor Vendor Signs.
1. An example of an outdoor vendor sign is in Figure 18.612.110(H)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(H)(1). Example of Outdoor Vendor Sign

2. Outdoor vendor signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(H)(2).
Table 18.612.110(H)(2). Outdoor Vendor Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Business | Types of Signs | Max. Area per Banner or A-Frame Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Banner or A-Frame | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Where a permitted use | See below | Option 1 | See below | Is required | ||||
1 | Comm’l banner | 16 sq. ft. | 1 | 8 feet | ||||
1 | A-frame | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | ||||
Option 2 | ||||||||
2 | A-frame | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | ||||
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Outdoor Vendor Signs.
a. Outdoor vendor signs are used for food trucks, fruit or vegetable stands, tree stands, pop-up uses, accessory vending stands, and similar activities. On-site signage is allowed if the use is separate from the primary or permanent use(s) of the site.
b. The only types of signs that may be used for outdoor vendor signs are commercial banners or A-frame signs.
c. Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(1) For option one in Table 18.612.110(H)(2), the outdoor vendor may have either a vehicle with the business name parked as a sign (see IMC 18.612.050(P)) or a commercial banner.
(2) For option two in Table 18.612.110(H)(2), if two A-frames are present, no vehicle sign may be present or visible.
(3) Menu boards, without advertising and a logo no more than 15 percent of the sign face, and in compliance with A-frame size and sign height, are considered informational signs (see IMC 18.612.070(A)(3)(d)).
d. Duration. Sign duration follows the allowed duration of the business it is advertising.
e. Sign Placement. In addition to IMC 18.612.100(A)(7), signs associated with outdoor vendors allowed on site must be placed on site only. Signs associated with outdoor vendors allowed in the right-of-way must place signage in the right-of-way, in compliance with IMC 18.612.100(A)(7).
I. Project Real Estate Signs.
1. Examples of commercial project real estate signs are in Figure 18.612.110(I)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(I)(1). Examples of Commercial Project Real Estate Sign
![]() Commercial Project Real Estate Sign With Two Faces | ![]() Commercial Project Real Estate Sign With One Face |
|---|
2. Project real estate signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(I)(2).
Table 18.612.110(I)(2). Project Real Estate Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Entrance/ Street Frontage | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Residential property in all zones | On site | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | 365 days | Is required |
Commercial property in all zones | On site | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | 365 days | Is required |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Project Real Estate Signs.
a. Sign Purpose.
(1) Residential. Advertising the initial availability of lots and/or houses in a subdivision or units (condominiums) at the entrance of the development, while the lots or houses are for sale.
(2) Commercial. Advertising commercial or industrial property or building on the street frontage of the property, while the property or building is for sale, rent, or lease.
b. Duration. The applicant may request one extension of time, not to exceed six months, for any project real estate sign.
c. Sign Placement, in Addition to IMC 18.612.100(A)(7).
(1) The sign must be located more than 10 feet from any adjoining property line and two feet behind the street property line;
(2) If the sign is for a commercial property, the sign may be attached to the building or be freestanding.
J. Residential Unit Real Estate Signs (For Sale, Lease or Rent). A residential unit real estate sign (for sale, rent, lease) is an on-site sign advertising that the immediate residential property is for sale, rent, or lease.
1. An example of residential unit real estate sign is in Figure 18.612.110(J)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(J)(1). Example of Residential Unit Real Estate Sign

2. Residential unit real estate signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(J)(2).
Table 18.612.110(J)(2). Residential Unit Real Estate Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Street Frontage | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Residential property in all zones | On site | 1 | 2 | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 6.5 feet | See below | Not required |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Residential Unit Real Estate Signs.
a. Maximum Area per Sign Face. In addition to the primary residential unit real estate sign, two riders of up to one and one-half square feet each are permitted. The square footage of the riders is in addition to the size of the primary sign.
b. Maximum Height. The maximum sign height includes the height of a yard arm to hold the sign and the height of any riders.
c. Duration. Signs may remain in place on site until 10 days after the property is sold, rented, or leased.
d. For sign placement, see IMC 18.612.100(A)(7).
K. Real Estate Directional Arrow Signs. An off-site real estate directional arrow sign is a portable and temporary sign advertising, or assisting people in locating, property that is for sale, rent, or lease.
1. An example of a real estate directional arrow sign is in Figure 18.612.110(K)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(K)(1). Example of Real Estate Directional Arrow Sign

2. Real estate directional arrows signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(K)(2).
Table 18.612.110(K)(2). Real Estate Directional Arrow Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs | Type of Sign | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All zones which include a residential use | Right-of-way | See below | Stake/wire frame | 1.5 sq. ft. | 2 | 2 feet | See below | Not required |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Real Estate Directional Arrow Signs.
a. Directional arrow signs are to be used solely for directing people to a house for sale or lease, or an apartment for rent, or a condominium unit for sale. No off-site real estate directional arrow sign is allowed for advertising the sale or rental opportunities of commercial property or properties outside the City.
b. The only type of sign that may be used for real estate directional arrow signs is stake/wire frame signs.
c. Maximum Number of Total Signs. The minimum number of signs necessary for each turn in locating the house or condominium unit from the closest arterial street.
d. Duration. Signs must be removed when the sale closes, or in case of a lease, when the tenant takes possession.
e. See sign placement in IMC 18.612.100(A)(7).
L. Residential Real Estate Open House Signs. An off-site real estate open house sign is a portable and temporary sign advertising, or assisting people in locating, property that is for sale, rent, or lease. An open house is an event held to welcome people to view a piece of residential real estate which is being offered for sale.
1. An example of a residential real estate open house sign is in Figure 18.612.110(L)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(L)(1). Example of Residential Real Estate Open House Sign

2. Residential real estate open house signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(L)(2).
Table 18.612.110(L)(2). Real Estate Open House Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Property | Type of Sign | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of A-Frame | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All zones which include a residential use | Right-of-way | 4 | A-frame, stake/wire frame | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | See below | Not required |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Residential Real Estate Open House Signs.
a. The only type of signs that may be used for real estate open house signs is A-frame and stake/wire frame signs.
b. No off-site real estate open house signs are allowed for advertising the sale or rental opportunity of a commercial property.
c. Maximum Number of Total Signs. No more than four signs per property per agent for any one residential open house may be displayed at one time; except if the agent has more than one listed property in a development, then the agent’s total number of such signs for the development is limited to five.
d. Duration. Signs may be displayed only between dawn and dusk on days when there is an open house and only when the seller or seller’s representative is at the property and the open house is occurring. For rental or leased buildings, an open house is only during the initial lease period.
e. Sign Placement. See IMC 18.612.100(A)(7) for sign placement.
M. Temporary Window Signs. A temporary window sign is an advertisement for services or products in the form of decals, emblems, paint, exposed neon, or banners. Any sign of a temporary nature displayed within a building on the inside of the glass or in close proximity to the window and intended to be viewed by persons outside of the building. Temporary window signs are those which identify the business, products, or services and are in place no more than 30 days.
1. Example of a Window Sign. See permanent commercial window signs example in IMC 18.612.090(B)(6).
2. Temporary window signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(M)(2).
Table 18.612.110(M)(2). Window Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. % of All Window Area per Each Business/Tenant Facade | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Sign | Max. Height of Sign Above Finished Grade | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF-F and CF-FPO | On site | 25% | 1 | 20 feet | 30 days | Not required |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Window Signs.
a. See IMC 18.612.100(A)(7) for sign placement. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. The following provisions apply to all temporary noncommercial signs placed within the City.
B. General Standards for Temporary Noncommercial Signs. Noncommercial speech signs express noncommercial messages such as public/community events, religious, political, ideological, or other philosophical messages. Noncommercial speech signs do not promote commercial businesses, projects, or services. The content of such signs is not regulated but the sign is subject to any time, place, or manner standards for the sign in this section, and the general and specific following requirements:
1. Permit. A sign permit or temporary sign agreement is not required to install a temporary noncommercial sign.
2. Fee. No fee is required to place temporary noncommercial signs in the City.
3. Temporary Noncommercial Sign Materials and Construction.
a. Signs must be constructed of any material durable enough to withstand rain, wind, and normal wear and tear for the anticipated use, and must conform to the requirements of this chapter;
b. Must be maintained in an aesthetic and safe condition;
c. Shall not be an electric sign and shall not be an illuminated sign;
d. Shall not move or vibrate, emit noise, or be animated, or have changing images.
4. Duration must be consistent with the definition of temporary signs as defined in Chapter 18.102 IMC.
5. Sign Height. Specific sign heights are listed in IMC 18.612.130. In no case are temporary noncommercial signs to extend above the roofline and in no case may they be higher than 65 feet above the grade regardless of building height.
6. Sign Placement. The following sign placement standards apply to all temporary noncommercial signs.
a. Temporary noncommercial signs may be placed in right-of-way only if specifically allowed in this subsection B;
b. All temporary noncommercial signs intended to be placed or allowed on site must be wholly within the property consistent with the requirements of this chapter;
c. Except when allowed to be in the right-of-way, the sign must be placed entirely outside of the transportation facility; and in no case may signs extend into the area intended for vehicular travel. Where no curb exists, the sign must be placed outside the roadway at least 10 feet from the roadway edge or consistent with the City’s roadway safety requirements;
d. Minimum Setback Requirements for Public or Private Facilities.
(1) Out of the sight distance triangle of intersections and driveways as described in IMC 18.612.180(B);
(2) Ten feet from any driveway, alley, or vehicle access point;
(3) Two feet from any curb or roadway edge;
(4) Two feet from any pedestrian sidewalk or ADA accessible path;
(5) Five feet from any building access point if not attached to the building;
e. The sign shall not obstruct pedestrian or accessible routes to or along the public or private sidewalk or encroach into the minimum clear pathway area of 48 inches in width;
f. The sign shall not interfere with the opening of car doors, use of bicycle parking facilities, bus stops, or loading zones;
g. The sign shall remain portable and may not be attached or anchored to trees or to public property including, but not limited to, utility or light poles, parking meters, or pavement;
h. Signs are prohibited in, on, or within public or private medians, roundabouts, traffic circles, utility poles, lampposts (except banners as specified in this section), traffic poles and signals, and street trees;
i. Signs shall not create a hazard to either pedestrians or motorists as determined by the City Traffic Engineer. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. The following provisions apply to all temporary noncommercial signs placed within the City.
B. List of Temporary Noncommercial Sign Design Types.
1. General on-site signs;
2. General right-of-way signs;
3. Noncommercial banners on light poles;
4. Flags.
C. General On-Site Signs.
1. Examples of general on-site signs are in Figure 18.612.130(C)(1).
Figure 18.612.130(C)(1). Examples of On-Site Signs
![]() Banner | ![]() Stake/Wire Frame Sign | ![]() Banner |
|---|
2. Temporary noncommercial general on-site signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.130(C)(2).
Table 18.612.130(C)(2). General On-Site Signs
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Max. Total Area of All Sign Faces | Types of Signs | Max. Area for Each Type of Sign’s Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Type of Sign | Max. Height of Sign | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Residential and Community Facilities Zones | Single-Family: C-Res, SF-E, SF-S, SF-SL, SF-D, UV-SF-1, UV-SF-0 Multifamily: MF-M, MF-H, UV-MF Community Facilities: CF-OS, CF-OSPO, CF-R, CF-RPO, CF-F, CF-FPO | 32 sq. ft. | A-frame | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet |
Stake/wire frame | 4 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | |||
Window | 15 sq. ft. | 1 | Window placement | |||
Banner | 15 sq. ft. | 2 | • 25 feet on a single pole or building • 4 feet otherwise | |||
Nonresidential and Mixed-Use Zones | Mixed-Use: PO, CBD, MU, MU-CI, MUR, IC-CI, UC, VR, UV-MUR-H, UV-MUR-T Nonresidential: IC, UV-COM, UV-RET, UV-O, UV-VC, M | 32 sq. ft. | A-frame | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet |
Stake/wire frame | 4 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | |||
Window | 32 sq. ft. | 1 | Window placement | |||
Banner | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | • 30 feet on a single pole or building • 10 feet otherwise |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to General On-Site Signs.
a. The only types of signs that may be used for general on-site signs are A-frame, stake/wire frame, window, and banner signs.
b. Sign Placement.
(1) Freestanding banners, such as those held by poles, must be placed five feet from the property line.
(2) For other signs, please see IMC 18.612.120(B)(6).
c. Sign Area.
(1) The maximum total sign area may be composed of any combination of signs and sign faces but the total sign area must be less than or equal to the maximum total sign area allowed.
(2) Window signs may not cover more than 25 percent of the window area on any façade.
D. General Right-of-Way Signs.
1. An example of a general right-of-way sign is in Figure 18.612.130(D)(1).
Figure 18.612.130(D)(1). Example of General Right-of-Way Signs

2. Temporary noncommercial general right-of-way signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.130(D)(2).
Table 18.612.130(D)(2). General Right-of-Way Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Type of Sign | Max. Area per Stake/Wire Frame Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Allowed in right-of-way adjacent to all zones | Right-of-way | Stake/wire frame | 4 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to General Right-of-Way Signs.
a. The only type of sign that may be used for right-of-way signs is stake/wire frame signs.
E. Noncommercial Banners on Light Poles.
1. An example of a noncommercial banner on light pole is in Figure 18.612.130(E)(1).
Figure 18.612.130(E)(1). Examples of Noncommercial Banner on Light Pole

2. Banners on light poles in the right-of-way are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.130(E)(2).
Table 18.612.130(E)(2). Noncommercial Banners on Light Poles
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Maximum Area per Banner Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Duration |
|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF-F and CF-FPO | Right-of-way | 10 sq. ft. on poles over 15 feet 5 sq. ft. on poles up to 15 feet | 2 | 90 days |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Noncommercial Banners on Light Poles.
a. Sign Placement.
(1) Banners may not be higher than the light pole itself. The top of the pole establishes maximum height of the banner.
(2) Banners must maintain a minimum clearance of at least eight feet above sidewalks and other areas where pedestrians are present and 14 feet over on-street parking or travel lanes.
b. Banners must be supported between bars to prevent fluttering.
c. Banners must receive the permission of the pole owner prior to installation and must be installed per the pole owner’s specifications.
d. Noncommercial banners shall not be used for advertising name and/or logo of business, a commercial development, or products. If commercial sponsorship information is desired on the banner, it may not be more than 15 percent of the total banner sign area.
F. Flags.
1. An example of a flag is in Figure 18.612.130(F)(1).
Figure 18.612.130(F)(1). Examples of a Flag

2. Flags are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.130(F)(2).
Table 18.612.130(F)(2). Flags
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Size Each Flag Face | Max. Height of the Flag |
|---|---|---|---|
All zones | On site | 25 sq. ft. | 30 ft. |
Mixed-use: PO, CBD, MU, MU-CI, MUR, IC-CI, UC, VR, UV-MUR-H, UV-MUR-T Nonresidential: IC, UV-COM, UV-RET, UV-O, UV-VC, M | On site | 60 sq. ft. | 40 ft. |
(Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. The Front Street temporary banner permit allows temporary noncommercial banners when all requirements have been met. Permanent or commercial banners are not allowed over the right-of-way in any location.
B. Application and Process. Applicants apply to the City at intervals during the year, using an application process available to all allowed users.
C. Allowed Users. Only the City of Issaquah and entities that receive funding from the City of Issaquah are allowed users of the Front Street temporary banners. Furthermore, allowed users may only install banners for a program or event for which they received funding in that calendar year. For those non-City entities that qualify as allowed users, the program or event utilizing the proposed banner must further a governmental purpose.
D. Location. Temporary noncommercial banners are allowed over the right-of-way only at City-designated locations.
E. Number. A City-sponsored user shall not have more than one banner up per calendar quarter year for each Front Street banner location. There is no limitation on the number of City of Issaquah banners.
F. Banner Installation and Design.
1. Temporary banners must be installed by the City and only with a valid approved banner permit.
2. All Front Street temporary banners must be made of heavy-duty material and constructed to withstand wind, weather, and other likely conditions. The City provides specifications to interested applicants, who must provide documentation confirming the banner complies with the specifications.
3. If commercial sponsorship information is desired on the banner, it shall not be more than 15 percent of the total banner sign area.
G. Duration. A banner may be installed for a maximum of three weeks.
H. Fees. A fee must be paid in accordance with the City of Issaquah’s adopted fee schedule. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Signs legally in existence as of the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter that do not comply with the standards herein are deemed legally nonconforming and may continue to exist per this section. Legal nonconforming status does not apply to signs that have received notice of infraction or violation prior to the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter.
B. Legal nonconforming signs may be removed for cleaning and routine maintenance such as repainting, cleaning, and changing of lighting and wiring without being brought into conformance with the current sign chapter.
C. Nothing in this section relieves the owner or user of a legal nonconforming sign or owner of the property on which such nonconforming sign is located, from the provisions of this chapter regarding safety, maintenance, and repair of signs; however, any repainting, cleaning, and other normal maintenance or repair of the sign or sign structure may not modify the sign structure or copy in a way which makes it more nonconforming or the sign may lose its legal nonconforming status.
D. Legal nonconforming signs may continue to exist except as follows:
1. Any legal nonconforming sign that undergoes a name change or has 20 percent or more of the sign face (except billboards as defined under IMC 18.612.050(D), Prohibited Signs) or sign structure changed must be brought into conformance with the current sign chapter within 60 days of such change;
2. Any legal nonconforming sign that is damaged in excess of 50 percent of the current estimated value of the sign must be brought into conformance immediately with the current sign chapter;
3. Any legal nonconforming sign that is relocated or replaced must be brought into conformance immediately with the current sign chapter.
E. Landmark Signs.
1. A nonconforming sign may continue to exist if it is determined by the Development Commission that the sign qualifies as a landmark sign. Application for designation as a landmark sign must be made on forms available from the permit center. An application must consist of a completed application form; any necessary supporting documentation such as plot plans, photographs, or other information demonstrating compliance with the criteria below; and the appropriate application fee.
2. The Development Commission classifies a sign as a landmark sign if, after review of a permit application, it determines that the sign complies with all of the following criteria:
a. There is evidence that the sign is at least 40 years old at the time of a complete application submittal;
b. The sign is demonstrated to have one or more of the following characteristics, making it a significant community landmark:
(1) Associated with a local historic figure, event, or place;
(2) Embodies significant evidence of the history of a product, business, or service advertised;
(3) Embodies significant history of a building;
(4) Characteristic of a specific historic period of the local area;
(5) Outstanding example of the sign maker’s art, whether because of their excellent craftsmanship, use of materials, or design;
(6) Local landmark, that is, signs recognized as a popular focal point in the community.
c. The sign, though nonconforming, is consistent with the purpose of this chapter, as described in IMC 18.612.010.
3. If the Development Commission classifies the sign as a landmark sign, it may continue to exist to preserve the historic character and distinctive features of the sign. To maintain the landmark designation, the following must be adhered to:
a. The sign’s shape shall not be altered;
b. No more than 50 percent of the sign area shall be modified; and
c. Deteriorated or damaged portions of the sign must be repaired when possible, rather than replaced, to preserve historical context. When new material is used, it must be consistent with the sign design, color, and texture.
4. Approval from the Development Commission is required for any alteration, significant change in appearance, or replacement (together “modification”) that exceeds 50 percent of the sign area. Approval may be granted when the modification is consistent with the landmark sign’s design, color and texture.
5. Lighting must comply with IMC 18.612.180 to the greatest extent practicable and feasible. (Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. No sign may hereafter be erected, reerected, constructed, refaced, altered, or repaired except as provided in this chapter, and a permit for the sign has been issued by the Director, except when such sign does not require a permit; or a temporary sign agreement has been received by the City except when such sign does not require a temporary sign agreement. A separate permit or temporary sign agreement is required for each individual sign except when specifically noted in the relevant section.
B. Responsibility.
1. The ultimate responsibility for any sign is borne by the legal owner of the property on which the sign is located, including inspections.
2. The Director may require, when necessary, that the property owner or agent be party to or applicant for any required sign permit.
3. For temporary signs or signs placed in the right-of-way, the person who placed the sign, or is responsible for the sign, is also responsible for its removal or is subject to penalties as provided in this Code.
C. Right of Entry. Whenever necessary to make an inspection to enforce any of the provisions of this chapter, or whenever the Director has reasonable cause to believe that there exists any sign or any condition which makes such sign unsafe, the Director may enter the premises or building on which such sign is located at all reasonable times to inspect the sign or to perform any duty imposed on him by this chapter. If such building or premises on which the sign is located is occupied, then the Director must first present proper credentials and request entry; and if such building or premises is unoccupied, then the Director must first make a reasonable effort to locate the owner or other persons having charge or control of the building or premises and request entry. If such entry is refused, the Director must have recourse to every remedy provided by law to secure entry. No owner or occupant or any other person having charge, care, or control of any building or premises must fail or neglect, after proper request is made, to promptly permit entry therein by the Director or his authorized representative for the purpose of inspection and examination pursuant to this chapter.
D. Inspections. All signs permitted by this chapter must be subject to inspection by the Director including all sign footings and sign installation. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. All signs, together with their supports, braces, guys, and anchors, must be kept in good repair and in a safe condition. The display surface of all signs must be kept neatly painted or posted at all times. Signs not repaired or removed in compliance with this chapter may be remedied by the City, and the sign owner may be billed for the cost of removal, though the City is not required to take any such action.
B. Signs are maintained by the property owner or person in possession of the permit.
C. Maintenance must be such that the signage continues to conform to the conditions imposed by the permit.
D. A damaged sign, including signs vandalized or subjected to graffiti, must be repaired within 60 days.
E. Internally illuminated signs or sign panels that have been damaged must remain unilluminated until repaired.
F. Metal pole covers and sign cabinets must be kept free of rust and rust stains.
G. Signs must be washed routinely to remove dirt, moss, and debris.
H. Removal of Signs.
1. Unsafe Signs.
a. Permanent. If the Director finds that any permanent sign regulated by this chapter is unsafe or not properly secured, the Director must give written notice to the named owner of the sign and the named owner of the land on which the sign is erected, who must remove or repair the sign within a specified time in the notice. If the sign is not removed and repaired, the Director must revoke the permit issued for such sign, as provided in this chapter, and may pursue any means necessary to enforce the provisions of this chapter. The Director may cause any sign which is determined to be a source of immediate peril to persons or property to be removed summarily without notice.
b. Temporary. If the Director finds that any temporary sign regulated by this chapter is unsafe or not properly secured, the Director must give written notice to the named owner of the sign and the named owner of the land on which the sign is erected, who must remove or repair the sign within two days of the date of the notice. If the sign is not removed and repaired within the specified time, if the owner is unknown and temporary sign is located on public property, or if the sign is determined to be a source of immediate peril to persons or property, the City may cause the sign to be removed .
2. Expired Advertising Signs. Any sign existing on or after the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter, which no longer advertises an existing business conducted or product sold on the premises, must be removed by the owner of the premises upon which such sign is located after notice from the Director. The Director, upon determining that such sign exists, must notify the owner of the premises in writing to remove the sign within 30 days from the date of such notice. Upon request, the Director may extend the removal requirement for a period not to exceed 90 days, but the sign shall not remain in use and functioning during the extension period and must be maintained consistent with the provisions of this chapter.
3. Expired or Invalid Temporary Sign Agreement or Temporary Sign Agreement Sign Number. Failure to properly display the sign number may result in removal of the sign. Displaying of a temporary commercial sign either before the sign number has been issued, or after the allowed duration of such sign, may also result in a sign enforcement action being taken; such as, in the right-of-way the sign may be removed, or if on private property, the City may pursue any means necessary to enforce the applicable standard.
4. Recovery of Removed Signs.
a. All permanent signs removed by the City must be available for recovery by the owner of such sign for a period of two weeks, after which they may be destroyed. All temporary signs removed by the City must be available for recovery by the owner of such sign for at least five business days, after which the City may dispose of the sign.
b. The City is not responsible for damages or loss during removal or storage.
I. Activities That Do Not Require a Permit. No permit is required for the following activities if they are performed consistent with the standards provided in this chapter:
1. Maintenance or Cleaning. Replacement of signs is allowed without a permit following temporary removal for maintenance or cleaning of signs or following temporary removal for permitted building façade changes. This exception does not include any structural, electrical, copy, refacing, or color changes of a sign.
2. Name change or replacement of up to 20 percent of the face of an existing sign (except a billboard; see IMC 18.612.050(D)), when such replacement does not increase the sign area or dimensions of the sign, is not considered a new sign or a structural alteration and does not require a permit.
3. Changeable Copy. No permit is required for the changing of the advertising copy or message on a lawfully erected, painted, or printed sign, marquee, or similar signs specifically designed for the use of changeable copy. No structural changes or change to the dimension of the sign may occur with this action. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Sign Illumination. In addition to any other lighting limitations or requirements elsewhere in this Code:
1. Lighting for signs must be held to the minimum needed to convey the sign’s message.
2. Lighting of signs must be in character with the building/development and the surrounding area.
3. All lighting must be LED and capable of being dimmed separately from all other light sources. Color temperature for white light may not exceed 3,000K.
4. Sign lighting must not be so bright and distracting as to be a traffic hazard.
5. Lighting must be designed to highlight the signage. External light sources must be shielded and directed onto or toward the sign only, facing downward.
6. Visible raceways and transformers for all components of a sign, such as logos and individual letters, are prohibited except when painted to match the building exterior upon which the sign is placed.
7. For signs comprised of channel letters, the interior of such signs shall not contain reflective material that enhances the brightness of the sign (unpainted metal, mirror type surfacing). A white painted interior box is acceptable to diffuse the light.
8. No additional signs shall be internally illuminated (ambient illumination only) unless specifically allowed by the standards for a particular additional sign.
9. Allowed illumination sources include:
a. External Illumination. Projecting light fixtures used for externally illuminated signs must be simple and unobtrusive in appearance and do not obscure the graphics of the sign.
b. Reverse illuminated sign/halo effect signage lighting.
c. Internally lit channel letters.
d. Exposed Neon Tubing. Exposed LED lighting may be appropriate if it has the look of exposed neon lighting. This is solely for signage and does not include outlining buildings or architectural elements.
10. Signs that are illuminated by halo lighting must be limited to white light source; provided, that signs may be internally illuminated when the surface on which they sign is mounted is made of glass or other highly reflective material that would interfere with the appearance of the sign if halo-lit.
11. Illuminated signs must be turned off during nonbusiness hours and reasonably follow dark sky hours, outlined within IMC 18.610.060(E).
B. Sight Distance. Signs must be placed outside of the sight distance triangle, schematically shown below, or below three feet six inches. For more information on the specifics of locating and placing signs in the sight distance triangle, see Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.

C. Other Requirements.
1. Indemnification. Owners of signs allowed to be placed within the public right-of-way by a sign permit or temporary sign agreement must agree to indemnify the City for any damages caused by the sign. The form of the indemnity agreement is included within the temporary sign agreement for some temporary signs or in a separate recorded document for permanent signs. Before any agreement or permit is approved, the applicant must agree to the indemnification language. See also IMC 18.612.090 for more information regarding permanent signs.
2. Insurance. Any permanent commercial signs placed in the right-of-way must make the City an additional insured at a value to be determined by the City and be current while the signs are in place. See also IMC 12.05.110 for more information regarding permanent signs.
3. Sign permit approval by the City, issuance of a sign number in response to a temporary sign agreement, or implementation of the standards in this chapter does not constitute any representation as to whether the selected location contains any utilities or irrigation infrastructure, or that the location meets the sight distance provisions or other safety requirements. Nor must sign approval by the City, issuance of a sign number in response to a temporary sign agreement, or implementation of the standards in this chapter be construed as relieving the owner of any sign for the responsibility of its erection, maintenance, and removal, and its compliance with the provisions of this chapter, or any other law or ordinance regulating the same. The applicant is fully responsible to research and ensure such placement of a sign does not harm the right-of-way or damage any landscape, utility, or irrigation system and meets safety standards. Damage caused by any sign installation is the responsibility of the sign owner or owner’s representative.
4. Right-of-Way. Where it is necessary to determine the applicable land use zone, the land use zone is based on the most proximate property’s land use zoning, relative to the proposed sign location. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Application, Review Process, and Criteria. Applicants may seek a variance from the requirements of this chapter in accordance with Chapter 18.210 IMC, Variances.
B. Variances Not Permitted. No variance shall be granted that would allow a sign or device which is prohibited by IMC 18.612.050, Prohibited signs.
C. No other method may be used to adjust sign standards established by this chapter. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
Development Standards
A. This chapter is based on the 2011 Model Lighting Ordinance developed in a partnership of the International Dark Sky Association and Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA), tailored for the City. It is structured as an overlay based on, yet different from, land use zoning. The purpose of this chapter is to provide regulations for outdoor lighting that will:
1. Permit the use of outdoor lighting that does not exceed the minimum levels specified in IES recommended practices for night-time safety, utility, security, productivity, enjoyment, and commerce;
2. Minimize adverse off-site impacts of lighting such as light trespass and obtrusive light;
3. Curtail light pollution, reduce skyglow (a form of light pollution), and improve the nighttime environment for layperson enjoyment and scientific study of astronomy;
4. Protect adjacent uses, and natural and critical areas, from excessive adverse effects and spillover light and glare generated by outdoor exterior building and/or site lighting;
5. Conserve energy and resources to the greatest extent possible; and
6. Ensure a safe, attractive, functional environment that is designed for the range of anticipated after dark activities and needs of residents, businesses, pedestrians, and bicyclists while minimizing negative lighting impacts. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
Except as provided in IMC 18.610.040, outdoor lighting must comply with the requirements in this chapter. This includes, but is not limited to, new lighting, replacement lighting, or any other lighting whether attached to structures, poles, the earth, or any other location. All lighting regulated by this chapter is categorized as either nonresidential/multifamily or new residential. See IMC 18.610.060 and 18.610.070 for criteria applicable to nonresidential/multifamily and new residential outdoor lighting, respectively. (Ord. 3088 § 6 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Description and Purpose. The lighting zone determines the limitations for lighting as specified in this chapter. A lighting zone is the overlay zoning system that establishes legal limits for lighting for particular lots, areas, or districts in the City and are shown in the table below, Table 18.610.030(B).
B. Lighting Zones.
Table 18.610.030(B). Lighting Zones
Lighting Zone | Description | Zones |
|---|---|---|
0 (LZ 0) | No Ambient Lighting Areas where the natural environment will be seriously and adversely affected by lighting. Impacts include, but are not limited to, disturbing the biological cycles of flora and fauna and/or detracting from human enjoyment and appreciation of the natural environment. Human activity is subordinate in importance to nature. The vision of human residents and users is adapted to the darkness, and they expect to see little or no lighting. When not needed, lighting should be extinguished. | • P-NRCA Tradition Plateau – Natural Resource Conservation Area • C-Rec Conservancy Recreation • CF-OS Community Facilities – Open Space (for portions with critical areas) • CF-OSPO Community Facilities – Open Space Privately Owned (for portions with critical areas) |
1 (LZ 1) | Low Ambient Lighting Areas where lighting might adversely affect flora and fauna or disturb the character of the area. The vision of human residents and users is adapted to low light levels. Lighting may be used for safety and convenience, but it is not necessarily uniform or continuous. After dark sky hours, most lighting should be extinguished or reduced as activity levels decline. | • C-Res Conservancy Residential – 1 du/5 acres • CF-OS Community Facilities – Open Space (for portions without critical areas) • CF-OSPO Community Facilities – Open Space Privately Owned (for portions without critical areas) • SF-E Single-Family Estates – 1.24 du/acre • SF-S Single-Family Suburban – 4.5 du/acre • SF-D Single-Family Duplex – 7.26 du/acre • SF-SL Single-Family Small Lot – 7.26 du/acre • UVSF-0 Urban Village – Single-Family, Zoning cap 0 du/lot • UVSF-1 Urban Village – Single-Family, Zoning cap 1 du/lot |
2 (LZ 2) | Moderate Ambient Lighting Areas of human activity where the vision of human residents and users is adapted to moderate light levels. Lighting may typically be used for safety and convenience, but it is not necessarily uniform or continuous. After dark sky hours, lighting may be extinguished or reduced as activity levels decline. | • CF-R Community Facilities – Recreation • CF-RPO Community Facilities – Recreation Privately Owned • CF-F Community Facilities – Facilities • CF-FPO Community Facilities – Facilities Privately Owned • MF-M Multifamily Medium – 14.52 du/acre • MUR Mixed-Use Residential – 14.52 du/acre • MF-H Multifamily High – 29 du/acre • VR Village Residential • UV-MF Urban Village – Multifamily • UV-MUR Urban Village – Mixed-Use Residential • PO Professional Office • UV-VC Urban Village – Village Center |
3 (LZ 3) | Moderately High Ambient Lighting Areas of human activity where the vision of human residents and users is adapted to moderately high light levels. Lighting is generally desired for safety, security and/or convenience and it is often uniform and/or continuous. After dark sky hours, lighting may be extinguished or reduced in most areas as activity levels decline. | • CBD Cultural and Business District • UV-COM/RET Urban Village – Commercial/Retail • UC Urban Core • MU Mixed-Use • MU-CI Mixed-Use – Central Issaquah • IC Intensive Commercial • IC-CI Intensive Commercial – Central Issaquah • M Mineral Resources |
4 (LZ 4) | High Ambient Lighting Areas of human activity where the vision of human residents and users is adapted to high light levels. Lighting is generally considered necessary for safety, security and/or convenience and it is mostly uniform and/or continuous. After dark sky hours, lighting may be extinguished or reduced in some areas as activity levels decline. | None |
C. New Zones. When a new land use zone is created, the zone must be categorized into the appropriate light zone based on the descriptions in this section. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. The following outdoor lighting is exempt from the standards outlined in this chapter but may be subject to regulation under Federal law, State law, or other chapters of the Issaquah Municipal Code:
1. All new and replacement lighting for existing structures on single-family lots.
2. Areas subject to an active development agreement.
3. Lighting levels and technical standards within public right-of-way, private roads, or easements for the principal purpose of illuminating streets or roads, except no exemption is given for any lighting within the public right-of-way or easement installed for the purpose of illuminating areas outside the public right-of-way or easement, unless regulated by Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
4. Lighting solely for signs. See Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.
5. Repairs to existing luminaires not exceeding the threshold established in IMC 18.610.090.
6. Temporary lighting for theatrical, television, and performance areas, approved as part of a special event permit in accordance with Chapter 5.14 IMC, Special Event/Special Use Permit.
7. Permanent or temporary lighting using unshielded strings of lights, such as for lighting outdoor dining or patios with individual lamps, that are less than 70 lumens and that comply with dark sky hours.
8. Temporary seasonal/festival lighting; provided, that individual lamps are less than 70 lumens and that comply with dark sky hours. Seasonal/festival lighting is defined as temporary lighting installed and operated in connection with holidays or festivals for periods not to exceed 60 days, completely removed and not operated again for at least 30 days. Buildings may be outlined as part of this temporary seasonal/festival lighting if the outlining is with individual white bulbs limited as allowed by this section. Temporary seasonal/festival lighting may be subject to approval as part of a special event permit in accordance with Chapter 5.14 IMC, Special Event/Special Use Permit.
9. Lighting that is only used under emergency conditions. Emergency conditions are defined as lighting that is only energized during a situation that poses an immediate risk to health, life, property, or environment, such as lighting fed from a backup power source, lighting used during a natural disaster, or lighting for security purposes used solely during an alarm.
10. Lighting specifically approved in a special event/special use permit, authorized by Chapter 5.14 IMC, Special Event/Special Use Permit. Lighting that would otherwise be prohibited by this Code may be approved; provided, that lighting that would be inconsistent with the intent or provisions of Chapter 5.14 IMC, shoot into the sky, negatively impact residences, or create unsafe situations for motorists will not be approved.
11. Lighting activated via motion sensors for security or similar purposes provided lighting is set to automatically time out and shut off and is designed to emit most light downward on areas within the subject property. (Ord. 3088 § 6 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Except when provided for in this chapter, no person may erect, alter, maintain, use, or relocate any of the following lights in the City and such existing lights must be removed consistent with IMC 18.610.090:
1. Temporary lighting in which any single luminaire exceeds 20,000 initial luminaire lumens or the total lighting load exceeds 160,000 lumens.
2. Aerial lasers.
3. Searchlights.
4. Other very intense lighting defined as having a light source exceeding 200,000 initial luminaire lumens or an intensity in any direction of more than 2,000,000 candelas.
5. Any lighting that may be confused with warning signals, emergency signals, or traffic signals.
6. Blinking, flashing intermittent, and/or moving lights.
7. Accent lighting (as defined and regulated in IMC 18.610.060(F)) on those portions of a building or on objects adjacent to I-90 ROW, including on and off ramps, to prevent glare or distraction to motorists and maintain the Mountains to Sound character and vision of the City frontage, except for lighting of United States Federal flags and lighting of architecture and landscape below 15 feet. See IMC 18.610.060(F)(3)(b).
8. Light spillover at more than three-tenths footcandles at the edge of any required critical area buffer, whether on or off site, to ensure that light diminishes further toward the applicable critical area except related to publicly owned trails. See IMC 18.610.080(C)(9).
9. At any property line or project boundary of the applicable site, light spillover in light zones LZ 0, LZ 1, LZ 2 at more than three-tenths footcandles and in light zone LZ 3 at more than eight-tenths footcandles.
10. Neon or other lighting outlining buildings or roofs such as LEDs that form a continuous line of any color.
11. Decorative or other nonessential light allowing beams and illumination to shine upon a street, highway, sidewalk, or that project a decorative pattern or image onto the street, highway, or sidewalk using such beam or illumination. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Applicability. All outdoor lighting must comply with this section if a property or project is a nonresidential, transportation, or recreational use or contains more than 10 dwelling units and has an outdoor common area.
B. Performance Methods. All luminaires shall be rated and installed using either Performance Method A or Performance Method B, as described in this section, except for temporary construction lighting regulated by subsection G of this section. Only one performance method may be used per permit application.
C. Performance Method A – Prescriptive Lighting for Small and Simple Projects. All luminaires shall be rated and installed according to Table 18.610.060(C)(2), Maximum On-Site Lighting, and Table 18.610.060(C)(3), Allowed Type of Luminaire. Any project that does not comply with the thresholds in subsection (C)(1) of this section must use Performance Method B, subsection D of this section. If there is uncertainty about compliance, then Performance Method B must be used.
1. A project whose use is not listed in subsection (D)(2) of this section and is below both the following thresholds may choose to use Performance Method A:
a. A building less than or equal to a total of 4,000 square feet, existing or with any proposed additions.
b. The developed or improved portion of a site, less than or equal to a half-acre (21,780 square feet).
2. Maximum On-Site Lighting.
a. The total installed initial luminaire lumens of all outdoor lighting must not exceed the total site lumen limit established in Table 18.610.060(C)(2).
b. Either the parking space method or hardscape area method may be used to calculate lighting levels, but only one method shall be used per permit application.
c. If a parking lot has or is proposed to have 10 spaces or less, including ADA parking, the applicant must use the parking space method. If a parking lot has or is proposed to have more than 10 spaces, the applicant must use the hardscape method.
d. Any existing lighting that will remain in place must be included in the calculation of total installed lumens. The total installed initial luminaire lumens is calculated as the sum of the existing and proposed luminaires.
Table 18.610.060(C)(2). Maximum On-Site Lighting
Lighting Zone | Parking Space Method (Lumens per Space) | Hardscape Method (Lumens per Square Foot) |
|---|---|---|
LZ 0 | 350 | 0.5 |
LZ 1 | 490 | 1.25 |
LZ 2 | 630 | 2.5 |
LZ 3 | 840 | 5.0 |
3. Allowed Luminaire Backlight, Uplight, and Glare (BUG) Ratings.
a. A luminaire may be used if it is rated for the lighting zone of the site or is a lower number for all BUG ratings.
b. The following luminaire types are prohibited with Performance Method A:
(1) A luminaire equipped with an adjustable mounting device allowing alteration of luminaire aiming in the field.
(2) A luminaire that does not have BUG ratings or exceeds the BUG ratings for the light zone.
Table 18.610.060(C)(3). Maximum Allowable BUG (Backlight, Uplight, Glare) Ratings by Lighting Zone
BUG Ratings and Maximum Allowed Allowable Light | LZ 0 | LZ 1 | LZ 2 | LZ 3 | Notes |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Maximum Allowed Backlight Rating (B) | |||||
Greater than 2 mounting heights from property line | B1 | B3 | B4 | B5 | |
1 to less than 2 mounting heights from property line and ideally oriented | B1 | B2 | B3 | B4 | |
0.5 to 1 mounting heights from property line and ideally oriented | B0 | B1 | B2 | B3 | |
Less than 0.5 mounting height to property line and properly oriented | B0 | B0 | B0 | B1 | |
Maximum Allowed Uplighting Rating (U) | |||||
Allowed uplight rating | U0 | U1 | U2 | U3 | |
Allowed % light emission above 90º for street or area lighting | 0% | 0% | 0% | 0% | |
Maximum Allowed Glare Rating (G) | |||||
Allowed glare rating for an ideally located luminaire | G0 | G1 | G2 | G3 | |
Any luminaire not ideally oriented with 1 to less than 2 mounting heights to any property line of concern | G0 | G0 | G1 | G1 | |
Any luminaire not ideally oriented with 0.5 to 1 mounting heights to any property line of concern | G0 | G0 | G0 | G1 | |
Any luminaire not ideally oriented with less than 0.5 mounting heights to any property line of concern | G0 | G0 | G0 | G0 |
c. Notes for Table 18.610.060(C)(3).
(1) Extension of Property Line Impact Area. When a property abuts a public walkway, bikeway, plaza, or parking lot, the property line may be considered extended five feet beyond the actual property line for purpose of determining compliance with this section. For a property that abuts a public roadway, the property line may be considered to be extended to the centerline of the public roadway or public transit corridor for the purpose of determining compliance with this section. This adjustment is relative to Table 18.610.060(C)(3) backlight and glare only and shall not be used to increase the lighting area of the site.
(2) To be considered “ideally oriented,” the luminaire must be mounted with the backlight portion of the light output oriented perpendicular and towards the property line of concern.
(3) Any luminaire that cannot be mounted with its backlight perpendicular to any property line within two times the mounting heights of the luminaire location is considered “not ideally oriented,” and must meet the reduced allowed glare rating in Table 18.610.060(C)(3).
D. Performance Method B – Lighting Compliance by Calculation.
1. Any project or property that is subject to this section and that does not qualify to use Performance Method A (see subsection C of this section) must use Performance Method B. A project may also elect to use Performance Method B to allow more flexibility in design or luminaire selection.
2. Any complex lighting use, as listed below, must use Performance Method B:
a. Sports facilities, including but not limited to unconditioned rinks, open courts, fields, ranges for guns, golf, archery and similar, and stadiums.
b. Lighting for industrial sites having special requirements (e.g., petrochemical manufacturing or storage, and shipping piers).
c. Parking structures.
d. Urban parks.
e. Accent lighting as allowed by subsection F of this section.
f. Theme and amusement parks.
g. Correctional facilities.
h. High light level uses including automobile and truck sales and gas station fueling areas.
i. Uses whose lighting levels are controlled by State laws such as automated teller machines in Chapter 19.174 RCW and outdoor swimming pools in WAC 246-260-031(23).
3. The entire outdoor lighting design shall be analyzed using industry standard lighting software including interreflections in the following manner:
a. Input data shall describe the lighting system including luminaire locations, mounting heights, aiming directions, and employing photometric data tested in accordance with IES guidelines. Buildings or other physical objects on the site must be included in the calculations.
b. Lighting in the right-of-way that may contribute onto the property must be included in the calculation.
c. “Industry standard lighting software” is defined as lighting software that calculates point-by-point illuminance that includes reflected light using either ray-tracing or radiosity methods.
4. The design complies with this section if:
a. Horizontal illuminance and uniformity ratios meet IES recommended practices for the space type(s). More than one space type may apply to a project. All materials submitted must clearly identify the space type and the area it is applied to.
b. The lighting is not prohibited in accordance with IMC 18.610.050(A)(8) and (A)(9) regarding light spillover to sensitive areas.
c. Selected luminaires are fully shielded.
E. General Requirements for All Performance Methods.
1. Technical Lighting Requirements.
Table 18.610.060(E)(1). Technical Lighting Requirements
Color Temperature | Maximum 3,000K on site, 4,000K in right-of-way. |
Color Rendering Index (CRI) | No less than 80. |
Light Sources | LED only. |
Lighting Control and Reduction Requirements | Refer to Washington State Nonresidential Energy Code (WS NREC) for automatic controls requirements for nonresidential developments including multifamily residential. |
Dark Sky Hours | Between 10:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m. or 30 minutes after close of a business or entity with outdoor lighting to 30 minutes before opening of the business, whichever provides more dark sky. |
Dark Sky Lighting Reduction Levels | Total outdoor lighting reduced by at least 30 percent or extinguished. This includes low voltage landscape lighting. Total outdoor lighting must be uniformly reduced, rather than selecting individual luminaires to extinguish. |
a. Exceptions to Table 18.610.060(E)(1).
(1) Dark sky lighting reductions are not required for any of the following:
(A) Code required lighting including for steps, stairs, walkways, and building entrances.
(B) City facilities, as publicly funded and providing public benefit and use, set lighting hours based on the facility’s hours. This includes trails, play areas, sports fields, parks, plazas, buildings, streets. Trails through critical areas must comply with IMC 18.610.080(C)(9) regarding use of motion detectors.
(C) Motion activated lighting or lighting controlled by an astronomic clock with a manual override that comply with the requirements in IMC 18.610.080(B)(4). Lighting levels triggered by the motion detector or astronomic clock must comply with all other standards in this chapter.
(D) Businesses or entities that operate on a 24-hour basis.
(E) Residential properties that qualify under IMC 18.610.070.
(F) When all the outdoor lighting for a property consists of only one luminaire.
(2) Color rendering index (CRI) minimums are not required for stadium lighting when supported by lighting studies prepared by a qualified professional that include mitigation strategies that adhere to the 2011 Model Lighting Ordinance developed in a partnership of the International Dark Sky Association and Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA).
2. Pole-Mounted Lights and Streetlights. The following mounting heights in Table 18.610.060(E)(2) apply for new or replaced luminaires or streetlights, unless they are located in the right-of-way.
3. All pole-mounted lights and streetlights in the right-of-way must comply with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
Table 18.610.060(E)(2). Maximum Mounting Heights for On-Site and Streetlights
Location of Pole and Street Lights | Max. Height (feet) |
|---|---|
On-site light or pole for any purpose, except as listed in IMC 18.610.060(D)(2) through (D)(4) or (E)(2); or as listed below for location compliant parking lots | 15 |
Parking structure: light pole on rooftop or upper deck of parking structure | 12 |
Parking lot where light poles will be at least 100 feet from a residential zone (SF or MF zones) | 20 |
At signalized intersections, streetlight integrated with signal poles | 35 |
Streetlights on local streets, woonerfs, alleys, except at signalized intersections | 15 |
Streetlights in the following neighborhoods, except at signalized intersections: Olde Town, Issaquah Highlands | 15 |
Streetlights on collector, minor, and principal arterials except at signalized intersections and the specified streets below, and in Talus | 18 |
Streetlights on East Lake Sammamish Parkway, SR 900, Front Street north of Gilman Boulevard | 30 |
F. Accent Lighting.
1. Accent lighting does not impact the function and safety of an area but is purely decorative, or used to illuminate architecture and/or landscaping, and installed for aesthetic effect. This could include lighting for building façades, architectural features, landscaping, public art, or flags.
2. Prohibited Accent Lighting.
a. Lighting directed at building façades;
b. Lighting directed at architectural features that cannot comply with subsection (F)(3) of this section and landscaping more than 15 feet above grade;
c. Lighting directed at flags as defined in Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs, other than the United States Federal flag; and
d. Uncontained uplighting.
3. Allowed Accent Lighting.
a. Lighting of United States Federal flags; see Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.
b. Lighting of architectural features and landscape at and below 15 feet from surrounding grade.
c. Lighting of ground-mounted art.
d. Uplighting contained by roof, overhang, eave, opaque canopy, and similar elements which prevent uplighting from spilling into the sky and creating light pollution. This would apply to lighting of building-mounted art (see IMC 18.610.050).
4. General Standards for Accent Lighting.
a. Accent lighting must not contribute to light pollution or create glare by being improperly directed.
b. Accent lighting must be included in the calculation of Performance Method B and in compliance with IES recommendations.
c. Accent lighting shall be aimed and shielded so that light is directed only on those features intended for illumination.
d. Lighting must not produce glare to pedestrians, cyclists, or motorists within the property or from adjacent property or right-of-way.
e. Fixtures must be locked into position after aiming.
f. Nonessential outdoor lighting must be turned off or substantially reduced consistent with lighting zone standards of IMC 18.610.030.
G. Temporary Construction Site Lighting. Construction sites may illuminate their sites as needed during the period from 30 minutes before and 30 minutes after the City’s construction hours. If the project is granted extended work hours per Chapter 16.35 IMC, then the hours of lighting are also extended. However, at all times light must be directed within the construction site and property, and not directed to adjacent properties or roads. Outside of the hours above, only security lighting is permitted. (Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Applicability. All outdoor lighting must comply with this section if a property or project is a residential use and contains 10 or less dwelling units and does not have an outdoor common area.
B. General Requirements and Prohibitions.
1. Outdoor lighting may not be aimed onto adjacent properties including low voltage and line voltage landscape lighting. In addition, shielded directional flood lighting must be aimed so that direct glare is not visible from adjacent properties. Lighting activated via motion sensors for security or similar purposes must be set to automatically time out and shut off.
2. No luminaires may be placed at more than 15 feet above grade.
3. If a United States flag will be flown at night, it may be lit to the minimum necessary to comply with Federal law.
4. Unshielded luminaires are prohibited except as specifically identified in Table 18.610.070(C). All outdoor luminaires must be fully shielded.
5. For docks lighting on Lake Sammamish, refer to Chapter 18.804 IMC, Shoreline Master Program.
C. Maximum Allowed Lumens for Lighting of Residential Uses.
Table 18.610.070(C). Residential Lighting Lum: Maximum Allowed Luminaire Lumens
LZ 0 (lumens) | LZ 1 (lumens) | LZ 2 (lumens) | LZ 3 (lumens) | Notes | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Unshielded luminaires at one entry only | Not allowed | 420 | 630 | 630 | IMC 18.610.070(C)(1) IMC 18.610.070(C)(2) |
Each fully shielded luminaire | 630 | 1,260 | 1,260 | 1,260 | IMC 18.610.070(C)(2) |
Each line voltage landscape light | Not allowed | 100 | 1,050 | 2,100 | IMC 18.610.070(C)(2) |
Each low voltage landscape light | Not allowed | 100 | 525 | 525 | IMC 18.610.070(C)(2) |
Each shielded directional flood light | Not allowed | 1,260 | 1,260 | 2,100 | IMC 18.610.070(C)(2) |
1. One partly shielded or unshielded luminaire at the main entry, not exceeding the allowed lumen output for maximum allowed luminaire lumens for unshielded luminaires at one entry only. “Partly shielded luminaire” is defined as a luminaire with opaque top and translucent or perforated sides, designed to emit most light downward.
2. Luminaire lumens are calculated by multiplying the initial lamp lumens for a lamp by the number of lamps in the luminaire. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Purpose. A vibrant city relies on being active most of the day and into the evening. Thus, lighting is necessary to encourage pedestrian and bicycle activity beyond daylight hours. The quality of light can have a strong positive impact on the overall quality of the nighttime environment. Furthermore, due to the long nights during the Pacific Northwest winters, lighting can have a significant impact on the use of exterior, outdoor areas during hours when most people are awake, yet it is dark. Creating a hierarchy of light that contributes to understanding the public realm and addresses the safety and security of both pedestrian, bicycle, and vehicular traffic is critical to a successful after dark environment. To encourage more pedestrian and bicycle activity, visibility must be enhanced through the quality of the light and its sources.
B. General Design Standards.
1. Illumination of the entire volume, encompassing horizontal and vertical elements, is a key ingredient in perception of the space. Illuminating only the horizontal (ground) plane will result in spaces perceived to be uninteresting or unsafe. Lighting must be used to illuminate the entire volume as a key ingredient in perception of the space.
2. Illumination levels vary depending on activities. The overall illumination must be the minimum necessary to achieve its purpose. Specific elements should be emphasized with slightly higher light levels such as plazas, and pedestrian circulation paths such as stairs, ramps, abrupt changes in walking direction, crossing vehicle lanes, or other changes in elevations that can become trip hazards.
3. The types and locations of lights contribute to the public realm not only in the nature of light, but the nature of the fixtures. Streetlights, lit bollards, sconces, and gooseneck lamps, for example, all have a presence that shapes the urban character, whether they are illuminated or not. Use fixtures and locations that contribute to the neighborhood’s or project’s form and help shape the character whether illuminated or not.
4. Where off hours lighting is desired for security purposes (such as at loading docks and employee entrances) or for safety purposes (such as where lighting has been lowered or turned off for dark sky hours), motion sensors, astronomical clocks, or similar devices must be used. The following design standards apply:
a. Motion sensor may be used where the user will be passing through (such as on a trail or private walkway), the route is unpredictable, the area is small (such as a waste enclosure) and/or a user is unlikely to be familiar with the equipment.
b. Astronomic clocks with manual overrides will be used when users are coming from fixed locations (such as a building entry), the lighting is needed in a larger area, and/or a user is likely to be familiar with the equipment. Astronomic clocks with manual overrides are preferred.
c. The motion sensor or astronomic clock may be activated for a duration of no more than five minutes unless it can be objectively demonstrated that a longer period is needed. For example, if the distance to be walked is calculated based on an average user to be longer, which would then establish the lengthier duration.
d. The motion sensors may not be activated by off-site movement.
e. Security Lighting.
(1) The luminaire must be fully shielded, aimed downward to light only the designated areas and not exceed the limits in IMC 18.610.050(A)(8) and (A)(9).
(2) Lighting fixture(s) may emit up to 1,200 lumens.
5. Permanent lighting may not be attached to trees. Temporary, seasonal, or festival lighting may be placed in trees in a manner that does not harm the tree.
C. Transportation Lighting Design Standards.
1. Streetlights will use the City’s master street light plan to identify public light fixtures in color, style, height, and other characteristics.
2. Streetlight poles must be located in pairs directly across the street from each other or staggered, resulting in an intentional pattern created by poles on both sides of the street.
3. Streetlight poles must be coordinated with other street elements, especially those that impact the fixture’s ability to illuminate the intended area. Street tree design must be coordinated with streetlight placement, to ensure both at installation and as the tree matures that streetlights will achieve the required lighting and uniformity levels.
4. For alleys, the minimum lighting necessary to ensure safety. Appropriate lighting may be provided by the lights associated with individual residences along the alley rather than streetlights or other shared lighting. Lighting should be placed to eliminate glare into adjacent uses. If lighting in alleys is located on private structures instead of independent fixtures, such as poles, lighting must be programmed to come on at dusk and be uniformly reduced at a specified time.
5. Pedestrian and/or bicycle facilities must be lit to ensure users are safe and feel safe.
a. Multimodal pathways, not associated with a vehicular transportation facility, must have a low but uniform light level. Appropriate lighting may be provided by building-mounted lights rather than separate light fixtures if appropriate to the character of the space.
b. Light fixtures for street corridors serving vehicles, pedestrians, and/or bicycles, must meet the needs of all users rather than providing light fixtures for each user separately; however, for some streets where tall fixtures are needed to light the vehicular travel ways consistent with lighting levels and uniformity, separate fixtures will be necessary and appropriate.
6. Trail and pedestrian only routes must have lighting that creates a sense of safety without adversely affecting the surrounding uses, such as abutting residences. Trail lighting associated with critical areas is addressed in IMC 18.802.260.
7. Poles may be located on just one side of the pedestrian and bicycle facilities or paired or staggered like vehicular transportation facilities, as is appropriate to the character of the facility, urban design, and adjacent uses.
8. Lighting within and adjacent to critical areas must have no spillover light into the critical area in accordance with IMC 18.610.050(A)(8). Trails within critical areas must intentionally be left dark to protect the natural habitat for nocturnal animals and wildlife with the following exceptions:
a. Nonmotorized bridges within critical areas may have a low level of light for safe use, and the light should be contained and focused on the bridge deck.
b. Publicly owned trails may use motion detectors per subsection (C)(9) of this section to increase trail lighting to allow a user’s safe passage through critical areas if the City or other agency has determined that lit passage after dark is appropriate and necessary.
9. Walking and biking routes must be lit to illuminate the faces of users, to a height of approximately six feet high. Spillover lighting from adjacent sidewalks, streets, buildings, etc., may fulfill this requirement and must be incorporated into the lighting calculations. Internally illuminated bollards may be used, and are appropriate to highlight pedestrian routes, demark changes between users (e.g., pedestrian and vehicular areas), steps or other grade changes. Illuminated bollards should not be the only light source when it is useful to illuminate people’s faces to create a sense of safety.
D. Outdoor Amenity Space Design Standards.
1. Outdoor amenity space must have low levels of uniform illumination for safety, with higher levels for focal points or areas of high activity, such as walking routes.
2. Recreation and children’s play areas must be illuminated if they are intended for use after dark with controls so that they are “off” after hours. Areas not intended for use after dark may not be illuminated.
E. Building and Specific Use Design Standards.
1. Primary building entrances and individual entrances to retail or other separate uses and residences along streets, plazas, trails, and similar uses shall highlight the entries with lighting. This does not apply to employee-only entrances or entries used only for exiting.
2. To avoid glare and minimize distraction, canopy lighting, such as with automobile fueling stations, hotel or hospital entrances must be contained by the canopy design and luminaire selection and shall not be mounted to the canopy sides (fascia) or top. (Sign lighting on the sides of the canopy is regulated by Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.) This can be achieved by one of the following methods:
a. The luminaires are fully recessed into the canopy; or
b. If the luminaires are surface mounted, they have no exposed lens outside of the canopy area, such as through the use of a soffit.
c. If indirect lighting is desired, the light may be beamed upward and then reflected down from the underside of the canopy. When this method is used, light fixtures must be shielded so that direct illumination is focused exclusively on the underside of the canopy.
d. The luminaires must comply with the glare portion of the BUG rating for that lighting zone.
3. When the following are illuminated, lighting fixtures must be mounted, aimed, and shielded so that their beams fall within the primary playing area and so that no illumination is directed off site: outdoor performance venue and sport or recreation fields, for activities including sports, ballgames, and play. All luminaires must be directed or shielded so as to not be visible off site to roads or residences. Pole heights may only be as tall as necessary to meet lighting requirements for the class of play and facilities. Landscaping must be installed and incorporate evergreen trees located between the poles supporting the luminaires and adjacent residential uses.
4. Sports and Event Lighting. The main event lighting must be turned off no more than 30 minutes following the end of the event. A secondary lighting system with lower height and light level lighting must be used to facilitate patrons exiting the event location and for maintenance crews.
F. Olde Town Design Standards.
1. Lighting selected both on site and in the right-of-way must complement the historic character of Olde Town through complementing the City’s public light fixtures in color, style, and other architectural features.
2. Lighting shall be used through block passages and connections to and from parking.
3. At Olde Town’s gateways, lighting shall be used as one of the elements to highlight entrance into the neighborhood.
G. Parking Facility Design Standards.
1. Structured parking, including the roof, must ensure no direct light spillover from fixtures or vehicles and must minimize glare spilling from garage fixtures and vehicles onto the adjacent roadways, off-site views, and residential areas, and eliminate or significantly reduce visibility of light sources by shielding the view of the light fixtures when viewed from outside the garage. Techniques include limiting openings or screening openings with architectural and/or landscape elements.
2. Light standards may not be located where they will interfere with or impinge on parking stalls, stacking areas, ingress or egress, or marked pedestrian routes.
3. Parking lot light poles must be located so that trees within the parking lots do not obscure the operation of the light pole. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. Permits.
1. An outdoor lighting permit is required for all lighting except:
a. Lighting that is not covered by this Code.
b. Lighting that is exempt.
c. Lighting for residential projects per IMC 18.610.070
d. Maintenance and cleaning. See subsection C of this section.
2. Applicants must obtain all applicable permits associated with the proposed lighting before constructing, installing, replacing, or repairing the outdoor lighting, including permits required by other applicable codes. Other applicable permits may include, but are not limited to, other local, State, and Federal codes, including, but not limited to, electrical and energy codes and the Building Code.
3. Submittal Requirements.
a. A site plan showing the proposed location, mounting height, aiming point, type, and size of all outdoor lighting, including building-mounted, landscape, roadways, and parking lot lighting. The site plan shall also include property line or project limit line if part of a larger project, any buildings or structures which might impact the light, and any additional information that shows compliance with this chapter.
b. If building-mounted fixtures are used, building elevations information showing the location and height of each fixture is required.
c. Manufacturer fixture specification sheets or cut sheets for all fixture types. Fixture cut sheets must be labeled with fixture type and all fixture features and accessories must be defined and an image of the fixture included.
d. Any other information determined necessary by the City, such as lighting studies prepared by a qualified professional, photometric analysis, lighting schedule, documentation, renderings, or plans.
B. Inspections. All lighting permitted by this chapter may be subject to inspection by the Director. If a complaint is filed or violation suspected, the City may request the property owner hire a consultant to evaluate the lighting to determine if it is consistent with this chapter or the City may hire a consultant to either peer review the evaluation or perform the evaluation if the property owner does not do so within 30 days of receiving a written notice from the City. Any cost incurred by the City to determine if the lighting is in compliance will be the responsibility of the property owner.
C. Maintenance. Maintenance or cleaning does not require a permit. Replacement of lighting is allowed without a permit following temporary removal for maintenance or cleaning of lighting or following temporary removal for permitted building façade changes. This exception does not include any structural, electrical, or luminaire changes.
D. Existing Lighting. Lighting installed prior to the effective date of this chapter must comply with subsections (E)(2) and (E)(3) of this section.
E. Additions or Alterations.
1. Any new outdoor lighting must meet the requirements of this chapter.
2. Major additions for nonresidential and multiple dwellings governed by IMC 18.610.060. If a major addition occurs on a property, lighting for the entire property must comply with the requirements of this chapter. “Property” means all contiguous land in common ownership. For purposes of this section, the following are considered to be a major addition:
a. Additions of 25 percent or more in terms of additional dwelling units, gross floor area, seating capacity, or parking spaces, either with a single addition or with cumulative additions within a three-year period.
b. Single or cumulative additions, modification, or replacement of 25 percent or more of installed outdoor lighting luminaires within a three-year period.
c. A major addition requires the submission of a complete inventory and site plan detailing all existing and any proposed new outdoor lighting that will demonstrate compliance.
3. Minor modifications, additions, or new lighting fixtures for nonresidential and multiple dwellings governed by IMC 18.610.060.
a. For nonresidential and multiple dwellings, all additions, modifications, or replacement of less than 25 percent of outdoor lighting fixtures existing within a three-year period do not have to be brought into compliance.
4. Right-of-Way.
a. Private development that is required to replace, add, or update street lighting must comply with the lighting requirements of this chapter for new street lighting pursuant to IMC 18.610.080(C).
b. Capital facilities projects must comply with the requirements of Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards. (Ord. 3017 § 5 (Exh. F), 2023).
A. The intent of this chapter is to attain vibrant, mixed-use, pedestrian-friendly neighborhoods by establishing site design standards that orient development so that it defines the public realm, reacts to and acknowledges the natural environment, and improves the pedestrian and multimodal experiences. Each development must meet the site and urban design intent by blending functionality with elements that make projects memorable, identifiable, and livable. Specifically, these standards aim to achieve:
1. Integration. Sites that are designed to acknowledge and amplify the context of the surrounding urban and natural environment including, but not limited to, trees, creeks, and mountains.
2. Transportation Priorities. Pedestrian and bicyclist circulation needs that are higher priority than motorized circulation, while ensuring sites are designed for functional motorized transportation.
3. Sense of Place. Development that is designed to generate a sense of belonging, community, and interest. In some cases, development may be designed to establish distinct characteristics of different neighborhoods or districts.
4. Environmentally Sustainable Design. Development that incorporates the most effective and innovative sustainable green building program measures.
5. A Sense of Arrival. Sites that highlight unique design features and provide a sense of arrival in each district and development to establish distinct boundaries that are recognizable to the community.
6. Compatibility With Existing Features and Context. Sites that respond to and harmonize with existing features and buildings, such as adjacent creeks, internal and external views, solar orientation, and adjacent building design (see Figure 18.600.010(A)(6)).
Figure 18.600.010(A)(6). Design Harmony Between New and Historic Buildings

B. The intent of this chapter’s urban design standards is to ensure that new buildings harmonize with the vision for a neighborhood’s buildings and public realm. When buildings harmonize within the context, the history and vibrancy of Issaquah’s urban fabric is maintained and enhanced. Such harmony is achieved through the urban design standards for building scale, proportion, massing, and ground level activation, unless the new buildings are of civic and social importance, when differentiated architecture can highlight the building’s importance (see Figure 18.600.010(B)).
Figure 18.600.010(B). Civic Buildings as Focal Point
![]() | ![]() |
(Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Unless exempt by IMC 18.600.030, Exemptions, this chapter applies Citywide to development, redevelopment, and subdivisions.
1. Site and urban design standards applicable to all sites are addressed in IMC 18.600.040.
2. Site and urban design standards applicable to multifamily, commercial, mixed-use development, and single-family and townhouses are addressed starting in Article III of this chapter, as shown in the following table:
Table 18.600.020(A)(3). Applicability of Design Standards
Use | Reference | |
|---|---|---|
Urban Design | Article III | |
Sustainable Site Design | All | IMC 18.600.040(A) |
Wayfinding | All | IMC 18.600.040(B) |
Ground Level Facades | Commercial and Mixed-Use | IMC 18.600.050 |
Entries | Commercial and Mixed-Use Multifamily Retail | IMC 18.600.050 IMC 18.600.060 IMC 18.600.080 |
Walkways | All Single-Family 2+ Lots | IMC 18.600.040(F) IMC 18.600.070 |
Site Design | Article IV | |
Fences, Walls, and Screening | All | IMC 18.600.090 |
Waste Collection | All | IMC 18.600.100 |
B. Additional standards may apply by zone and subarea, as identified and applicable in Part VII of this title, Neighborhood Overlay. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
Individual single-family detached and middle housing developments are not subject to this chapter. (Ord. 3091 § 9 (Exh. I), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Sustainable Site Design. Every project must contribute to the City’s overall goals for sustainability and climate change mitigation and resiliency, in accordance with the Land Use Element of the City Comprehensive Plan. Specific to site design, this means:
1. Development must integrate sustainable green building principles into designing site layout, orientation, and construction.
2. Required methods include, at minimum:
a. Integrating existing environmental site characteristics such as existing topography, critical areas, and trees into the site design;
b. Analyzing the sun path and wind directions passing through the site and how these might contribute to energy efficiency by natural heating, cooling, or energy generation;
c. Enhancing or expanding multimodal transportation options (see Chapters 12.10 and 18.608 IMC);
d. Providing electric vehicle charging if providing new parking (see IMC 18.604.090); and
e. Including accommodations for technologies such as conduits for fiber, broadband readiness, and building and lighting energy use minimization.
B. Intuitive Wayfinding. Sites must provide wayfinding signage and be designed so all users including pedestrians, bicyclists, and motorists can easily orient themselves and understand how to move through the development.
C. Multifunctionality. Site design must create opportunities for multiple uses. Examples include:
1. Raised planters and walls may be designed to be used for seating;
2. Planter strips may accommodate bioswales;
3. Raised utility vaults may be designed as playscape areas;
4. An emergency staging/fire lane area(s) may be designed to be used for recreation or informal gathering when not in use for emergencies;
5. Fire turnarounds may be integrated into plaza/trail/road configurations;
6. Parking lots and garages may be used as off-peak markets;
7. Low volume driving surface may be shared with pedestrians and bicyclists;
8. Nature trails and utility corridors may be combined;
9. Play elements that also educate;
10. Swales or pavers that manage stormwater and create community space opportunity; and
11. Utility and infrastructure cabinets may be surfaced with art, information, and maps.
D. Site Amenities and Street Furniture. Site design must provide site amenities and street furniture in community spaces (Chapter 18.608 IMC) and adjacent transportation facilities to support the uses and create a public living room. Amenities must be easily accessible to pedestrians and not interfere with pedestrian routes. Amenities must include a combination of the following, to the extent practical:
1. Benches;
2. Pet relief stations;
3. Bike racks;
4. Art;
5. Decorative bollards;
6. Drinking fountains;
7. Transit or bus shelters;
8. Overlooks;
9. Informational and directional signage;
10. Interpretive kiosks;
11. Waste receptacles; and
12. Directories.
E. Special Paving Materials. Special and varied paving materials must be used to create visual interest and highlight areas of importance, see examples in Figure 18.600.040(E). Examples of areas of importance are: locations in community spaces (Chapter 18.608 IMC); transportation facility intersections; and important pedestrian crossings of vehicular routes (Chapter 18.602 IMC).
Figure 18.600.040(E). Examples of Special Paving Materials
![]() | ![]() |
F. Transportation Facilities. Pedestrian walkways and connections to surrounding transportation facilities and properties must be designed as follows:
1. Motorized and nonmotorized connections must be provided in coordination with adjacent transportation facilities and City planned transportation facilities.
2. Parking, drive-throughs, and similar auto-dependent facilities must not impede pedestrian walkways and bicycle facilities, in accordance with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
3. Building and structure design must provide direct access to the Transportation Facilities in accordance with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
4. Barrier-free walkways providing the most direct route through a development must be provided between public entrances and the nearest public sidewalk, trail, or shared use corridor.
5. Walkways must meet the latest Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) guidelines. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Buildings must be oriented towards natural areas in Central Issaquah (see Figure 18.600.042(A)). Development sites, partially or totally within the Natural Context zone (i.e., within 150 feet of a natural area), and adjacent site development must respect, reinforce, and strengthen natural area assets.
Figure 18.600.042(A). Natural Context Areas Map

1. The building design and site between the natural area and the building must connect the building(s) and site uses to the natural area rather than divide them (see Figure 18.600.042(A)(1)).
Figure 18.600.042(A)(1). Natural Context Zone Diagram

2. Buildings must be designed to face the natural area and use natural materials and finishes that will age well over time.
3. Buildings must be designed with doors and windows making up 50 percent of the wall(s) oriented toward natural areas, to blur the transition between outdoor and indoor spaces along natural areas.
4. Upper floor must have building stepbacks that foster a graceful transition between the built and natural environments with a minimum stepback of five feet and maximum of 20 feet for all floors above the fourth floor that face the natural area, and shall be provided as follows:
a. For buildings taller than five floors, stepback must begin by the sixth floor but may begin as low as the third floor.
b. For buildings with fewer than six floors, a minimum of the first two floors must be built at the street edge.
5. Uses and activities shall be placed in the setback from the natural area, to orient to and build on its presence, rather than divide the site from the natural area.
6. Only native plant material landscape shall be used in the area between the building and the natural area.
7. Buildings shall be designed with balconies, stoops, porches and/or upper floor terraces facing the natural area. See example in Figure 18.600.042(A)(7).
Figure 18.600.042(A)(7). Building Oriented to Natural Area

8. Public walkways shall be provided between regulated creek or wetland open space and the building frontage.
9. For development adjacent to natural areas with water (such as wetlands, streams, and ponds), a water-oriented feature shall be provided, such as viewing platforms, trails, and outdoor seating areas accessible to the public while containing human and pet impacts with a barrier, railing, or fence.
10. Building activities and design that close off the building from the natural area are prohibited, including, but not limited to, utility rooms, storage, and solid walls with lack of windows and doors.
11. Driveways, parking loading areas, outdoor storage areas between buildings and open spaces/natural areas are prohibited. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Projects must preserve views of the forested hillsides of Tiger, Squak, and Cougar Mountains, Sammamish Plateau and Mt. Rainier from public spaces including transportation facilities and community spaces as shown on the Green Necklace Map, IMC 18.608.050(B), as follows:
1. Along the axis of existing transportation facilities except through block passages and trails, preserve the existing linear view;
2. If the existing circulation transportation facilities are curved, then the applicant must obtain a determination of the important views to be retained, by following the deviation process (IMC 18.600.110). The request must be reviewed and approved prior to approval of the project’s land use permit. For new transportation facilities, use views of the forested hillsides listed above as one criterion in determining appropriate layout; and
3. Design community spaces to preserve views along new and existing transportation facilities.
4. Floors above the mid-rise level for high-rise buildings must be horizontally separated from other high-rise buildings by 110 feet. Low-rise, mid-rise, and high-rise building locations may be adjusted as determined by the Director to ensure preservation of these view corridors.
5. The applicant may seek a deviation from this section by following the deviation process at IMC 18.600.110. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Ground Level Details of Commercial Uses in Mixed-Use Buildings.
1. Intent. This subsection intends to ensure that mixed-use buildings that have commercial use on the ground floor display the greatest amount of visual interest and reinforce the character of the streetscape.
2. Applicability. This subsection applies to mixed-use buildings with a commercial use on the ground floor.
3. Standards. Buildings located along a public street must incorporate at least four of the following elements into any ground-floor, street-facing façade:
a. Lighting supported by ornamental brackets;
b. Belt courses;
c. Plinths for columns;
d. Ornamental doors or window;
e. Projecting sills;
f. Tilework; and/or
g. Potted plants or hanging baskets supported by ornamental brackets.
B. Entries at Commercial Office Uses.
1. Intent. This subsection intends to ensure that entries facing the street are prioritized, and entries off through block passages will be additional and secondary to the street entrance. By locating entries facing the public realm, users will enter and exit the building from the street or passage, activating and animating the district.
2. Applicability. This subsection applies to commercial office uses.
3. Standards. Entries at commercial office uses must comply with the following:
a. Ground floor commercial entries must be oriented to transportation facilities and through block passages and be directly accessible from the adjacent sidewalk.
b. Primary business and client entries must face the street and shall not be accessed directly from parking lots.
Figure 18.600.050(B)(3). Commercial Office Entry (Image: Crandall Arambula)

c. Employee and service entries may face other nonprimary frontages, through block passages, and parking facilities.
d. At-grade entries fronting on sidewalks must be provided.
e. All doorway and window glazing must be transparent and comply with IMC 18.602.080, Ground level transparency. Colored, dark tinted, reflective, or other opaque window or door materials and treatments are prohibited.
C. Standards for retail use entries are located in IMC 18.600.080. (Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Intent.
1. When buildings have ground floor individual dwelling units or main lobby entries oriented to the street or pedestrian realm, they contribute to the vitality and safety of the public realm through “eyes on the street” surveillance. By locating entries to face the street, courtyard, and/or through block passages, users will enter and exit the building from the street, activating and animating the public realm.
2. These standards intend to ensure ground-related residential units improve the experience for pedestrians and offer the opportunity for semi-private space to the residence. The design and placement of the building, windows, and semi-private space needs to balance the need for activity adjacent to sidewalks and public space while maintaining security and privacy for residents.
3. The design of residential buildings should reinforce a pedestrian-friendly and multimodal transportation environment. This might include stoops, private front yards, common gardens, courtyards or elevated first floor units.
B. Applicability. This section applies to multifamily developments with ground floor residential units.
C. Multifamily Entries Standards.
1. Any building abutting a transportation facility must be oriented to the transportation facility.
2. Architectural elements must be used to provide a clearly identifiable and defensible entry visible from the street. For example, front porches with substantial depth, distinctive roof forms, architectural details, seating, railings, or alcoves may be used. Developments must include at least two of the following:
a. Recesses.
b. Balconies.
c. Articulated roof forms.
d. Front porches.
e. Arches.
f. Trellises.
g. Glass at sides and/or above entry doors.
h. Awnings and/or canopies.
3. Architecture and landscape architecture features must be used to further enhance and identify the pedestrian entry experience. Primary building entries must include a clearly identifiable entry doorway visible from the adjacent transportation facility, enhanced landscaping, special paving, and pedestrian-scaled lighting and/or lighted bollards.
Figure 18.600.060(C)(3). Commercial Terracing or Alternative Treatments

4. Ground floor residential entries must be oriented to the street, courtyard (if not adjacent to the street), or through block passage. If the doorway does not face the street, a clearly marked and well-maintained five-foot paved path must connect the entry to the sidewalk. They must also provide secure access directly to dwelling units or through elevator lobbies, stairwells, and corridors.
Figure 18.600.060(C)(4). Multifamily Entries Accessed From the Street

a. Compliant design requires the following:
(1) The primary entry for any ground-floor unit abutting the transportation facility, and the primary entry for multifamily residential buildings with ground-floor units that do not have entries facing the street such as those with entries through lobbies, must open directly onto the transportation facility.
(2) Individual unit and lobby entry doors that are substantial enough to suggest privacy while still appearing welcoming to those who approach and enter.
(3) For doors that face an active and busy street, provide separation through setback or four-foot recess with comfortable grade change.
(4) For each building frontage that exceeds 50 feet in length, each unit must have a separate entry directly from the sidewalk, through block passage, courtyard, or similar pedestrian-oriented facility except where unavoidable factors (e.g., vertical separation such as for an underground garage, or horizontal separation such as a lack of setback) preclude the connection. Where the connection is precluded, terraces, balconies, or similar active facility must be provided for each ground floor unit.
(5) Secondary entrances may be from parking areas, where a pedestrian connection from the parking area to the entrance has been made.
b. Noncompliant Design.
(1) Main entries accessed directly from parking lots or alleys. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Intent. This section intends to establish nonmotorized connections among and between single-family homes in developments of two or more lots.
B. Applicability. This section applies to developments of single-family homes involving two or more lots.
C. Standards. Developments of single-family homes involving two or more lots must comply with all of the following:
1. In addition to any required sidewalks or bike lanes, provide nonmotorized access and circulation by walkways, shared use paths and/or techniques such as linking cul-de-sacs, linking groups of buildings, and providing parallel routes that are permanent and recorded on plats and/or other required permit plans.
2. A required nonmotorized facility must provide pedestrian access from within the development to activity centers, parks, common areas, open spaces, schools or other public facilities, transit stops, public streets and/or existing nonmotorized facilities in adjacent developments served by public streets.
3. Stubs and/or routes for future connection may be required after an analysis of potential development on adjacent parcels and remaining opportunities to connect with collector and arterial streets.
4. At least one nonmotorized facility is required where block lengths or cul-de-sac lengths are 500 feet or more.
5. Nonmotorized facilities must be located the maximum distance possible from residential buildings that will still allow meeting the other requirements of this chapter. Landscaping must be provided within the setback in accordance with the requirements of Chapter 18.606 IMC, Landscaping. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Intent. Individual retail shop entries oriented to the street are essential for business success and contribute to the pedestrian-oriented vitality of shopping areas. The following standards intend to ensure a welcoming public realm for both businesses and pedestrians.
B. Applicability. This section applies to all retail uses, including those located within commercial and mixed-use buildings.
C. Standards. Retail entries must comply with all of the following:
1. A customer entrance to individual retail storefronts must be oriented to the street and directly accessible from the adjacent sidewalk;
2. Retail uses must have at-grade entries fronting sidewalks;
3. Secondary entries are permitted along a through block passage, alley, or parking lot;
4. Entries directly from parking lots must be limited to service, employee, and emergency access;
5. Entrances to business must be identifiable;
6. A minimum of 25 percent of the retail area must be oriented to pedestrians; and
7. Use of ramps or steps to access a retail storefront is prohibited.
Figure 18.600.080(C)(7). Retail Entryways (Image: Crandall Arambula)

(Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Intent. The standards in this section intend to provide screening between incompatible uses.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all commercial and multifamily developments.
C. Wall Standards.
1. Site walls must comply with the following standards:
a. Site walls adjacent to pedestrian areas (e.g., walkways, sidewalks, trails) shall not be taller than four feet in height. If taller walls are required, e.g., a retaining wall, one of the following may be selected:
(1) A wall up to four feet tall next to or near the pedestrian area with one or more taller walls (each up to 10 feet in height) terraced behind the lower wall; or
(2) A wall up to 10 feet tall, set back from the pedestrian area with enough setback to accommodate evergreen trees spaced every 30 to 35 feet. Additional walls, also up to 10 feet tall, may be terraced behind the first wall. Setback of the wall closest to the pedestrian area must accommodate mature tree size without impinging on pedestrian area. Setback space between trees must be filled with shrubs and groundcovers consistent with landscape standards; see Chapter 18.606 IMC, Landscaping.
b. In all cases of terracing, walls must be terraced with a minimum of three feet to accommodate shrubs, vines, and groundcover.
c. Wall materials must complement the selected architectural styles, such as block or shotcrete covered soil nail walls (Figure 18.600.090(C)(2) shows an example for a noncompliant wall; while it is the right height, the style of wall is busy and detracts rather than complements the adjacent homes).
Figure 18.600.090(C)(2). Noncompliant Wall Design

d. Materials scored or changed at a pedestrian scale frequency. Pedestrian scale materials include brick and other block or modular element. If concrete is used, it must be treated architecturally with scoring or other detailing.
e. Walls four feet and greater in height and longer than 30 feet length must be articulated and modulated at a frequency of, at a minimum, 35 feet.
f. When walls are used to screen undesirable elements, then articulation, artwork, and/or landscape plantings must be added to soften the visual effect of the structure.
2. The following are prohibited:
a. Using rockeries or timber walls, except when adjacent to natural open spaces.
b. Large expanses of concrete with no reveals, scorelines, or similar elements.
D. Fence Standards. Fences must comply with the following standards:
1. Fence design should complement the character of the development such as split rail or informal fencing (e.g., vinyl, aluminum, etc.) in natural or transition areas, and more formal fencing (e.g., wood, wrought iron, etc.) in developed areas.
2. Fences adjacent to pedestrian facilities and community spaces must be four feet or less in height and partially view-obscuring. Fences screening utilities, service, loading, waste, etc., must be the same height as the equipment it is screening but not exceed eight feet, while complementary to the architecture and character of adjacent areas.
3. When fences are used to screen undesirable elements, then articulation, artwork, and/or landscape plantings must be added to soften the visual effect of the structure. If fences are used to screen facilities such as waste collection areas, full height fences (six to eight feet tall) shall be used.
4. Wood or wrought iron are preferred fencing, arbor, pergola, or trellis materials such as when along a property side that is visible to the public or abutting property owners. Hedge or impenetrable landscape may be substituted for fencing, but height restrictions do not apply.
E. Specific Types of Fencing Standards. The following standards apply to certain types of fencing:
1. Use of chain-link fencing is restricted, except when provided as follows:
a. In general, chain-link fencing is prohibited in prominently visible areas or along transportation facilities unless specifically allowed below.
b. In less prominent areas, like the side and rear setbacks, black vinyl coated fencing, or other color coating that reduces visibility, may be used.
c. Temporary Uses. Chain-link fencing may be used for temporary purposes such as construction sites.
d. Multifamily and Nonresidential Sites. In less visible portions of multifamily, commercial, retail, or industrial areas, black vinyl coated chain link may be used for fencing where sight-obscuring fencing is not needed. Chain-link fencing must be softened with landscape screening.
e. Recreational Sites. Recreation fields and ball fields may use black vinyl coated chain link fencing to contain balls and players.
f. Major and Minor Utility Facilities. Major and minor utility facilities may use chain-link fencing softened with landscape screening.
g. Single-Family, Duplexes, Triplexes, Fourplexes, and Townhomes on Individual Lots. Chain-link may not be used unless specifically allowed by the architectural standards, such as Olde Town single-family-duplex architectural standards, or active Architectural Review Committee for an area, such as Issaquah Highlands and Talus.
2. Electric Fences. Electric fences are not permitted in any district except where additional fencing or other barriers prevent access to the electric fence by small children.
3. Barbed-Wire Fences. Barbed-wire fences may be used only in the following situations:
a. At the top of a six-foot-high solid or chain-link fence in commercial or industrial zoned districts;
b. To protect and contain permitted agricultural animals, which include livestock, bees, and poultry; or
c. At the top of a solid or chain-link fence around a major or minor utility facility. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Intent. The following standards are intended to ensure the provision of adequate facilities for waste and recycling collection in commercial and multifamily projects.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all commercial and multifamily developments.
C. General Standards for Waste Collection. Waste collection must meet all the following standards:
1. Separate containers must be provided for garbage, recyclables, and food waste. Each collection type must be located in the same outdoor enclosure or indoor room, using consistent methods. If a restaurant is an included use, room for a grease barrel must be provided. If a restaurant might be a future use, room for a future grease barrel is encouraged.
2. All trash compactors must be connected to sanitary sewer (separated from storm drains).
3. For dumpsters on rollers, the area at the front of the enclosure, where the dumpster will be pulled out for servicing, may not exceed a three percent grade, to prevent runaway dumpsters.
4. For stationary dumpsters, any cross slope in front of the enclosure may not exceed 10 percent.
5. Waste truck accessibility to the dumpster enclosures is limited by the truck turning templates, available from the City. Dumpsters on rollers must be rolled or pulled out to the front of the enclosure, while stationary dumpsters must be picked up from within the enclosure. There is a limited distance an operator will travel from vehicle to access enclosure. Waste collection must be coordinated between the development, the City and the waste collection purveyor.
6. If a vehicle is needed to pull the dumpster or containers to a location where the waste purveyor can access the containers for emptying, adequate storage space inside the building must be provided for the vehicle.
7. Containers That Are Transported to the Curb for Pickup.
a. Containers must have a permanent location on private property that is screened from view from the street and sidewalk with solid fencing, such as wood, or sight-obscuring landscaping.
b. Containers are allowed to be brought to the curb no sooner than 18 hours before the time of pick up and must be returned to private property no later than 18 hours after pickup occurs.
D. Outdoor enclosures require all of the following:
1. Waste locations should be convenient for residents/businesses. In general, waste enclosures should be provided within 250 feet of each residence/use, unless precluded by other site planning factors.
2. Containers must be located within a minimum six-foot-high enclosure designed to extend a minimum of one foot above the height of the container and must provide a 100 percent sight-obscuring enclosure. Other screening may be required per landscape standards in Chapter 18.606 IMC.
3. The enclosure must be roofed to create a wildlife resistant enclosure. Any roofed structure over enclosures for stationary dumpsters must have a vertical clearance of 14 feet.
4. Enclosure pads must slope toward an opening to allow drainage. The pad may not exceed a three percent grade and must be concrete.
5. Dumpsters, grease and oil containers, and trash compactors must have no illicit discharge to storm drains. Storm drains must be positioned so that potential discharge from dumpsters, containers, and compactors is visible outside the waste enclosure. For instance, storm drains can be located at a distance from the enclosure, such as a minimum of 15 feet, to highlight illicit discharge from the enclosure.
6. Dumpsters must have lids, or keep them under cover, to prevent the entry of stormwater.
7. Gate doors at the fronts of enclosures must open with a 180-degree swing, and include gate stops in both the open and closed positions. The gates must be constructed with commercial grade hinges, poles, and hasps.
8. A separate door for users is required in addition to the service gates to facilitate access.
9. Dumpster enclosures may not be located in required setbacks.
10. Precast curb stops must be placed around the entire inside perimeter of the enclosure except where doors are located.
11. Compactors must provide an eight-to-10-inch-thick reinforced concrete slab.
E. Enclosures or Collection Rooms Inside Buildings.
1. If waste chutes are used, separate garbage and recycling chutes are required. An optional additional chute for food waste may be used; however, it is preferred that food waste is collected in a waste collection room, rather than through a chute.
2. All waste streams must be consolidated into one or more waste collection rooms that are secure, well-lit, and only accessible to building occupants and management. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. Deviations may be requested for the following list of standards in this chapter. Deviations must be requested according to the appropriate permit process in IMC 18.204.020, Review levels. Deviations from the standards within this section must meet the approval criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and the criteria listed below. Any proposal to deviate that does not satisfy the following conditions must apply for a variance, according to Chapter 18.210 IMC, Variances.
B. Deviation Criteria for IMC 18.600.044 to Determine Views to Be Retained Along Curved Transportation Facilities.
1. The applicant must demonstrate which preserved view or views listed in IMC 18.600.044 are existing prior to the project development and what the impact would be on those views after project construction.
2. If there are no views to preserve, no further action is required. If there are views to preserve, then the applicant must either comply with IMC 18.600.044 or seek a deviation.
C. To seek a deviation from the views and vistas standards, the applicant must provide a viewshed study to assess the impacts of the proposed project. If views will not be altered or impacted by the proposed deviation or development design, no further action is required, and the deviation may be approved. If views will be impacted, a deviation may be approved if the applicant utilizes one of the following techniques to minimize changes in view corridors:
1. Increasing distances between high-rise building towers;
2. Retaining or creating new view corridors; or
3. Strategic placement of building bulk or height, while meeting minimum densities, and FAR. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. A), 2023).
A. The intent of this chapter is to establish building design standards that:
1. Create a vibrant, livable, pedestrian-friendly, and sustainable built environment through buildings designed to frame and engage the public realm, while maintaining and enhancing existing building uses and designs and views to nature;
2. Ensure internal and external views and solar access are considered when locating taller buildings. This includes ensuring sunlight at street level and in community and amenity spaces by thoughtfully locating buildings;
3. Ensure that buildings engage with adjacent facilities and that they do not have a “back side” through design and articulation;
4. Encourage and enforce a safe and healthy environment for benefit of the public welfare;
5. Encourage building designs that accommodates many uses so they may evolve over time;
6. Reduce heat island impacts by allowing for green space and tree canopy between buildings; and
7. Increase passive solar to reduce energy use.
B. The multifamily building design standards intend to break up the mass of buildings in creative ways.
1. Balance street-level activation with visual separation and privacy for ground-floor multifamily units that have minimal setbacks from streets, through block passages, or other public rights-of-way while increasing physical interaction between ground floor multifamily units and the public realm.
C. The retail and commercial building design standards intend to:
1. Activate transitions into storefronts, hotel lobbies, and other commercial spaces that have minimal setbacks from streets, through block passages, or other public rights-of-way; and
2. Increase visual and physical interaction between ground-floor retail uses and the public realm through adequate window and door openings. Retail uses face transportation facilities and use large street level windows that allow pedestrians to see activity within shops. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
Unless exempt by IMC 18.602.030, Exemptions, this chapter applies Citywide to development, redevelopment, and subdivisions. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. This chapter does not apply to the following:
1. Temporary uses and structures; and
2. Buildings and sites designated as landmarks by the Historic Preservation Commission.
B. Ground-level transparency does not apply to recreational cannabis facilities, as addressed in IMC 18.502.090. (Ord. 3091 § 10 (Exh. I), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. The following standards provide a baseline for building design in the City of Issaquah. However, Issaquah’s neighborhoods are not all the same. Additional building design standards may apply in Issaquah’s overlay areas, which are addressed in Part VII of this title, Neighborhood Overlays. See also Chapter 18.600 IMC, Urban Design and Site Planning, for additional building design standards that apply to specific uses.
B. Primary building entrances must face and be accessible from transportation facilities in order to engage the public realm, to bring visual interest, variation, and intimacy to the streetscape, while maintaining the pedestrian through-route. Other, nonprimary, building entrances may also be accessed from secondary or non-pedestrian-oriented transportation facilities or parking lots. Activities in the right-of-way must comply with Issaquah street standards.
C. Each primary building entrance must have weather protection and highlight the presence of the entrance to pedestrians through the use of architectural treatments such as modulation and articulation changes in the street wall or building façade, and lighting. Primary pedestrian entrances must be visually more prominent than secondary entrances.
D. For buildings that have more than one frontage along a transportation facility, each frontage must receive individual and detailed ground level treatment to complement the designated pedestrian character.
E. Blank walls longer than 30 linear feet are not allowed except when facing alleys.
1. General building design should appear to have continuity on all sides and no “back side.”
2. If windows and doors are not present, blank wall treatment is required. Treatment methods include, but are not limited to, at least two of the following:
a. Other features that allow visibility to the interior of the building;
b. Vertical trellis with climbing vines or plant materials to obscure or screen a minimum of 60 percent of the wall’s surface;
c. Decorative tile, cornices, or masonry;
d. Artwork (mosaic, mural, sculpture, etc.) on at least 25 percent of the blank wall surface;
e. Discernible change in building materials, patterns, or color variation every 15 horizontal feet and extending 60 percent of the vertical height of the adjacent building story; or
f. Special building details that add visual interest at a pedestrian scale.
3. If landscaping is present, it must enhance the blank wall and pedestrian experience as well as reduce the perceived scale.
a. Landscaping must be provided in combination with other design features.
b. Landscaping must include species that will not cause damage to hard surfaces over time.
c. Landscape beds/boxes, raised planters, and/or green ways are considered landscaping.
F. Outdoor informal gathering areas and opportunities for social interaction must be located adjacent to the façade. The required area will be based on requirements for outdoor spaces for new and redevelopment in accordance with Chapter 18.608 IMC, Community and Amenity Spaces.
G. Numerous and separated, rather than consolidated, entrances must be used such as regular use of individual entrances to businesses and residences. Entrances must be reinforced with the use of traditional “main street” design and repeated architectural elements such as windows, weather protection, pedestrian-oriented signage, archways, doors, accent lights and piers, columns, or pilasters.
H. Landscaping, including evergreen plantings to maintain year-round interest, must be located between the property line and the building to soften hardscape spaces and contribute to the Green Necklace. Plantings may be in at-grade or raised planters, containers, window box planters, upon trellises, etc. Where the building is located at the property line, plantings may be located in building bays such as required in IMC 18.602.060(D). Plantings may also extend onto the adjacent right-of-way. Landscaping in or adjacent to sidewalks must also comply with the sidewalk use design standards and guidelines under Chapter 12.05 IMC, Sidewalk Use District.
I. In commercial or mixed-use zones that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), at least two of the following design elements must be incorporated into the building design to best enhance the ground level details:
1. Clerestories over storefront windows;
2. Projecting window sills;
3. Medallions;
4. Benches and seat walls along 25 percent of the length of the façade; or
5. Decorative brick, tile or stone work on the ground floor façade.
J. Design of buildings must reinforce a pedestrian-friendly environment using the following techniques:
1. In commercial and mixed-use zones, the ground floor must be designed to incorporate active, visible uses (e.g., retail) or other visible uses that engage the pedestrian (e.g., residences, meeting rooms, lobbies, live/work). Where office and other uses require ground floor privacy, then a combination of landscaping, low walls, fencing and other built elements should create layers and differing textures to define these semi-private areas while maintaining a pedestrian-friendly environment.
2. Where gates or fences are desired or required, an open design must be used to allow social interaction. Semi-public and semi-private space must be delineated from public areas with railings or fences no more than three feet tall (unless fall protection is required), planters, or overhead elements.
K. Sustainable Design.
1. All mixed-use or commercial development or redevelopment of buildings greater than or equal to 10,000 gross square feet and subject to IMC 18.602.020, Applicability, must be certified to meet the current version of the U.S. Green Building Council’s (USGBC) Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED) Platinum program standards.
2. All residential development projects of 10 units or more and subject to IMC 18.602.020, Applicability, must be certified to meet the current version of the Built Green four-star certification standards. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Applicability. The following section contains the design standards that apply to required massing and articulation. These design standards must be met by all buildings, except where architectural styles of a specific neighborhood subarea or overlay provide different guidance, in accordance with Part VII of this title, Neighborhood Overlays.
B. Upper portions of buildings shall step back through changes in building materials with articulation and modulation that differs from the first three floors, per base and building height requirements in IMC 18.404.090, Residential zones form and intensity standards, through 18.404.170, Talus form and intensity standards.
1. Buildings adjacent to natural areas must comply with the stepback requirements in IMC 18.600.042(A).
2. Stepbacks must incorporate terraces and usable outdoor space.
3. Buildings with four or fewer floors shall not incorporate more than one upper floor stepback.
Figure 18.602.050(B)(4). Examples of a six-story building with upper two floors stepped back from street (left) and a four-story building with lower two floors at the street edge and upper two floors stepped back (right)

Figure 18.602.050(B)(5). Example: Building over six stories with multiple stepbacks. Photo: BHC Consultants

C. Buildings must provide surface relief, depth, and shadows to the façade by:
1. Recessing at least 18 inches deep or projecting elements of the façade, especially windows;
2. Changing materials, color, or height; or
3. Vary within the build-to-line for horizontal façades longer than 30 feet.
D. Commercial and retail structures must abut the sidewalk to create the presence of a streetwall. A setback from the sidewalk will only be considered if the use and/or adjacent uses will use the setback area as active space, specific design elements, or for security purposes (e.g., outdoor seating for a restaurant or café, retail display area, entry court, seating, fountain, kiosk, etc.). If a setback is allowed, use of design elements that create and/or maintain a strong connection to the street and support a pedestrian-friendly environment must be provided.
1. If a setback is allowed, it should be the minimum necessary to provide the active space and/or design element needed for the specific use.
2. An approved setback for commercial and retail proposals shall be no greater than 10 feet.
E. To increase a building’s architectural detail and level of interest, in areas that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), windows must be:
1. Divided light windows;
2. Operable;
3. Trimmed around framed openings; or
4. Recessed or projecting from the building façade and not flush.
F. In areas that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), the building base, middle, and top must be distinguished from each other through techniques such as setting back buildings with heights over three stories or varying character, materials, color, or height.
G. Views must be preserved in accordance with IMC 18.600.044(A).
H. In areas that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), building corners adjacent to the public realm must include added detail, design, and building form, or conversely cutting away the corner for a special entry, gathering spot, café seating, sidewalk vending, art, a fountain, or similar pedestrian element. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of rooftop standards is to regulate the development of rooftops that may be used as active amenities, such as for community gardens, recreation, and useable courtyards (see Figure 18.602.060(A) for an example of a compliant rooftop).
Figure 18.602.060(A). Rooftops Used for Communal Space

B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all nonresidential and multifamily developments.
C. Where active uses cannot be placed on rooftops, rooftops should be used for passive activities, such as green roofs to partially address stormwater, solar panels, art and/or design to make them visually interesting, as well as a means to allow access to light and air for adjacent occupied space.
D. In areas that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), nonresidential buildings must have parapets and projecting cornices to create a prominent edge when viewed against the sky. Residential uses may use parapets and projecting cornices or sloping roofs consistent with the building design.
E. Parapets should be used to highlight focal points of the building. Parapets shall not dominate the façade or appear as flat and obviously false extensions of building wall sections, but rather appear as distinct building masses and extend into the depth of the building.
F. Parapets may not exceed 25 percent of the height of the supporting wall, as measured from grade to the exterior roof surface, and may not exceed eight feet in height.
G. Where roof shape and penthouse functions are integrated into the overall building design, one of the following design elements must be used:
1. Active rooftop uses in accordance with IMC 18.608.100, Rooftop amenities;
2. Green roofs that reduce stormwater runoff; or
3. Parapet walls.
H. In areas that do not have detailed architectural styles (such as Central Issaquah or Olde Town) or an active Architectural Review Committee (Issaquah Highlands and Talus), sloped roofs must have pitched roofs with a minimum slope of 4:12. Large roofs that extend longer than 60 feet must have a change in form such as a change in height, pitch, orientation, or other changes in form at a spacing to break up the massiveness of a continuous, uninterrupted sloping roof.
I. Views at ground level of mechanical, electrical, and communication equipment, satellite dishes, utilities, infrastructure housing, HVAC, except renewable energy appurtenances, must be screened from view from surrounding sidewalks, through block passages, community spaces, or public parks. Screening may be required for sides or tops of equipment, as necessary to shield views. The devices must be screened in a method that is integrated with the architectural character of the building. Where the equipment is contained in a plain box, or self-screened, the roof-mounted equipment shall match the color of the roof to minimize visual impacts when equipment is visible from higher elevations nearby.
J. Cell phone towers and related equipment may be located on rooftops in accordance with Chapter 18.512 IMC, Wireless Communication Facilities, but must be located toward the center of the roof to minimize ground level and surrounding street views as much as possible. The Director may require structure design or screening methods to integrate the equipment with the development design.
K. Equipment that is incorporated into a rooftop terrace or garden must ensure screening of large equipment with architectural elements and/or landscaping to include the top and all sides. At maturity, the plant screening must be at least the height of the equipment being screened.
L. Rooftop Materials.
1. Rooftops must be comprised of sustainable building materials. Examples of acceptable sustainable building materials include, but are not limited to:
a. Green and living roofs;
b. White or cool roof materials designed to reflect as much heat as possible, reducing HVAC system demands;
c. Natural, recycled, or reclaimed roofing materials, including, but not limited to, wood, recycled metals, slate, and clay materials;
d. One hundred percent recyclable roofing;
e. A material not specifically listed here, but one that the applicant demonstrates provides greater energy and heating efficiency or a lower carbon footprint over the lifecycle of the material; or
f. A material not specifically listed here, but one that provides greater fire safety than the sustainable alternatives listed above.
2. Rooftops shall not contain materials that cause chemical runoffs harmful to streams and ecosystems, such as anti-moss treatments like zinc or copper that can harm fish habitats through runoff. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of weather protection requirements is to:
1. Protect pedestrians and outdoor seating areas from rain and snow;
2. Be an integral component of the building façade and architecturally complement the architecture;
3. Be proportionate to the building and sidewalks; and
4. Consider the surrounding environment to avoid interference with street trees, light fixtures, or other street furniture.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all nonresidential and multifamily developments.
C. Weather protection is required over entrances that serve as the primary access for tenants, guests and customers. Weather protection must be provided on no less than 75 percent of the building façade length where the building is located adjacent to a sidewalk, pedestrian path, or woonerf. Weather protection for pedestrian routes to rear or secondary entrances is required; however, the extent of weather protection along portions of the building not used by pedestrians may be waived if such weather protection would interfere with loading, deliveries, or waste collection.
D. Appropriate sizing of weather protection coverage is required as follows:
1. Weather protection associated with nonresidential buildings must be at least six feet in depth and have at least eight feet clearance beginning at the average finished grade. If the weather protection is 12 feet above the sidewalk, it must be at least eight feet in depth.
Figure 18.602.070(D)(1). Diagram of Weather Protection Dimensions

2. Weather protection over building entrances for residential uses must be at least four feet deep and four feet wide.
Figure 18.602.070(D)(2). Diagram of Weather Protection Dimensions on a Residential Building

E. The heights of weather protection must be compatible with adjacent buildings. The location of street trees and the edge of the driving surface may require adjustments to these dimensions. In all cases, the height and depth of the weather protection must prioritize providing protection to the pedestrian over architectural enhancement.
F. Acceptable weather protection materials include, but are not limited to:
1. Fabric awnings, including canvas or retractable awnings, made out of fire-retardant material;
2. Horizontal metal canopies with transom or clerestory windows above;
3. Simple, planar forms resembling flat or shed roofs; or
4. Glazed canopies.
G. Weather protection shall not be:
1. Made of vinyl fabrics in Central Issaquah or Issaquah Highlands subareas;
2. Backlit through internal lighting;
3. Arched, circular, or in rounded dome forms in Central Issaquah; or
4. Used primarily for nonpedestrian uses. For example, weather protection for pots, and retail displays and does not protect pedestrian facilities or outdoor seating. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of requiring transparency standards is to ensure active ground floor street uses that support walkability and a pedestrian supportive environment.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all nonresidential and multifamily developments.
C. Measurement. The transparency percentage is measured for each façade facing a public space and includes the linear five feet above the building’s first finished-floor height, except as otherwise specified in subsection F of this section. Transparent surfaces include windows and transparent or glass doors.
Figure 18.602.080(A)(1). Ground Floor Transparency Along a Building Frontage for Multifamily/Office Space and Retail Space (Image: Crandall Arambula)

D. Window glazing must be clear and transmit visible daylight.
E. Reflective glass, coatings, or glazes shall not be used. Transparent surfaces shall not use glazing that is blue/green, dark tinted, or other opaque materials or treatments. This includes window films and walls placed behind windows.
F. Multifamily and commercial uses must comply with the following additional standards:
1. Forty percent ground floor façade transparency is required for multifamily and commercial use buildings that front streets, through block passages, natural areas, or publicly accessible open space.
a. For multifamily residential space within buildings located directly adjacent to the sidewalk, the first floor must achieve 40 percent transparency for portions of the façade six feet and higher above exterior ground level. See Figure 18.602.100(D)(1)(c) for an illustration.
G. Retail use must comply with the following additional standards:
1. Seventy percent ground floor façade transparency is required for retail uses that front streets, through block passages, a natural area, or publicly accessible open space; and
2. Applied window signs must be less than 10 percent of any single opening. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of requiring specific standards for single-family and middle housing development is to:
1. Ensure single-family and middle housing developments are compatible with the scale and design of the neighborhood or community in which it is located. Compatibility of design includes, but is not limited to:
a. Resembling the style and modulation of a single-family residence.
b. Having a height and scale that is consistent with the existing single-family homes in the neighborhood;
2. Provide livable housing for residents that includes amenities such as usable open space;
3. Encourage a sense of community within each neighborhood; and
4. Emphasize people, pedestrians, and homes while reducing the impact of automobile access and storage.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all single-family and middle housing buildings, except where architectural styles of a specific neighborhood subarea or overlay provide different guidance, such as Olde Town, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus subareas.
C. Front Entrances.
1. Residential structures must be oriented with the front of the home facing the street, or central open space, or central courtyard. If none of these options is not practically feasible then the front door shall face the transportation facility providing access to the development.
2. Residential structures must provide a clear, direct, unobstructed pedestrian walkway between the sidewalk or public right-of-way and the front door. Gates are allowed along the path, as long as they can be opened to provide access from the street to the front door.
3. The primary entryway to the dwelling unit must provide a covered entry porch at least four feet deep.
4. Residential developments containing more than one residential unit must provide a comprehensive pedestrian walkway system within the development allowing access from the structures to adjacent unit entries, parking lots, common areas, parks, and other facilities.
5. Duplexes.
a. A duplex in a side-by-side configuration, meaning both units face the street next to one another, must each have one street-facing door per unit; see Figure 18.602.090(C)(5).
b. A duplex in a front-to-back configuration, meaning the two units are oriented perpendicular to the street, must have one street-facing door for the street-facing unit. The unit in the back may have a door perpendicular to the street as long as it has a direct path from the street to the primary entrance.
c. A duplex in a stacked configuration, meaning one unit is on the story above the other unit, must provide entrances consistent with either side-by-side or front-to-back configurations.
Figure 18.602.090(C)(5). Duplex Entries
(5).png)
D. Driveways and Garages.
1. Alley Access.
a. If the lot has alley access, all driveways and garages must only be accessed from the alley.
b. Alley-loaded driveway widths are not regulated.
c. If alley access is not feasible, driveways and garages may be accessed from the street.
2. Street-Facing Garages.
a. Size. Garages that face a transportation facility may not exceed 50 percent of the overall dwelling unit width unless the building’s façade is less than 36 feet wide.
(1) On building façades less than 36 feet in width, facing a street or transportation facility whose façade includes both a front door and a garage, the width allotted to the garage must be minimized, and the width devoted to the front door and living space be maximized. In no case may the front door and the space on either side of it be less than six feet in width. In addition, the front door must incorporate elements that emphasize its presence and importance, including, but not limited to, weather protection, lighting, landscaping, special paving, etc.
(2) Garages must be sized to accommodate the required on-site number of standard-sized parking stalls, waste containers (garbage, recycling, and yard waste), and storage inside the garage.
3. Driveway Standards.
a. Length. Each lot with driveway access from a street, woonerf, alley, or similar facility must provide a driveway that has an on-site 18-foot minimum length. Where driveway parking is not needed or possible, driveways must be limited to four feet or less in length and use other techniques that communicate that parking on the driveway apron is prohibited.
b. Width.
(1) Driveway widths for residential buildings must be in accordance with the City’s driveway construction standards in Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
(2) The width of the driveway may not be greater than 67 percent of the lot or unit width.
(3) Where a wider driveway is functionally necessary (such as to serve a three-car garage), landscape or other elements shall be used to break the driveway into sections, each 20 feet or less in width. See Figure 18.602.090(D)(4).
Figure 18.602.090(D)(4). Wide Driveway Elements

c. Only one driveway cut from a street, or another transportation facility with a pedestrian component, is allowed per lot, not including alleys.
d. Shared Driveway.
(1) Shared driveways must be in accordance with IMC 18.350.020, Shared-access lots.
(2) An access easement must be recorded with the King County Recorder’s Office granting use of the driveway to all lot owners and public safety personnel.
e. Driveways shall be constructed of materials such as concrete, exposed aggregate, and pavers. Asphalt shall not be used for driveways.
E. Massing, Scale, and Facade Design Standards.
1. Buildings over 30 feet in width must incorporate both of the following modulation techniques along any street façade:
a. Change in Plane. Recess or project a portion of the façade by a minimum of four feet in depth and eight feet in width. Must extend to all stories to qualify as a mass reduction technique.
b. Front Porch or Entry Feature. Provide a front porch, portico, recessed or projecting entry, associated roof accent or other architectural feature directly over the front door.
2. Façade articulation techniques must be used to further reduce the perceived scale of the building and must be coordinated with the overall massing approach to create a cohesive, human-scaled façade by using at least two of the following elements:
a. Window groupings, patterns, and detailing, such as recessed or projecting windows, panes, shutters, and awnings;
b. Balconies;
c. Architectural details, including trim, columns, pilasters, cornices, and chimneys; and
d. Changes in color or material to highlight specific portions of building’s shape.
Figure 18.602.090(E)(1). Façade Massing and Scale – Not Allowed Vs. Mass Reduction Techniques to Create Compliant Massing and Scale
(1).png)
Figure 18.602.090(E)(2). Building Mass and Scale Examples – Allowed Mass Reduction Techniques to Create Compliant Massing and Scale
(2).png)
F. Middle Housing and Townhouse Standards.
1. An attached single-family/townhouse may not have a firewall and/or parapet extension above the roofline.
2. The maximum number of single-family dwellings/townhouses that may be attached in a single grouping varies by zoning district and is determined in IMC 18.402.020, Table of permitted uses. (Ord. 3091 § 10 (Exh. I), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of requiring specific standards for multifamily development is to:
1. Ensure multifamily development that is compatible with the scale and character of the neighborhood or community in which it is located;
2. Provide livable housing for residents that includes amenities such as usable open space; and
3. Encourage a sense of community within each overall development.
B. Applicability. The standards in this section apply to all multifamily buildings, except where architectural styles of a specific neighborhood subarea or overlay provide different guidance, such as Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus subareas.
C. Multifamily Building Massing Standards.
1. Street-facing façades must project or be recessed from abutting façade planes by a minimum depth of three feet for a minimum width of eight feet and maximum width of 25 feet.
Figure 18.602.100(C)(1). Multifamily Building Modulation

2. Modulation must extend to the roof, except where there are balconies.
3. Buildings must include articulation along the façades facing and visible from public rights-of-way.
4. Horizontal façades longer than 30 feet must be articulated into smaller units using at least two of the following elements:
a. Distinctive roof forms;
b. Changes in materials;
c. Window patterns; and/or
d. Color differentiation.
D. Multifamily Building Setback Design.
1. Where buildings have a zero setback:
a. Units adjacent to sidewalks and public walkways must have a finished floor elevations at a minimum 18 inches above exterior ground level with recessed entries (maximum four feet depth) oriented to stoops, patios, terraces, or porches for each individual entry if required;
b. Windows of units directly adjacent to sidewalks and public walkways must be located above pedestrian sightlines, at least six feet above exterior ground level.
Figure 18.602.100(D)(1)(c). To accommodate residential privacy, multifamily buildings adjacent to the sidewalk may achieve the required 40 percent transparency in the first floor areas above six feet from ground level
Figure 18.602.100(D)(1)(d). Ground floor residential unit with zero setback with windows positioned six feet above the exterior ground level. (Image: Crandall Arambula)
Figure 18.602.100(D)(1)(e). The side façade of this townhome development has zero setback to the sidewalk. The first story is elevated above ground level and windows are located above eye level. (Graphic: BHC Consultants)
2. Where buildings have a setback up to 10 feet:
a. Landscaping must be incorporated within the setback;
b. Entries must be provided at grade or raised above the sidewalk;
c. Private porches or patios must be separated with hedges, steps, low walls, or low fences.
E. Cottage Housing Standards.
1. Number of Dwelling Units. The maximum number of cottage houses that may be clustered in a single grouping varies by zoning district and is determined in IMC 18.404.090, Residential zones form and intensity standards.
2. Cottage Size. Cottages shall each be no more than 1,700 square feet in size, excluding attached garages.
3. Orientation. Each dwelling unit that abuts the central courtyard must have a primary entry oriented to the common open space.
4. Amenity Space.
a. Cottage housing developments must provide open space and meet the common outdoor amenity space requirements as determined in Chapter 18.608 IMC, Common Outdoor Amenity Space.
b. Each cottage must provide private outdoor amenity space. This may include a covered porch, patio, or deck with a minimum area of 60 square feet per unit. Private outdoor amenity space does not contribute to the minimum outdoor common space area requirement.
5. Parking.
a. Parking shall be provided in accordance with IMC 18.604.080, Computation of vehicle parking.
b. Required parking shall be located on the same property as the cottage housing, unless the lot is part of a subdivision and owned by all property owners.
c. Required parking may be located in or under an accessory parking structure, but such structures shall not be attached to individual dwelling unit. Uncovered parking is also permitted.
6. Existing Nonconforming Structures.
a. An existing detached single-family structure, with respect to the standards of this chapter may be nonconforming, may be permitted to remain, but the extent of the nonconformity may not be increased. The nonconforming dwelling unit must be included in the maximum lot density.
b. Nonconforming dwelling units may be modified to be more consistent with this chapter.
c. New accessory dwelling units are not permitted in cottage housing developments.
F. Courtyard Housing Standards.
1. Number of Dwelling Units. The maximum number of dwelling units that may be clustered in a single grouping varies by zoning district and is determined in IMC 18.404.090, Residential zones form and intensity standards.
2. Orientation. Courtyard housing projects shall meet the following site layout requirements:
a. Courtyard housing shall be in a U- or L-shaped configuration. At least two sides of the dwelling units must surround the central courtyard.
b. The main entry to each ground floor dwelling unit shall be directly off a common courtyard or directly from a street.
3. Central Open Space. Courtyard housing developments must provide a central courtyard and meet the common outdoor amenity space requirements as determined in Chapter 18.608 IMC, Common Outdoor Amenity Space. (Ord. 3091 § 10 (Exh. I), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
(Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Where buildings have a zero setback:
1. Windows and façades must be recessed a maximum of one and one-half feet from the build-to-line to accommodate columns or other architectural elements that engage the pedestrian and create façade interest.
2. Entry areas and doorways must be recessed a maximum of four feet to provide a transition into storefronts.
Figure 18.602.120(A)(3). Recessed Entries and Windows for Zero Setbacks (Image: Crandall Arambula)

B. Where buildings have a setback up to 10 feet:
1. Outdoor seating, dining, and/or retail display must be accommodated with primarily paved areas, which may include limited landscaping in the form of at-grade or raised planters or landscape pots. See example in Figure 18.602.120(B).
Figure 18.602.120(B). Ground Floor Commercial With 10-Foot Setback for Dining
C. Buildings must engage with the street by including design and amenity elements including, but not limited to, outdoor seating, plantings or landscape elements, or pavers.
D. Ground level retail and entrance lobby uses located on a pedestrian-oriented transportation facility must have a first-floor height of at least 15 feet. Office uses and other uses not located on a pedestrian-oriented transportation facility may have lower first-floor heights. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
A. Deviations may be requested for the following standards in this chapter. Deviations must be requested according to the appropriate permit process in IMC 18.204.020, Review levels, Deviations from standards, and meet all of the approval criteria listed under IMC 18.204.080, Application vesting, and the criteria stated below. Any proposal to deviate that does not satisfy the following conditions must apply for a variance, in accordance with Chapter 18.210 IMC, Variances.
1. Window transparency percentage standards may be adjusted when the security and privacy requirements of the tenant or owner need to be balanced with the flows of the transportation facility based on the following approval criteria:
a. Multifamily window transparency percentage standards may be adjusted by 10 percent when:
(1) Additional design features beyond what is required by this Code are used instead. For example, artwork, fountains, street furniture, varied exterior materials, and/or landscape elements or plazas are used to enhance the pedestrian environment; or
(2) Housing units make up at least 50 percent of the ground floor space that fronts streets, through block passages, natural areas, or publicly accessible open space.
b. Nonresidential window transparency percentage standards may be adjusted by five percent when:
(1) Additional design features beyond what is required by this Code are used instead. For example, artwork, fountains, street furniture, varied exterior materials, and/or landscape elements or plazas are used to enhance the pedestrian environment. (Ord. 3017 § 1 (Exh. B), 2023).
The intent of this chapter is to establish standards for the design, configuration and performance of parking facilities based on land use and community vision for the transportation system. By requiring parking as a condition of development, the City intends to achieve a balance between insufficient parking (which can cause overflow parking pressure in adjacent streets and lots) and excessive parking (which wastes space and resources). This balance is necessary to support a pedestrian-friendly environment, encourage attractive urban design, and reduce environmental impacts by limiting impervious surface. This will be accomplished by administration of this chapter in order to:
A. Increase traffic safety and pedestrian safety;
B. Encourage safe and efficient vehicular and nonmotorized travel;
C. Ensure adequate, safe, and reasonable storage of and access to parking facilities;
D. Encourage the use of parking garages over surface parking;
E. Promote efficient site design to provide parking therein;
F. Provide tools for flexibility in the design, performance, and location of parking facilities;
G. Reduce the visual impact of parking lots and garages;
H. Allow on-street parking to meet as much of the required parking as possible;
I. Where on-street parking is constrained, provide adequate off-street parking;
J. Minimize paving and impervious surfaces;
K. Promote environmental quality through reduced use of fossil fuels by supporting the use of nonmotorized travel;
L. Encourage alternative methods of moving people and incentivize the parking and storage of bicycles; and
M. Provide convenience and reliability to commuters, residents, pedestrians, employees, tourists, shoppers, students, bicyclists, special populations, and service providers. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. This chapter applies to all existing uses, changes of use, and development in the City.
B. In the case of a use not specifically mentioned in this chapter, the parking standards must be determined by the Director. Such determination shall be based upon the requirements for the most comparable use specified in this chapter. The applicant may be required to provide sufficient information to demonstrate that the parking demand for a specific land use will be satisfied, based upon existing land uses similar to the proposed use. The applicant shall provide a parking study for the proposed use which shall be prepared by a professional with expertise in traffic and parking analysis.
C. Parking standards are distinguished between Tier I and Tier II:
1. Parking in Tier I areas must accommodate the multimodal goals for urban development as established in the mobility master plan. Tier I encompasses Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands Commercial areas, and Olde Town.
2. Parking for Tier II areas must accommodate the neighborhood characteristics of less dense development. Tier II encompasses all areas of the City that are not Tier I.
Figure 18.604.020(A). Parking Tier Areas

(Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
The addition of dwelling units or living units added within an existing building may require the retention of existing parking that is required to satisfy existing residential parking requirements under local laws and for nonresidential uses that remain after the new units are added. (Ord. 3105 § 4 (Exh. A), 2025).
A. The intent of this section is to provide bicycle parking in a safe, accessible, and convenient location to support a bicycle-friendly community.
B. Bicycle parking provides a space for securing a bicycle at any location and includes both the space of the bicycle rack and the space to attach the bicycle to the rack.
C. Bicycle parking spaces must provide parking for cyclists of all ages and abilities. Area devoted to bicycle parking shall not be used for any other purpose, except as authorized by this Code.
D. Wayfinding signage must be provided when bike parking facilities are not visible from the public street or sidewalk. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of short-term bicycle parking is to provide safe, accessible, and secure locations that directly serve the use activities generating the bicycle parking demand.
B. Short-term bicycle parking is for bicycles parked less than four hours.
C. All short-term bicycle parking installations must meet the following criteria:
1. Must be located in a well-lit area, highly visible to the public to emphasize use, and within 50 feet of a building’s primary entrance;
2. Must not impede the use or encroach on any adjacent transportation travel facilities at any time;
3. Must accommodate a U-lock-type lock to lock both the bicycle’s frame and tire to the bicycle rack; and
4. Must support the frame of the bicycle in at least two places and prevent the bicycle from tipping over.
D. When 10 or more short-term bicycle parking spaces are required, a minimum of 50 percent of the spaces must be covered.
E. With approval from the Director, required short-term bike parking may be installed in the public right-of-way, in accordance with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
F. The minimum number of off-street short-term bike parking spaces required is set forth in Table 18.604.040(A).
Table 18.604.040(A). Short-Term Bike Parking Requirements
(When requirement establishes multiple values, the greater number of spaces applies)
Land Use | Requirement |
|---|---|
Residential | |
Single-family detached, middle housing | None |
Senior housing, assisted living facilities, uses not listed | 1 per 20 units |
Multifamily in Tier 1 | 1 per 20 units |
Multifamily in Tier 2 | None |
Commercial | |
Office, research and development, or uses not listed | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 40,000 sq ft |
Child care/day care | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 20,000 sq ft |
Retail, eating and drinking, personal services | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 2,000 sq ft |
Lodging | Minimum 2 spaces per building |
Entertainment | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 1,000 sq ft |
Industrial | |
Manufacturing or production | None |
Warehouse and freight movement | None |
Civic, Cultural Facilities | |
Nonassembly; or uses not listed | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 40,000 sq ft |
Assembly | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 1,000 sq ft |
Elementary through high school | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 10,000 sq ft |
University or vocational schools | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 10,000 sq ft |
Recreation | Minimum 2 spaces; or 1 per 20 auto spaces that serve the recreation space |
(Ord. 3100 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3093 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. Long-term bicycle parking is for bicycles parked four or more hours.
B. Long-term bicycle parking must provide a safe, accessible, and secure location that directly serves the use activities generating the bike parking demand, and must meet the following criteria:
1. The parking area must be provided in secure room or enclosed area with a locked gate with limited access for only the users securing a bicycle.
2. The parking area must be located in one of the following secure locations:
a. Within 50 feet of an attendant or security guard;
b. Within the field of view of security system and within 100 feet of a building’s primary entrance;
c. Located in an area visible from employee work areas, or
d. Located in an area visible from residential communal areas or living spaces.
3. The parking must accommodate a U-lock-type lock to secure both the bicycle’s frame and one wheel to the bicycle rack;
4. Access to power source for charging electric bicycles must be provided in accordance with Table 18.604.050(B);
C. Bicycle parking located inside a dwelling unit is not counted toward long-term bicycle parking space requirements for residential uses.
D. When 10 or more long-term bicycle parking spaces are required, 100 percent of the spaces must be covered.
E. The minimum number of long-term bike parking spaces required is set forth in Table 18.604.050(A).
F. In Tier 1 nonresidential areas, showers and lockers for cyclists must be provided and located near the long-term bike parking area in accordance with Table 18.604.050(B).
Table 18.604.050(A). Long-Term Bike Parking Requirements
(When requirement establishes multiple venues, the greater number of spaces applies)
Land Use | Requirement |
|---|---|
Residential | |
Single-family detached and attached, middle housing | None |
Multifamily in Tier 1 | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per unit |
Multifamily in Tier 2 | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 20 units |
Assisted living facilities, uses not listed | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 20 units |
Commercial | |
Office, research, or uses not listed | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 40,000 sq ft |
Child care/day care | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 4,000 sq ft |
Retail, eating and drinking, personal services | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 12,000 sq ft |
Lodging | Minimum 2 spaces per building, or 1 per 20 rental rooms |
Entertainment | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 12,000 sq ft |
Commercial outdoor recreation | 1 per 20 vehicle parking spaces |
Industrial | |
Manufacturing or production | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 15,000 sq ft |
Warehouse and freight movement | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 40,000 sq ft |
Civic, Cultural Facilities | |
Nonassembly; or uses not listed | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 12,000 sq ft |
Assembly | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 12,000 sq ft |
Elementary through high school | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 1,000 sq ft |
University or vocational schools | Minimum 2 spaces per building; or 1 per 1,000 sq ft |
Recreation | None |
Table 18.604.050(B). Minimum Required Supporting Facilities for Long-Term Bicycle Parking
Land Use | Requirement |
|---|---|
Office | 2 showers per 50,000 sq ft |
Office | 1 locker per long-term bike rack required; 50,000 sq ft and greater |
Office | 1 power outlet per two long-term bike racks; 50,000 sq ft and greater |
(Ord. 3100 § 2 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3093 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. Installation. All bicycle racks must be installed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and meet the following criteria:
1. Racks must be securely fastened.
a. For sturdy surface locations, bicycle racks must be secured on concrete, pavers, or asphalt surfaces.
b. For soft surface locations, bicycle racks must be secured with in-ground mounting with concrete footings.
2. The fasteners must be tamper-resistant.
3. Short-term bicycle parking installations must comply with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
B. Rack Materials. Bicycle rack materials must be made of carbon steel or stainless steel with a coating that minimizes damage to bicycles secured to the rack. The rack coatings must include:
1. Powder coatings (TGIC or similar); or
2. Thermoplastic.
C. Types of Rack. Bicycle racks must only use the following rack types:
1. Inverted U or staple;
2. Rack cradles;
3. Wall-mounted; or
4. Corrals.
D. Spacing Requirements. All bicycle parking must not encroach on any walkway area, bicycle facility travel lane, or motorized vehicle travel lanes at any time. The minimum footprint for a single occupant bicycle is six feet long and two feet wide and six feet long and four feet wide for cargo bikes.
E. Street Installations. All bicycle parking installed on a street must comply with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. Use of Parking. Parking spaces must provide vehicle parking only for residents, customers, patrons, visitors, and employees. Area devoted to parking may not be used for any other purpose, except as authorized by this Code. Except in designated areas, required parking shall not be used for:
1. The storage of motorized vehicles, recreational vehicles, boats, or other materials; or
2. The sale, repair, or servicing of any vehicle.
B. Location.
1. All uses: Except as provided within Chapter 18.604 IMC, all parking shall be provided as off-street parking. Parking shall not be located in areas so that vehicles extend over sidewalks, vegetation or other obstructions or provided in any required landscape planting area unless otherwise allowed by Chapter 18.606 IMC, Landscaping.
2. Single-family and middle housing: Required parking must be on site.
3. Multifamily: On-site parking is not permitted in the side or rear setback of a multifamily development when the parking would abut a single-family district. In other cases, on-site parking for multifamily development is allowed in the rear and side setback.
4. Other uses: Parking must be provided on site or when utilizing IMC 18.604.160, Flexible parking tools, within 800 feet of the building or use for which the parking area is required.
C. Barrier-Free Spaces. Parking and access must be barrier free and provided in accordance with the Building Code.
D. Permit Required. Parking or loading spaces shall not be created, constructed, located, relocated, or modified after the effective date of these provisions without first obtaining a Level 1 independent technical document review in accordance in accordance IMC 18.204.060, Technical document review. If ADA stalls or accessible routes are altered, a building permit is required.
E. Accessory Uses. Parking and loading spaces that are not primary uses are considered accessory uses and are subject to the same procedures and review requirements as primary uses.
F. Unlawful Elimination. Parking and loading facilities must not be eliminated or reduced without the establishment of alternative parking or loading facilities which meet the requirements of this Code.
G. Change in Use. When a change of use is proposed, required parking and loading facilities must be provided according to this chapter. If the proposed use requires more parking or loading than the previous use, the applicant must construct the required parking and/or loading stalls prior to occupancy.
H. Substantial Remodels or Additions. The provisions of this chapter are applicable to substantial remodels or additions that expand the gross floor area of the use by 10 percent or greater. Remodels or additions to single-family units do not require additional parking spaces; however, the site plan must be consistent with the other parking standards.
I. Middle Housing and Co-Living Transit Access. Residential lots containing middle housing and co-living units within one-half-mile walking distance from a major transit stop, measured along continuous pedestrian routes not geographically interrupted by features such as steep slopes, major arterials and highways with no pedestrian crossings, are exempt from off-street parking requirements.
J. Tree Retention Exemption for Required Residential Parking. Off-street parking as a condition of permitting a residential project will not be required if the applicant demonstrates that compliance with tree retention policies outlined in IMC 18.812.070, Minimum tree retention requirements, would otherwise make a proposed residential development or redevelopment infeasible.
A determination of infeasibility shall be made by the City during the project permit application review process, and shall be based on site-specific conditions, required submittals, and applicable City standards. To qualify for this exemption, the applicant must clearly demonstrate that the application of tree retention policies would otherwise make the proposed residential development or redevelopment infeasible by meeting one or more of the following criteria:
1. Compliance with tree retention requirements would necessitate the placement of some or all off-street parking in a parking structure due to insufficient available space caused by tree retention.
2. Tree retention constraints result in no viable location for required off-street parking due to tree retention constraints, and no feasible alternatives exist, such as parking agreements or other flexibility mechanisms provided in the code. (Ord. 3106 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3104 § 3 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3093 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. Amount Required. The numbers of required parking spaces are listed by use in Table 18.604.080(A).
Table 18.604.080(A). Table of Off-Street Parking Standards
Land Use | Tier I | Tier II | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
Minimum | Maximum | Minimum | Maximum | |
RESIDENTIAL | ||||
General Residential | ||||
Single-family attached | 1 per unit | 1 per unit or 1 tandem space with a 2-vehicle capacity | 1 per unit | 1 per unit or 1 tandem space with a 2-vehicle capacity |
Single-family detached (for lots less than 6,000 square feet) | 1 per unit | 4 per unit | 1 per unit | 4 per unit |
Single-family detached (for lots greater than 6,000 square feet), cottage housing | 2 per unit | N/A | 2 per unit | N/A |
Co-living | 0.25 per unit | 0.25 per unit | 0.25 per unit | 0.25 per unit |
Middle housing (excluding cottage housing) for lots less than 6,000 square feet | 1 per unit | N/A | 1 per unit | N/A |
Middle housing (excluding cottage housing) for lots greater than 6,000 square feet | 2 per unit | N/A | 2 per unit | N/A |
Multifamily and live/work | 0.75 per unit | 2 per unit | 1 per unit | 2 per unit |
Senior housing, bonus density units (See IMC 18.500.060(B)(1)) | 0.5 per each unit above allowed base + one space per employee at peak times | 2 per unit | 0.5 per each unit above allowed base + one space per employee at peak times | 2 per unit |
Assisted living facility | 0.4 per unit | 0.75 per unit | 0.4 per unit | 0.75 per unit |
Accessory Residential, as listed below | ||||
Accessory dwelling unit | No min | 1 per unit | No min | 1 per unit |
COMMERCIAL | ||||
Office, professional or corporate | 1.63 per 1,000 GFA | 1.95 per 1,000 GFA | 1 per 300 GFA | No max |
Day care | No min | 2.45 per 1,000 GFA | 2.45 per 1,000 GFA | 3.57 per 1,000 GFA |
General Service, as listed below | ||||
Automotive fuel station | No min | 1 per 2,000 GFA + Required parking for other on-site land uses (if any) | No min | 1 per 2,000 GFA + Required parking for other on-site land uses (if any) |
Car wash | 1 per 2,000 GFA + Required parking for other on-site land uses (if any) | No max | 1 per 2,000 GFA + Required parking for other on-site land uses (if any) | No max |
Vehicular service, maintenance, or repair shops | 1.69 per 1,000 GFA | 3.36 per 1,000 GFA | 1.69 per 1,000 GFA | 3.36 per 1,000 GFA |
Medical | ||||
Hospital | 1 per 500 GFA | No max | 2.25 per 1,000 GFA | No max |
Clinic | 3.89 per 1,000 GFA | No max | 3.89 per 1,000 GFA | No max |
Office | No min | 1 per 200 GFA | 1 per 200 GFA | No max |
Overnight Lodging, as listed below | ||||
Hotel | No min | 0.74 per rentable room | 0.74 per rentable room | 0.96 per rentable room |
Bed and breakfast | 1 per rentable unit | No max | 1 per rentable unit | No max |
Personal service | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 250 GFA | 1 per 200 GFA | No max |
Recreation, Indoor | ||||
Bowling alley | 1 per 500 GFA | No max | 1 per 500 GFA | No max |
Theater, live and movie | 1 per 500 GFA | No max | 1 per 500 GFA | No max |
Restaurant/bar, food, beverage | 1 per 500 GFA | 4.72 per 500 GFA | 1 per 100 GFA | No max |
Retail Sales | ||||
< 3,999 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 200 GFA | 1 per 200 GFA | No max |
4,000 – 29,999 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 250 GFA | 1 per 200 GFA | No max |
> 30,000 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 250 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | No max |
INDUSTRIAL | ||||
Heavy industrial | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | No max |
Light industrial | 0.5 per 1,000 GFA | 0.65 per 1,000 GFA | 0.65 per 1,000 GFA | 1.06 per 1,000 GFA |
Research and development | 1 per 1,500 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | 2.58 per 1,000 GFA |
Self-storage service | 0.1 per 1,000 GFA | 0.17 per 1,000 GFA | 0.1 per 1,000 GFA | 0.17 per 1,000 GFA |
Warehouse and distribution | 0.39 per 1,000 GFA | 0.61 per 1,000 GFA | 0.39 per 1,000 GFA | 0.61 per 1,000 GFA |
Waste-related service | 1 per 2,000 GFA | 1.9 per 1,000 GFA | 1.9 per 1,000 GFA | 3.13 per 1,000 GFA |
PUBLIC, INSTITUTIONAL, AND OPEN SPACE | ||||
Agriculture | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 250 GFA | 1 per 500 GFA | No max |
Civic uses, except as listed below | 1 per 500 GFA | 1.5 per 500 GFA | 1 per 300 GFA | No max |
Government facility: fire/police station; maintenance site | 1 per 500 GFA | 1.5 per 500 GFA | 1 per 300 GFA | No max |
Essential public facilities | 1 per 500 GFA | 1.5 per 500 GFA | 1 per 300 GFA | No max |
Parks, plazas, open spaces, and natural areas except as listed below | No min | No max | No min | 1.7 per acre |
Trailhead | No min | Determination by Parks Director | Determination by Parks Director | Determination by Parks Director |
Stadium/arena/amphitheater, sports fields | No min | 1 space per 4 seats + 1 per 100 GFA assembly area not containing seats | 1 space per 3 seats | No max |
Schools, public and private | 1 per 500 GFA | 1 per 300 GFA | 1 per 400 GFA | No max |
NONRESIDENTIAL ACCESSORY | ||||
Heliport, helipad, helistop | No min | 1.5 space per 100 GFA of terminal/passenger areas | 1 space per 100 GFA of terminal/passenger areas | No max |
(Ord. 3100 § 3 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3093 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to provide electric vehicle charging infrastructure for off-street parking spaces.
B. Standards. Electric vehicle charging infrastructure must be provided for new and substantial improvements or additions, new surface parking lots (not gravel), and new parking garages as follows:
1. Electric vehicle infrastructure must be provided according to Tables 18.604.090(A) and 18.604.090(B). For developments that have mixed residential and nonresidential uses, parking associated with residential uses must meet the requirements of Table 18.604.090(A), and parking associated with nonresidential uses must meet the requirements of Table 18.604.090(B). Projects must meet the number of electric vehicle supply equipment (EVSE) parking spaces, the number of electric vehicle ready (EV-ready) parking spaces, and the number of electric vehicle capable (EV-capable) parking spaces.
2. Exception for On-Site Parking With Less Than 10 Spaces. Except for Group A, Group E, and Group M occupancies, on-site parking with less than 10 parking spaces shall not be required to comply with subsection B of this section.
3. Group A, Group E, and Group M occupancies shall comply with one of the following, whichever is greater:
a. The provisions of subsection B of this section shall apply only to designated employee parking spaces.
b. One of each 200 parking spaces or fraction thereof shall be EV ready. One of each 200 parking spaces or fraction thereof shall be an EV charging station.
Table 18.604.090(A). Residential Electric Vehicle (EV) Charging Infrastructure
Use | Number of EVSE Parking Spaces | Number of EV-Ready Parking Spaces | Number of EV-Capable Parking Spaces |
|---|---|---|---|
New residential buildings that do not contain more than two dwelling units | None | 1 per dwelling unit | None |
All other new residential buildings (Group R occupancies) | 10% of total parking spaces | 30% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces |
Existing multifamily buildings undergoing substantial improvement (R-1, R-2, and I-2 occupancies) | 10% of total parking spaces | 20% of total parking spaces | None |
Table 18.604.090(B). Nonresidential Electric Vehicle (EV) Charging Infrastructure
Use | Number of EVSE Parking Spaces | Number of EV-Ready Parking Spaces | Number of EV-Capable Parking Spaces |
|---|---|---|---|
New nonresidential buildings (Group A, B, E, F, H, I, M, and S occupancies) | 10% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces |
Existing nonresidential buildings (Group A, B, E, F, H, I, M, and S occupancies) undergoing substantial improvement | 5% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces | None |
New surface parking lots (not gravel) and parking garage uses | 10% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces | 10% of total parking spaces |
4. When EVSE or EV-ready parking spaces are required, 10 percent of the accessible parking spaces, rounded to the next whole number, shall be EVSE. Additional 10 percent of the accessible parking spaces, rounded to the next whole number, shall be EV ready. No fewer than one for each type of EV charging system shall be accessible. The electric vehicle charging infrastructure may also serve adjacent parking spaces not designated as accessible parking. A maximum of 10 percent of the accessible parking spaces, rounded to the next whole number, is allowed to be included in the total number of electric vehicle parking spaces required.
5. Nothing in this section shall be construed to modify the minimum number of off-street motor vehicle parking spaces required for specific uses or the maximum number of parking spaces allowed, as set forth in this chapter.
6. All EVSE parking spaces must have designated signage and pavement markings per RCW 46.08.185.
7. All EV charging infrastructure must be installed in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). For EV-ready parking spaces, the branch circuit must be identified as “Electric Vehicle Ready” in the service panel or subpanel directory, and the termination location must be marked as “Electric Vehicle Ready.”
8. Projects that fully or partially include affordable housing units at or below 80 percent AMI must meet 100 percent of the requirement for EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable in the project; however, the provision of EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable in the project associated with defined affordable housing must be cost neutral. To achieve cost neutrality, the applicant must demonstrate how cost neutrality has been calculated in an objective and typical industry methodology and that any changes to existing standards to achieve cost neutrality are the minimum necessary. A method to achieve cost neutrality may include reduction in the minimum required parking (supported by a parking study as allowed by this Code).
9. If the above action does not result in cost neutrality, then, alternatively or additionally, the applicant may propose:
a. Reduction in the amount of required parking lot landscaping.
b. Any combination of the above that ensures the provision of EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable infrastructure associated with affordable units is cost neutral.
10. In no case may the provision of EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable stalls associated with affordable housing units drop below 50 percent of the required EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable infrastructure.
11. Exception for Co-Living and Middle Housing. Off-street EVSE, EV-ready, and EV-capable parking shall not be required as a condition of permitting development of middle housing within one-half mile distance of a major transit stop, per RCW 36.70A.635(6)(d). (Ord. 3106 §§ 2 – 4 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3100 § 4, 2025; Ord. 3093 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. All nonresidential uses containing 20 or more vehicular parking spaces and residential developments of six or more dwellings must provide parking spaces for motorcycles, scooters, and similar motorized vehicles.
B. Parking spaces must be provided at one per 36 of the required automobile spaces with at least one space provided for uses meeting the threshold in subsection A of this section.
C. Nonresidential uses such as warehouses, storage facilities, and automobile services may seek a deviation to be exempt from this section requirements.
D. Motorcycle or scooter drive aisles must also comply with the adjacent automobile drive aisle dimensions in accordance with Figure 18.604.170(A), Vehicle Parking Stall Size and Configuration.
1. Motorcycle or scooter spaces must be located according to the same criteria and standards that are applicable to compact parking spaces. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to provide adequate room for off-street loading and unloading of commercial vehicles associated with the proposed development. Whenever normal operation of any development requires that goods, merchandise, or equipment be routinely delivered to or shipped from that development, a sufficient loading and unloading area must be provided to accommodate delivery or shipment operations safely and conveniently.
B. Quantity of Loading Space.
1. The minimum number of off-street loading spaces required for a specific use is set forth in Table 18.604.110(A).
2. When a lot contains more than one business establishment, the square footage of the business establishments within the same category must be added together in order to determine the number of required off-street loading spaces.
C. Standards for Loading Spaces.
1. Width. Each off-street loading space must not be less than 10 feet in width.
2. Overhang. All buildings with overhangs that project over off-street loading spaces must have a vertical overhang clearance of not less than 14 feet.
3. Length. Each off-street loading space for a high-demand use must be a minimum of 35 feet in length, unless provided otherwise in Table 18.604.110(A).
4. Location. All off-street loading spaces must be located on site.
D. Change Current Use. When a change of use is proposed for an existing structure, required off-street loading for the new use must be provided according to the off-street loading standards within this section.
E. Other Parking Requirements. No area allocated to required off-street loading and unloading facilities may be used to satisfy other parking requirements, nor may any portion of any other parking requirements be used to satisfy the area required for off-street loading and unloading facilities, except for the maneuvering and circulation portions of such areas.
F. Signage and Hours. Off-street loading areas must be signed and hours of use must be established.
G. Maneuvering Space. All required off-street loading facilities must be designed such that vehicles engaging in loading or unloading activities do not encroach upon or interfere with the right-of-way or public use of transportation facilities.
Table 18.604.110(A). Off-Street Loading Space Standards
Land Use | Minimum Requirement |
|---|---|
Residential | |
Multifamily (< 40 units) | 1 space |
Multifamily (≥ 40 units) | 2 spaces |
Commercial | |
Office, research, or uses not listed | 1 space per 30,000 GFA |
Retail, eating and drinking, personal services | 1 space per 10,000 GFA |
Lodging | 1 space per 40 rental rooms |
Entertainment | 1 space per 10,000 GFA |
Commercial outdoor recreation | 1 space per 30,000 GFA |
Civic | |
Nonassembly; or uses not listed | 1 space per 30,000 GFA |
Assembly | 1 space per 30,000 GFA |
Elementary through high school | 1 space per 20,000 GFA |
University or vocational schools | 1 space per 20,000 GFA |
Recreation | 1 loading space per 20 auto parking spaces that serve the space |
(Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to provide safe and sufficient parking and stacking space to support drive-through facilities so they do not encroach on public streets, sidewalks, or private parking and circulation areas.
B. Design. Required stacking space shall measure eight feet by 20 feet with direct forward access to a service window of a drive-through facility. Individual spaces within the lane may not be delineated with pavement markings. Stacking lanes shall not block on-site pedestrian routes or encroach on the public right-of-way.
C. Requirements. Uses providing drive-through services must provide vehicle stacking spaces in accordance with Table 18.604.120(A).
Table 18.604.120(A). Required Stacking Spaces for Drive-Through Window Facilities
Drive-through use | 1 window | 2 windows | 3 or more windows |
|---|---|---|---|
Drive-through food/beverage service | 5 stacking spaces | 4 stacking spaces per window | 3 stacking spaces per window |
Drive-through bank/financial institution, business service, or other drive-through use not listed | 4 stacking spaces | 3 stacking spaces per window | 2 stacking spaces per window |
D. Parking Credit. Credit towards minimum parking requirements must be given for each drive-through station. One-third parking credit must be given for each stacking space.
E. Other Parking Lot Standards. The drive-through facility must meet all other parking lot requirements including, but not limited to, location requirements, landscape screening, lighting, signage, and design standards. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of temporary parking is to provide parking for a temporary use with a limited purpose and time and to minimize impacts of the temporary use on surrounding land uses.
B. Requirements for Construction.
1. Temporary areas for equipment staging and mobilization and for construction worker parking must be provided.
2. A temporary gravel or unimproved parking or staging area requires a use permit in accordance with Chapter 5.14 IMC, Special Event/Special Use Permit.
3. Temporary parking and staging areas must have a setback of 20 feet from existing streets, and no gravel placement is allowed within 20 feet of the existing streets.
4. Temporary parking and staging areas shall also comply with all applicable National Fire Protection Association standards.
C. Requirements for Temporary Businesses. Parking stalls on private property may be used temporarily for conducting temporary business. The Department will determine if a permit is required.
D. Parking for temporary businesses such as produce stands, outdoor vendors such as espresso carts, food carts and trucks, and Christmas tree stands must be approved through the special event permit in accordance with Chapter 5.14 IMC, Special Event/Special Use Permit.
1. Parking stalls on privately owned transportation facilities and parking lots may be used temporarily for conducting temporary businesses in accordance with the following criteria:
a. The use does not create a hazard;
b. The use does not displace needed parking for the primary use; and
c. The use is allowed by the property owner following the appropriate permit process. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of the transportation management plan (TMP) is to promote the use of transportation alternatives which lessen traffic congestion, lessen the impact on the City’s air quality, and use the City’s existing infrastructure more efficiently.
B. A TMP is a contract between the City and a property owner, manager, or an employer stating that the property owner, manager, or employer will provide the following to residents, employees, and other users of a property:
1. Education on alternative modes of travel;
2. Opportunities to use alternative modes of travel; and
3. Incentives for ride sharing, carpooling, and using transit, bicycling and walking as a substitute for automobile travel.
C. The TMP must address the responsibility of the property owner, manager, or employer(s) for monitoring the success of the TMP and reporting the annual results to the City.
D. Requirement. A TMP is required for individual projects, pursuant to the City’s adopted transportation management regulations. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. Intent. This section establishes standards for outdoor residential uses, storage and activities related to motor vehicles and nonmotorized vehicles. These standards are intended to protect property values by reducing visual blight, aid in emergency access and fire safety, guard against the creation of rodent and pest harborage, and reduce the impact on the natural environment from the leaking of motor vehicle fluids.
B. Recreational Vehicle, Utility Vehicles, Trailers, and Boats in ROW. It is unlawful for any person to park and/or permit any other person to park a recreational or utility vehicle, boat or trailer in the public right-of-way or in a manner that obstructs visibility from adjacent driveways or street corners.
C. Disabled or Unlicensed Vehicles and Boats. It is unlawful for any person to keep, store or park, or to permit any other person to keep, store or park, any disabled vehicle or boat, or unlicensed vehicle or boat, on any privately owned residential property within the City unless that vehicle or boat is stored and parked outside public view within a fully enclosed building at all times. Auto or boat repair shops may have disabled licensed vehicles or boats on the premises which are being repaired, but these vehicles or boats shall not be parked clearly within public view or in the right-of-way. Vehicles are considered disabled when they are incapable of being operated or have not been operated or repaired for over 30 days, including automotive parts, whether assembled or not.
D. Appearance. All vehicles and boats kept on site must be operational, currently registered and licensed, and maintained in a clean, well-kept condition which does not detract from the appearance of the surrounding area.
E. Vehicles, Boats, and Trailers in Residential Areas.
1. Commercial. It is unlawful for any person to park or store commercial vehicles in residential areas. This provision does not apply to temporary parking for delivery, pick up, moving, or service activities. For the purpose of this section, a “commercial vehicle” is defined as any vehicle types defined within Classes 4 through 13 of the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA)’s standardized vehicle classification system.
2. Recreational Vehicles, Boats, and Trailers. Recreational vehicles, travel trailers, campers, motor homes boats, boat trailers, flatbed trailers, hauling trailers, and similar vehicles may be parked on a residential property, as long as the vehicle complies with the provisions of this Code. The vehicle must be kept on a driveway or in a carport or garage. If the vehicle cannot be stored on a driveway or in a carport of garage due to size constraints, the vehicle must be parked off site. Canoes, kayaks, or other nonmotorized water craft are not required to be sight screened.
3. Motorized vehicles shall not park in the pervious surface areas of front or streetside setbacks of a residential use property unless such pervious surface is a driveway or is located under or within a carport or garage.
F. Vehicle as Dwelling Unit. It is unlawful for any person to use any recreational or utility vehicle parked or stored on private property as a permanent or temporary dwelling unit, except where explicitly permitted in campgrounds in accordance with IMC 18.402.020, Table of permitted uses; provided, however, temporary guests who travel in a recreational or utility vehicle may reside in the vehicle on the host’s premises on a temporary basis not to exceed 30 days in any 12-month period. (Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to provide tools for flexibility in the design, performance, and location of parking facilities. This section provides methods, incentives, and techniques to meet the following:
1. Decrease the reliance on motor vehicles;
2. Diminish the percentage of land dedicated to parking;
3. Reduce the amount of parking needed to support land uses while providing adequate parking;
4. Allow projects to adapt to market needs and changes in community priorities; and
5. Adopts progressive trends in parking technology and management.
B. The tools are applicable based on a project’s location within the City, with projects in Tier I allowed additional tools and flexibility for compact facilities which support urban densities and design.
C. Cap on Reductions. This Code allows for the combination of tools described in this chapter, provided the intent of the chapter is met. Reductions must be capped at a 40 percent from the minimum required parking, with the exception of subsection J of this section, Tandem Parking for Residential Uses, which is capped at a 50 percent reduction from the minimum required parking if requirements are met and subsection G of this section, Small Business Waiver, which waives all parking if requirements are met. Additionally, higher reduction in parking, beyond 40 percent, may be allowed for redevelopment of an existing legal nonconforming community service establishment that meets the goals and policies of the City’s human services strategic plan. Such a reduction shall be processed as a Level 2 review process and shall meet the following criteria:
1. A technical report analyzing multiple comparable land uses in a similar market area, such as transportation demand management, prepared by a traffic or parking professional that supports such reduction.
2. A transportation management plan (TMP) in accordance with IMC 18.604.140 is provided by the applicant and approved by the City, showing customer and employee vehicle parking measures that minimize potentially negative spillover impacts to neighboring businesses and residents as well as methods to reduce vehicle parking demand. The plan must show location of any off-site public and private parking proposed for the use. Additionally, the applicant shall provide a parking utilization study, prepared by a traffic or parking professional, of offsite parking spaces proposed for the project, documenting availability and mitigation measures that would be necessary to offset any negative parking or traffic-related effects to surrounding businesses and residents as a result of this project.
D. Parking Flexibility Tools by Tier. Table 18.604.160(A) establishes the permitting review levels and displays which parking flexibility tools are available Citywide versus which tools are only available in Tier 1 to support urban densities and design. Refer to Figure 18.604.020(A) for map of Tier 1 and Tier 2.
Table 18.604.160(A). Parking Flexibility Tools by Tier
Parking Tool | Availability for Use in: | Maximum Reduction | Review Level (IMC 18.204.020) | |
|---|---|---|---|---|
Tier I | Tier II | |||
Shared parking | Available | Available | 40% | Level 1 |
Transit access | Available | Not Available | 40% | |
Small business waiver | Available | Not available | All parking | |
On-street parking credit | Available | Available | 20% | |
Off-site parking | Available | Available | --NA-- | |
Tandem parking | Available | Available | 50% | |
TDM study | Available | Available | 40% | |
Delay of installation | Available | Available | --NA-- | |
Reserved parking | Available | Available | --NA-- | |
Electric vehicle charging provisions | Available | Not available | 10% | |
Parking district | Available | Not available | --NA-- | |
CBD credit | Available | Not available | 40% | |
E. Shared Parking.
1. The intent of shared parking is to efficiently use parking resources where the potential for shared parking with abutting land uses has been analyzed, to efficiently use parking facilities for more than one use, specifically uses whose prime hours of operation do not overlap, and to decrease the amount of parking provided for a specific use by sharing adjacent underutilized parking facilities.
2. Prime Hours of Operation.
a. Prime hours of operation are defined as the time span during which a use has its highest level of activity from employees, clients, customers, and/or other users.
b. Approval for the prime hours of operation must be reviewed and set as approved by the Director.
3. Spaces Required.
a. Nonoverlapping Prime Hours of Operation. Shared parking will only be permitted if prime hours of operation of the uses seeking to share parking do not overlap, or if the overlap is less than one-half hour. If the uses have nonoverlapping prime hours of operation, the property owner(s) must provide parking spaces equal to those required of the use with the greater of the individual parking requirements in accordance with Table 18.604.080(A).
b. Overlapping Prime Hours of Operation. If the uses have overlapping prime hours of operation, shared parking is not allowed.
c. The required number of spaces for shared parking may be reduced by a maximum of 40 percent of the total required parking stalls if the following criteria are met:
(1) A transportation demand management (TDM) study, in accordance with subsection L of this section, supports the estimated shared parking demand for the proposed uses; and
(2) Evidence from technical studies or manuals relating to the proposed mix of shared uses is provided.
4. Review for Shared Parking.
a. Existing Use. Shared parking may be approved by the Director for an existing use if it complies with the approval criteria for shared parking.
b. New Uses. Shared parking for new uses does not require a separate review process and may be approved within the site plan review process for the project.
5. Approval Criteria for Shared Parking. Shared parking may be approved if all of the following approval criteria are met:
a. The location of parking facilities must be within 800 feet and visible to the associated uses involved in the shared parking contract.
b. The location must be zoned to permit parking facilities outright, or through a specific site plan review process.
c. A convenient pedestrian connection must be provided between the uses and the shared parking facilities. This pedestrian connection must be designed as barrier-free and built with appropriate lighting and safety considerations consistent with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
d. The availability of parking for each use must be indicated by directional signs governed by Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.
6. Shared Parking Contract. A contract is required and must be executed by all the owners/operators of the shared parking and the City. The shared parking contract must:
a. Provide that the land comprising the required shared parking facilities shall not be encroached upon, used, sold, leased, or conveyed unless doing so will not impact the shared parking facilities or the contract is amended or terminated and adequate parking is provided for the uses;
b. Provide that the contract term must be for as long as any of the shared parking continues in existence;
c. Be recorded with the King County Recorder’s Office and be binding upon the heirs, successors, and assigns of the parties;
d. Indicate prime hours of operation for the uses sharing parking;
e. Assign maintenance provisions for the parking facilities and landscaping;
f. Designate potential times of overflow, and a parking plan which will be implemented in the event of overflow; and
g. Provide for parking enforcement at the subject locations.
7. Contract Amendments or Termination. Amendments to the contract or contract termination must be reviewed and approved through the Level 1 review process pursuant to Chapter 18.204 IMC.
F. Transit Access. Transit access parking reductions are available to projects with direct pedestrian and bicycling access to the frequent transit facilities.
1. To be eligible for this reduction, a project must meet the following criteria:
a. The primary pedestrian entrance to the building is within a quarter mile of the frequent transit facilities, measured along continuous pedestrian routes; and
b. The pedestrian routes are not geographically interrupted by features such as steep slopes or major arterials and highways with no pedestrian crossings.
2. Eligible projects may receive up to 20 percent reduction of required parking without a TDM study.
3. Required parking may be reduced by a maximum of 40 percent, with a TDM study, for eligible projects if all of the following measures are taken to enhance access to the transit facilities:
a. Generally continuous weather protection is provided for pedestrians on 75 percent of building frontage, not including crossings of vehicular routes;
b. Continuous, direct sidewalks or walks are provided;
c. Generally continuous street lighting and minimized and/or enhanced pedestrian crossings of vehicular routes are provided.
G. Small Business Waiver. A business with gross floor area (GFA) less than or equal to 3,000 square feet and that meets all the following criteria may request to have its parking requirement waived. A business with more than 3,000 GFA and that meets all the following criteria may receive a waiver for the first 3,000 GFA. The criteria are:
1. The business is located within an existing building (new development prohibited from consideration);
2. The business is located adjacent to a pedestrian facility;
3. The business is visible from a pedestrian facility; and
4. The business has its primary pedestrian access from a pedestrian facility; and
5. A TMP, in accordance with IMC 18.604.140, is provided by the applicant, and approved by the City, showing customer and employee vehicle parking measures that minimize potentially negative spillover impacts to neighboring businesses and residents. The plan must show off-site public and private parking locations as well as a method to reduce vehicle parking demand.
H. On-Street Parking Credit. Street level retail uses may count the on-street parking stalls within the right-of-way that are directly abutting the building space to help fulfill no more than 35 percent of the parking requirements.
I. Off-Site Parking. The minimum required parking may be provided by off-street parking within 800 feet of the development for which the parking is required.
J. Tandem Parking for Residential Uses. Tandem parking may be allowed for certain uses in order to provide for a more attractive streetscape and pedestrian-friendly environment by more efficiently using the land.
1. Approval Criteria for Residential Uses. Tandem parking may be permitted for up to 50 percent of the total residential parking requirement if all of the following criteria are met:
a. Each residential unit may have only one tandem parking stall (equaling no more than two parking spaces) for each dwelling unit or for each multifamily unit requiring two parking spaces;
b. Ingress and egress for the tandem parking stalls do not interfere with the safety of residents or adjacent property owners, and the functionality of adjacent parking;
c. The size of the tandem parking stalls must equal two standard stall dimensions (eight feet wide by 37.5 feet in overall length). Compact tandem stalls are not permitted;
d. Individual private residential garage door width must be a minimum of eight feet; and
e. Tandem garages in individual, private residences are permitted outright when they are greater than two standard stall dimensions, and when storage space is provided in the garage area for waste collection bins, unless the project has a shared collection area, and items which typically occupy garage space (e.g., bicycles and other gear).
2. Additional parking spaces may be required if the percentage of tandem parking spaces is increased beyond the standard stall percentage, as indicated in subsection (J)(2) of this section, so long as this additional parking does not negatively impact public safety. For example, a project with 10 units is required to have 20 parking spaces. If there are no more than five stalls in the tandem configuration, this complies. However, if seven stalls are in the tandem configuration, two stalls over the maximum. (One stall for each unit over five is considered available so only two stalls are above the maximum.) If two additional stalls are provided on site, then the project is in compliance, as indicated in Figure 18.604.160(J).
3. Tandem parking must not be used for the storage of boats, trailers, recreational vehicles, or materials.
Figure 18.604.160(J). Residential Tandem Parking Configuration

Note: White boxes represent available/unoccupied parking spaces within a tandem stall.
K. Tandem Parking for Retail and Commercial Uses.
1. Approval Criteria for Retail and Commercial Uses. Because of the need for individual occupants to coordinate parking on a large scale, tandem parking is permitted only for employees if all the following criteria are met:
a. No more than 25 tandem parking stalls (equaling 50 parking spaces) may be provided;
b. Parking spaces are assigned to all employees;
c. Tandem parking stalls must be of standard size with an overall tandem stall size of eight feet by 37.5 feet;
d. Adequate visitor parking is provided; and
e. Tandem parking must not be used for the storage of boats, trailers, recreational vehicles, or materials.
2. Exception for Retail, Commercial, and Vehicle Repair Shop Customers. Tandem parking is permitted for customers of retail, commercial, and vehicle repair shop uses if all of the following criteria are met during business hours:
a. Valet parking is provided for customers;
b. Tandem parking spaces for customers are available only for valet parking use;
c. The tandem parking can accommodate a minimum of two cars in a row; and
d. Retail and commercial approval criteria in subsections (K)(1)(c) through (K)(1)(e) of this section are met.
L. Transportation Demand Management (TDM) Study. A project may receive additional reductions in required parking with a TDM study looking at multiple comparable projects in the Pacific Northwest. The TDM study must be prepared by a traffic or parking professional selected jointly by the City and the applicant. Additional required parking reductions recommended by a TDM study may be approved if one or more of the following can be shown:
1. Demonstrable pedestrian, bicycle, or mass transit facilities provided to encourage and promote use by employees, residents, or customers which replaces automobile use;
2. Density of more than 12 dwelling units per acre;
3. Income restricted housing under 80 percent of average median income; and/or
4. Presence or provision of basic daily uses within 1,300 feet (i.e., one-quarter mile) such as grocery/corner store, drug store, and child care; and/or weekly uses such as bank, convenience store, restaurant, or theater.
M. Delayed Parking Installation. During land use or construction permit review, completion of the required parking improvements may be delayed due to project phasing, inclement weather, or poor soil conditions (example: settling of fill). Requests for such delays must be submitted in writing and must explain the reason for the request and an estimated completion date for the improvements. All approved delays must be bonded pursuant to the City’s estimate of the value of the delayed improvements.
1. Phasing. In the event the project is phased, the Director may apply additional conditions with related project permits to ensure each phase complies with this Code and any permit approvals, such as but not limited to access, fire circulation, parking, and landscaping requirements including site stabilization.
a. Phased Occupancy. In the event that a building is occupied in phases, only a portion of the required parking is necessary with each phase. The calculation must be based on the parking as calculated and/or modified by this chapter. All parking must be constructed and completed by final certificate of occupancy or final tenant improvement occupancy, whichever is later.
b. Maintenance. Prior to completing a project, interim landscape in required landscape areas must be provided to discourage invasive plants from being established. Routine maintenance of these areas must include removing invasive plants.
N. Reserved Parking. The intent of reserved parking is to provide less “paved and striped” parking. If the application provides documentation that indicates lower parking demand for the specific site or use, then reserved parking may be used for a specific time period. Reserved parking must provide all of the following:
1. A transportation management plan (TMP), in accordance with subsection L of this section, that indicates a currently lower parking demand than required in Table 18.604.080(A), and a time period for when the conversion to parking is deemed necessary.
2. Landscaping or other use of the land in lieu of the remaining parking which could be converted into “paved and striped” parking if site/use conditions change; and
3. Reserved Parking Contract. A contract is required and must be executed by all the owners/operators of the use and the City. The reserved parking contract must:
a. Provide that the land comprising the required reserved parking facilities must not be encroached upon, used, sold, leased, or conveyed unless doing so will not impact the reserved parking area or the contract is amended or terminated, and adequate parking is provided for the site/use;
b. Provide that the contract term must be for as long as any of the reserved uses continues in existence;
c. Assign maintenance provisions for the parking facilities and landscaping;
d. Designate potential times of overflow, and a parking plan which will be implemented in the event of overflow; and
e. Be recorded with the King County Recorder’s Office and be binding upon heirs, successors, and assigns of the parties.
4. Contract Amendments and Termination. Amendments to the contract or contract termination must be reviewed and approved through the Level 1 review process.
O. Electric Vehicle Charging Provisions. For every electric vehicle charging station provided, the required number of parking spaces may be reduced by an equivalent number, provided the total reduction does not exceed 10 percent of the total required parking spaces.
P. Parking District. One or more properties or developments may form a parking district. The parking district may account for some or all of the parking requirements within the district, including vehicular parking located in structures, surface lots, on-street parking, etc., and bicycle parking located in racks, lockers, rights-of-way, private access, etc. The parking district may use a combination of parking tools or other measures to fulfill the intent of this section.
1. The intent of parking districts is to:
a. Provide adequate vehicular and bicycle parking, as well as accessible bus stops, for uses within the parking district;
b. Shift from auto focused to a pedestrian-oriented and park-once philosophy;
c. Collaborate with King County and Sound Transit on transit stop locations, as well as bicycle facilities such as bike racks or a bike station, where a bicycling program could benefit the entire community;
d. Provide incentives to encourage a transition from surface parking to structured parking;
e. Share parking so it is used efficiently and space devoted to parking is minimized; and
f. Allow flexibility in the timing of parking construction, so that its construction can be efficient and related to construction phasing and demand for parking.
2. Wayfinding Signage. Parking districts must communicate the availability of parking for each use by directional signs governed by Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.
3. District Establishment. The Director may approve establishment of a parking district following the procedures outlined in Chapter 18.202 IMC, Applications.
a. Parking lots must be a maximum distance of 800 feet between lots.
b. The total requirement for all off-street parking must be the sum for all individual uses.
c. An agreement establishes a primary operator for the duration a district is established. If all parties agree to dissolve the district, the agreement must also define how all properties will comply with the original parking requirements for their uses.
Q. CBD Credit. Parking Reductions in the CBD Zoning District. Parking requirements for all uses located in the CBD zone may be reduced by as much as 40 percent as follows:
1. General Reduction. Parking requirements for all uses in the CBD zone may be reduced by 15 percent in order to encourage redevelopment and promote pedestrian systems.
2. Additional Reduction. An additional 25 percent of the required number of spaces for shared parking may be reduced in the CBD zone when the provisions of subsection E of this section, Shared Parking, are met.
3. Additional Olde Town Provision. The following provisions apply to the CBD zone and MF-H zone (along East Sunset Way only).
a. Change of Use. No additional parking is required for a change in use for an existing structure or the use of previously unused space within an existing structure.
b. Additions. Additional parking must be provided in accordance with this chapter for any structural addition only when it exceeds 10 percent of the original gross floor area of the building. (Ord. 3106 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of the off-street design standards and specifications is to provide safe, barrier-free access connecting parking areas to the specific uses they serve, permit accessibility to vehicles, including public safety vehicles, enhance urban form, and reduce surface parking as much as possible. The following standards and specifications apply to all parking required under this chapter.
B. Dimensions. Stall dimensions including standard, compact, micro, parallel, and motorcycle stall dimensions must be designed as shown in Figure 18.604.170(A).
1. Standard parking stalls may not exceed the standard dimensions. Any stalls with dimensions less than the standard stall in one or both directions, but no less than the compact stall size, are considered compact stalls. Any stalls with dimensions less than the compact stall in one or both directions, but no less than the micro stall size, are considered micro stalls. Stalls smaller than micro may be provided for motorcycles; however, they do not count toward meeting the required vehicle parking provisions. Multiple or combination stalls may be approved when considering improved access and usability.
C. Drive Aisle Widths. Drive aisle widths are linked to stall angle and stall lengths. Specified drive aisle widths are given in Figure 18.604.170(A). Drive aisle sizes and configurations are the maximums, except as follows:
1. Where stalls of various sizes are mixed along a drive aisle, the largest drive aisle width associated with the largest stall size present is required; and
2. The parking layout must continue the use of the larger drive where a drive aisle transitions from one stall size to another, structural columns placement, or similar situations.
D. Parallel Parking Stalls. Parallel parking stalls must be designed so that the doors of the vehicles do not encroach onto pedestrian walkways.
Figure 18.604.170(A). Vehicle Parking Stall Size and Configuration

Note: y is the bumper overhang.
E. Mix of Parking Stall Sizes. Required parking may choose the following mix:
1. Standard stalls: up to 100 percent of total required parking;
2. Compact stalls: up to 60 percent of total required parking;
3. Micro stalls: up to five percent of total required parking; and
4. Motorcycle stalls: required parking must be in accordance with IMC 18.604.100, Motorcycle and scooter parking.
F. General Stall Location.
1. Compact and micro stalls shall not impede fire lane access.
2. For single loaded parking: The stall length shall not impede two vehicle travel lanes that are a minimum of nine feet wide each, so the total fire lane width is equal to at least 38 feet.
3. For double loaded parking: Both stall lengths shall not impede the two vehicle travel lanes that are a minimum of nine feet wide each, so the total fire lane width is equal to at least 57 feet.
4. Parking spaces that are closest to the building’s entrances must not be compact spaces.
G. Driveways. Driveways must be designed and sized to prioritize pedestrian safety and access while maintaining functionality for vehicles.
1. The location and design of driveways must be in accordance with the City’s driveway construction standards in Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
H. Access. Access to parking facility vehicular driveways must occur in the priority of:
1. Alleys;
2. Driveways common with neighboring properties;
3. Secondary transportation facilities;
4. Access to primary transportation facilities.
I. Marking. The property owner must identify and mark required parking stalls, stall types, directional arrows and pedestrian crossings within parking areas using marking materials or other methods in accordance with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
J. Lighting and Signs. Parking structure walkways, elevators, stairs, and other forms of internal pedestrian circulation to public travel facilities must include signage in accordance with Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs, and lighting in accordance with Chapter 18.610 IMC, Outdoor Lighting.
K. Screening. Parking lots located along a street edge and the ground floor for parking structures must be screened by walls, hedges, or landscaped berms in accordance with IMC 18.606.080, Parking areas and highways – Landscape and decorative requirements.
L. Bumper Overhang. In order to prevent the collection of leaves and trash, a bumper overhang is preferred over wheelstops. Wheelstops shall only be used when required by the Americans with Disabilities Act or where the streetscape is curbless or consists of LID/rain gardens. Bumper overhangs must meet the following criteria:
1. Bumper overhang is generally assumed to be two feet; however, a larger or smaller overhang may actually exist depending on the angle and size of vehicles. The applicant may provide additional information on the actual configuration so the Director may determine if another overhang dimension would be appropriate with the proposed configuration.
2. Bumper overhang area may be used for walkway extension, alternative materials, landscaping, or rain garden. Unless wheelstops are used, the area shall not be asphalt. In any case, this area must be protected so that cars may not continue driving into this area.
3. Surface parking or nonparallel parking stalls that have low landscape or additional hardscape (by moving the curb) at the head of the stall may reduce the paved portion of the stall length by two feet as long as the vehicle can hang into the landscape or hardscape by two feet without reducing or impacting pedestrian walkway widths or the proposed landscape. Vehicle overhang must be indicated on all construction drawings using this technique.
M. Wheelstops. When wheelstops are provided, they must be positioned 18 inches into the parking stall. Wheelstops must not be used in conjunction with curbs. Wheelstops must ensure cars are contained within the parking lot and that cars do not overhang into areas not intended for parking such as walkways or planting areas.
N. Repair and Maintenance of Required Parking and Circulation Areas. The property owner must maintain in perpetuity all parking and circulation areas on the property in a safe, functional, and well-maintained condition that meets all applicable standards and project approvals.
O. Prior Installation of Required Parking. All parking improvements, including markings required by this section, must be installed prior to any change in the use of land or structures and prior to the occupancy of any new or enlarged structure.
P. Vehicle circulation for all parking areas on the site must be contained within the proposed parking area.
Figure 18.604.170(B). Vehicle Parking Layout for Turning Clearances, Parallel Parking, and Gravel Parking

Q. Appearance and Design. Parking lots must incorporate measures that break up the expanse of pavement, shade the surface, screen views of the parking lot from above and the sides and reduce the scale such as by locating the short dimension of the lot adjacent to the street. For surface lots, the narrow width of the parking lot, no wider than 65 feet, must be located adjacent to a transportation facility.
1. Surface Parking Lot Materials. Single-family residential uses are not required to pave and stripe their parking and circulation areas. Residential uses may use grass block pavers or turf-block pavers to meet minimum parking requirements. If residential uses choose to use hard-surfaced materials or other alternative materials, those materials must comply with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards. All other parking and circulation areas must be hard surfaced, consistent with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards. Gravel, turf-block, or other similar alternative surface may be permitted only if all of the following approval criteria are met:
a. Access to Right-of-Way. At least 20 feet of the initial vehicular entrance leading to all the rights-of-way are paved in order to minimize any dust, gravel or other material from being transported from the parking area to adjacent streets or alleys;
b. Character/Location. The alternative surface is an approved surface supporting the design characteristics of the use and/or the location; and
c. Maintenance. The alternative surface is maintained, as needed, by the property owner.
R. Sustainability. Surface parking lots must implement environmentally friendly elements such as pervious pavement, low-impact stormwater development (LID) elements such as rain gardens and other effective and innovative sustainability measures, in accordance with the stormwater master plan. (Ord. 3106 § 6 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to enhance form with parking structures and reduce surface parking lots, to connect parking areas to the specific uses they serve, and to permit accessibility to motorized vehicles. The following standards and specifications apply to all parking structures.
B. Structure Requirement. Structure parking is only required in Tier 1, in accordance with Figure 18.604.020(A).
C. New Development. Structure parking is required for all new nonresidential developments as provided in the following Tables 18.604.180(A) and 18.604.180(B).
Table 18.604.180(A). New Development – Required Parking to Be Provided in Structure
Use | Minimum Required Parking in Structure |
|---|---|
Office | 50% when > 5,000 GFA |
Retail/Service | 50% when > 25,000 GFA |
D. Vertical Mixed-Use Overlay. Structure parking is required for all new nonresidential developments within parcels abutting designated vertical mixed-use corridors as provided in the following Table 18.604.180(B).
Table 18.604.180(B). New Development – Required Parking to Be Provided in Structure
Use | Required in Structure |
|---|---|
Office | 90% when > 5,000 GFA |
Retail/Service | 90% when > 25,000 GFA |
E. Location. Structured parking facilities must be concealed within the site or located under or above or behind the street level of buildings.
F. Access. Access drives and ramps to parking and service areas must maintain clear sight lines and minimize interference at pedestrian and bicycle crossings. Vehicle driveway openings must be minimized along the street frontage by setting entrances and exits back from the primary plane of the façade; placed a minimum of 40 feet from street corners; and incorporate architectural treatment of the openings, art, and landscaping.
G. Wrap With Commercial. Where structured parking is provided on the ground level, commercial or residential uses must be provided along the build-to-line with parking facilities placed behind the uses and away from the transportation facility. The commercial or residential space must be a minimum depth of 20 feet.
H. Structured Parking Building Design. Structured parking must incorporate building design elements and must be architecturally integrated and designed in a similar fashion to associated or adjacent buildings.
I. Natural ventilation and daylight must be incorporated in parking structure design and installed to avoid glare or reflection of light. Lights must not be located where they may interfere with parking stalls, stacking areas, and ingress and egress to parking areas. Also see Chapter 18.610 IMC, Outdoor Lighting.
J. Rooftop Screening. Where the structure does not reach the maximum building height, the top level of open parking structures must be screened in accordance with IMC 18.606.090, Parking structure requirements. (Ord. 3106 §§ 7 – 9 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to establish regulations for nonconforming parking facilities. See also Chapter 18.214 IMC, Nonconforming Uses and Structures.
B. Resurfacing of Existing Residential Parking Spaces. Existing parking spaces for residential uses that do not conform to the requirements of this chapter and were established prior to June 6, 2024, are not required to be modified or resized, except to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act. Existing paved parking lots serving residential uses are not required to resize parking spaces during resurfacing.
C. Gravel-Surfaced Parking Spaces for Residential Uses. Existing legally nonconforming gravel-surfaced parking spaces for residential uses, established prior to June 6, 2024, shall count toward minimum parking requirements, up to a maximum of six spaces.
D. Demolition and Change of Use. Developments which had legal nonconforming parking facilities prior to the effective date of these provisions must become conforming when:
1. A structure is demolished; or
2. The use of the development is changed to a new use, except when an existing commercial or mixed-use building being converted into a residential development when the existing building received a certificate of occupancy at least three years prior to the permit application to add housing units.
E. Additions. If the basis for calculating required parking is increased, such as adding gross floor area, seats, units, or other measure, then required parking must be provided for the increased amount. (Ord. 3106 § 10 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3105 § 6 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 2 (Exh. C), 2023).
Landscape is an essential element of a great public realm and maintaining the character of Issaquah. The intent of this chapter is to require development that draws nature into the community. Adding green elements softens the urban form and provides transitions from natural edges to the built environment. These standards ensure a livable, verdant, attractive community by requiring well-designed green spaces that complement high-intensity urban uses and integrate landscaping design principles. Minimum requirements and standards are established to:
A. Protect and enhance the quality and function of the natural environment;
B. Create a public realm that helps to define the character and image of Issaquah;
C. Support a pedestrian- and bicycle-oriented environment;
D. Provide safety to pedestrian, bicycle, and vehicular traffic;
E. Promote wise and efficient use of water resources;
F. Protect water quality;
G. Ensure appropriate plant material selection and spacing for proposed locations and uses;
H. Encourage healthy, attractive year-round landscapes throughout Issaquah;
I. Require proper landscape maintenance practices to minimize landscape hazards;
J. Require retention of native vegetation and associated soils where appropriate;
K. Integrate landscaping within nature and the context of the built environment;
L. Soften development and hardscape spaces;
M. Establish lush, verdant landscaping as key focal points; and
N. Ensure plant and landscape materials are restorative and resilient to climate change through diverse native and drought-resistant species. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
The provisions of this chapter apply to:
A. New development;
B. Subdivision of property;
C. Any development or redevelopment located in, adjacent to, or affecting critical areas as defined in Chapter 18.802 IMC; and
D. Any redevelopment or project that results in an increase of 20 percent or more of impervious surface area on a property. (Ord. 3088 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. When the cost of an addition, alteration, or repair of any existing building or structure exceeds 50 percent of the value of the existing building or structure, landscaping must conform with the requirements of this chapter.
B. When the cost of an addition or alteration of gross floor area is 50 percent or less of the existing building or structure value, nonconforming landscaping must conform to the requirements of this chapter proportionately, which shall be no less than a percentage of required landscaping area and plantings equal to the percentage of increase in gross floor area.
1. Additional landscaping must be grouped into a single area with priority given to consistency with the required landscape types and visibility from a public street or other public area.
2. This landscaping must displace paving or other impervious material including one or more parking spaces in excess of required parking. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
The following project types are exempt from permitting and bonding requirements outlined in this chapter:
A. Single-family use lots with a detached single-family home;
B. Middle housing developments;
C. Accessory dwelling units; and
D. Small projects requiring the installation of five or fewer new trees or 1,000 square feet of landscaping. (Ord. 3091 § 11 (Exh. J), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The intent of these planting and vegetation standards is to ensure that plants are selected considering the surrounding context, enhancing and protecting Issaquah’s natural environment.
B. All planting areas must contain landscape, installed based on an approved plan.
C. Plant Standards. All plant materials used must meet the most recent American Association of Nurserymen Standards (ANSI Z60.1) for nursery stock.
D. All landscape and groundcover must be appropriately spaced by its respective type and plant size to provide total coverage of the landscape area within three years.
E. Plant Selection. All plants must be adapted to their sites, considering sun exposure, cold hardiness, moisture requirements, soil type, climate change, environmental stress, and soil pH. Plants with differing environmental/cultural requirements must not be used together unless desirable conditions can be provided for all plants.
1. New plant materials must consist of native or drought-tolerant varieties or nonnative species that have adapted to the climate conditions of the King County lowland environment. Appropriate locations and species must be selected to ensure plants will thrive, considering how the impacts of climate change can add undue stress to native plants in an urban environment. In some cases, native plants may need to be irrigated to survive.
a. Drought-tolerant and native plant species lists can be found in King County’s Native Plant Guide.
2. There must be a diversity of tree and shrub genus and species in the site landscaping and must contain 50 percent native trees per IMC 18.812.080, Replacement trees, and 30 percent native shrubs and groundcovers. No more than 50 percent may be of one species.
3. All plants must be selected taking into consideration the mature size of the plant and the space allowed for the plant to grow unobstructed. For example, large native conifers are not appropriate in densely built areas and narrow planter beds.
4. Plants must be selected that are appropriate for the provided space to minimize persistent pruning. Any class of noxious weeds, including nonregulated weeds and weeds of concern, per the King County Noxious Weed Control Board pursuant to the State Weed Control Law, Chapter 17.10 RCW, is not allowed.
5. A minimum of 10 percent of shrubs and groundcovers must be known to attract regional pollinator species.
6. Tree species must be selected from the City preferred and prohibited tree list.
F. Plant and Pot Sizes and Spacing. Standard plant sizes and spacing requirements for new landscape areas must follow the guidelines for selection and spacing based on the ultimate size and growth habits of the plants as defined in the ANSI Z60.1-2014 or the most recent edition of the guide. At a minimum:
1. Four-inch pots must be spaced 12 inches on center in a triangular planting arrangement.
2. One-gallon pots must be spaced 18 inches in a triangular planting arrangement.
3. Groundcovers spacing is dependent on the type and size of the plant material used. In existing woodlands, the spacing of groundcovers is allowed to be spaced apart.
G. Shrubs spacing is dependent on the type and size of the plant material used and must be adequate to provide total coverage of the landscape area within three years. At a minimum:
1. Low shrub: mature size under three feet tall. Minimum size at planting: one-gallon pot. If massing is the intent, spacing 18 inches on center or to cover in three years.
2. Medium shrub: mature size from three feet to six feet tall. Minimum size at planting: two-gallon pot. If massing is the intent, spacing 24 inches on center or to cover within three years.
3. Large shrub: mature size over six feet tall. Minimum size at planting: five-gallon pot or balled and burlapped equivalent. If massing is the intent, spacing three feet on center or to cover within three years.
H. Trees spacing is dependent on the type and size of the trees used and will depend on the landscape type that is required per the approved landscape plan. At a minimum:
1. Small tree: a tree with an ultimate height less than 30 feet under normal urban growing conditions. When planted, they must be no smaller than one-and-one-half-inch caliper, six to eight feet in height.
2. Medium tree: a tree with an ultimate height between 30 and 50 feet under normal urban growing conditions. When planted, they must be no smaller than two-inch caliper, 10 feet to 12 feet in height.
3. Large tree: a tree with an ultimate height over 50 feet under normal urban growing conditions. When planted, a deciduous tree must be no smaller than two-and-one-half-inch caliper, 12 feet to 14 feet in height.
4. Narrow tree: a tree with a maximum width less than 15 feet.
5. Coniferous tree: when planted, they must be seven-foot minimum height as measured per the ANSI Standards.
6. Multistemmed trees must be a minimum of five feet high when planted.
7. Street trees when planted must be sized according to Chapter 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation, and the preferred and prohibited tree list.
I. Artificial or synthetic turfs must comply with the best available science to ensure no toxic run-offs or adverse environmental impacts. For example, some turfs use 6PPD quinone or microplastics that have harmful effects to aquatic ecosystems.
J. Berms. If berms are used, they must be planted with trees, shrubs, and living groundcover and must be adequately planted to prevent erosion.
1. Berms planted with sod lawn must be no steeper than a 3:1 ratio.
2. Planted slopes with erosion control plants and groundcovers must be no steeper than a 2:1 ratio.
3. Any berms over 2:1 must have 100 percent biodegradable erosion control netting or matting installed in addition to the required plantings.
K. Pedestrian Pathways. Landscape material shall not be used for pedestrian pathways except between stepping stones or similar durable materials.
L. Landscaping Area Size Requirements.
1. Larger planting beds are more likely to be successful than small ones. Therefore, planting bed size must be as large as practical for each site. Shrub planting areas must be a minimum of 100 square feet with a minimum width of five feet.
2. All required tree planting areas must be:
a. A minimum width of five feet and provide a minimum soil volume of 1,200 CF. When adequate soil volumes are not achievable via planting strips, structural soils and tree soil cells must be used to increase soil volumes and connect root zones of planting under paving. If using structural soil, four times the volume is necessary to match that of tree soil cells in order to match usable soil amounts. If root zones are connected, soil volumes shared by multiple trees can be less than 1,200 CF per tree.
b. Tree wells must be a minimum of 24 square feet of open area; however, the use of continuous landscape beds or lawns is considered preferable to individual tree wells.
c. Island planting beds in parking lots or similar situations must have a minimum dimension of five feet between curbs.
d. Planting holes must be three times the diameter of the plant rootball and must be backfilled.
M. Tree and Vegetation Protection. The following standards intend to provide adequate protection of trees and the landscaping area:
1. Protective devices such as bollards, root guards, planter edger, boulders, etc., may be used.
2. Where vehicles may overhang into required landscaping areas, trees must be located such that they will not be damaged by vehicles pulling in and out of parking stalls. Permanent curbing must be provided in all landscaping areas within or abutting parking areas unless modifications are needed to accommodate stormwater infrastructure; other structural barriers may be substituted for curbing, such as concrete wheel stops.
3. Trees must be sized appropriately and not be placed in areas where they will require excessive pruning (greater than 25 percent of the canopy).
4. The property owner must not fill, excavate, stack, or store any equipment or compact the earth in any way within the area defined by the dripline of any tree to be retained.
N. The applicant shall not install impervious surface material within the area defined by the dripline of any trees to be retained unless specifically approved by the Director.
O. If the grade level around a tree to be retained is to be raised, the applicant must construct a wall or well around the tree. The diameter of this wall or well must be equal to the diameter of the tree’s dripline. See Chapter 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation, for allowable grade impacts within the critical root zone. (Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The following standards intend to preserve and enhance the City of Issaquah’s soils, working to ensure healthy vegetation and landscapes.
B. Soil Porosity. Soils in planting areas must have adequate porosity to allow root growth. Soils compacted to a density greater than 85 percent compaction must be loosened (ripped) to increase aeration to a minimum depth of 18 inches, or to the depth of the largest plant rootball, whichever is greater. After soil preparation is completed, motorized vehicles must be kept off the soil area to prevent excessive compaction and underground pipe damage.
C. Soil Amendments for New Landscape Areas. All new landscape areas are required to amend soils to improve soil health and nutrient availability, increase porosity, infiltration and moisture holding capacity and must meet the following minimum specifications for soils, compost, mulches, and seed mixes:
1. Subgrade must be a minimum of eight inches below finish grade. Substandard soils must be removed prior to adding amendments. Topsoil must be tilled into soils in four-inch lifts to prevent a distinct soil interface from forming.
2. A soils analysis must be completed for all new planting areas before and after any amendments and must include:
a. A determination of soil texture, indicating percentage of organic matter.
b. An approximated soil infiltration rate either measured or derived from soil/texture/infiltration rate tables.
c. A measure of pH value.
3. Soils for use in projects applying low-impact development (LID) standards must follow the LID Technical Guidance Manual for Puget Sound.
4. For soils that will not adequately percolate to provide proper drainage for plant materials, a correction plan must be developed by the landscape architect.
D. Waterwise Soil Amendments. The amendments are required for all landscape areas:
1. Plants having similar water use characteristics (hydrozones) must be grouped together.
2. Soil amendments may be necessary to produce a healthy growing medium, which will increase the survival rate for new planting and reduce ongoing maintenance requirements.
3. Water and nutrient holding materials must be incorporated into the soil as deep as possible, but no less than 12 inches. Fully composted organic material must be used.
E. Mulch Standards.
1. All mulched groundcover areas must have groundcover established, covering the area with growing plant material within three years. Mulch may not be used as a groundcover.
2. New planting areas shall be mulched to minimize evaporation, suppress weed growth and reduce erosion, using fully composted material.
3. Trees in lawn areas are required to have a mulched bed extending a minimum of 24 inches in all directions from the base of the tree.
4. Mulch shall not be placed against the tree trunk above the soil line.
5. All mulches used in planter beds must be weed-free and feathered to the base of the plants and kept at least six inches away from the crowns of shrubs or trunks of trees.
F. Native Soil Protection. The conservation and use of on-site native soil and vegetation for stormwater management is a central principle of LID design. For management of native vegetation and soil protection areas for LID design see the LID Technical Guidance Manual.
1. The duff layer and native topsoils must be retained in an undisturbed state to the maximum extent practicable. Any duff layer or topsoil removed during grading must be stockpiled on site in a designated, controlled area not adjacent to public resources and critical areas. The material must be reapplied to other portions of the site where feasible.
2. Areas that have been cleared and graded or subject to prior disturbance must be amended. Prior disturbance must include soil compaction or removal of some, or all, of the duff layer or underlying topsoil. Replaced topsoil must be a minimum of eight to 12 inches in depth, unless the applicant demonstrates that a different thickness will provide conditions equivalent to the soil moisture holding capacity native to the site. Replacement topsoil must have an organic content of 10 percent dry weight and a pH between 5.5 and 7.0. The intent of amending disturbed soils is to restore the moisture holding capacity of the original undisturbed native soil to the maximum extent practicable.
3. Native Vegetation Retention Areas. All projects with existing native vegetation areas must retain the following minimum of the native soil area:
a. Twenty-five percent for nonresidential uses and multifamily; and
b. Thirty percent for single-family residential uses.
4. This section does not apply to areas that would harm existing trees proposed for retention, or that, at project completion, are covered by an impervious surface, incorporated into a drainage facility, or engineered as structural fill or slope. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The intent of this section is to protect and enhance environmental functions and integrity, while also protecting and promoting efficient use of water. A permanent, efficient irrigation system must be installed in all landscapes unless exempted pursuant to this section.
B. For projects that require a site development permit (see Chapter 18.208 IMC, Site Development Permits), irrigation systems must be designed to conserve water by using best available conservation technology and irrigation best management practices by using at least three of the following techniques:
1. Subsurface or drip irrigation;
2. Sprinkler head selection and spacing designed to minimize overspray;
3. Use of plants with similar water needs, soil moisture sensors and separate zones for turf and shrub hydrozones and microclimates to meet watering needs of different sections of the landscape;
4. A minimum of 25 percent of landscaped areas are designed with long-term irrigation from harvested rainwater, such as rain barrels or rain gardens;
5. Irrigation uses recycled water or greywater water; or
6. Other technology that reduces water uses equal to, or greater than, the options above, as demonstrated by the applicant.
C. Irrigation systems must include a rain and soil moisture sensor designed to shut off or override watering during rainfall events.
D. Deviations to the irrigation requirements, as approved per IMC 18.606.190, Allowed deviations to this chapter, may be made for:
1. Allowing lawns to brown during the summer (June through September) to reduce water consumption;
2. Approved xeriscape (low water usage) plantings;
3. Landscaping using drought-tolerant plants or established indigenous plant material;
4. Landscaping in conjunction with low-impact development stormwater systems or landscapes where natural appearance is acceptable or desirable to the City.
E. Irrigation systems must be designed to avoid runoff, low-head drainage, overspray, or other similar conditions where irrigation water flows onto adjacent property, nonirrigated area, or impervious surfaces by:
1. Considering soil type and infiltration rates;
2. Using proper irrigation equipment and schedules, including such features as repeat cycles, and matched precipitation and infiltration rates; and
3. Considering special problems posed by irrigation on slopes, in median strips, and in narrow hydrozones.
F. Landscape water features must use nonpotable water unless the water feature is designed to both minimize water loss and recirculate water used in operation.
G. Public irrigation systems must utilize a master control valve connected to a flow sensor and irrigation controller.
H. Irrigation systems in right-of-way medians, curb strips, parking lots or other landscape strips of less than five feet in width or turf-grass exceeding a slope of three horizontal feet to one vertical foot (3:1) must be served by a low-volume, subsurface irrigation system providing a distribution uniformity of not less than 0.90.
I. Irrigation systems must be designed with provisions for winterization by providing either:
1. Manual drains at all low points (automatic valves are not allowed); or
2. A method to blow out irrigation system pipes with pressurized air.
J. Irrigation systems must be maintained and inspected periodically to assure proper functioning, adjust scheduling and to meet irrigation water budget requirements. Replacement of components must be original specified parts or materials, or their equivalents.
K. Water tubes may also be added to the tree plantings to allow water to penetrate the soil. However, they must be removed after the trees have become fully established or after the maintenance bond period, whichever comes sooner. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. For certain areas in the City, land uses may be more or less intensive based on the activity and zoning designation. The intent of this section is to use landscaping to balance and separate uses for such zones and land uses where needed. In many cases, this is used for parking landscape standards. See Figure 18.606.070(A) for an example of the intended effect of these types.
Figure 18.606.070(A). Landscaping Types Visual Example

B. The landscape types apply to all parking land uses and zones regulated by landscape type.
C. Classification of Landscape Types.
1. The standards for types of plantings and landscaping are established in Figure 18.606.070(C), Types of Landscape Plantings:
Table 18.606.070(C). Types of Landscape Plantings
Type | Purpose | Tree Standards | Shrub Standards | Standards |
|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Year-round sight barrier | • Minimum 90% evergreen trees in three years. • Rows spaced an average of 30 feet on center depending on species with a minimum of four trees per 5,000 square feet. • A minimum of six to eight feet high for conifers and two-and-one-half-inch caliper for deciduous and evergreen broad-leaf trees when planted. | • Minimum 80% evergreen. • Large shrubs a minimum of five-gallon pot or balled and burlapped equivalent when planted. | • Where the required setback is greater than 10 feet, the 10 feet of the setback area adjacent to the property line must be landscaped. • Where the required setback is 10 feet or less, the entire setback area must be landscaped. • The landscaping must be a combination of large evergreen and deciduous material to provide a 90% sight-obscuring screen within three years, or a combination of approximately 70% evergreen trees backed by a 100% sight-obscuring fence softened or accented with landscaping. |
2 | Visual screen | • Minimum 50% evergreen. • Medium trees spaced an average of 25 to 30 feet on center depending on species, with a minimum of four trees per 5,000 square feet. • Minimum of six to eight feet for conifers and two-inch caliper for deciduous and evergreen broad-leaf trees when planted. | • Minimum 50% evergreen. • Triangulated rows: Medium shrubs spaced per IMC 18.606.040(G). • Minimum two-to-three-gallon pot or balled and burlapped equivalent when planted. | • Where the required setback is greater than 10 feet, the 10 feet of the setback area adjacent to the property line must be landscaped. • Where the required setback is 10 feet or less, the entire setback area must be landscaped. • The landscaping must be a combination of medium to large evergreen and deciduous material to provide a visual screen within three years and with shrubs and groundcover providing 100% coverage in three years, or a combination of approximately 30% evergreen trees backed by a 70% sight-obscuring fence softened or accented with landscaping. |
3 | Visual buffer | • Minimum 30% evergreen. • Small to medium trees spaced an average of 20 feet on center depending on species with a minimum of four trees per 5,000 square feet. • A minimum of six to eight feet for conifers and one-and-one-half-inch caliper for deciduous and evergreen broad-leaf trees when planted | • Minimum 30% evergreen. • Triangulated rows: Small shrubs spaced per IMC 18.606.040(G). • Minimum one gallon pot or balled and burlapped equivalent. | • Where the required setback is greater than 10 feet, the 10 feet of the setback area adjacent to the property line must be landscaped. • Where the required setback is 10 feet or less, the entire setback area must be landscaped. • The landscaping must be a combination of evergreen and deciduous material to provide a visual buffer within three years and with shrubs and groundcover providing 100% coverage in three years. |
D. Zones That Require Landscaping Along Lot Lines.
1. Table 18.606.070(D) does not apply for zones in Central Issaquah subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus.
2. Street frontage landscaping is not required along Front Street, unless buffering a parking area or mechanical equipment.
3. Where there is a conflict between the perimeter landscaping designation and landscaping buffers abutting less intense zoning districts in Table 18.606.070(D), the more intensive landscaping buffer type shall be used.
Table 18.606.070(D). Zones Requiring Lot Line Landscaping
Zone | Street Frontage | Perimeter | Landscaping Buffers Abutting Less Intense Zoning District | Notes |
|---|---|---|---|---|
C-Rec and TP-NRCA | Type 3 | Type 3 | NA | |
Community Facilities | Type 3 | Type 3 | NA | |
SF-E, SF-S, SF-SL, SF-D, C-Res | See Notes | NA | NA | See IMC 18.606.170 regarding street trees |
MUR, MF-M, MF-H | Type 3 See Notes | Type 3 | Type 2 All single-family zones, C-Rec, TP-NRCA | See IMC 18.606.170 regarding street trees |
Intensive Commercial (IC) | Type 2 See Notes | Type 2 | Type 1 (MFR, SFR, or CBD) | See IMC 18.606.170 regarding street trees |
(Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The purpose of landscaping or decorative elements in association with parking areas is to soften the visual appearance, reduce the impacts on pedestrians, screen views of parking, add shade, limit the amount of continuous impervious surface, and reinforce safe pedestrian access to buildings and connecting sidewalks.
B. The following parking landscape standards apply Citywide, except in Central Issaquah subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus:
1. Required Landscaping Type by Parking Size.
Table 18.606.080(B)(1). Required Landscaping Types by Parking Size
Standard Threshold | Street Frontage | Perimeter | Landscaping Buffers Abutting Less Intense Zoning District | Notes |
|---|---|---|---|---|
Parking > 25 required spaces | Type 1 | Type 2 | Type 1 | See IMC 18.606.080(C) for additional location standards. |
Parking < 25 required spaces | Type 2 | Type 2 | Type 1 | See IMC 18.606.080(C) for additional location standards. |
Parking structure | Type 1 | Type 2 | Type 1 | See IMC 18.606.090, Parking structure requirements. |
2. Street Frontage, Pedestrian Walkways and Parking Lots Near Sidewalks. Along street frontage and between pedestrian walkways and parking areas, a planting area along the right-of-way or pedestrian walkway, except for driveways, must be planted with a mixture of evergreen and deciduous trees based on the size of the parking lot as required for the identified landscape type identified in IMC 18.606.040, General requirements by landscape type.
3. Table 18.606.080(B)(2) defines planting requirements for parking areas.
Table 18.606.080(B)(2). Landscape Type and Quantity for Parking Areas Outside of Issaquah Subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus
Street Frontage | Perimeter Screening | Interior Layout | |
|---|---|---|---|
Parking: Greater than or equal to 25 required spaces | Type 1 landscaping of the planting strip with medium to large trees. | When parking lots are within 15 feet of a less intense zoning district, a six-foot-high wall is required with Type 2 screening of the wall. | 25 square feet of landscaping must be provided for every parking space. |
Parking: Less than 25 required spaces | Type 2 landscaping of the planting strip with medium trees. | When parking lots are within 15 feet of less intense zoning districts, a six-foot-high wall or evergreen hedge with shrubs spaced three feet on center is required. | 18 square feet of landscaping must be provided for every parking space. |
All parking lots | Frontage will be required to have a three-foot-high wall or solid evergreen hedge. | Visual access to meet CPTED standards will be allowed where necessary as determined by the Director. | Island widths must be a minimum of eight feet wide. |
4. Screening Wall. Parking lots along street edge must be screened by walls, hedges, landscaped berms, or a combination of these elements. Screen walls must consist of a solid three-foot-high evergreen hedge and/or fence with landscaping to soften the fence on the street side. Trellising with climbing vines above a solid wall may be substituted for the fencing.
5. Clustering. Clustering of landscaping is permitted to encourage larger planting areas for LID.
6. Planting and pruning of shrubs for hedges along street frontages must be adequate to allow the plants to fill in between shrubs to create a screen that reduces headlight glare to surrounding properties and streets.
7. Preservation of Tree Function (Shade). Landscape maintenance must allow the trees to reach a size and shape to provide the intended shading of the parking surface. The landscape plan must set a predetermined minimum height for trees. Once the desired height is reached, trees must not be pruned below that height. See landscape standards, tree pruning in IMC 18.606.150.
8. Landscape Islands/Strips.
a. Landscape islands or peninsulas within the parking lot must be a minimum of eight feet wide and the equivalent to the required parking stall length. The length is encouraged to be longer to aid in traffic calming.
b. Planting islands with trees must be located at the ends of each parking row and midway between the ends. A span of no more than 10 parking spaces must be allowed between planting islands (six if spaces are double backed). Planting islands located midway between the end islands may run perpendicular or parallel with the rows.
c. Tree grates are not encouraged, but, when used, must be designed so that sections of grate can be removed incrementally as the tree matures and must be designed to avoid accumulation of trash. See Figure 18.606.080(B)(8)(d) for two methods of providing tree wells in parking lots.
d. Decorative mulches or unit pavers may be used in areas of heavy foot traffic but shall not cover more than five percent of the required landscaping.
Figure 18.606.080(B)(8)(d). Two Methods of Providing Tree Wells in Parking Lots. (S: standard stall; C: compact stall)
![]() | ![]() |
9. Interior Landscape. Landscaping in the interior of parking lots is intended to diminish the effects of paving and shall consist of:
a. Landscape areas at the entries of buildings and between parking areas and buildings. These areas must be a minimum of five feet wide and may be clustered to accommodate pedestrian circulation and parking layout; and
b. One tree for every six parking spaces in parking lot interiors. Trees must be a minimum of 10 feet high and two-inch caliper when planted. The trees must be 100 percent large broad-leaf canopy trees.
C. Parking Landscape Standards for Central Issaquah Subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus.
1. Interior Landscape. Landscaping in the interior of parking lots is intended to diminish the effects of paving and shall meet the following requirements:
a. The total of all interior landscaped areas must equal or exceed 10 percent of the parking lot area;
b. A landscaped area must be provided at the end of parking aisles; and
c. The minimum width of landscape islands must be based on the plants installed in it, door swings, and adjacent uses. Landscape islands with trees must be a minimum of five feet between curbs.
2. Edge Landscape. Landscaping along parking lot edges abutting public rights-of-way, transportation facilities, or community spaces must be provided to create a pedestrian-friendly environment. Groundcover must be provided. Landscaping must also include one or both of the following:
a. Evergreen shrubs, at least two feet high at installation, to provide a continuous three-foot height hedge at maturity. These landscaped buffers for parking lot areas must have a minimum width of three feet; and
b. Three-foot-tall fencing or wall, which is at least 75 percent opaque.
3. Small Parking Lots. Parking lots with less than eight standard spaces, 10 compact spaces, or six ADA stalls, assuming a drive aisle with half the stalls on each side, may provide required landscaping area along the edges, rather than in the interior, so long as the following are met:
a. At least one tree for every six stalls must be provided in the edge landscaping; and
b. No more than four standard spaces, five compact spaces, or three ADA stalls (with two associated walkways/loading areas) may be placed in a continuous row.
D. Landscape Standards for Residential Sites Adjacent to Freeways and Highways.
1. The intent of the following standards is to mitigate impacts to health and air in residential uses adjacent to major highways and freeways. The standards apply to multifamily and mixed-use buildings with residential spaces that are adjacent to transportation facilities classified by WSDOT as an interstate or other freeway/expressway.
2. Buildings with residential uses must use landscaping to screen or buffer interstates and highways from residential uses. The project must include the following:
a. Clustering of plant materials and vegetation that creates a continuous landscaped area adjacent to the transportation facility, as seen in Figure 18.606.080(D)(2)(a), using Type 1 landscaping;
Figure 18.606.080(D)(2)(a). Vegetation Buffer From Highway

b. Vegetation tall enough to visually block the transportation facility from ground level view of the highway or freeway. Exceptions are allowed for pedestrian connections and for sightlines for transportation facilities;
c. Existing trees nearest to and adjacent to the highway or freeway must be preserved in accordance with Chapter 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Intent. Exposed garage structures and rooftop parking have negative impacts that must be minimized without unduly discouraging their construction. Rooftop parking is considered equivalent to a surface parking lot and must be modulated by either landscaping or nonlandscaping methods.
B. Purpose. To provide sight barriers for parking structures by mitigating adverse impacts created by vehicle use areas including noise and glare by buffering uses, screening adjacent properties, facilitating movement of traffic, and improving the physical appearance of vehicle use areas.
C. General Standards, Excluding Central Issaquah Subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus.
1. Perimeter Screening. In addition to required landscaping of the setback area, one of the following must be provided around and adjacent to the entire parking structure except for driveways, pedestrian walkways, and emergency access points:
a. A 10-foot-wide planting area with Type 1 landscaping; or
b. A five-foot-wide planting area with Type 2 landscaping with trellising and climbing vines as described in IMC 18.600.090, Fences, walls and screening.
2. Interior Design Criteria. Landscape areas must be provided at the entries of buildings and between parking structures and buildings when the parking structure is a separate structure. Said areas must be a minimum of five feet wide and may be clustered to accommodate pedestrian circulation and parking layout.
3. Screening Wall. Structured ground floor parking must be screened from pedestrian view, such as from sidewalks, trails, parks, and plazas. Screen walls must consist of a solid three-foot-high evergreen hedge and/or fence with landscaping to soften the fence on the street side. Trellising with climbing vines above a solid wall may be substituted for the fencing.
4. CPTED. Visual access to meet CPTED standards may be allowed where necessary.
D. Standards for Central Issaquah Subarea, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus.
1. Perimeter Requirements. Treatments along exposed parking structures abutting public rights-of-way, transportation facilities, or community spaces must have visually and texturally interesting pedestrian-friendly treatments, except where there are pedestrian or vehicular entries/exits to the parking structure. Treatment options are:
a. Landscape growing on the building or an attached structure, such as green walls; and/or
b. A landscape area at least 10 feet wide composed of a combination of evergreen and deciduous trees, evergreen shrubs, and groundcover. The landscape materials may be clustered, staggered, or regularly spaced, as long as screening is achieved. The minimum required number of each landscape material is based on the linear footage of exposed parking structure frontage as follows: one tree per 20 linear feet, one shrub per five linear feet.
2. Rooftop Requirements. The purpose of architectural elements or landscape for rooftop parking is to soften the visual appearance of the rooftop, screen views of the rooftop, add shade, break up the visual appearance of rooftop parking, and reinforce safe pedestrian access to stairwells and elevators.
a. Interior.
(1) The square footage of all horizontal architectural elements or landscape interior to the rooftop parking must be equal to or greater than 10 percent of the total rooftop parking area.
(2) The applicant may choose to use architectural elements and/or landscape.
(3) Horizontal architectural elements must be five feet above areas used only by cars and eight feet above areas used by people.
(4) No perimeter treatment may contribute to the 10 percent interior requirement, except that portion which is greater than five feet in height; however, this exception shall not be used to meet more than 50 percent of the interior requirement.
b. Perimeter.
(1) Architectural elements or landscape must provide a visual screen at least three feet in height around the entire perimeter of the rooftop.
(2) On sides of the rooftop parking where adjacent or nearby occupied buildings are tall enough to look across or down upon the roof, architectural elements or landscape must provide a visual screen at least five feet in height.
(3) Architectural elements or landscape provided to meet the requirements of this section, and which are visible from the exterior of the parking structure, must be consistent with and/or complementary to the exterior architecture. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of this section is to design the portion of the development area immediately adjacent to a critical area and its buffer to protect and enhance the adjacent sensitive land.
B. Within the 15-foot building setback line established in Chapter 18.802 IMC, Critical Areas Regulations:
1. All vegetation shall be native, either retained or planted as part of the project;
2. Grading performed shall slope away from the critical area and its buffer so that no runoff of irrigation water, pesticides, and/or fertilizers will be diverted into the critical areas or their associated buffers;
3. All vegetation must be installed and maintained so that no plant material will be diverted into the critical areas or their associated buffers. Plants whose seeding methods or growth patterns are likely to result in migration into critical areas and their buffers shall not be planted near the critical area or buffer unless they are categorized as native plants; and
4. Wildlife enhancement features shall be incorporated, such as snags, loafing logs, and other natural features;
5. Applications must be 50 or more feet away from a waterway or wetland, or its associated buffer as established by Chapter 18.802 IMC, Critical Areas Regulations, unless approved by the City. Approved herbicide applications within 50 feet of a critical area buffer, such as for removing noxious weeds, must be done by a WSDA licensed pesticide applicator with an aquatic endorsement and an aquatic herbicide application permit from the Washington Department of Ecology, either aquatic noxious weed NPDES permit or the aquatic plant and algae management general NPDES permit.
C. In CARA Class 1 and 2 areas, proposed developments with maintained landscape areas greater than 10,000 square feet in total area must prepare an operations and maintenance manual plan using best management practices (BMPs) and integrated pest management (IPM) for fertilizer and pesticide/herbicide applications. The BMPs must include recommendations on the quantity, timing and type of fertilizers applied to lawns and gardens to protect groundwater quality. The City must issue guidelines for IPM in CARA Class 1 and 2 areas that must be based on the following principles:
1. Use of chemical applications must be kept at the minimum level required by the chemical label;
2. Selective applications of chemicals will be used rather than broad-based chemical applications. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The intent of landscaping or decorative elements is to soften the visual appearance, reduce the impacts on adjacent pedestrians, screen views of parking, add shade, limit the amount of continuous impervious surface, and reinforce safe pedestrian access to buildings and connecting sidewalks. The following landscape standards and specifications apply to all landscaping required under this chapter.
B. Centennial Tree. “Eddie’s White Wonder” Dogwood (Cornus “Eddie’s White Wonder”) has been chosen as Issaquah’s official centennial tree. Developers are therefore encouraged to use it as a single specimen or in small group plantings. It is not appropriate for use in planting strips or as a street tree.
C. Drainage Required. All landscapes must have adequate drainage, either through natural percolation or through an installed drainage system. A percolation rate of one-half inch of water per hour is acceptable. Wetland and riparian landscapes choosing to use LID techniques as part of a LID stormwater element must follow the guidelines of the LID Technical Guidance Manual, as amended, and Chapter 18.802 IMC, Critical Areas Regulation. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
When an approved development site is cleared and construction is delayed more than six months, the Director may require temporary vegetative cover and removal of invasive plants in support of IMC 16.26.050 (temporary erosion and sediment control). (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Administration.
1. A landscape plan must be submitted to the city before a construction permit is issued for the applicable developments outlined in IMC 18.606.020, Applicability.
2. An applicant must submit a landscape plan containing all required information necessary for the City to evaluate a project’s landscape design. All plans must meet the following specifications:
a. The landscape plan must be prepared or approved by a landscape architect, Washington-certified nurseryman/landscaper, or other qualified landscape designer as authorized by the City, signed by the party accepting responsibility and liability for the proposed plan, and be submitted together with other project application materials at the time of initial project submittal.
b. The irrigation plan, if irrigation is proposed, must be prepared or reviewed and approved by a certified irrigation designer, or other qualified irrigation designer as approved by the City, and submitted together with the project’s building plans.
c. Planting and Irrigation Details. All planting and irrigation plans, details and plant materials must conform to the guidelines set forth in this chapter. The plans must, at a minimum, include the type, quantity, spacing and location of plants and materials; typical planting details; soil amendment/installation; tree protection details as applicable; the location of significant trees within 20 feet of the property line on adjacent properties; and the location of irrigation systems with sufficient information for the review of the equipment, water system, and water budget to demonstrate compliance with the standards and ability to serve the project. Underground and at-ground utilities, equipment, or appurtenances must be shown on the plans so that planting conflicts are avoided. All plants must be shown at 85 percent of their mature size on landscape plans to demonstrate coverage.
d. A tree plan must be submitted according to the requirements established in Chapter 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation.
3. Landscape and irrigation plan revisions must be approved and installed according to the standards in this chapter. Revised plans must show all changes including different plant types, sizes, quantities, locations, irrigation, and all other landscape and irrigation elements. All revisions to landscape and irrigation plans must be approved prior to installation.
4. Certificate of Occupancy. Prior to certificate of occupancy the approved landscape and irrigation installation must be:
a. Installed, inspected, and approved by the City.
b. Maintenance bond submitted and accepted per IMC 18.206.020, Assurance devices. (Ord. 3088 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Irrigation water budgeting requirements apply to all developments subject to landscaping requirements in IMC 18.606.020, Applicability. Irrigation systems must conform to landscape standards and specifications as outlined in IMC 18.606.060, Irrigation and water standards.
B. A landscape design’s irrigation water budget (IWB) must be calculated based upon the total square footage of the proposed landscape area, which includes landscape water features (such as decorative ponds, pools, or fountains), and excluding impervious surfaces and critical areas regulated by Chapter 18.802 IMC, Critical Areas Regulations, and their buffers. The irrigation water budget must be calculated as described in this section.
C. A landscape design’s estimated water use (EWU) must be calculated by determining the estimated water use for each hydrozone and adding the EWU for all hydrozones together. The sum of the EWU for all hydrozones is the landscape’s total EWU. The formula used to determine the estimated water use for each hydrozone is available in the “Irrigation Water Budgeting Requirements” handout available at the permit center.
D. Plant factor values, or the “crop coefficient,” must be used for all plant species selected for use in a landscape. The plant factor value for the hydrozone is that of the plant species with the highest plant factor value within the hydrozone. Plant factor values assigned must reflect the plant species’ actual water demand as planted according to the final landscape design and plan.
E. Irrigation system efficiency values (IE) must be assigned in calculating the estimated water use for each hydrozone of a landscape. Determination of the IE must be as described in the “Irrigation Water Budgeting Requirements” handout available at the permit center.
F. The irrigation system must be designed, installed, and maintained in such a manner as to meet a minimum distribution uniformity of not less than 0.65.
G. An irrigation schedule must be submitted with the irrigation plan. (Ord. 3088 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Landscape Maintenance. Maintenance activities vary due to weather conditions and seasonal events. The following regular maintenance procedures serve as a standard for normal maintenance:
1. Litter pickup;
2. Mowing turf;
3. Edging turf;
4. Weeding planting beds;
5. Sweeping;
6. Irrigation; and
7. Pruning to required heights and widths.
B. Tree Pruning and Maintenance. All pruning must be done to the most recent National Arborist Association Standards: ANSI Z133.1 (2017) for safety factors and Z300 (Part 1) for pruning. It is recommended that all pruning be done to Class I (Fine Pruning), Class II (Standard Pruning), or Class III (Hazard Pruning) standards.
1. The following activities are considered acceptable pruning activities:
a. Canopy cleaning: the removal of dead, dying, diseased, crowded, weakly attached, low-vigor branches, and watersprouts from a tree’s canopy.
b. Canopy raising: the removal of the lower branches of a tree to provide a height of up to seven feet for pedestrian clearance and up to 16 feet for vehicular clearance or such other increased height as deemed appropriate for clearance by the City Arborist.
2. Class IV (Crown Reduction Pruning) may only be done for the following reasons:
a. Branches are interfering with utility lines.
b. Significant crown dieback has occurred.
c. Storm damage or prior incorrect pruning requires correction.
3. In no case is topping (the severe reduction of branches without consideration of the specifications for cutting back) allowed.
4. No more than 25 percent of the total canopy may be removed through canopy thinning (the selective removal of branches to increase light penetration and air movement, and to reduce weight) unless greater pruning is approved by the City and is necessary for the health and safety of the tree.
5. If illegal tree topping has occurred, the property owner must have a certified arborist develop and implement a five-year pruning schedule in addition to monetary fines and required tree replacement.
6. Unless greater pruning is approved by the City and is necessary for the health and safety of the tree, excessive pruning is prohibited and is a violation of this Code.
7. An irrigation method approved by the City must be provided to all newly planted protected trees through an establishment period.
C. Shrub Pruning. Shrubs used for screening purposes must have a predetermined minimum desired height shown on the landscape plan. The shrubbery must be required to fill in and create an adequate screen to reduce headlight glare to surrounding properties. Once the desired height is reached, they may not be pruned below that height, except every five years based on the recommendation of a qualified landscape professional for the plant’s health and to retain the form of the plant. Shearing is allowed for hedges, but specimen plants are to be selectively pruned according to their plant type, not sheared. Visual access to meet CPTED standards must be incorporated where necessary as shown on the landscape plan.
D. Chemical Applications.
1. Use of chemical applications must be kept at the minimum level required by the chemical label. Permitted applications of pesticides must be applied by licensed applicators only. All use of fertilizers, pesticides, and herbicides must comply with best management practices. Pest and disease control using chemical products and methods must also be approved by the City Parks Department.
2. Applications of all pesticides, herbicides, and fertilizers must be made in a manner that will inhibit their entry into waterways, wetlands, and storm drains. Fertilization, if approved, must comply with the manufacturer’s specifications. Integrated pest management (IPM) strategies must be incorporated into landscape design and maintenance whenever possible.
3. All fertilizer, pesticide, and herbicide applications to turf or trees and shrubs must follow Washington State University Extension Office, National Arborist Association or other accepted agronomic or horticultural guidelines as well as the product guidelines.
4. Fertilizer, pesticide, and herbicide applications must be done only when necessary for the essential health of the landscape, with herbicides classified as safe for aquatic environments and must be made in a manner that will prevent their entry into waterways and wetlands and minimize their entry into storm drains.
E. Safety. All landscaping features, plants, trees, and objects must be maintained so that public health and safety is protected. Conditions which present a risk to public health and safety, resulting from landscaping features, including tree roots and limbs, are the responsibility of the property owner to correct. These conditions include, but are not limited to, tree roots causing disruptions to community spaces and amenity areas, and must be addressed immediately at the property owner’s expense. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The City will require maintenance and performance bonds to guarantee the completion, proper establishment and upkeep of landscaping as detailed in the approved landscape plan. For developments in, adjacent to, or affecting critical areas as defined in Chapter 18.802 IMC, additional bonding requirements may apply. The property owner is responsible for ensuring the landscaping is maintained in an appropriate manner, regardless of any second-party landscape maintenance agreements.
B. Performance. All landscaping and necessary irrigation systems must be installed per the approved plan in a safe, healthy, and attractive manner. To ensure this occurs for projects that are subject to Level 3 or 4 approval, the applicant must provide a performance guarantee equal to 150 percent of the total costs of the improvements permitted prior to permit issuance. Following installation, the applicant must provide a surety in the amount of 50 percent of the value of the plant material and irrigation installed for a period of three years.
C. If any portion of the approved landscaping dies or is not maintained in a healthy manner within the first three years of planting per annual inspections, the City will issue a correction letter requiring replacement. If corrective actions are not taken within 60 days, the City will use whatever portion of the bond is needed to replace the landscaping. The City will use either City employees or private contractors to replace the landscaping and will assess the property owner all actual costs against the deposit if it is sufficient. An additional three-year cash deposit at 150 percent of the value of the landscaping will be required if a significant amount of the plants needs to be replaced.
D. Before bond funds are returned to the applicant, the landscape area must be inspected by the City. The inspection is subject to applicable inspection fees. (Ord. 3088 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. The intent of the following standards is to incorporate unique plantings to establish a special feeling of place in and on public properties and rights-of-way, while ensuring safe access and clear sightlines. Plantings may include annuals and colorful plantings, plantings in pots, beds, raised planters, edible plants or kitchen gardens, and other measures.
B. The City shall have an preferred tree list from which developers may select trees. Any trees selected for use on public property that are not on the list require approval by the City. This list is subject to periodic updating by the City and is available at the permit center.
C. The City has an approved set of specifications from which developers may select grass seed combinations (including sod) for use on public property. Any seed combination not on the list requires approval by the City. Alternative cross-sections of the planting strip on City right-of-way for the use of trees, shrubs, and drought-tolerant materials to replace sod requires approval by the Director.
D. The City is responsible for the maintenance of all developed landscape areas owned by the City, except for right-of-way, unless otherwise agreed upon by the City.
E. Maintenance of landscape areas (including irrigation systems, ornamental plantings, and other landscape elements) on City right-of-way is the responsibility of the abutting property owner, unless the City has accepted maintenance responsibility for that right-of-way. Any tree removal requires City approval (see IMC 18.812.050, Tree removal).
F. Permission by the City is required before any plant may be planted or removed from City property or public right-of-way.
G. Plant location and spacing on City right-of-way must meet all sight obstruction requirements (see Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards). Plantings on City right-of-way must not obstruct the visibility or accessibility of any fire hydrant or traffic control device. The trees may be spaced at irregular intervals to accommodate sight distance requirements for driveways, intersections, or traffic control devices.
H. Street trees must have a minimum overhead clearance of seven feet over pedestrian pathways and 14 feet over streets at maturity. Street trees must be centered a minimum of three feet from curbs and multimodal facilities and two feet from sidewalks or as otherwise approved by the City.
I. Street trees planted in tree wells in sidewalks must have a minimum of two and one-half feet of pedestrian clearance around the tree unless otherwise approved by the City (see Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards). Tree grates may be required to meet ADA accessibility requirements.
J. Street trees must be planted in a planting strip with a minimum of five feet between the sidewalk and the back of the curb. Permanent or temporary irrigation is required for a minimum of three years. Tree grates, when used, must be designed so that sections of grate can be removed incrementally as the tree matures and be designed to avoid accumulation of trash.
K. Where a setback between transportation facilities and buildings is necessary, such as in building entries, office uses, and residential uses, landscaping must be used in combination with benches, low walls, and other built elements to establish a boundary between public and semi-private areas. The landscape and built elements may create layers, differing textures, and semi-transparency to define semi-private areas while maintaining a pedestrian-friendly environment. See IMC 18.602.050, Building massing and articulation design.
L. All pedestrian facilities must be buffered with trees and shrubs, appropriate in size, scale, planter type, and character to the type of facility or subarea. Landscape adjacent to parking must be hardy and easily traversable such as with pavers to guide pedestrians. Unless otherwise permitted, the width of the planting strip must be a minimum of five feet between the sidewalk and the back of the curb.
M. Trees planted under overhead utility wires must be of a small variety (as specified by the approved tree list) which will not grow up to interfere with the wires.
N. Street trees are required for all project applications required to provide frontage improvements in the rights-of-way, unless the Director approves a deviation in accordance with IMC 18.606.190. Street trees must be a minimum of two-inch caliper for deciduous trees and seven feet tall for conifers at the time of planting. Street trees must be limbed up a minimum of five feet when planted, following the standards provided in ANSI Z133-2017. The minimum tree pit size in a tree well must be 16 square feet and the minimum tree pit must be three times the size of the rootball. (Ord. 3088 § 5 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Violations. Except as otherwise provided, violations of any portion of this chapter are subject to the applicable code enforcement and penalty provisions set out in Chapters 18.108, Enforcement, and 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation.
B. Site Stabilization. Any site that is cleared or has vegetation removed must be protected or revegetated consistent with Chapter 16.26 IMC, Clearing, Grading, and Stormwater Management. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Deviations may be requested for the following list of standards in this chapter. Deviations must be requested according to the appropriate permit process in IMC 18.204.020, Review levels. Any proposal to deviate that does not satisfy the following conditions must apply for a variance in accordance with Chapter 18.210 IMC, Variances.
1. Irrigation Water Budgeting Requirements. An applicant may request a deviation from the standards in IMC 18.606.140 if all of the criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and the following criterion is met:
a. The applicant demonstrates that a deviation results in equal to or lesser water usage as compliance with the standards.
2. Public Properties and Rights-of-Way. An applicant may request a deviation from street tree requirements in IMC 18.606.170 if all of the criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and the following criterion is met:
a. The applicant demonstrates that the deviation addresses a public safety risk. (Ord. 3017 § 3 (Exh. D), 2023).
A. Implementation of the Green Necklace. This chapter helps implement the Green Necklace, a vision presented in the City’s park strategic plan that ensures Issaquah community members have access to natural areas and recreation opportunities. This chapter applies only to privately developed amenities Citywide, not to public parks, trails, or other recreational facilities built by the City of Issaquah.
1. The vision for the Green Necklace is that the urban environment will be saturated with an array of green elements including community and neighborhood parks, riparian corridors, tree lined streets, active and passive plazas, and other shared urban spaces all connected by on- and off-road trails. Open space amenities and nature will be unified through the coordinated placement of parks, trails, and plazas near areas and connected public spaces. Inviting green spaces and social gathering spaces are the jewels of the necklace, and a network of connected trails are the strands of the necklace.
2. Some elements of the Green Necklace vision will be built and maintained by the City, while other elements will be built by developers, and in some cases maintained by private property owners.
3. Shared Use Routes. The urban environment also contributes to the Green Necklace through amenities such as tree lined streets, active and passive plazas, and urban and nature trails. The features of the Green Necklace are connected by shared use routes and nonmotorized trails in accordance with IMC 18.608.050.
4. Community Spaces. Natural features are used as key design elements to create a unique sense of place and enhance the value and function of the natural environment. A community space, often in the form of a plaza, is constructed by a private developer but is intended for use by the general public. These spaces are required for some nonresidential and mixed-use developments. See IMC 18.608.070.
5. Building Orientation. When a development orients its entries and active areas to face Green Necklace parks or provides a connection to a current or mapped trail connection to a park, the development’s design contributes to the vitality and safety of the Green Necklace. Orienting buildings and establishing trail connections to the Green Necklace invites social opportunities and connects people with on-site or adjacent amenities, making the Green Necklace successful. See IMC 18.608.080, Development orientation to parks, and 18.608.050. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. This chapter contains the standards and requirements to animate and connect the natural fabric of the City. They also ensure that individual projects provide amenities for their residents, employees, and visitors. The intent of these standards includes the following:
1. Building design, community spaces, and outdoor amenity spaces are connected to each other, consistently high quality, and well-maintained;
2. Site and design are inviting, encourage social interaction, and make a positive contribution to the public realm, if open to the public;
3. Site planning and design make a positive contribution to ecosystem health;
4. Livability, public life, and community health are promoted and improved through the creation of an “outdoor room”;
5. People who bike and walk are welcome and comfortable;
6. Green Necklace amenities are located within each neighborhood with the goal to provide spaces within walking distance of most residences;
7. Design, use, lighting, and other amenities make safe, comfortable places;
8. Site planning and design make a positive contribution to the public realm;
9. Each community space is multifunctional;
10. There is visual and recreational variety and interest;
11. Stormwater management and critical areas protection are beautifully integrated into urban design;
12. Connections are made to parks, plazas, and shared use routes throughout Central Issaquah and the broader community;
13. Most multifamily residential and nonresidential uses have an outdoor area either integrated into their site or within walking distance; and
14. Consistent with the character of the neighborhood, the whole composition of the community space, including streets, trees, lighting, street furniture, walkways, landscape areas, building massing and detailing defines a place for employees, residents and/or visitors to stroll, meet, play, and socialize.
B. Variety. This Code intends to achieve a variety of community spaces in the public realm that are memorable and inviting. These spaces must be designed to be multifunctional and accommodate flexible programing and activities.
C. Appropriateness. This section intends to achieve community spaces and outdoor amenity spaces that have appropriate size and functions to their locations. These spaces are intended to foster community character and not feel empty, barren, or too big when not in use.
D. Connection With Nature. Community and Outdoor Amenity Spaces provide places where people can be outdoors and experience natural elements. These spaces are intended to be well-designed with experiential elements, such as art, and/or a range of active and passive uses. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Unless exempt by IMC 18.608.030, this chapter applies Citywide to development, redevelopment, and subdivisions.
B. While the standards apply to all sites in the City, the level of action required by this chapter may depend on development use, location, and proximity to mapped Green Necklace elements throughout the City. See Table 18.608.020(B) for thresholds for community and amenity space requirements.
Table 18.608.020(B). Thresholds for Community and Amenity Space Requirements
Land Use | Location | Required Amenity Type | Development Standards |
|---|---|---|---|
Any use | Adjacent to a Green Necklace Park | Development Orientation | Map 18.608.050(B) IMC 18.608.050(C)(1) IMC 18.608.080, Development orientation to parks |
Any use | Adjacent to a Green Necklace Trail | Development Orientation Shared Use Route | Map 18.608.050(B) IMC 18.608.050(C)(2) |
Any use | Adjacent to a City-Owned Trail | Trail Connection | See Map 18.608.050(B) IMC 18.608.050(C)(3) |
Residential uses 5+ units | Citywide | Natural Amenity Space | IMC 18.608.060, Residential uses |
Assisted living or senior housing, 5+ units | Citywide | Natural Amenity Space Indoor Amenity Space | IMC 18.608.060, Residential uses |
Residential uses 22+ units | Central Issaquah | Indoor Amenity Space Additional Indoor Amenity | IMC 18.608.060, Residential uses |
Nonresidential or mixed-use | Issaquah Highlands Talus Central Issaquah | Community Space | IMC 18.608.070, Nonresidential and mixed-use developments |
(Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
This chapter does not apply to residential development, redevelopment, or subdivision of four or fewer units. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. This section contains general requirements for all types of outdoor amenity space, including public community space and private outdoor amenity space.
B. Minimum Size. Each community space or common outdoor amenity space must be provided in a contiguous area no smaller than 200 square feet.
C. Landscaping. A minimum of 30 percent of the outdoor community space or outdoor amenity space must be landscaped with plant materials. At least 50 percent can be hardscape materials which are barrier-free, such as pavers, textured concrete, and brick.
D. Seating. Seating must be provided. Seating options include fixed, movable, or a combination of both. Seating must be dispersed throughout the community space or outdoor amenity space. The following additional requirements apply:
1. At least one bench or seating unit for each 100 square feet of amenity space must be provided.
2. Seating surfaces must be a minimum of 18 inches in depth.
3. For purposes of determining the number of seats provided on a bench, ledge, or fountain, 18 lineal inches on a horizontal surface is considered one seat.
4. At least half the seating must have seat backs.
5. Moveable chairs not associated with and reserved for an adjacent business may count toward the overall seating requirement.
6. Compliance with accessibility requirements of IMC Title 16 including ICC A117.1, or as amended, is required.
E. Wayfinding. Clear and intuitive wayfinding must be used to communicate how to access the Green Necklace and adjacent parks and natural areas.
1. Intent. The intent of this section is to increase accessibility and awareness of Issaquah’s Green Necklace, and promote greater connectivity within the City, particularly for pedestrians and cyclists.
2. Applicability. This section applies to all new and redeveloped commercial, multi-family residential, and public developments adjacent to the Green Necklace Amenities, as outlined in Figure 18.608.050(B).
3. Exemption. Single-family lots are exempt from this section.
4. Signage must direct the viewer from the property line to nearby amenities.
5. All signs must not obstruct the right-of-way, pathways, or trails.
6. The wayfinding signs must be made from durable materials that are easy to maintain.
7. Universal icons designating amenity accessibility and mobility are encouraged.
Figure 18.608.040(E)(7). Examples of Universal Icons

8. Dimensions. The sign face must be on a post at least 34 inches tall. The primary text must be at least two inches in height.
Figure 18.608.040(E)(8). An Example of a Sign Meeting the Criteria

F. Connect With Nature Standards. Issaquah Creek and Tibbetts Creek are focal spots that provide a natural green edge within the Central Issaquah area. Critical areas and their buffers also can provide the opportunity for connecting with nature while preserving the value and function of the critical area. Lake Sammamish State Park, Tibbetts Valley Park, and Confluence Park provide a green edge just outside Central Issaquah. The following standards apply to amenity areas adjacent to these natural areas:
1. The community or outdoor amenity areas must provide access to existing recreational hiking trails as well as facilitate passive uses, enjoyment of nature, picnicking, or informal play.
2. Amenity spaces must have clear links to transportation infrastructure that promotes pedestrian mobility, bicycle usage, connectivity to mass transit and complete streets to ensure the vision of connected, pedestrian-friendly neighborhoods that connect to nature.
G. Additional Development Standards. In addition to the general development standards required here, the amenity types in the table below have specific requirements applicable to all uses. Where development standards for a specific amenity type conflict with the general amenity area standards, the standards for the specific amenity apply.
Table 18.608.040(E). Specific Amenity Type Development Standards
Amenity Type | Development Standards |
|---|---|
Animal Off-Leash Area | IMC 18.608.130 |
Community Garden/P-Patch | IMC 18.608.120 |
Playscapes | IMC 18.608.110 |
Plazas | IMC 18.608.090 |
Rooftop Amenities | IMC 18.608.100 |
(Ord. 3107 § 1 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. This section establishes additional development requirements for sites located adjacent to Green Necklace amenities.
B. The Green Necklace Amenities Map, Figure 18.608.050(B), is a representation of City-owned parks, open spaces, and trails that form the Green Necklace.
1. This map may be updated as the City purchases additional park and open space or identifies new trail locations.
Figure 18.608.050(B). Green Necklace Amenity Map

C. Development Requirements. A site that meets the description for more than one of the following locations must meet the development requirements for each of the applicable locations:
1. Any site sharing a property boundary with a City-owned park or open space area, including those labeled City Park or Open Space on Figure 18.608.050(B) or that are acquired by the City in the future for a park or open space that are zoned Community Facilities – Parks (CF-P) or Community Facilities – Open Space (CF-OS), must orient the development to the park or open space. Development orientation includes designing buildings to face the park, including active elements, entries, missing trail connections, or other design features that encourage easy access and use of the park or open space. See IMC 18.608.080, Development orientation to parks development standards.
2. Any site abutting a City-owned mapped trail connection, including Green Necklace trail connections labeled Type 1, Type 2, Type 3, pedestrian/bike, and major connections, as shown on Figure 18.608.050(B), must meet the following requirements:
a. The developer must construct the portion of the mapped Green Necklace trail connection located adjacent to or running through the development site.
b. The trail connection must be constructed to meet the shared use route standards in Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
3. Any site abutting a mapped future trail connection, as shown on Figure 18.608.050(B):
a. Alignment. Future trail connections shown on the map represent connections between blocks. Specific alignments for the connections will be developed during the site plan land use permit process for applicable sites.
b. Installations. As property is developed or redeveloped, corresponding portions of the future trail connection adjacent to the property must be developed and a public access easement dedicated or conveyed to the City as a condition of the project development. The easement must be recorded prior to occupancy of the adjacent building.
c. The future trail connection must be constructed solely on the property being developed.
4. Any site abutting a City-owned trail, including those shown on Figure 18.608.050(B):
a. Site Abutting City-Owned Trails. The development must provide a trail connecting the development site to the park.
(1) The trail must be constructed to meet the trail standards in Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
(2) For residential uses, the trail is not required to be open to the public, but it must be easily accessible for all residents.
(3) For commercial and mixed-use developments, the trail must be made open to the public. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of this section is to ensure high quality design, safety, and functionality of privately owned and maintained amenity spaces for residential developments, including, but not limited to, apartments, townhomes, multi-unit single-family residential subdivisions and developments, assisted living facilities, and senior housing. Specifically:
1. To provide access to larger common outdoor amenity space for the residents of multifamily developments;
2. To ensure single-family residential subdivisions and developments provide set aside amenity space for the common use and enjoyment of the residents; and
3. To require amenity spaces both indoors and outdoors for the use and enjoyment of residents who choose to avoid driving or are restricted to their immediate vicinity, such as in multifamily housing, senior housing, or assisted living facilities.
B. Required Amenity Spaces for Residential Uses.
Table 18.608.060(B). Required Amenity Spaces for Residential Uses
Land Use | Minimum Common Outdoor Amenity Space | Additional Common Amenity Area Required (sf) | Additional Requirements | Private Outdoor Amenity Space per Unit (sf) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
Residential, 5+ Units | 100 sf per unit | IMC 18.608.060(B)(1) | 48 | |
Residential, 22+ Units in Central Issaquah | 100 sf per unit | 400 (Indoor or Outdoor) | IMC 18.608.060(B)(1) IMC 18.608.060(B)(2) | 48 |
Assisted Living or Senior Housing, 5+ Units | 100 sf per unit | 48 per Unit (Indoor) | IMC 18.608.060(B)(3) | NA |
Talus/Highlands (All Residential Units) | 250 sf per unit | NA | 48 | |
Cottage Housing 5+ Units | At least 20 percent of the lot must be common open space | 60 | ||
Courtyard Housing 5+ Units | At least 20 percent of the lot must be common open space |
1. Required Outdoor Amenity Space Elements. The minimum outdoor amenity space stated in Table 18.608.060(B) must be provided as follows:
a. Private outdoor amenity space must include private outdoor balconies, rooftops amenities, ground level patios, or decks attached to individual units. Minimum length and width of each private outdoor space must be eight by six feet.
b. Common outdoor amenity space may include one or several outdoor communal balconies, rooftop amenities, ground level patios, decks, animal off-leash areas, or gardens. All space must be easily accessible to residents of all units and not be attached to any individual unit. Loading docks, employee entrances, and other similar activity areas must be designed not to interfere with incompatible on-site uses. For example, children’s play areas shall not overflow into parking lots or pedestrian pathways.
For cluster developments, see also IMC 18.500.070, Cluster housing standards.
2. Additional Common Amenity Space. In addition to the minimum required outdoor amenity space in Table 18.608.020(B), each residential project in the Central Issaquah subarea with 22 or more units must provide at least one additional common on-site amenity. The common amenity space must be a minimum of 400 square feet and can be either indoor or outdoor. Examples include, but are not limited to, a recreation room furnished with recreational equipment, a community garden/P-patch, animal off-leash area, swimming pool, or other recreational amenities such as playscapes. The facility selected must be appropriate for the target housing market segment, as demonstrated by the applicant with the land use permit submittal.
3. Assisted Living Facilities and Senior Housing Facilities. Every assisted living facility and senior housing facility with five or more units must provide private indoor amenity area and outdoor amenity space for individual units as stated in Table 18.608.060(B).
a. Required outdoor amenity area can be provided either as private space for use by individual units or as common space shared by all units. Seating space is required for a minimum of 30 percent of the total number of units provided, assuming two persons per unit (for example, six units would provide seating/table space for two units or four persons).
b. Required indoor amenity area must be provided in a contiguous area no smaller than 200 square feet and include:
(1) Seating and table space for a minimum of 30 percent of the total number of units provided, assuming two persons per unit (for example, six units would provide seating and table space for two units or four persons);
(2) Kitchen facilities, including at minimum a sink, cabinet and counter space.
4. Cottage Housing. Every cottage housing development must provide at least one outdoor common open space for the development complying with Table 18.608.060(B) and meet the following:
a. The open space must be a focal point of a cottage development with units surrounding the shared outdoor area on at least two sides.
b. The open space must be a contiguous area no less than 15 feet wide and 20 feet deep.
c. The open space must abut at least 50 percent of the cottages in a cottage housing development.
d. The open space must have pedestrian connections circumnavigating the space and connecting through the space. Each cottage unit must have direct access to the open space.
e. The following do not contribute to meeting the required common outdoor amenity space requirement:
(1) Required setbacks;
(2) Landscaped pathways along site access points;
(3) Access pathways to garages or driveways;
(4) Parking areas; and
(5) Critical areas and associated buffers.
f. A community building is an optional component, and a cottage housing development may not contain more than one community building. When proposed, a community building must meet the following development standards:
(1) A community building may not exceed 2,400 square feet of net floor area.
(2) The architectural design of the community building must be compatible in color and materials to cottage units.
(3) The maximum height of a community building must be one and one-half stories in height.
(4) Community buildings shall be designed as flexible, multi-purpose spaces.
(5) The community building must be owned and maintained through a shared maintenance agreement with each cottage unit owner.
(6) A community building is exempt from minimum off-street parking requirements.
5. Courtyard Housing. Every courtyard housing development must provide a central courtyard for the development complying with Table 18.608.060(B) and must provide the following:
a. The courtyard must be the central focal point of a courtyard housing development with units surrounding at least one shared outdoor area.
b. Shared outdoor areas must be surrounded by at least two building elevations.
c. The following do not contribute to meeting the required as outdoor common space:
(1) Required setbacks; and
(2) Parking areas.
d. A courtyard shall be a contiguous area no less than 20 feet wide and 20 feet deep.
e. Each courtyard must provide paved pedestrian access around the courtyard and to each residential building at least five feet wide.
f. Each unit shall have direct access to the courtyard through either private entrances or shared entryways.
g. Courtyards are not required to be fully landscaped. A private plaza can be proposed if standards of IMC 18.608.090 are met. A minimum of 30 percent of the courtyard must be landscaped.
h. For courtyard housing projects proposing 20 units or more, the required courtyard space may be broken up into multiple courtyards; provided, that the minimum courtyard area requirement is met.
(1) There shall be at least one primary courtyard no less than 20 feet wide and 20 feet deep.
(2) Secondary courtyards may have reduced dimensions of no less than 10 feet wide and 10 feet deep. Multiple secondary courtyards are permitted.
(3) Private outdoor amenity spaces are optional. If provided, the minimum length and width of each private outdoor amenity space must be eight by six feet.
(A) Private outdoor amenity spaces do not contribute to the minimum courtyard area requirement.
(4) Community buildings are an optional component. If proposed, community buildings must meet the following development standards:
(A) The architectural design of the community building shall be compatible in color and materials to courtyard development.
(B) The maximum height of a community building shall be one and one-half stories in height.
(C) Community buildings must be owned and maintained through a shared maintenance agreement with each courtyard unit owner.
(D) Community buildings shall be designed as flexible, multi-purpose spaces.
(5) Indoor amenities are an optional component. If proposed, each indoor amenity may reduce the total amount of courtyard area required by 100 square feet. No courtyard area will be reduced to provide less than 400 square feet of common outdoor space. (Ord. 3091 § 12 (Exh. K), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. This section intends to create publicly accessible community space that is comfortable, secure, and inviting for a variety of activities during all hours and seasons.
B. Community Space Requirement.
1. Community space for tenants, customers, and visitors must be provided with every nonresidential and mixed-use development in Issaquah Highlands and Talus neighborhoods, and in Central Issaquah when the development is adjacent to a pedestrian priority, core street, neighborhood street, or local street, as defined in Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
2. Publicly accessible community space for a building containing an industrial or intensive commercial use as listed in Chapter 18.402 IMC, Permitted Uses, is required.
3. Indoor community space is required in enclosed shopping centers. Inside common areas must be 15 percent of the total retail area. The internal corridor of the enclosed center counts toward meeting the requirement for common area if seating, plantings, and other amenities are provided.
4. Any mixed-use development must also meet the applicable residential uses requirements at IMC 18.608.060.
C. Types of Community Spaces. Community spaces must serve tenants, customers, and visitors. In most cases, a plaza is the most appropriate type of community space, but in some circumstances other types of community space, such as an animal off-leash area, rooftop amenities, or community garden/P-patch, may be appropriate. All community spaces must be designed as an integral part of the location and scale of adjacent streets, buildings, and uses.
D. Minimum Size Required. A community space must be an appropriate size to meet the needs of the development and its users.
1. A community space no less than 20 feet wide and 20 feet deep is required for each building.
2. At a minimum, a community space must provide 25 square feet per 1,000 square feet of new nonresidential construction, excluding new public school facilities. It may be broken into multiple spaces; however, no plaza which counts toward the community space requirement may be smaller than 2,000 square feet.
E. Development Standards for Community Spaces. The following requirements apply to all community spaces. See also additional development standards for specific types, including plazas, playscapes, community gardens/P-patches, and animal off-leash areas.
1. Every community space must be owned and maintained by the property owner and be accessible to the public.
F. Location and Orientation.
1. A community space must be located at or close to ground level and be visible from a public or private street;
2. An outdoor, ground level community space must be framed by placing a building on at least one side, preferably more. Where they cannot be framed by buildings, for instance because they occupy an entire block, they must be framed by architectural elements at least eight feet in height along at least one side to create an appropriate sense of enclosure and substitute for the building; and
3. A community space must not be located adjacent to surface parking lots;
4. Location and design must consider solar orientation and creating balanced opportunities for both sun and shade. Suitable shade opportunities to balance solar access can be provided by deciduous trees, offering sun in winter, buildings that do not shade the community space all day, freestanding structures such as pergolas, or architectural elements attached to buildings such as weather protection;
5. A community space must be visible from adjacent housing units or occupied spaces to ensure safety;
6. A community space must provide opportunities for people to connect with nature, including preserving views of important local natural features, as described in Chapter 18.600 IMC, Urban Design and Site Planning;
7. If present, adjacent nonmotorized transportation facilities must be integrated with the community space;
8. No more than two edges of the community space shall be shared with vehicular transportation facilities.
G. Required Design Elements. In addition to general amenity area standards found at IMC 18.608.040, the following are required:
1. Pedestrian-scaled lighting fixtures no taller than 15 feet;
2. Animal-proof waste containers;
3. Water and electrical outlets must be provided to facilitate use for a variety of events and users;
4. Some portion of the community space must be usable year-round. Examples of usable year-round space include:
a. A pergola, gazebo, pavilion, and/or provided indoor space; and
b. Generally continuous weather protection along an adjacent retail street for no less than 75 percent the length of the frontage;
Figure 18.608.070. A Plaza With Weather Protection, Art, and Inviting Seating Options

5. Clear, direct pedestrian routes are required, at least five to eight feet wide, depending on the level of pedestrian activity, the destinations, and scale of the community space;
6. An element with sustainability attributes, such as a rain garden, green roof and wall, commercial grade solar powered lights or equipment, or pervious paving; and
7. An artistic design element, such as decorative paving patterns, ornamental art features, or creative lighting elements. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. This section guides the development of sites adjacent to parks established in IMC 18.608.050. The intent of this section is to guide design and orientation of development that frames and enhances the park itself and reinforces visual and physical access between the park and the development.
B. Development Standards.
1. Building Orientation. New development must have at least one façade that is oriented to face the adjacent park space. The space between the façade and the park space must prioritize the park as a focal point by meeting the following standards:
a. Any required outdoor amenity area or community space must be located between the building and the park;
b. No surface parking lot, outdoor storage or trash area, heavy machinery, or loading area is allowed to be located between the façade and the park;
2. Building Frontage. New development must provide visual and physical connections between buildings and adjacent park space by including the following:
a. Ground level shared and private doorways and entrances that face and are visible from adjacent park space.
b. Windows that face adjacent park space.
c. Frontage elements like stoops, porches, or balconies that face adjacent park space. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The intent of the plaza standards is to create inviting spaces, also known as outdoor rooms, for social interaction or solitary experience.
1. Plazas are outdoor open gathering places with primarily hard surfaces, but that also contain landscaping.
2. Plazas may denote important places and create a focus, while increasing light and air at street level.
3. Plazas also function as points of orientation.
B. Materials, Furniture, and Lighting.
1. The plaza must be at the same level as the public sidewalk on at least one side.
2. Pedestrian-oriented frontage is required on at least two sides unless the space is linear in design, in which case pedestrian-oriented frontage is required on at least one side.
3. The design must maintain view lines and visibility from adjacent streets into and through the plaza. Physical obstructions between a plaza and a sidewalk or public park must be designed to provide sufficient visibility to protect the public safety of the users of the plaza and to ensure that public access to the plaza is convenient, obvious, and welcoming. Walls or structures shall not exceed 36 inches in height above the abutting sidewalk or public park for a total of more than 50 percent of the lineal footage along one side of a plaza that directly abuts a public street right-of-way or public park.
4. The plaza shall not have blank walls adjacent to or fronting the plaza. If a blank wall is present, it must use site appropriate measures including murals, green walls, and/or architectural treatment. See IMC 18.600.090, Fences, walls, and screening, for more standards related to wall materials and specifications.
5. The plaza must have an edge to define the space using low walls or landscaping.
6. Plazas must be designed with at least three types of pedestrian amenities including seating, lighting, water features, special paving, landscaping, artwork, and special recreational features.
7. At least 25 percent but not more than 40 percent of the open space must be landscaped with trees, groundcover, or other vegetation.
8. Plazas must be constructed with concrete, pavers, or special paving material. Asphalt shall not be used.
9. The plaza must provide adequate drainage.
10. Root barriers must be provided for all trees planted within plazas, consistent with Chapter 18.812 IMC, Tree Preservation.
11. Permanent and raised stages, amphitheaters, or other structures that limit flexibility are not allowed, unless a deviation is granted per IMC 18.608.150, Allowed deviations to this chapter.
12. All City approvals or permits for any structure, or temporary or accessory use must be reviewed for compatibility with pedestrian routes, existing uses in the plaza, accessibility, and sightlines as part of its review.
Figure 18.608.090(B)(13). Inappropriate Blank Wall Adjacent to a Plaza (Image: Crandall Arambula)

C. Plaza Seating Requirements.
1. General Seating Requirements for Community Spaces. IMC 18.608.040(D) is required. Additionally, reserved seating for a restaurant, café, or other adjacent use is allowed, but access and use of the plaza by the general public must be preserved. No more than 25 percent of the plaza area may be reserved for adjacent business use. The plaza area and business reserved seating do not count toward meeting the seating requirement.
D. Permanent structures are allowed within a plaza if they do not preclude access to the plaza by the general public. Enclosed or open-air structures are allowed to be leased for commercial use. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The rooftop amenities standards are intended to activate rooftop space by providing an amenity for active or passive recreational use.
B. Rooftop Amenities as Required Community Space.
1. A rooftop amenity may be used to provide some, but not all, of required community space; and
2. Providing a rooftop amenity does not replace the need for public street level community spaces that serve the greater community.
C. Allowable rooftop amenities may include the following:
1. Sports fields or facilities;
2. Residential uses: communal space, pet amenity areas, community gardens, view outlooks, and play areas;
3. Restaurants: outdoor eating and view outlooks; and
4. Offices or commercial uses: communal space and view outlooks.
D. Standards. Rooftop amenity design must meet the following:
1. Landscaping is required, consistent with IMC 18.608.040(C);
2. Seating is required, consistent with IMC 18.608.040(D);
3. Rooftop amenities may occupy the top deck of a building or be created using terracing or partial building setbacks;
4. A minimum depth of eight feet is required if the space results from large balconies, terracing, notching out, or setting back upper-level floors; and
5. Access to multiple tenants, not just individual units, is required, except in the case of townhouses where private rooftop amenities for individual units are allowed. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The playscape standards are intended to create safe and comfortable places for families and children to play and enjoy.
B. All play areas and structures must conform to the requirements noted in the current editions of Publication F1487 “Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specifications for Playground Equipment for Public Use,” published by the American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), and “The Handbook for Public Playground Safety,” published by the United States Consumer Product Safety Commission.
C. Children’s play areas and activities must be located away from streets with speed limits exceeding 35 miles per hour. Children’s play areas and activities located within a facility that is adjacent to a street must include measures necessary to protect children’s safety. Such measures must provide a physical barrier between the playscape and vehicular transportation facilities such as a minimum three-foot-tall fence or solid hedge.
D. Shade and rest areas for supervision must be provided using deciduous landscaping, architectural elements, temporary structures, or other means.
E. Along with structured play equipment, if any, natural, creative play elements for free and/or structured play must be provided. These elements do not have to be overtly for play but should support, allow, and even encourage play by children. For instance, ground slides from one level to another, tricycle tracks, swings hung from arbors, paths that meander and are of varying materials and widths, water that can be manipulated, outdoor rooms made from landscape or rocks, berms, and hills.
F. Play areas must be designed for a variety of ages, activities, and fine and gross motor skills.
G. Animal-proof trash receptacles must be provided. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The community garden/P-patch standards intend to incorporate gardening opportunities for growing flowers, herbs, fruit, and vegetables throughout the City. The standards also intend to create spaces that serve as green pockets of refuge and enjoyment for the public.
B. Location.
1. Community gardens shall be located to reduce wildlife access, such as locating it on a rooftop. If the community garden cannot be located to reduce wildlife access, the design must include an eight-foot decorative fence around entire perimeter.
2. Sites shall be selected with direct sun exposure for at least six hours a day of direct sunlight year-round.
C. Required Design Elements.
1. Sheds and storage for tools, wheelbarrows/wagons, and materials.
2. Access to water such as hose bibs and rain barrels.
3. Signs that include rules of use and P-patch etiquette, including restricting pesticide use, in accordance with Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs.
4. Electrical outlets.
5. Composting and trash facilities.
6. A vehicular access point to facilitate delivery of materials and loading/unloading. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Intent. The animal off-leash area standards intend to provide hygienic, pet-friendly places for pets to perform bodily functions and exercise.
B. Required Design Elements.
1. Appropriate areas for performing bodily functions, including pet waste pickup stations and disposal of bagged waste;
2. Access to potable water;
3. Fencing to prevent dogs leaving the area. If chain-link fencing is used, it must be vinyl coated. See IMC 18.600.090, Fences, walls, and screening;
4. Double gate entry points and a hard surface such as concrete or gravel provide between the gates; and
5. Posted rules for use of the area, in accordance with Chapter 18.612 IMC, Signs. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. All community and amenity space required by this chapter must be constructed and maintained by the property owner, with the exception of shared use routes that abut a street or are in the right-of-way, which must be constructed by the property owner then dedicated to the City for maintenance.
B. The responsibility for maintenance must be transferred to each successive owner in perpetuity.
C. Maintenance activities include applicable activities listed for landscape maintenance at IMC 18.606.150 in addition to:
1. Maintaining lighting fixtures in working order;
2. Maintaining plumbing and electrical outlets in working order;
3. Replacing or fixing broken or missing tables, chairs, seating areas, or other features required by this section;
4. Maintaining the legibility and accuracy of wayfinding signage;
5. Painting over or removing graffiti; and
6. Maintaining plaza amenities, including removing snow and ice and providing adequate waste management. (Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. Deviations may be requested for the following list of standards in this chapter. Deviations must be requested according to the appropriate permit process in IMC 18.204.020. Any proposal to deviate that does not satisfy the following conditions must apply for a variance in accordance with Chapter 18.210 IMC, Variances.
1. Size of Community Space. The applicant may request a deviation from community space size requirements if all the criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and the following are met:
a. The applicant combines the required community space for multiple buildings into one larger community space.
2. Common and Private Outdoor Amenity Space for Residential Uses. The applicant may request deviations from providing private outdoor spaces for all units if all the criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and the following are met:
a. Additional common outdoor space is provided such that the total outdoor amenity space (combined common and private) is still meeting the overall square feet as under Table 18.608.060(B).
b. Applicant has provided private outdoor space for at least 50 percent of the units.
3. Private Outdoor Amenity Space for Conversions to Residential Uses. The applicant converting a commercial or mixed use to a multifamily residential use may request a deviation from providing private outdoor amenity space as long as 148 square feet of amenity space is provided for each unit through the common amenity space(s).
4. Permanent and Raised Stages, Amphitheaters, or Other Structures. The applicant may request a deviation from this restriction if all the criteria listed under IMC 18.202.080 and all the following are met:
a. The permanent structure does not encompass more than 30 percent of the space;
b. The remaining area of the plaza includes additional pedestrian amenities such as seating, lighting, art, etc.; and
c. Programming for the permanent structure will occur and be managed by an identified entity. (Ord. 3110 § 2 (Exh. A), 2025; Ord. 3017 § 4 (Exh. E), 2023).
A. The purpose of this chapter is to establish standards of design, placement, size, renovation, and proper maintenance of all exterior visible signs and sign structures within the City of Issaquah to:
1. Contribute to the economic vitality of the community;
2. Encourage signs that are both functional and attractive, and that clearly respond to the needs of the public in locating a residence or business establishment as well as general wayfinding;
3. Ensure that signage is compatible with the unique character and natural beauty of Issaquah and its neighborhoods;
4. Recognize the role signs have in creating a visually interesting and attractive place as well as contributing to good overall urban design, while avoiding visual distraction, clutter, chaos, obstructions, and an overly busy public environment;
5. Implement the goals and vision of the Mountains to Sound Greenway and Chapter 47.42 RCW (Scenic Vistas Act) by managing the type, location, and proliferation of signage that may be visible from I-90;
6. Provide signs that are pedestrian and bicycle oriented; and
7. In the Cultural and Business District zone (CBD), encourage signage that is compatible with historical and cultural Downtown Issaquah CBD. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. This chapter is applicable to all signs erected or maintained on properties or rights-of-way within the City of Issaquah, except for areas with active development agreements that have their own sign standards. On any property, except the right-of-way, signs may only be established as an accessory use to a principally permitted use. Signs may not be the principal use on any property.
B. This chapter is not intended to and may not be interpreted to restrict noncommercial speech based on its content, viewpoint, or message. This chapter shall not be construed to favor commercial speech over noncommercial speech in comparable circumstances. A commercial sign may contain a commercial or noncommercial message. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. The following signs are exempt from the standards outlined in this chapter but may be subject to regulation under Federal law, State law, or other chapters of the Issaquah Municipal Code:
1. Signs required by local, State, or Federal rule, regulation, or law;
2. Government signs, which are signs installed by the City, County, State, Sammamish Plateau Water and Sewer District, Eastside Fire and Rescue, Federal governmental agency, or other governmental agency for the purpose of protecting the public health, safety, and general welfare. This includes emergency or warning signs, traffic and directional signs, wayfinding or gateway signs erected and maintained by the City of Issaquah, public service information signs (defined as a sign that indicates danger and/or service and safety information), and any other sign placed for the protection of public health, safety, and welfare.
3. Art that does not contain text or logos is not considered to be a sign and is not subject to standards in this chapter except when the art contains a logo, slogan, advertising message, company name, registered trademark, features or designs consistent with the associated use, or contact information. Painted wall designs or patterns that do not represent a product, service, or registered trademark, and that do not meet the definition of a sign, are not considered signs.
4. Signs not visible by the public from any location designated or designed for public travel, use, or public gathering, even if on private property. Additionally, any sign that is located in a building and that is clearly intended to be visible primarily to people located in the building; however, commercial message signs within three feet of a window that are meant to be viewed from the right-of-way or an area open to the public are not exempt and are treated as window signage.
5. Any sign on a vehicle, except when such vehicle is prominently visible from the public right-of-way or other public realm and is parked in that location for the primary purpose of attracting public attention to the sign. See IMC 18.612.050, Prohibited signs.
6. Minor, Nonelectrified, and Unilluminated On-Site Signs.
a. Commercial Signs.
(1) Balloons less than 18 inches in diameter with messages;
(2) “Credit available” signs less than two square feet in size;
(3) Unit occupied signs less than one square foot;
(4) Posters in cases related to uses and activities on the property;
(5) Umbrellas with messages.
b. Residential nameplate signs less than two square feet in size.
c. Permanent Noncommercial Signs.
(1) Standard traffic and pedestrian signs, less than four square feet in size, allowed by the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), and directed by a traffic engineer to assist traffic and pedestrians on private property;
(2) Memorial signs, defined as a sign, tablet, or plaque memorializing a person, event, structure, or site, less than six square feet and limited to one per street frontage. Typical memorial signs contain names and dates related to the person, event, structure, or site, and are unrelated to any current tenant or use, except when the tenant or use meets the minimum landmark length of 40 years. See example of a memorial sign in Figure 18.612.030(A)(6)(c)(2).
Figure 18.612.030(A)(6)(c)(2). Memorial Sign Example

(Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. This section provides standards and specifications for measuring signs.
B. Sign Clearance. If the sign is above a street, the smallest vertical distance between the grade of the adjacent street or street curb and the lowest point of any sign; if the sign is above landscape or another surface, the smallest vertical distance between the grade below the sign and the lowest point of any sign. This includes framework and embellishments, extending over that grade. An example of sign clearance is in Figure 18.612.040(B).
Figure 18.612.040(B). Example of Sign Clearance

C. Sign Area. The sum of all display sign areas as determined by circumscribing the exterior limits of each display piece erected on one sign structure with a circle, triangle, or quadrangle connecting all extreme points. The sign structure supporting a sign, or the painted or architectural background of a sign, is not included in determining the sign area except when the sign structure or background is designed in a manner to visually amplify the sign itself or is specified to be included in the sign’s standards. Example of measuring sign area in Figure 18.612.040(C).
Figure 18.612.040(C). Example of Measuring Sign Area

D. Sign Face. Sign face equals sign area and indicates how many sides of a structure may have signs on it. The table for each sign design type specifies how many times a sign face may be used with that sign design type, typically between one and four, to create the total sign.
E. Sign Height.
1. For signs that are not attached to a building (such as monument, pole, or directional/informational signs), the vertical distance measured from the grade immediately around the sign to the highest point of the sign or its sign structure.
2. For a sign attached to a building, the vertical distance measured from the building grade immediately below the sign to the highest point of the sign or its sign structure. Two examples are shown in Figure 18.612.040(E)(2).
Figure 18.612.040(E)(2). Examples of How Vertical Distance Is Measured
![]() | ![]() |
F. Total Sign. The total sign is composed of the number of allowed sign faces, as demonstrated in Figure 18.612.040(F):
Figure 18.612.040(F). Example Total Sign

G. Sign Number. The number the City assigns to a temporary sign agreement.
H. Sign Structure. Any structure that supports or is designed to support any sign. A sign structure may be a single pole and may or may not be an integral part of the building. Examples of sign structure with arrows pointing to the sign structure are shown in Figure 18.612.040(H).
Figure 18.612.040(H). Examples of Sign Structure
![]() | ![]() |
(Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Except when provided for in this chapter, no person may erect, alter, maintain, or relocate any of the following signs or sign features in the City and such existing signs must be removed consistent with IMC 18.612.170(H), Removal of Signs. Violators may be subject to the penalty provisions in Chapter 8.45 IMC, Enforcement.
B. Abandoned signs. A sign that no longer identifies or advertises a bona fide business, lessor, service, owner, product, or activity, and/or for which no legal owner can be found. When a City inspector determines the maintenance, control, or safety of a sign is not being sustained, the sign is deemed abandoned and it must be removed.
C. Animated signs. Digital or moving signs except approved reader boards in community facilities zones, or as specifically allowed by this chapter.
D. Billboard signs. A “billboard sign” is defined as a large permanent sign designed or used for high-visibility display of sign copy which is typically not associated with the property upon which the sign is placed. Billboards typically have a wood or steel sign structure with one or two sign faces oriented to major traffic routes. Billboards are larger than permitted pole signs and may include catwalks.
E. Blinking signs or signs with flashing lights. Any illuminated sign or sign containing blinking, flashing, intermittent, or moving light or lights, except the time and temperature portion of a sign.
F. Cabinet signs. A “cabinet sign,” also referred to as a box or can sign, is defined as a sign contained completely within a box, frame, or similar enclosure. Cabinet signs are typically backlit with a plastic or plexiglass face. See example in Figure 18.612.050(F).
Figure 18.612.050(F). Example of Cabinet Sign

G. Feather signs. A feather sign is defined as a feather banner sign, or a feather flag made of fabric, plastic, or similar material. It is attached to a flexible or rigid pole on one side.
H. Flags larger than 60 square feet.
I. Fuel price signs that are movable. See IMC 18.612.090(I)(3)(e)(2) for definition of “fuel price sign.”
J. Highway advertising. No person may erect or maintain a sign in violation of the Highway Advertising Control Act or the Scenic Vistas Act, Chapter 47.42 RCW.
K. I-90 facing signs. A sign that is inconsistent with the restrictions of IMC 18.612.080(D)(1)(a) is not allowed.
L. Internally illuminated/backlit awning and canopy signs where light shines through the material.
M. Illuminated signs that allow beams and illumination to shine upon a street, highway, sidewalk, or that project a sign onto the street, highway, or sidewalk using such beam or illumination.
N. Large inflatable objects that are signs. A large inflatable object is defined as a large balloon or balloon-like object, greater than 18 inches in any dimension, that uses blown air or any gas to keep it inflated (except if approved as part of a special event permit).
O. Monument signs not in compliance with IMC 18.612.090(F), including the following:
1. Any monument sign exceeding 10 feet in sign height.
2. Monument signs in areas that do not meet the conditional criteria for that area.
P. Natural features and street furniture with signs. Signs, balloons, or devices affixed or painted on street furniture, trees, rocks, or other natural features, that do not have a permit as a permanent sign.
Q. Parked vehicles, trailers, or carts with signs. Signs along a public right-of-way that are attached, painted, or otherwise affixed to parked vehicles, trailers, or carts and are visible from a public right-of-way are prohibited except when the vehicle or trailer is any of the following:
1. An authorized government vehicle;
2. Being temporarily loaded or unloaded;
3. On private property where the business is located; and must be all of the following:
a. Within 100 feet of the space occupied by the business being promoted. See example in Figure 18.612.050(Q)(3)(a).
Figure 18.612.050(Q)(3)(a). Illustration of 100 Feet of Space for Promotion

b. Parked for a period not exceeding 24 consecutive hours;
c. Promoting a business with a valid City business license;
d. Parked consistent with marked parking stalls.
4. On private property where the vehicle is being operated as an outdoor vendor, consistent with IMC 18.612.060, Signs permitted in the right-of-way.
R. Primary use. No permanent sign may be located on a lot, parcel, or easement as the sole principal use of that lot, parcel, or easement.
S. Readerboard sign. Includes electronic readerboard signs, except:
1. Manual readerboards allowed with marquee signs;
2. Readerboards allowed as electronic community facility readerboards; or
3. Readerboards that are already in place and are legal nonconforming.
T. Readerboards, portable.
U. Reflective material in signage including highly reflective metallic finishes, sequin studded materials, or fluorescent colors.
V. Revolving signs or signs with movable parts except barber poles and numerical signs indicating parts of clocks or thermometers.
W. Roof signs, except as otherwise allowed in this chapter. A “roof sign” is defined as a sign erected or constructed wholly upon and over the roof of any building and supported solely on the roof structure. Signs standing out horizontally from a mansard roof are considered wall signs.
X. Strings of pennants, ribbons, streamers, spinners, mylar balloons, or other similar moving or fluttering devices, or moving or revolving devices of a carnival-like nature.
Y. Temporary signs attached to or posted on permanent signs.
Z. Traffic hazard or public nuisance signs, including the following:
1. Signs with advertising copy which imitate official traffic signs, or signals, or use such words as “stop,” “look,” “danger,” “caution,” “warnings,” or “go slow”;
2. Signs that may confuse motorists or detract from any legal traffic control device as determined by the Director; or
3. Signs on or within medians, roundabouts, traffic circles, the clear view sight distance triangle of intersections, and any sign placed in such a manner that it obscures the vision of a motorist as determined by the Director.
AA. Utility or public street features with signs. Signs, balloons, or devices affixed to or painted on the following locations within the public right-of-way or public property:
1. Utility poles;
2. Street sign poles;
3. Traffic signal equipment and poles;
4. Garbage receptacles;
5. Benches;
6. Bridges;
7. Railings and railing supports;
8. Boardwalks;
9. Fences;
10. Retaining walls;
11. Bus shelters and other types of street furniture.
BB. Any off-site sign. An “off-site sign” is defined as a sign relating, through its message and content, to a business activity, use, product, or service not available on the site on which the sign is erected, including any sign located on any property other than that property on which the business is located, except as specifically permitted in this chapter.
CC. Signs located on a railroad right-of-way or land that was previously a railroad right-of-way and is now used for public purposes, except for governmental signs.
DD. Commercial signs or messages attached to wireless communication facilities or construction cranes.
EE. Signs in or over a public right-of-way with the following exceptions:
1. Signs specifically permitted by IMC 18.612.060 to be in the right-of-way;
2. Signs that meet the requirements of Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards; and
3. Signs that are allowed by a special event or special use permit. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. The following Table 18.612.060(A) lists signs that are permitted in the right-of-way so long as such signs are consistent with the applicable sign design type standards.
Table 18.612.060(A). Signs Permitted in the Right-of-Way
Signs Permitted in the Right-of-Way | Applicable Sign Design Type Standards |
|---|---|
A-frames | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary commercial signs |
Awning or canopy | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Banners on poles | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary commercial signs IMC 18.612.130, Temporary noncommercial signs |
Business district kiosks | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Directional, informational, interpretative markers | IMC 18.612.070, Signs permitted without a permit |
Follow-through | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Front Street banner | IMC 18.612.140, Front Street temporary banner |
Garage sale | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary commercial signs |
Marquee | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Monument | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Neighborhood/district identification | IMC 18.612.060, Signs permitted in the right-of-way |
General right-of-way | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary noncommercial signs |
Outdoor vendor | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary commercial signs |
Pedestrian-oriented | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Projection | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
Real estate (directional arrows, open house) | IMC 18.612.110, Temporary commercial signs |
Wall | IMC 18.612.090, Permanent commercial signs |
(Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. General Requirements for Permanent Commercial Signs Allowed Without a Permit.
1. The signs identified in this section do not require a permit or temporary sign agreement when all conditions listed for the specific sign type are met, except if a home business is allowed a pedestrian-oriented sign. All pedestrian-oriented signs require a permit.
2. All permanent commercial signs allowed without a permit must be nonelectric and nonilluminated, except when specifically allowed below.
3. List of Permanent Commercial Sign Design Types Allowed Without a Permit.
a. Directional/informational signs and interpretive markers;
b. Drive-through selection signs;
c. Home business signs;
d. Directional/informational signs and interpretive markers examples in Figure 18.612.070(A)(3)(d).
Figure 18.612.070(A)(3)(d). Examples of Directional/Informational Signs and Interpretive Markers
Below Left, Structured Parking Informational Sign With Electrified Parking Information | Below Right, Interpretive Marker |
|---|---|
![]() | ![]() |
Below Left, Informational/Directional Sign in the Right-of-Way | Below Right, 10-Foot-Tall Informational/Directional Sign |
![]() | ![]() |
B. Directional/Informational Signs and Interpretive Markers Are Allowed as Specified in Table 18.612.070(B).
Table 18.612.070(B). Directional/Information Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All zones | On site | Additional | See below | 12 sq. ft. | 4 | 10 feet |
Right-of-way | 4 sq. ft. | 4 | 4 feet |
C. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Directional/Information Signs and Interpretive Markers.
1. Maximum Number of Total Signs. The maximum number of signs is determined by what is necessary to inform and direct the public and users as determined by the Director.
2. Location and Placement. See general sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J). Directional/informational signs and interpretive marker signs in the right-of-way must:
a. Only be used when placement in the right-of-way is necessary to serve the purpose of the sign; for example, a sign located at a parking entrance to identify it to drivers;
b. Be placed no more than 10 feet from the property, business, or service the sign is related to.
3. Structured parking is allowed one on-site electrified informational sign at each entry indicating the status of parking (status examples include open, full, and number of available stalls). Signs may provide the parking availability status of each level of a multistory garage. The changeable copy portion of the informational sign, indicating the status of the parking available, may be electronic and remotely changed. Signs may have one or two sign faces and may not exceed 12 square feet per face.
D. Drive-Through Selection Signs. A “drive-through selection sign” is a sign that displays the available selection for ordering at a drive-through business, such as a menu.
1. An example is in Figure 18.612.070(D)(1).
Figure 18.612.070(D)(1). Drive-Through Selection Sign Example

2. Drive-through selection signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.070(D)(2).
Table 18.612.070(D)(2). Drive-Through Selection Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Business with a drive-through | On site | Additional | 1 | 16 sq. ft. | 1 | 8 feet |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Drive-Through Selection Signs.
a. Maximum Number of Total Signs. In addition to the number shown in Table 18.612.070(D)(2), additional drive-through selection signs are allowed if they are not visible from the right-of-way. Drive-through selection signs that are not visible from the right-of-way are not limited to the maximum area per sign face standard in Table 18.612.070(D)(2).
b. Location and Placement. For sign location and placement information see IMC 18.612.080(J). An example is in Figure 18.612.070(E)(1).
c. Illumination. The face of the sign presenting the selection information may be illuminated either internally or externally; no other sides may be illuminated or electrified. See sign illumination information in IMC 18.612.180.
E. Home Business Signs.
1. An example of a home business sign is in Figure 18.612.070(E)(1).
Figure 18.612.070(E)(1). Examples of Home Business Sign Location and Placement

2. Home business signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.070(E)(2).
Table 18.612.070(E)(2). Home Business Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Residences where home businesses are allowed and present | On site | Other: wall, window | 1 – 2, see below | 2 sq. ft. | 1 | 12 feet |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Home Business Signs.
a. Sign Category. Home business signs are not primary, secondary, or additional signs.
b. Sign Design Types. Home business signs do not have a unique sign design type and may select a window or wall sign within the parameters provided in this subsection.
c. Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(1) All home businesses may have one window or wall sign.
(2) In addition, where there are ground-related residential units on streets designated for sidewalk use in Chapter 12.05 IMC, Sidewalk Use District, legal and permitted home businesses may choose to add a pedestrian-oriented sign as another sign. The applicant must obtain a permit for the pedestrian-oriented sign, which complies with the requirements of IMC 18.612.090(G), Projection and Pedestrian-Oriented Signs. The maximum area of the sign faces for a pedestrian-oriented sign with a home business occupation is specified in IMC 18.612.080(F).
d. Location and Placement. In cases where a home is not visible from the street, the sign may be placed on the owner’s property near the road, but not in the right-of-way. See general information in IMC 18.612.080(J). (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Permit.
1. Except when a permit is not required in accordance with IMC 18.612.070, applicants must obtain all other applicable permits associated with the proposed sign before constructing or installing the desired sign. Other applicable permits may include, but are not limited to, building permits, electrical permits, and right-of-way use permits, unless the sign is specifically exempted below. To demonstrate compliance with these and other applicable codes and laws, an applicant may be required to provide additional information and drawings.
2. Applicants may submit a sign package containing multiple signs associated with a business or project; however, they must pay more than one fee as described in subsection B of this section, Fee.
3. Process. In accordance with IMC 18.204.020, Review levels, sign permits are a Level 1 review.
4. Duration. Permits are valid for a period of one year from date of issuance by which time the subject sign must be fully installed in compliance with all required permits, such as a building permit. If the sign is not installed within one year, the applicant must submit a new application and fee, and obtain approval from the Director. A permit extension may be granted in accordance with IMC 18.206.040, Permit term, extension, and expiration.
B. Fee. A permit fee must be paid for all permanent sign permits in accordance with the City of Issaquah’s adopted fee schedule.
1. If an applicant submits a sign package, each unique sign submitted is charged a separate sign permit fee; however, multiple, identical signs are charged as if they are one sign.
2. All electric signs and illuminated signs require an additional permit which is to be procured directly from the State Electrical Inspector, in accordance with its established permit fee schedule.
C. Sign Category. Most permanent commercial signs are classified into one of three different sign categories:
1. Primary Sign. The primary advertising for a business, enterprise, or community facility;
2. Secondary Sign. A smaller sign that is not the primary sign of the business;
3. Additional Sign. In addition to primary and secondary signs, the purpose of additional signs is to (through the use of small, minor signage) assist pedestrians, bicyclists, and drivers to find a business and add visual interest and variety to the transportation facility and positively contribute to its character; if the sign is not classified into one of these three sign categories, that information is identified as part of the sign’s requirements. In some cases, other signs have unique designs; in other cases they rely on other sign design types. This is specified with each sign design type.
4. See each sign design type section below for further regulations on sign category regulations for each sign design type.
D. Sign Restrictions for Permanent Signs Adjacent to I-90.
1. Applicability of Restrictions. Restrictions apply to a building or business adjacent to I-90 except:
a. Where a street is located between I-90 and the property on which a building or business is established, such as SE 62nd Street;
b. Where the parallel building elevation to the freeway (including on-ramps and off-ramps) is determined by the Director to be the primary frontage for the building; or
c. Where a development consists of two or more buildings, this limitation applies only to the building(s) located closest to the I-90 right-of-way.
2. Restrictions. The following restrictions apply to all permanent primary and secondary sign design types:
a. Parallel Elevation of a Secondary Frontage. No building or business may be allowed signage on the building elevation that is parallel to the freeway (including on-ramps or off-ramps);
b. Perpendicular Elevation of a Secondary Frontage. A building or business is allowed a wall sign with letters limited to a maximum height of two feet and length of 15 feet. The total sign area shall not exceed 30 square feet;
3. The following definitions apply for purposes of this restriction only:
a. Parallel Elevation. An elevation at an angle of 45 degrees or less relative to I-90;
b. Perpendicular Elevation. An elevation at an angle greater than 45 degrees but less than 110 degrees relative to I-90;
c. Primary Frontage. The side of the building providing the main vehicle and/or pedestrian access, and/or the business’s primary orientation as determined by the Director;
d. Secondary Frontage. The side of the building other than the main vehicle and/or pedestrian access, as determined by the Director.
E. Sign Incentives.
1. Incentive No. 1 for Multisided and Multi-Entry Ground Level Businesses.
a. Incentive and Sign Placement.
(1) Businesses that meet all of the criteria in this subsection (E)(1) may have two building-mounted primary signs and up to two secondary signs as follows:
(A) If a business has three or more façades, for each façade that does not have a primary sign, one secondary sign is allowed per façade, up to a total of two secondary signs; or
(B) If the business has only two façades, the secondary sign may be placed on a façade with one of the primary signs.
(2) Each primary sign must be located on the façade where the pedestrian entry is located and is calculated as specified in Table 18.612.080(F), Primary Sign Maximum Sign Area.
b. To qualify for Incentive No. 1, a business must meet all of the following criteria:
(1) The business faces two or more streets or the public realm;
(2) The business has pedestrian-oriented entries on two different sides of the building, each of which faces a street or public realm; and
(3) Both pedestrian-oriented entries must be open during regular business hours and be designed to draw the pedestrian’s attention to each entry’s presence by, for example, changes in weather protection (higher or lower than adjacent weather protection), changes in building plane (building projecting or being set in), changes in building materials, or changes in building height (a tower). The pedestrian-oriented entries may open into the same foyer, or room if they are distinctly located on different sides of the building with the architectural treatment described above.
2. Incentive No. 2 for Multi-Entry Ground Level Businesses.
a. Incentive, Sign Placement, and Sign Size.
(1) Businesses which meet all the criteria in this subsection (E)(2) may have two building-mounted primary signs and up to two secondary signs as follows:
(A) If a business has two or more façades, for each façade that does not have a primary sign, one secondary sign is allowed per façade, up to a total of two secondary signs; or
(B) If the business has only one façade, one secondary sign may be placed on the façade with the two primary signs.
(2) Each sign shall be located near the pedestrian entry.
(3) The sum of the two primary sign sizes does not exceed the total primary sign size as specified in Table 18.612.080(F), Primary Sign Maximum Sign Area.
b. To qualify for Incentive No. 2, a business must meet all of the following criteria:
(1) The business’s portion of the façade is a minimum of 100 feet in length;
(2) The business’s entrances face a street or the public realm;
(3) The business has two pedestrian entries significantly separated from each other (a minimum of 50 percent of the business’s façade length);
(4) Both entries are open during regular business hours.
c. An applicant who qualifies may use both Incentive No. 1 and Incentive No. 2.
F. Sign Size. The primary sign may not exceed the following maximum sign area as indicated in Table 18.612.080(F), except when the size is specified by its sign design type to be smaller than specified in the table; for example, monument signs. Secondary and additional sign sizes are specified with the specific sign design type. The calculation of sign area for an individual business must be related to the portion of the building façade owned or leased by that business and the wall on which the sign is attached. The façade area is calculated by multiplying the relevant façade length by the relevant façade height which is determined by the finished grade and the cornice line or eave line if the roof is not flat.
Table 18.612.080(F). Primary Sign Maximum Sign Area
Facade Area (Square Feet) | Maximum Sign Area (Square Feet) |
|---|---|
0 – 100 | 15 |
101 – 199 | 25 |
200 – 1,499 | The larger of seven percent of the facade to which the sign is attached or 30 square feet, up to a maximum of 100 square feet |
1,500 – 2,999 | The larger of five percent of the facade to which the sign is attached or 100 square feet, up to a maximum of 150 square feet |
3,000 or greater | The larger of four percent of the facade to which the sign is attached or 150 square feet, up to a maximum of 200 square feet |
G. Permanent accessory uses are considered permanent commercial uses and must comply with the permanent and temporary commercial sign allowances and requirements. This includes accessory uses such as:
1. Food trucks or espresso drive-throughs on a property;
2. Car wash, convenience store, and/or restaurant with an automobile fuel station.
H. Multisided signs and their sign structure must be finished on all visible sides.
I. Sign Height and Clearance.
1. Except when the height is further restricted by the sign design type, maximum sign height shall not extend above the roof and shall be no more than 65 feet above building grade except when the sign is a corporate identification sign.
2. Signs that are allowed to extend over a walkway or area where there may be pedestrians present, including into the right-of-way, must maintain at least eight feet clearance between the walkway and the bottom of the sign and its sign structure. Figure 18.612.080(I)(2) is an example of signs that may extend into the right-of-way and the necessary clearance.
Figure 18.612.080(I)(2). Example of Signs in Right-of-Way and Clearance

J. Sign Location and Placement. The following sign placement standards apply to all permanent sign types in this chapter:
1. The primary signs must be placed on the primary street frontage providing pedestrian access except when the Director determines another configuration better serves the public.
2. Signs may be placed on any street frontage facing the public realm or a transportation facility excluding alleys, except if another placement is specifically allowed by the sign design type.
3. Where a business has no entrance or exterior street frontage on a public or private street, the Director may approve one wall sign on one exterior wall of the building space used by that business. With approval by the building owner, a business with no street frontage must be allowed one sign that is maximum of 15 square feet in size for their business name and/or logo. Each sign counts toward the maximum sign area allowed on that street frontage. For example, a grocery store with an internal pharmacy, bank, separate restaurant, and/or espresso stand.
4. All permanent commercial signs intended to be placed or allowed on site must be wholly within the property consistent with the requirements of this chapter, or as allowed by Chapter 12.05 IMC, Sidewalk Use District.
5. Permanent commercial signs may be placed in right-of-way only if specifically allowed by sign design type, as identified within IMC 18.612.060.
6. Except when allowed to be in the right-of-way, the sign must be placed entirely outside of the transportation facility; and in no case may signs extend into the area intended for vehicular travel. Where no curb exists, the sign must be placed outside the roadway at least 10 feet from the roadway edge or consistent with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.
7. Minimum Setback Requirements for Public or Private Facilities.
a. Out of the sight distance triangle of intersections and driveways as described in IMC 18.612.180(B);
b. Ten feet from any driveway, alley, or vehicle access point;
c. Two feet from any curb or roadway edge;
d. Two feet from any pedestrian sidewalk or ADA accessible path;
e. Five feet from any building access point if not attached to the building.
8. The sign shall not obstruct or impinge on pedestrian or accessible routes to or along the public or private sidewalk or encroach into the minimum clear pathway area of 48 inches in width.
9. The sign location shall not interfere with the opening of car doors, use of bicycle parking facilities, bus stops, loading zones, or other similar functions.
10. Signs shall not create a hazard to either pedestrians or motorists as determined by the Director. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. List of Permanent Commercial Sign Design Types Allowed With a Permit (Except as Prohibited Under This Chapter or Other Title 18 Standard).
1. Awning, canopy, wall, window signs;
2. Monument signs;
3. Projection and pedestrian-oriented signs;
4. Community facility signs;
5. Automobile fueling station signs;
6. Marquee signs;
7. Corporate identification signs;
8. Follow-through signs;
9. Business district kiosk signs.
B. Awning, Canopy, Wall, Window Signs.
1. Examples of Awning Signs in Figure 18.612.090(B)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(1). Examples of Awning Signs
![]() Awning as a Primary or Secondary Sign | ![]() Awning as an Additional Sign |
|---|
2. Examples of Awning Edge in Figure 18.612.090(B)(2).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(2). Examples of Awning Edge

3. Examples of Canopy Signs in Figure 18.612.090(B)(3).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(3). Examples of Canopy Sign

4. Examples of Canopy Edge in Figure 18.612.090(B)(4).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(4). Examples of Canopy Edge

5. Examples of Wall Signs in Figure 18.612.090(B)(5).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(5). Examples of Wall Signs
![]() Externally Lit Wall Sign | ![]() Individually Lit Letters Forming a Wall Sign |
|---|
6. Examples of Window Signs in Figure 18.612.090(B)(6).
Figure 18.612.090(B)(6). Examples of Window Signs
![]() Window Signs and Decals, Covering Less Than 50 Percent of the Windows | ![]() Additional Window Sign |
|---|
C. Awning, Canopy, Wall, Window Signs Are Allowed as Specified in Table 18.612.090(C).
Table 18.612.090(C). Awning, Canopy, Wall, Window Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF and if allowed by subsection H of this section | See below | Primary | 1 except window; see below | IMC 18.612.080(F) | 1 | IMC 18.612.080(I) |
Secondary | 1 except window; see below | 30 sq. ft. | 1 | IMC 18.612.080(I) | ||
Additional | See below | See below | 1 | See below |
D. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Awning, Canopy, Wall, and Window Signs.
1. Maximum Number of Primary and Secondary Signs. See incentives in IMC 18.612.080(E) and restrictions for the maximum number of primary and secondary signs in IMC 18.612.080(D).
2. Illumination. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination information, and subsection (E)(4) of this section for specific illumination related to awning, canopy, wall, and window primary and secondary signs.
E. Other Requirements for and Information Related Only to Awning and Canopy Signs.
1. If multiple awnings or canopies are present, an awning or canopy sign may be either a primary sign or a secondary sign. In all cases, the primary and secondary signs must be on separate awnings or canopies.
2. If an awning or canopy is used for an additional sign:
a. Maximum Number of Total Signs and Placement.
(1) One sign per awning or canopy edge is allowed parallel to the façade, where the awning or canopy is not used as primary or secondary sign;
(2) One sign per any awning or canopy edge perpendicular to the façade.
b. Maximum Area per Sign Face. The maximum area is determined by a maximum letter or logo height of six inches.
3. Permitted Location and Placement.
a. Awnings and canopies may be on site or extend into the right-of-way. Awnings and canopies attached to on-site buildings and structures may extend into the right-of-way consistent with Chapter 12.04 IMC or as allowed by special use permit in Chapter 5.14 IMC;
b. Canopy signs are allowed on and above the face of the canopy;
c. Maximum Height. Must be placed on awnings or canopies associated with ground floor windows.
4. Illumination.
a. Awnings and canopy signs may be externally illuminated; no internal illumination which is visible through or above the awning or canopy is allowed;
b. Canopy signs may have external illumination, channel letters, halo-style illumination, or similar.
5. The following definitions apply for purposes of this section:
a. Awning. An architectural projection roofed with flexible material supported from an exterior wall of a building and/or other sign structure;
b. Canopy. A permanent, rigid architectural projection supported from an exterior wall of a building and/or other structure;
c. Edge, Awning or Canopy. The vertical edge of an awning or canopy, generally parallel or perpendicular to the façade.
6. Other Requirements for and Information Related Only to Wall Signs.
a. When a Wall Sign Is an Additional Sign.
(1) Allowed only as multibusiness wall signs;
(2) Maximum number of total signs and placement: one per street frontage with a maximum of two allowed;
(3) Maximum area per sign face is 16 square feet;
(4) Permitted location: must be entirely on site;
(5) Maximum height: no higher than 10 feet above the ground.
b. Location and Placement of Wall Signs.
(1) Primary and secondary signs: wall signs may extend up to 12 inches into the right-of-way but must comply with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards;
(2) Wall signs may not extend more than 12 inches from the building façade on which they are installed;
(3) Awning and canopy signs must located on the ground floor and associated with the subject business.
c. Signs standing out horizontally from a mansard roof are considered wall signs; however, they may not extend vertically above the top of the mansard.
d. Painted Wall Sign. Only the portion of a painted wall sign or mural that contains a logo, trademark, or other commercial message is governed by the requirements of this chapter and a painted border is not included in the overall dimensional size limitations.
e. Definitions. A multibusiness wall sign is an on-site sign that identifies tenants and may identify the building name for a multibusiness development. Also known as tenant directory sign.
7. Other Requirements for and Information Related Only to Window Signs.
a. Maximum Number.
(1) The combination of all window signs (temporary, permanent, primary, secondary, additional) shall not exceed 25 percent of the total window area on any façade. The combination of all graphics, artwork, photos, and decorations shall not exceed an additional 25 percent, for a total of 50 percent of the window area on any façade, except when a space is empty, unoccupied, or under construction. If a space is empty, unoccupied, or under construction, then its windows may be fully obscured through art, decoration, or graphics. Window signs such as open/closed, store hours, address, and other necessary directional and informational signs are exempt from total sign area limitations;
(2) Window signs as additional signs shall not exceed the façade’s linear footage divided by 20 (for example, a 60-foot façade could have up to three window signs: 60 linear feet of façade divided by 20 feet per window sign equals three window signs).
b. When a Window Sign Is an Additional Sign.
(1) Maximum Area per Sign Face. Maximum area is established by a maximum letter size or logo height of 12 inches;
(2) Position/Maximum Height. For window that a business has facing public realm or transportation facility, excluding alleys, the business may have a window sign as an additional sign.
c. Permitted Location. Primary, secondary, additional window signs must be entirely on site.
F. Monument Signs.
1. Examples of Monument Signs in Figure 18.612.090(F)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(F)(1). Examples of Monument Signs
![]() Individual Business Monument Sign | ![]() Multibusiness Monument Sign |
|---|
2. General Standards for Monument Signs.
a. Location and Placement. See sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J);
b. Maximum Area per Sign Face. Neither the portion of the sign structure providing support, nor the frame, are counted when determining the square footage of the sign;
c. Maximum Height. Overall sign height includes the frame or sign structure on which it is mounted;
d. Illumination. The sign may have exterior illumination only, regardless of the area or zone in which the monument sign is located. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination information.
3. Monument signs with business and commercial activities are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(F)(3).
Table 18.612.090(F)(3). Business and Commercial Monument Signs
Monument Sign Use Areas | How Allowed | Where Sign Is Allowed by Business Configuration | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Outside of Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, Talus, and CBD zone | Allowed outright | Individual business | On site | See below | See below | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet |
Multibusiness | 50 sq. ft. | 10 feet | ||||||
Within Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, Talus | Prohibited, except as allowed below | Individual business | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | ||
Multibusiness | 50 sq. ft. | |||||||
In CBD | Prohibited, except as allowed below | In SF home | 1 | 15 sq. ft. | 2 | 5 feet | ||
Multibusiness | 25 sq. ft. | 10 feet |
a. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Business and Commercial Monument Signs.
(1) Sign Category and Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(A) Individual business monument signs are primary or secondary signs. Up to one primary sign and one secondary monument sign may be permitted if a monument sign is allowed in Table 18.612.090(F)(3) or in subsection (F)(3)(b) of this section. An individual business is located on a separate lot and not legally part of a multibusiness development.
(B) Multibusiness development monument signs are primary signs used to identify the development and some or all of its tenants or occupants. Up to one primary monument sign may be permitted, if a monument sign is allowed in Table 18.612.090(F)(3) or in subsection (F)(3)(b) of this section. Monument signs may not be used as a secondary sign. Tenants and occupants may have their own signs, but they may not be monument signs in a multibusiness development.
b. Conditions of Placement for Monument Signs in Certain Areas of the City.
(1) Monument Signs in Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, Talus, and Cultural and Business District (CBD) After the Adoption of This Chapter.
(A) A monument sign, legally in place before the adoption of this chapter, is an allowed sign and may remain, be maintained, have its structure or sign face replaced, and undergo a name change until such time as the building or business is demolished. The monument sign may be replaced prior to demolition; however, the replaced monument sign must comply with the monument sign use area standards regarding location, maximum area, maximum number of faces, and maximum height in this section. This provision supersedes the limitations in IMC 18.612.150, Nonconforming signs.
(B) If a building is demolished, or in Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus, if a single-family subdivision is redeveloped, the monument sign must be eliminated, and other signs must be used; except if during development or redevelopment, and prior to certificate of occupancy, the Director issues a written determination that the building is not placed close to and sufficiently visible from the street, then a monument sign may be warranted to identify the business or development.
(C) If allowed under subsection (A) or (B) of this section, a monument sign must be a primary sign.
(D) New monument signs are prohibited in Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, and Talus.
(2) Monument Signs in Cultural and Business District Zone (CBD) After the Adoption of This Chapter.
(A) Any existing development that contains multiple buildings and multiple retail tenants may elect to have one monument sign, until such time as the existing development is demolished.
(B) Where an existing house is set back from the street and used for a home business one monument sign may be permitted, until such time as the existing house is demolished.
4. Monument signs associated with residential projects (single-family subdivision or multifamily development with one or multiple buildings) are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(F)(4).
Table 18.612.090(F)(4). Residential Monument Signs
Monument Sign Use Areas | How Allowed | Where Sign Is Allowed by Residence Type | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Outside of Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, Talus, and CBD zone | Allowed outright | Single- family subdivision; multifamily | On site | See below | See below | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet |
Within Central Issaquah, Issaquah Highlands, Talus | Prohibited | Single- family subdivision | – | – | – | – | – | |
Allowed conditionally; see below | Multifamily | On site | See below | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | ||
In CBD zone | Prohibited | – | – | – | – | – | – |
a. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Residential Monument Signs.
(1) Sign Category and Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(A) Monument signs for single-family subdivisions do not have a sign category; they are other signs. If they are allowed in Table 18.612.090(F)(4) and in subsection (F)(5) of this section, there may be one per vehicular entry, placed near that entry.
(B) Monument signs for a multifamily building or development may be a primary sign, if they are allowed in Table 18.612.090(F)(4) and in subsection (F)(5) of this section. One primary monument sign is allowed for a multifamily building or development.
5. Monument signs for neighborhoods or districts are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(F)(5).
Table 18.612.090(F)(5). Neighborhood/District Monument Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs per Neigh. or District Entrance | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All areas | Right-of-way or on site | Other, monument | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet |
a. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Neighborhood or District Monument Signs.
(1) Sign Category. Neighborhood/district monument signs do not have a sign category; they are other signs.
(2) Monument signs may be permitted for a recognized neighborhood or commercial district.
(3) The monument sign must be designed to establish the neighborhood or commercial district. For example, it must be consistent in material, color, mountings, and text style.
G. Projection and Pedestrian-Oriented Signs. Projection sign is a sign that is wholly or partly dependent upon a building for support and that projects more than 12 inches from such building. Pedestrian-oriented sign is a permanent, nonilluminated sign, the primary purpose of which is to provide information for pedestrians and bicyclists. Blade signs are an example of a pedestrian-oriented sign.
1. An example of projection sign is in Figure 18.612.090(G)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(G)(1). Example of Projection Sign

2. An example of pedestrian-oriented sign is in Figure 18.612.090(G)(2).
Figure 18.612.090(G)(2). Example of Pedestrian-Oriented Sign

3. Projection and pedestrian-oriented signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(G)(3).
Table 18.612.090(G)(3). Projection and Pedestrian-Oriented Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF and if allowed by subsection H of this section | See below | Primary; see below | 1 | See IMC 18.612.080(F) | 2 | See IMC 18.612.080(I) |
Secondary; see below | 1 | 30 sq. ft. | 2 | See IMC 18.612.080(I) | ||
Additional; see below | See below | 4 sq. ft. | 2 | 12 feet |
4. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Projection and Pedestrian-Oriented Signs.
a. Sign Category. Projection signs are primary and secondary signs. Pedestrian-oriented signs are additional signs.
b. Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(1) For incentives on the maximum number of primary and secondary signs, see subsection E of this section;
(2) For restrictions on the maximum number of primary and secondary signs, see subsection D of this section;
(3) One pedestrian-oriented sign per business for each façade facing a transportation facility, including alleys when a public pedestrian entry to the business is from an alley, and the entry is open and accessible during business hours.
c. The two faces of the projection or pedestrian-oriented sign must be parallel to each other.
d. Location and Placement.
(1) Projection and pedestrian-oriented signs attached to on-site buildings may extend into the right-of-way consistent with Chapters 12.04 and 12.05 IMC or as allowed by special use permit in Chapter 5.14 IMC. They may also be fully on site;
(2) Minimum setback must be two feet from curb or edge of vehicular surface;
(3) Projection sign may not extend above the parapet or eave except when the projection sign is for a cinema or theater. In all cases, a projection sign must be limited to 65 feet or the base building height in the zone;
(4) Projection signs may extend outward up to 75 percent of the width of the abutting sidewalk but no more than six feet from the wall they are mounted on;
(5) Pedestrian-oriented signs may not project beyond the awning, canopy, or marquee;
(6) See general sign location and placement information in subsection IMC 18.612.080(J).
e. Illumination. May be externally illuminated; no internal illumination is allowed. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination standards.
H. Community Facilities Signs.
1. An example of a community facilities sign is in Figure 18.612.090(H)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(H)(1). Example of Community Facilities Monument Sign With Readerboard

2. Community facility signs are allowed as specified in Tables 18.612.090(H)(2)(a) and 18.612.090(H)(2)(b).
Table 18.612.090(H)(2)(a). Community Facilities Signs Associated With a Building as the Primary Use
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
CF-OS, CF-R, CF-F, CF-OSPO, CF-RPO, CF-FPO | On site | Primary: monument | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | Sign structure and sign: 10 feet |
See below | Other primary: wall, projection, window | 2 – 3 | Subsection (A)(5) of this section | 1 – 2 See below | Subsection (A)(8) of this section | |
CF-OS, CF-R, CF-F | – | Readerboard portion | 1 | 24 sq. ft. | 1 – 2 See below | – |
Table 18.612.090(H)(2)(b). Community Facilities Signs Not Associated With a Building Except as an Accessory Use
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
CF-OS, CF-R, CF-F, CF-OSPO, CF-RPO, CF-FPO | On site | Other, see below; Monument | See below | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet |
CF-OS, CF-R, CF-F | – | Other, readerboard portion | 1 | 24 sq. ft. | 1 – 2 See below | – |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Community Facilities Signs.
a. Community Facilities (CF) Parcels With Buildings as a Primary Use.
(1) Sign Category. Community facilities monument signs and other primary signs (wall, window, projection signs) are each treated as primary signs for the purposes of sizing each primary sign. Community facilities may not use secondary signs but may select from any additional sign identified and allowed in this section.
(2) Maximum Number of Total Signs. May have a total of up to three primary signs per building. The three primary signs may be either a monument sign and two other primary signs or three other primary signs.
(3) Any additional sign selected must follow the standards for that additional sign in this section.
(4) Maximum number of sign faces and standards for other primary signs must follow the standards for that sign design type in subsection D of this section (wall or window signs), or subsection F of this section (projection signs).
b. Community Facilities (CF) Parcels Without a Building, Except as an Accessory Use.
(1) Sign Category. When a community facility does not have a building, such as a park or sports field except accessory uses such as a bathroom building or a picnic shelter, the signs do not have a sign category and are considered other signs;
(2) Maximum Number of Total Signs. The maximum number is one monument sign per each parcel side fronting on a transportation facility or public realm;
(3) The sign design type is monument sign.
c. A Community Facilities Readerboard Sign.
(1) The maximum area per sign face for the readerboard portion of the sign is a portion of the monument sign, or other primary sign face, that a readerboard may use; it is not additive.
(2) Maximum Number of Sign Faces for a Readerboard, as a Part of Another Sign. The readerboard may have the same number of faces as the sign it is a part of, which is two faces with a monument sign or projection sign and one face with a wall or window sign.
(3) A readerboard shall not be a separate sign. It must be a portion of a monument sign or other primary sign.
Readerboard signs may be electronic or manual; however, electronic readerboards are not allowed with privately owned community facilities signs.
d. A Community Facilities Monument Sign. Community facilities monument signs must follow subsection F of this section, Monument Signs.
e. An electronic readerboard sign must meet the following requirements:
(1) The signs must be designed and placed to prevent light and glare from being visible to adjacent residential properties;
(2) The signs must dim during twilight and night hours to reduce glare and must be turned off during night hours. Night hours are between 10:00 p.m. and 6:00 a.m.;
(3) The display must include only static text and/or static graphics. No moving graphics, or animations such as flying or fading, video, or blinking/pulsing/strobe effects are allowed; and
(4) Each message and/or graphic must be displayed for at least 10 seconds. The change from one message/graphic to the next may utilize a scrolling or wipe effect, but the effect may not take more than one second to complete.
f. Location and Placement.
(1) Other Primary Signs, Wall, Window, and Projection Signs Used With a Community Facilities Building. Location of community facilities signs, either on site or in the right-of-way, must follow the standards for that sign design type in subsection C of this section (wall and/or window signs) or subsection G of this section (projection signs);
(2) Community Facilities Monument Signs. Shall not be located closer than two feet from any property line and must comply with any other applicable setbacks;
(3) See sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J).
g. Illumination. A monument sign may be externally illuminated; no internal illumination is allowed, except for the portion of the sign that is an electronic readerboard. A manual readerboard may not be backlit. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination standards.
I. Automobile Fueling Station Signs. Fueling stations are businesses selling motor fuel or alternative fuels (for example, electric vehicle charging) to the public. A fuel price sign is a nonmovable sign advertising the price of motor fuel.
1. Example of Fueling Station Sign in Figure 18.612.090(I)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(I)(1). Example of Fueling Station Sign

2. Automobile fueling station signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(I)(2).
Table 18.612.090(I)(2). Automobile Fueling Station Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs per Street Frontage | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Fueling station as primary land use | On site | Other, monument | 1 | 50 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet |
Other, pole | 15 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | |||
Fueling station as primary or secondary land use | Other, fuel price sign portion | 1 total | 15 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | |
Other, signs on fueling station canopy are wall signs | 1 | See below | 1 | See below |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Automobile Fueling Station Signs.
a. Sign Category. Automobile fueling station signs are not primary, secondary, or additional signs; they are other signs. Automobile fueling station signs are the only signs allowed with this use, except if there are accessory uses at the fueling station such as convenience stores, restaurants or other retail, self-service car washes, and service bays for vehicle service and repair. See IMC 18.612.080(G) regarding signs for these permanent accessory uses.
b. Automobile fueling station canopies are regulated by this subsection I, and no other regulations related to signs on canopies apply to fueling station sites, except as allowed by subsection (I)(3)(a) of this section.
c. Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(1) One monument or pole sign is allowed per fueling station street frontage;
(2) Only one fuel price sign is allowed per fueling station and it must be integrated with the monument or pole sign. See IMC 18.612.050, Prohibited signs, regarding movable fuel price signs.
d. Signs on Fueling Station Canopy, Whether the Fueling Station Is a Primary or Secondary Use.
(1) Maximum Area per Sign Face. The maximum area per sign face is determined by the use of letters and/or logo no more than two feet in height.
(2) Maximum Height. The maximum height is determined by the height of the fueling station canopy on which the letters and/or logo are being placed. The letters and logo may not extend above the edge of the fueling station canopy roof or eave if the roof is sloped.
e. Fueling Station as Secondary Use.
(1) Examples of a fueling station as a secondary use are when a grocery or big-box store has a fueling station in addition to its primary use of grocery or big-box store and there is no intervening public right-of-way between the grocery or big-box store and the fueling station.
(2) The sign for the secondary use may be incorporated with the monument sign of the primary use; however, in no instance may the fuel price sign itself exceed the size, number of faces, and sign height limitations shown in Table 18.612.090(I)(2).
f. Location and Placement.
(1) Monument or pole signs must be at least two feet from any property line;
(2) Fueling station canopy signs must be on the face of the fueling station canopy covering the pump island(s);
(3) See sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J).
g. Illumination. All signs may be illuminated signs. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination standards.
J. Marquee Signs. A marquee is a permanent structure or canopy located above the primary entrance to a building, such as a theater, that projects over the sidewalk and is attached to, and entirely supported from, the street wall of the building. A marquee sign can also be a sign painted on or attached to a permanent overhanging marquee sign structure which projects from the face of a building.
1. An example of a marquee sign is in Figure 18.612.090(J)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(J)(1). Example of Marquee Sign and Changeable Copy

2. Marquee signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(J)(2).
Table 18.612.090(J)(2). Marquee Signs
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Mixed-use and nonresidential areas: CBD, IC, IC-CI, M, MU, MU-CI, MUR, PO, UC, UV-COM, UV-MUR-H, UV-MUR-T, UV-O, UV-RET, UV-VC, VR | See below | Primary | 1 | See IMC 18.612.080(F) | 2 | See below |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Marquee Signs.
a. Sign Category. A marquee sign is considered the primary sign of the business. A marquee shall not be used as a secondary sign.
b. Location, Placement, and Maximum Height of Marquee Signs.
(1) A marquee sign may extend into the right-of-way consistent with Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards;
(2) May extend above the parapet or roof but shall not be taller than 65 feet or the allowed base building height in the area of the City in which it is located;
(3) See sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J).
c. Changeable Copy Portion of the Marquee.
(1) Letter sizing shall not exceed 12 inches in height;
(2) Shall not extend beyond, below, or be attached to the underside of the marquee.
d. Illumination. The marquee sign may only be externally illuminated. The changeable copy portion of the marquee may be backlit. See IMC 18.612.180 for illumination standards.
K. Corporate Identification Signs. The purpose of a corporate identification sign is to identify one significant tenant within a building. A building owner may allow a corporate identification sign at the upper levels of a high-rise building if the sign is on a high-rise structure that is at least 10 stories tall and the high-rise structure contains the single use of a hotel, motel, or hospital; or the sign is for an enterprise that is an anchor tenant in the building.
1. An example of corporate identification sign is in Figure 18.612.090(K)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(K)(1). Example of Corporate Identification Sign

2. Corporate identification signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(K)(2).
Table 18.612.090(K)(2). Corporate Identification Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category and Design Type | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
On a high-rise structure; see below | On site | Other, wall | 2 | 200 sq. ft. | 1 | See below |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Corporate Identification Signs.
a. Sign Category. A corporate identification sign is not a primary, secondary, or additional sign; they are other signs. However, the tenant/owner for whom the corporate identification sign is permitted may have all other signage allowed by this chapter as primary, secondary, additional, and temporary signage.
b. Maximum Sign Height and Position of Corporate Identification Sign(s) and Other Permitted Signage.
(1) Corporate identification signs shall not project above the top or beyond the edge of the wall or element to which they are affixed;
(2) A corporate identification sign is located at the top of the building, not necessarily in relationship to the location of the tenant’s leased space;
(3) If a building owner and tenant determine that two corporate identification signs are necessary, the two signs must be on different façades and they must be oriented to face I-90 and/or SR-900, and not Cougar or Squak Mountains;
(4) All the other signage must be located at ground/transportation facility level.
c. Corporate identification signs must be mounted to the building with a mounting system that is not visible beyond the edges of the sign elements.
L. Follow-Through Signs. A follow-through sign is a sign which is required to be placed in the City right-of-way by the Washington State Department of Transportation Motorist Information Sign Program and is designed to direct travelers to gas, food, lodging, camping, recreation, tourist activities, and 24-hour pharmacies.
1. Examples of follow-through signs are in Figure 18.612.090(L)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(L)(1). Examples of Follow-Through Signs
![]() Single Information on a Follow-Through Sign | ![]() Co-Located Information on a Follow-Through Sign |
|---|
2. Follow-through signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(L)(2).
Table 18.612.090(L)(2). Follow-Through Signs
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Mixed-use and nonresidential areas: CBD, CF-F, CF-FPO, IC, IC-CI, M, MU, MU-CI, MUR, PO, UC, UV-COM, UV-MUR-H, UV-MUR-T, UV-O, UV-RET, UV-VC, VR Multifamily: MF-H | Right-of-way | Additional | See below | See below | 2 | See below |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Follow-Through Signs.
a. Follow-through signs are allowed only where Washington State Department of Transportation (WSDOT) has approved a sign as part of the WSDOT Motorist Information Sign Program within their right-of-way jurisdiction.
b. Maximum Number of Total Signs. The maximum number of signs is the minimum number necessary to comply with WSDOT’s requirements.
c. Maximum Area per Sign Face. The maximum area per sign face is the minimum size necessary to comply with WSDOT’s requirements.
d. Maximum Sign Height. Maximum sign height of sign is per City street standards for street signs.
e. Manufacture of the sign and its installation must be by the applicant, following the City’s specifications.
f. Illumination. Ambient illumination only.
g. Location and Placement.
(1) Wherever possible, follow-through signs are co-located with other businesses on a follow-through sign rather than posted separately;
(2) See sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J).
M. Business District Kiosk Signs. A business district kiosk is a sign used to assist pedestrians, bicyclists, and drivers in locating businesses within a neighborhood. Business district kiosks are allowed on private and public property for the purpose of locating a business.
1. Examples of business district kiosk signs are in Figure 18.612.090(M)(1).
Figure 18.612.090(M)(1). Example of Business District Kiosk Signs
![]() Pedestrian Scale Business District Kiosk Shown Overall | ![]() Pedestrian Scale Business District Kiosk Shown Closeup | ![]() Example of a Circular Kiosk |
|---|
2. Examples of business district kiosk sided signs are in Figure 18.612.090(M)(2).
Figure 18.612.090(M)(2). Example of Business District Kiosk Sided Signs
![]() Two-Sided Business District Kiosk | ![]() Four-Sided Business District Kiosk |
|---|
3. Business district kiosk signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.090(M)(3).
Table 18.612.090(M)(3). Business District Kiosk Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Sign Category | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Kiosk | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Sidewalk use districts established in Chapter 12.05 IMC | On site or right-of-way | Additional | See below | See below | 4 | 10 feet |
4. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Business District Kiosk Signs.
a. Maximum Number of Total Signs and Placement. Prior to submitting for a sign permit, a master business district kiosk plan must be submitted and approved. In a master business district kiosk plan, an applicant must propose locations demonstrating compliance with all the location criteria below and in Chapter 12.05 IMC, Sidewalk Use District. The locations of the master business district kiosk plan to ensure locations are appropriate and meet all of the following criteria:
(1) Placed at key intersections or decision points, and designed predominantly for pedestrians and bicyclists but useful to drivers as well;
(2) Sited to facilitate use by both pedestrians and vehicles, such as in the planting strip between the curb and sidewalk;
(3) Located to allow for door swings, vehicular sight lines, and pedestrian routes, and similar functional considerations, when locating them; and
(4) Meet other sign location and placement information in IMC 18.612.080(J).
b. Maximum Area per Sign Face.
(1) An individual sign for each business within the kiosk is limited to 0.75 square feet on sides oriented to and for pedestrian use. Letter size must be no larger than five inches in height.
(2) The applicant may request the use of 12-inch-tall letters/logo on sides oriented to vehicles. Where this larger letter/logo size is allowed, each sign panel with the larger letter/logo size may be no more than three feet in length. A proposal use of the larger letter size must meet all the following criteria:
(A) The 12-inch letter/logo size will be considered where vehicular volumes, speeds, and number of travel lanes are such that larger letters/logos may be necessary for safe viewing; two-lane roads, one in each direction, with travel speeds at or below 30 miles per hour do not qualify.
(B) If the larger letter/logo size is approved for use, a multisided kiosk must be used to ensure that there is at least one pedestrian-oriented side and one vehicular-oriented side.
(C) No more than two sides may use the larger letters/logo. At least one side of the kiosk must be for pedestrian use.
(3) A kiosk may also include a sponsor’s name and logo which are limited to six inches in height, one per each side of the kiosk. On circular kiosks, two names/logos are permitted.
(4) Kiosk sides may also be used for maps and noncommercial information.
c. Business district kiosk signs located on the public right-of-way require a sign permit, a master business district kiosk plan, and may require a building permit, depending on the design of the kiosk and as determined by the building official.
d. Business district kiosk signs may only include maps, noncommercial information, business name and logos, directional arrows, and distances.
e. Illumination. Ambient illumination only. (Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. General Standards for Temporary Commercial Signs. The following provisions apply to all temporary commercial signs placed within the City:
1. Permit. No permit is required but certain temporary commercial signs require a temporary sign agreement. See each sign design type in IMC 18.612.110 regarding whether a sign requires a temporary sign agreement and IMC 18.612.160 for temporary sign agreement standards.
2. Fee. No fee is required to place temporary commercial signs in the City.
3. Temporary Commercial Sign Materials and Construction.
a. Temporary signs must be constructed of any material durable enough to withstand rain, wind, and normal wear and tear for the anticipated use, and must conform to the other requirements of this chapter;
b. Temporary signs must be maintained in an aesthetic and safe condition;
c. Temporary signs may not be an electric sign and may not be an illuminated sign;
d. Temporary signs may not move or vibrate, emit noise, or be animated or have changing images.
4. Duration. The length of time each sign is permitted is listed in IMC 18.612.110. Any temporary sign that is specific to an event must be removed within five days of the end of the event.
5. Restrictions. No temporary commercial signs may be placed in the area restricted by IMC 18.612.080(D).
6. Height. Specific sign heights are listed in IMC 18.612.130. In no case are temporary signs to extend above the roofline and be higher than 65 feet above the grade regardless of building height.
7. Sign Placement.
a. Temporary commercial signs may be placed in the right-of-way only if specifically allowed in IMC 18.612.110;
b. All temporary commercial signs intended to be placed or allowed on site must be wholly within the property consistent with the requirements of this chapter;
c. Except when allowed to be in the right-of-way, the sign must be placed entirely outside of the transportation facility; and in no case may signs extend into the area intended for vehicular travel. Where no curb exists, the sign must be placed outside the roadway a minimum 10 feet from the roadway edge or consistent with the City’s roadway safety requirements;
d. Minimum Setback Requirements for Public or Private Facilities.
(1) Out of the sight distance triangle of intersections and driveways as described in IMC 18.612.180;
(2) Ten feet from any driveway, alley, or vehicle access point;
(3) Two feet behind any curb or roadway edge;
(4) Two feet from any pedestrian sidewalk or ADA accessible path;
(5) Five feet from any building access point if not attached to the building.
e. The sign shall not obstruct pedestrian or accessible routes to or along the public or private sidewalk or encroach into the minimum clear pathway area of 48 inches in width;
f. The sign shall not interfere with the opening of car doors, use of bicycle parking facilities, bus stops, or loading zones;
g. The sign must remain portable and shall not be attached or anchored to trees or to public property including, but not limited to, utility or light poles, parking meters, or pavement;
h. Signs are prohibited in, on, or within public or private medians, roundabouts, traffic circles, utility poles, lampposts (except banners as specified in this section), traffic poles and signals, and street trees;
i. Signs shall not create a hazard to either pedestrians or motorists as determined by the City Traffic Engineer.
B. Temporary Sign Agreement.
1. When required for certain temporary commercial signs, a sign number must be issued by the City prior to installation of the sign. By submitting the temporary sign agreement, an applicant acknowledges the applicable standards, including indemnification if signs are allowed in the right-of-way, and ensures compliance with any time limits. To determine if a temporary sign agreement is required for a temporary commercial sign, see the standards for the sign type above. Whether a temporary sign agreement is required or not, compliance with all standards listed for the specific sign must be met.
2. A temporary sign agreement authorizes the applicant to place the identified sign on the disclosed property or location for the allowed duration, starting from the date of issuance of a sign number. Any temporary commercial sign which requires a temporary sign agreement must properly display the issued sign number on the sign.
3. For signs allowed in the right-of-way that require a temporary sign agreement, the property identified on the temporary sign agreement must be the business address with which the sign is associated, such as for A-frames; or the address shown on the City of Issaquah business license, such as for outdoor vendors. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Temporary Commercial Signs. The following provisions apply to all temporary commercial signs placed in the City.
B. List of Temporary Commercial Sign Design Types.
1. A-frames;
2. Commercial banners on light poles;
3. Commercial banners on buildings;
4. Construction, contractor, or “coming soon” signs;
5. Garage sale signs;
6. Outdoor vendor signs;
7. Project real estate signs;
8. Residential unit real estate signs (for sale, lease or rent);
9. Real estate directional arrow signs;
10. Residential real estate open house signs;
11. Window signs.
C. A-Frame Signs.
1. An example of A-frame sign is in Figure 18.612.110(C)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(C)(1). Example of A-Frame Sign

2. Commercial A-frame signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(C)(2).
Table 18.612.110(C)(2). A-Frame Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Business/Tenant Space | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of A-Frame | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones | On site Right-of-way | 1 | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | 365 days | Is required |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to A-Frame Signs.
a. Signs must be present during the hours a business or service is open.
b. Sign Placement. In addition to IMC 18.612.100(A)(7) signs must adhere to the following:
(1) On Site. Must be on site, directly in front of or adjacent to the sponsoring business and on the property directly in front on the business, no farther than 20 feet from the primary public pedestrian entrance to the business and not in front of another business;
(2) In Right-of-Way. If the business meets the criteria below, one A-frame, up to 50 feet from the business’s primary entrance. The sign must be located the shortest distance between the sign and the entrance to the site or with a sight line to the business’s primary entrance. An A-frame is allowed in the right-of-way if the sign cannot be placed on the property directly abutting the sponsoring business and meets one of the following two criteria:
(A) The business is so close to the right-of-way that there is insufficient space to place the A-frame on site and within 20 feet of the primary public pedestrian entrance to the business; or
(B) The business is not within 20 feet of the right-of-way, and a sign placed on site and no more than 20 feet from the business’s primary public pedestrian entrance does not have a sight line from the sign to right-of-way.
D. Commercial Banners on Light Poles.
1. An example of commercial banners on light pole is in Figure 18.612.110(D)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(D)(1). Example of Pair of Commercial Banners on Light Pole

2. Commercial banners on light poles are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(D)(2).
Table 18.612.110(D)(2). Commercial Banners on Light Poles
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Banner Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF-F and CF-FPO | On site | See below | 10 sq. ft. on poles over 15 ft. 5 sq. ft. on poles up to 15 ft. | 2 | 90 days | Not required |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Commercial Banners on Light Poles.
a. Maximum Number of Total Signs. There may be up to two banners per pole.
b. Sign Placement. In addition to IMC 18.612.100(A)(7) signs must adhere to the following:
(1) Banners may not be higher than the light pole itself. This standard establishes maximum height of the sign.
(2) Banners must maintain a clearance of at least eight feet above areas where pedestrians are likely to be present.
c. Banners must be installed with permission of the light pole owner.
E. Commercial Banners on Buildings.
1. An example of a commercial banner on a building is in Figure 18.612.110(E)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(E)(1). Example of Commercial Banner on a Building

2. Commercial banners are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(E)(2).
Table 18.612.110(E)(2). Commercial Banner Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Business/ Tenant Space | Max. Area of Banner Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Banner Above Finished Grade | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF-F and CF-FPO | On site | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 1 | 30 feet | 30 days per calendar quarter per year | Is required |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Commercial Banners.
a. Sign Placement. In addition to IMC 18.612.100(A)(7) signs must adhere to the following:
(1) All commercial banners must be attached to the building housing the business and located on the side of the building that faces the street, or if the business does not face a street, then the primary entrance.
(2) The entire banner must be attached flush to the façade of the building, anchored at all four corners, and may not extend above the roofline or around the corner of a wall.
F. Construction, Contractor, or “Coming Soon” Signs. A construction, contractor, or “coming soon” sign is a temporary sign for informational purposes that identifies individuals or firms involved with the construction of a building or announcing the character of the building or enterprise, which is erected during the building construction period.
1. An example of construction or contractor sign is in Figure 18.612.110(F)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(F)(1). Example of Construction or Contractor Sign

2. An example of “coming soon” sign is in Figure 18.612.110(F)(2).
Figure 18.612.110(F)(2). Example of “Coming Soon” Sign

3. Construction/contractor or “coming soon” signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(F)(3).
Table 18.612.110(F)(3). Construction, Contractor or “Coming Soon” Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area of Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All zones | On site | See below | 32 sq. ft. | 1 | 10 feet | See below | Not required |
4. Requirements for and Information Related to Construction, Contractor, “Coming Soon” Signs.
a. Maximum Number of Total Signs. For a property or tenant space under construction, one construction, contractor, or “coming soon” sign per street frontage is allowed. If there is no street frontage, then one such sign per tenant space.
b. Duration. All construction, contractor, or “coming soon” signs allowed in this subsection may be in place while permits are active, and construction is ongoing. The sign must be removed from the site within 10 days of the cessation of excavation, construction, demolition, rehabilitation, structural alteration, or related work on site, or expiration of the construction permit(s).
c. Sign Placement. In addition to standards within IMC 18.612.100(A)(7), the sign must be located a minimum 10 feet from any adjoining property line and two feet behind the street property line.
G. Garage Sale Signs. A garage sale sign is a temporary sign advertising the sale of personal property used to dispose of personal household possessions and including sample sales. It is not for the use of any commercial venture. Garage sale signs are also known as yard sale, moving sale, or patio sale signs.
1. An example of a garage sale sign is in Figure 18.612.110(G)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(G)(1). Example of Garage Sale Sign

2. Garage sale signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(G)(2).
Table 18.612.110(G)(2). Garage Sale Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Garage Sale | Type of Sign | Max. Area of Stake/ Wire Frame Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement. |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All zones which include a residential use | Right-of-way | 4 | Stake/wire frame | 4 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | See below | Not required |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Garage Sale Signs.
a. The only type of sign that may be used for garage sale signs is stake/wire frame signs.
b. Duration. Signs may only be present for up to three days, associated with the sale, to assist with advertising and direction.
c. See sign placement in IMC 18.612.100(A)(7).
H. Outdoor Vendor Signs.
1. An example of an outdoor vendor sign is in Figure 18.612.110(H)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(H)(1). Example of Outdoor Vendor Sign

2. Outdoor vendor signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(H)(2).
Table 18.612.110(H)(2). Outdoor Vendor Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Business | Types of Signs | Max. Area per Banner or A-Frame Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Banner or A-Frame | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Where a permitted use | See below | Option 1 | See below | Is required | ||||
1 | Comm’l banner | 16 sq. ft. | 1 | 8 feet | ||||
1 | A-frame | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | ||||
Option 2 | ||||||||
2 | A-frame | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | ||||
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Outdoor Vendor Signs.
a. Outdoor vendor signs are used for food trucks, fruit or vegetable stands, tree stands, pop-up uses, accessory vending stands, and similar activities. On-site signage is allowed if the use is separate from the primary or permanent use(s) of the site.
b. The only types of signs that may be used for outdoor vendor signs are commercial banners or A-frame signs.
c. Maximum Number of Total Signs.
(1) For option one in Table 18.612.110(H)(2), the outdoor vendor may have either a vehicle with the business name parked as a sign (see IMC 18.612.050(P)) or a commercial banner.
(2) For option two in Table 18.612.110(H)(2), if two A-frames are present, no vehicle sign may be present or visible.
(3) Menu boards, without advertising and a logo no more than 15 percent of the sign face, and in compliance with A-frame size and sign height, are considered informational signs (see IMC 18.612.070(A)(3)(d)).
d. Duration. Sign duration follows the allowed duration of the business it is advertising.
e. Sign Placement. In addition to IMC 18.612.100(A)(7), signs associated with outdoor vendors allowed on site must be placed on site only. Signs associated with outdoor vendors allowed in the right-of-way must place signage in the right-of-way, in compliance with IMC 18.612.100(A)(7).
I. Project Real Estate Signs.
1. Examples of commercial project real estate signs are in Figure 18.612.110(I)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(I)(1). Examples of Commercial Project Real Estate Sign
![]() Commercial Project Real Estate Sign With Two Faces | ![]() Commercial Project Real Estate Sign With One Face |
|---|
2. Project real estate signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(I)(2).
Table 18.612.110(I)(2). Project Real Estate Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Entrance/ Street Frontage | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Residential property in all zones | On site | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | 365 days | Is required |
Commercial property in all zones | On site | 1 | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | 10 feet | 365 days | Is required |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Project Real Estate Signs.
a. Sign Purpose.
(1) Residential. Advertising the initial availability of lots and/or houses in a subdivision or units (condominiums) at the entrance of the development, while the lots or houses are for sale.
(2) Commercial. Advertising commercial or industrial property or building on the street frontage of the property, while the property or building is for sale, rent, or lease.
b. Duration. The applicant may request one extension of time, not to exceed six months, for any project real estate sign.
c. Sign Placement, in Addition to IMC 18.612.100(A)(7).
(1) The sign must be located more than 10 feet from any adjoining property line and two feet behind the street property line;
(2) If the sign is for a commercial property, the sign may be attached to the building or be freestanding.
J. Residential Unit Real Estate Signs (For Sale, Lease or Rent). A residential unit real estate sign (for sale, rent, lease) is an on-site sign advertising that the immediate residential property is for sale, rent, or lease.
1. An example of residential unit real estate sign is in Figure 18.612.110(J)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(J)(1). Example of Residential Unit Real Estate Sign

2. Residential unit real estate signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(J)(2).
Table 18.612.110(J)(2). Residential Unit Real Estate Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Street Frontage | Max. Number of Total Signs | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign Structure and Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Residential property in all zones | On site | 1 | 2 | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 6.5 feet | See below | Not required |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Residential Unit Real Estate Signs.
a. Maximum Area per Sign Face. In addition to the primary residential unit real estate sign, two riders of up to one and one-half square feet each are permitted. The square footage of the riders is in addition to the size of the primary sign.
b. Maximum Height. The maximum sign height includes the height of a yard arm to hold the sign and the height of any riders.
c. Duration. Signs may remain in place on site until 10 days after the property is sold, rented, or leased.
d. For sign placement, see IMC 18.612.100(A)(7).
K. Real Estate Directional Arrow Signs. An off-site real estate directional arrow sign is a portable and temporary sign advertising, or assisting people in locating, property that is for sale, rent, or lease.
1. An example of a real estate directional arrow sign is in Figure 18.612.110(K)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(K)(1). Example of Real Estate Directional Arrow Sign

2. Real estate directional arrows signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(K)(2).
Table 18.612.110(K)(2). Real Estate Directional Arrow Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs | Type of Sign | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All zones which include a residential use | Right-of-way | See below | Stake/wire frame | 1.5 sq. ft. | 2 | 2 feet | See below | Not required |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Real Estate Directional Arrow Signs.
a. Directional arrow signs are to be used solely for directing people to a house for sale or lease, or an apartment for rent, or a condominium unit for sale. No off-site real estate directional arrow sign is allowed for advertising the sale or rental opportunities of commercial property or properties outside the City.
b. The only type of sign that may be used for real estate directional arrow signs is stake/wire frame signs.
c. Maximum Number of Total Signs. The minimum number of signs necessary for each turn in locating the house or condominium unit from the closest arterial street.
d. Duration. Signs must be removed when the sale closes, or in case of a lease, when the tenant takes possession.
e. See sign placement in IMC 18.612.100(A)(7).
L. Residential Real Estate Open House Signs. An off-site real estate open house sign is a portable and temporary sign advertising, or assisting people in locating, property that is for sale, rent, or lease. An open house is an event held to welcome people to view a piece of residential real estate which is being offered for sale.
1. An example of a residential real estate open house sign is in Figure 18.612.110(L)(1).
Figure 18.612.110(L)(1). Example of Residential Real Estate Open House Sign

2. Residential real estate open house signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(L)(2).
Table 18.612.110(L)(2). Real Estate Open House Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Number of Total Signs per Property | Type of Sign | Max. Area per Sign Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of A-Frame | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
All zones which include a residential use | Right-of-way | 4 | A-frame, stake/wire frame | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | See below | Not required |
3. Other Requirements for and Information Related to Residential Real Estate Open House Signs.
a. The only type of signs that may be used for real estate open house signs is A-frame and stake/wire frame signs.
b. No off-site real estate open house signs are allowed for advertising the sale or rental opportunity of a commercial property.
c. Maximum Number of Total Signs. No more than four signs per property per agent for any one residential open house may be displayed at one time; except if the agent has more than one listed property in a development, then the agent’s total number of such signs for the development is limited to five.
d. Duration. Signs may be displayed only between dawn and dusk on days when there is an open house and only when the seller or seller’s representative is at the property and the open house is occurring. For rental or leased buildings, an open house is only during the initial lease period.
e. Sign Placement. See IMC 18.612.100(A)(7) for sign placement.
M. Temporary Window Signs. A temporary window sign is an advertisement for services or products in the form of decals, emblems, paint, exposed neon, or banners. Any sign of a temporary nature displayed within a building on the inside of the glass or in close proximity to the window and intended to be viewed by persons outside of the building. Temporary window signs are those which identify the business, products, or services and are in place no more than 30 days.
1. Example of a Window Sign. See permanent commercial window signs example in IMC 18.612.090(B)(6).
2. Temporary window signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.110(M)(2).
Table 18.612.110(M)(2). Window Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. % of All Window Area per Each Business/Tenant Facade | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Sign | Max. Height of Sign Above Finished Grade | Max. Duration | Temp. Sign Agreement |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF-F and CF-FPO | On site | 25% | 1 | 20 feet | 30 days | Not required |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Window Signs.
a. See IMC 18.612.100(A)(7) for sign placement. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. The following provisions apply to all temporary noncommercial signs placed within the City.
B. General Standards for Temporary Noncommercial Signs. Noncommercial speech signs express noncommercial messages such as public/community events, religious, political, ideological, or other philosophical messages. Noncommercial speech signs do not promote commercial businesses, projects, or services. The content of such signs is not regulated but the sign is subject to any time, place, or manner standards for the sign in this section, and the general and specific following requirements:
1. Permit. A sign permit or temporary sign agreement is not required to install a temporary noncommercial sign.
2. Fee. No fee is required to place temporary noncommercial signs in the City.
3. Temporary Noncommercial Sign Materials and Construction.
a. Signs must be constructed of any material durable enough to withstand rain, wind, and normal wear and tear for the anticipated use, and must conform to the requirements of this chapter;
b. Must be maintained in an aesthetic and safe condition;
c. Shall not be an electric sign and shall not be an illuminated sign;
d. Shall not move or vibrate, emit noise, or be animated, or have changing images.
4. Duration must be consistent with the definition of temporary signs as defined in Chapter 18.102 IMC.
5. Sign Height. Specific sign heights are listed in IMC 18.612.130. In no case are temporary noncommercial signs to extend above the roofline and in no case may they be higher than 65 feet above the grade regardless of building height.
6. Sign Placement. The following sign placement standards apply to all temporary noncommercial signs.
a. Temporary noncommercial signs may be placed in right-of-way only if specifically allowed in this subsection B;
b. All temporary noncommercial signs intended to be placed or allowed on site must be wholly within the property consistent with the requirements of this chapter;
c. Except when allowed to be in the right-of-way, the sign must be placed entirely outside of the transportation facility; and in no case may signs extend into the area intended for vehicular travel. Where no curb exists, the sign must be placed outside the roadway at least 10 feet from the roadway edge or consistent with the City’s roadway safety requirements;
d. Minimum Setback Requirements for Public or Private Facilities.
(1) Out of the sight distance triangle of intersections and driveways as described in IMC 18.612.180(B);
(2) Ten feet from any driveway, alley, or vehicle access point;
(3) Two feet from any curb or roadway edge;
(4) Two feet from any pedestrian sidewalk or ADA accessible path;
(5) Five feet from any building access point if not attached to the building;
e. The sign shall not obstruct pedestrian or accessible routes to or along the public or private sidewalk or encroach into the minimum clear pathway area of 48 inches in width;
f. The sign shall not interfere with the opening of car doors, use of bicycle parking facilities, bus stops, or loading zones;
g. The sign shall remain portable and may not be attached or anchored to trees or to public property including, but not limited to, utility or light poles, parking meters, or pavement;
h. Signs are prohibited in, on, or within public or private medians, roundabouts, traffic circles, utility poles, lampposts (except banners as specified in this section), traffic poles and signals, and street trees;
i. Signs shall not create a hazard to either pedestrians or motorists as determined by the City Traffic Engineer. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. The following provisions apply to all temporary noncommercial signs placed within the City.
B. List of Temporary Noncommercial Sign Design Types.
1. General on-site signs;
2. General right-of-way signs;
3. Noncommercial banners on light poles;
4. Flags.
C. General On-Site Signs.
1. Examples of general on-site signs are in Figure 18.612.130(C)(1).
Figure 18.612.130(C)(1). Examples of On-Site Signs
![]() Banner | ![]() Stake/Wire Frame Sign | ![]() Banner |
|---|
2. Temporary noncommercial general on-site signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.130(C)(2).
Table 18.612.130(C)(2). General On-Site Signs
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Max. Total Area of All Sign Faces | Types of Signs | Max. Area for Each Type of Sign’s Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Type of Sign | Max. Height of Sign | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Residential and Community Facilities Zones | Single-Family: C-Res, SF-E, SF-S, SF-SL, SF-D, UV-SF-1, UV-SF-0 Multifamily: MF-M, MF-H, UV-MF Community Facilities: CF-OS, CF-OSPO, CF-R, CF-RPO, CF-F, CF-FPO | 32 sq. ft. | A-frame | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet |
Stake/wire frame | 4 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | |||
Window | 15 sq. ft. | 1 | Window placement | |||
Banner | 15 sq. ft. | 2 | • 25 feet on a single pole or building • 4 feet otherwise | |||
Nonresidential and Mixed-Use Zones | Mixed-Use: PO, CBD, MU, MU-CI, MUR, IC-CI, UC, VR, UV-MUR-H, UV-MUR-T Nonresidential: IC, UV-COM, UV-RET, UV-O, UV-VC, M | 32 sq. ft. | A-frame | 6 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet |
Stake/wire frame | 4 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet | |||
Window | 32 sq. ft. | 1 | Window placement | |||
Banner | 32 sq. ft. | 2 | • 30 feet on a single pole or building • 10 feet otherwise |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to General On-Site Signs.
a. The only types of signs that may be used for general on-site signs are A-frame, stake/wire frame, window, and banner signs.
b. Sign Placement.
(1) Freestanding banners, such as those held by poles, must be placed five feet from the property line.
(2) For other signs, please see IMC 18.612.120(B)(6).
c. Sign Area.
(1) The maximum total sign area may be composed of any combination of signs and sign faces but the total sign area must be less than or equal to the maximum total sign area allowed.
(2) Window signs may not cover more than 25 percent of the window area on any façade.
D. General Right-of-Way Signs.
1. An example of a general right-of-way sign is in Figure 18.612.130(D)(1).
Figure 18.612.130(D)(1). Example of General Right-of-Way Signs

2. Temporary noncommercial general right-of-way signs are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.130(D)(2).
Table 18.612.130(D)(2). General Right-of-Way Signs
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Type of Sign | Max. Area per Stake/Wire Frame Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Height of Sign |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Allowed in right-of-way adjacent to all zones | Right-of-way | Stake/wire frame | 4 sq. ft. | 2 | 4 feet |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to General Right-of-Way Signs.
a. The only type of sign that may be used for right-of-way signs is stake/wire frame signs.
E. Noncommercial Banners on Light Poles.
1. An example of a noncommercial banner on light pole is in Figure 18.612.130(E)(1).
Figure 18.612.130(E)(1). Examples of Noncommercial Banner on Light Pole

2. Banners on light poles in the right-of-way are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.130(E)(2).
Table 18.612.130(E)(2). Noncommercial Banners on Light Poles
Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Maximum Area per Banner Face | Max. Number of Sign Faces per Total Sign | Max. Duration |
|---|---|---|---|---|
Nonresidential and multifamily uses in all zones; property zoned CF-F and CF-FPO | Right-of-way | 10 sq. ft. on poles over 15 feet 5 sq. ft. on poles up to 15 feet | 2 | 90 days |
3. Requirements for and Information Related to Noncommercial Banners on Light Poles.
a. Sign Placement.
(1) Banners may not be higher than the light pole itself. The top of the pole establishes maximum height of the banner.
(2) Banners must maintain a minimum clearance of at least eight feet above sidewalks and other areas where pedestrians are present and 14 feet over on-street parking or travel lanes.
b. Banners must be supported between bars to prevent fluttering.
c. Banners must receive the permission of the pole owner prior to installation and must be installed per the pole owner’s specifications.
d. Noncommercial banners shall not be used for advertising name and/or logo of business, a commercial development, or products. If commercial sponsorship information is desired on the banner, it may not be more than 15 percent of the total banner sign area.
F. Flags.
1. An example of a flag is in Figure 18.612.130(F)(1).
Figure 18.612.130(F)(1). Examples of a Flag

2. Flags are allowed as specified in Table 18.612.130(F)(2).
Table 18.612.130(F)(2). Flags
Zones Where Sign Is Allowed | Permitted Location | Max. Size Each Flag Face | Max. Height of the Flag |
|---|---|---|---|
All zones | On site | 25 sq. ft. | 30 ft. |
Mixed-use: PO, CBD, MU, MU-CI, MUR, IC-CI, UC, VR, UV-MUR-H, UV-MUR-T Nonresidential: IC, UV-COM, UV-RET, UV-O, UV-VC, M | On site | 60 sq. ft. | 40 ft. |
(Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. The Front Street temporary banner permit allows temporary noncommercial banners when all requirements have been met. Permanent or commercial banners are not allowed over the right-of-way in any location.
B. Application and Process. Applicants apply to the City at intervals during the year, using an application process available to all allowed users.
C. Allowed Users. Only the City of Issaquah and entities that receive funding from the City of Issaquah are allowed users of the Front Street temporary banners. Furthermore, allowed users may only install banners for a program or event for which they received funding in that calendar year. For those non-City entities that qualify as allowed users, the program or event utilizing the proposed banner must further a governmental purpose.
D. Location. Temporary noncommercial banners are allowed over the right-of-way only at City-designated locations.
E. Number. A City-sponsored user shall not have more than one banner up per calendar quarter year for each Front Street banner location. There is no limitation on the number of City of Issaquah banners.
F. Banner Installation and Design.
1. Temporary banners must be installed by the City and only with a valid approved banner permit.
2. All Front Street temporary banners must be made of heavy-duty material and constructed to withstand wind, weather, and other likely conditions. The City provides specifications to interested applicants, who must provide documentation confirming the banner complies with the specifications.
3. If commercial sponsorship information is desired on the banner, it shall not be more than 15 percent of the total banner sign area.
G. Duration. A banner may be installed for a maximum of three weeks.
H. Fees. A fee must be paid in accordance with the City of Issaquah’s adopted fee schedule. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Signs legally in existence as of the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter that do not comply with the standards herein are deemed legally nonconforming and may continue to exist per this section. Legal nonconforming status does not apply to signs that have received notice of infraction or violation prior to the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter.
B. Legal nonconforming signs may be removed for cleaning and routine maintenance such as repainting, cleaning, and changing of lighting and wiring without being brought into conformance with the current sign chapter.
C. Nothing in this section relieves the owner or user of a legal nonconforming sign or owner of the property on which such nonconforming sign is located, from the provisions of this chapter regarding safety, maintenance, and repair of signs; however, any repainting, cleaning, and other normal maintenance or repair of the sign or sign structure may not modify the sign structure or copy in a way which makes it more nonconforming or the sign may lose its legal nonconforming status.
D. Legal nonconforming signs may continue to exist except as follows:
1. Any legal nonconforming sign that undergoes a name change or has 20 percent or more of the sign face (except billboards as defined under IMC 18.612.050(D), Prohibited Signs) or sign structure changed must be brought into conformance with the current sign chapter within 60 days of such change;
2. Any legal nonconforming sign that is damaged in excess of 50 percent of the current estimated value of the sign must be brought into conformance immediately with the current sign chapter;
3. Any legal nonconforming sign that is relocated or replaced must be brought into conformance immediately with the current sign chapter.
E. Landmark Signs.
1. A nonconforming sign may continue to exist if it is determined by the Development Commission that the sign qualifies as a landmark sign. Application for designation as a landmark sign must be made on forms available from the permit center. An application must consist of a completed application form; any necessary supporting documentation such as plot plans, photographs, or other information demonstrating compliance with the criteria below; and the appropriate application fee.
2. The Development Commission classifies a sign as a landmark sign if, after review of a permit application, it determines that the sign complies with all of the following criteria:
a. There is evidence that the sign is at least 40 years old at the time of a complete application submittal;
b. The sign is demonstrated to have one or more of the following characteristics, making it a significant community landmark:
(1) Associated with a local historic figure, event, or place;
(2) Embodies significant evidence of the history of a product, business, or service advertised;
(3) Embodies significant history of a building;
(4) Characteristic of a specific historic period of the local area;
(5) Outstanding example of the sign maker’s art, whether because of their excellent craftsmanship, use of materials, or design;
(6) Local landmark, that is, signs recognized as a popular focal point in the community.
c. The sign, though nonconforming, is consistent with the purpose of this chapter, as described in IMC 18.612.010.
3. If the Development Commission classifies the sign as a landmark sign, it may continue to exist to preserve the historic character and distinctive features of the sign. To maintain the landmark designation, the following must be adhered to:
a. The sign’s shape shall not be altered;
b. No more than 50 percent of the sign area shall be modified; and
c. Deteriorated or damaged portions of the sign must be repaired when possible, rather than replaced, to preserve historical context. When new material is used, it must be consistent with the sign design, color, and texture.
4. Approval from the Development Commission is required for any alteration, significant change in appearance, or replacement (together “modification”) that exceeds 50 percent of the sign area. Approval may be granted when the modification is consistent with the landmark sign’s design, color and texture.
5. Lighting must comply with IMC 18.612.180 to the greatest extent practicable and feasible. (Ord. 3069 § 1 (Exh. A), 2024; Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. No sign may hereafter be erected, reerected, constructed, refaced, altered, or repaired except as provided in this chapter, and a permit for the sign has been issued by the Director, except when such sign does not require a permit; or a temporary sign agreement has been received by the City except when such sign does not require a temporary sign agreement. A separate permit or temporary sign agreement is required for each individual sign except when specifically noted in the relevant section.
B. Responsibility.
1. The ultimate responsibility for any sign is borne by the legal owner of the property on which the sign is located, including inspections.
2. The Director may require, when necessary, that the property owner or agent be party to or applicant for any required sign permit.
3. For temporary signs or signs placed in the right-of-way, the person who placed the sign, or is responsible for the sign, is also responsible for its removal or is subject to penalties as provided in this Code.
C. Right of Entry. Whenever necessary to make an inspection to enforce any of the provisions of this chapter, or whenever the Director has reasonable cause to believe that there exists any sign or any condition which makes such sign unsafe, the Director may enter the premises or building on which such sign is located at all reasonable times to inspect the sign or to perform any duty imposed on him by this chapter. If such building or premises on which the sign is located is occupied, then the Director must first present proper credentials and request entry; and if such building or premises is unoccupied, then the Director must first make a reasonable effort to locate the owner or other persons having charge or control of the building or premises and request entry. If such entry is refused, the Director must have recourse to every remedy provided by law to secure entry. No owner or occupant or any other person having charge, care, or control of any building or premises must fail or neglect, after proper request is made, to promptly permit entry therein by the Director or his authorized representative for the purpose of inspection and examination pursuant to this chapter.
D. Inspections. All signs permitted by this chapter must be subject to inspection by the Director including all sign footings and sign installation. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. All signs, together with their supports, braces, guys, and anchors, must be kept in good repair and in a safe condition. The display surface of all signs must be kept neatly painted or posted at all times. Signs not repaired or removed in compliance with this chapter may be remedied by the City, and the sign owner may be billed for the cost of removal, though the City is not required to take any such action.
B. Signs are maintained by the property owner or person in possession of the permit.
C. Maintenance must be such that the signage continues to conform to the conditions imposed by the permit.
D. A damaged sign, including signs vandalized or subjected to graffiti, must be repaired within 60 days.
E. Internally illuminated signs or sign panels that have been damaged must remain unilluminated until repaired.
F. Metal pole covers and sign cabinets must be kept free of rust and rust stains.
G. Signs must be washed routinely to remove dirt, moss, and debris.
H. Removal of Signs.
1. Unsafe Signs.
a. Permanent. If the Director finds that any permanent sign regulated by this chapter is unsafe or not properly secured, the Director must give written notice to the named owner of the sign and the named owner of the land on which the sign is erected, who must remove or repair the sign within a specified time in the notice. If the sign is not removed and repaired, the Director must revoke the permit issued for such sign, as provided in this chapter, and may pursue any means necessary to enforce the provisions of this chapter. The Director may cause any sign which is determined to be a source of immediate peril to persons or property to be removed summarily without notice.
b. Temporary. If the Director finds that any temporary sign regulated by this chapter is unsafe or not properly secured, the Director must give written notice to the named owner of the sign and the named owner of the land on which the sign is erected, who must remove or repair the sign within two days of the date of the notice. If the sign is not removed and repaired within the specified time, if the owner is unknown and temporary sign is located on public property, or if the sign is determined to be a source of immediate peril to persons or property, the City may cause the sign to be removed .
2. Expired Advertising Signs. Any sign existing on or after the effective date of the ordinance codified in this chapter, which no longer advertises an existing business conducted or product sold on the premises, must be removed by the owner of the premises upon which such sign is located after notice from the Director. The Director, upon determining that such sign exists, must notify the owner of the premises in writing to remove the sign within 30 days from the date of such notice. Upon request, the Director may extend the removal requirement for a period not to exceed 90 days, but the sign shall not remain in use and functioning during the extension period and must be maintained consistent with the provisions of this chapter.
3. Expired or Invalid Temporary Sign Agreement or Temporary Sign Agreement Sign Number. Failure to properly display the sign number may result in removal of the sign. Displaying of a temporary commercial sign either before the sign number has been issued, or after the allowed duration of such sign, may also result in a sign enforcement action being taken; such as, in the right-of-way the sign may be removed, or if on private property, the City may pursue any means necessary to enforce the applicable standard.
4. Recovery of Removed Signs.
a. All permanent signs removed by the City must be available for recovery by the owner of such sign for a period of two weeks, after which they may be destroyed. All temporary signs removed by the City must be available for recovery by the owner of such sign for at least five business days, after which the City may dispose of the sign.
b. The City is not responsible for damages or loss during removal or storage.
I. Activities That Do Not Require a Permit. No permit is required for the following activities if they are performed consistent with the standards provided in this chapter:
1. Maintenance or Cleaning. Replacement of signs is allowed without a permit following temporary removal for maintenance or cleaning of signs or following temporary removal for permitted building façade changes. This exception does not include any structural, electrical, copy, refacing, or color changes of a sign.
2. Name change or replacement of up to 20 percent of the face of an existing sign (except a billboard; see IMC 18.612.050(D)), when such replacement does not increase the sign area or dimensions of the sign, is not considered a new sign or a structural alteration and does not require a permit.
3. Changeable Copy. No permit is required for the changing of the advertising copy or message on a lawfully erected, painted, or printed sign, marquee, or similar signs specifically designed for the use of changeable copy. No structural changes or change to the dimension of the sign may occur with this action. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Sign Illumination. In addition to any other lighting limitations or requirements elsewhere in this Code:
1. Lighting for signs must be held to the minimum needed to convey the sign’s message.
2. Lighting of signs must be in character with the building/development and the surrounding area.
3. All lighting must be LED and capable of being dimmed separately from all other light sources. Color temperature for white light may not exceed 3,000K.
4. Sign lighting must not be so bright and distracting as to be a traffic hazard.
5. Lighting must be designed to highlight the signage. External light sources must be shielded and directed onto or toward the sign only, facing downward.
6. Visible raceways and transformers for all components of a sign, such as logos and individual letters, are prohibited except when painted to match the building exterior upon which the sign is placed.
7. For signs comprised of channel letters, the interior of such signs shall not contain reflective material that enhances the brightness of the sign (unpainted metal, mirror type surfacing). A white painted interior box is acceptable to diffuse the light.
8. No additional signs shall be internally illuminated (ambient illumination only) unless specifically allowed by the standards for a particular additional sign.
9. Allowed illumination sources include:
a. External Illumination. Projecting light fixtures used for externally illuminated signs must be simple and unobtrusive in appearance and do not obscure the graphics of the sign.
b. Reverse illuminated sign/halo effect signage lighting.
c. Internally lit channel letters.
d. Exposed Neon Tubing. Exposed LED lighting may be appropriate if it has the look of exposed neon lighting. This is solely for signage and does not include outlining buildings or architectural elements.
10. Signs that are illuminated by halo lighting must be limited to white light source; provided, that signs may be internally illuminated when the surface on which they sign is mounted is made of glass or other highly reflective material that would interfere with the appearance of the sign if halo-lit.
11. Illuminated signs must be turned off during nonbusiness hours and reasonably follow dark sky hours, outlined within IMC 18.610.060(E).
B. Sight Distance. Signs must be placed outside of the sight distance triangle, schematically shown below, or below three feet six inches. For more information on the specifics of locating and placing signs in the sight distance triangle, see Chapter 12.04 IMC, Street Standards.

C. Other Requirements.
1. Indemnification. Owners of signs allowed to be placed within the public right-of-way by a sign permit or temporary sign agreement must agree to indemnify the City for any damages caused by the sign. The form of the indemnity agreement is included within the temporary sign agreement for some temporary signs or in a separate recorded document for permanent signs. Before any agreement or permit is approved, the applicant must agree to the indemnification language. See also IMC 18.612.090 for more information regarding permanent signs.
2. Insurance. Any permanent commercial signs placed in the right-of-way must make the City an additional insured at a value to be determined by the City and be current while the signs are in place. See also IMC 12.05.110 for more information regarding permanent signs.
3. Sign permit approval by the City, issuance of a sign number in response to a temporary sign agreement, or implementation of the standards in this chapter does not constitute any representation as to whether the selected location contains any utilities or irrigation infrastructure, or that the location meets the sight distance provisions or other safety requirements. Nor must sign approval by the City, issuance of a sign number in response to a temporary sign agreement, or implementation of the standards in this chapter be construed as relieving the owner of any sign for the responsibility of its erection, maintenance, and removal, and its compliance with the provisions of this chapter, or any other law or ordinance regulating the same. The applicant is fully responsible to research and ensure such placement of a sign does not harm the right-of-way or damage any landscape, utility, or irrigation system and meets safety standards. Damage caused by any sign installation is the responsibility of the sign owner or owner’s representative.
4. Right-of-Way. Where it is necessary to determine the applicable land use zone, the land use zone is based on the most proximate property’s land use zoning, relative to the proposed sign location. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).
A. Application, Review Process, and Criteria. Applicants may seek a variance from the requirements of this chapter in accordance with Chapter 18.210 IMC, Variances.
B. Variances Not Permitted. No variance shall be granted that would allow a sign or device which is prohibited by IMC 18.612.050, Prohibited signs.
C. No other method may be used to adjust sign standards established by this chapter. (Ord. 3017 § 6 (Exh. G), 2023).